CITY OF BOISE
TO: Mayor and Council
FROM: Finance and Administration and Public Works Department
RESOLUTION NUMBER: R-389-11
DATE: November 16, 2011
SUBJECT: Approval of Contract, FB 12-021, Headworks Improvement and
Secondary Clarifier Mechanism Replacement, WBP-073, to RSCI, not to
exceed $812,000.
ACTION REQUIRED: Contract approval by Resolution.
RECOMMENDATION: Finance and Administration and Public Works Departments
recommend that FB 12-021 be awarded to the lowest and responsive and responsible
bidder, RSCI, not to exceed $812,000. Award of this contract is subject to compliance
with bonding and insurance requirements.
FISCAL IMPACT/BUDGET IMPLICATIONS: Financial Services has confirmed
sufficient funding is available for this obligation.
BACKGROUND: This project is the installation of Owner-furnished influent pump and
secondary clarifier mechanisms; furnishing and installing piping, valves, electrical, and
control systems for the influent pump; furnishing and installing septage piping; and
furnishing and installing improvements to the screen distribution channel.
ATTACHMENTS: Resolution, Contract, Bid Proposal and Bid Specifications.
RESOLUTION NO. ________________
BY THE COUNCIL: CLEGG, EBERLE, JORDAN, MCLEAN,
SHEALY AND THOMSON
A RESOLUTION APPROVING AN AGREEMENT FOR FB 12-021, HEADWORKS
IMPROVEMENT AND SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM REPLACEMENT,
WBP-073, BETWEEN THE CITY OF BOISE CITY (PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT)
AND RSCI; AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO RESPECTIVELY
EXECUTE AND ATTEST SAID AGREEMENT; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE
DATE.
WHEREAS, Finance and Administration and Public Works Departments staff
recommend award of FB 12-021, Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier Mechanism
Replacement, WBP-073, to the lowest, responsible bidder, RSCI; and,
WHEREAS, during their meeting of ________, the City Council followed staff
recommendation and awarded Resolution No.________, to RSCI.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE MAYOR AND COUNCIL OF
THE CITY OF BOISE CITY, IDAHO:
Section 1. That the Agreement for FB 12-021, Headworks Improvement and Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism Replacement, WBP-073, by and between the City of Boise and RSCI,
attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference, be, and the same is hereby, approved as to
both form and content.
Section 2. That the Mayor and City Clerk be, and they hereby are, authorized to
respectively execute and attest said Agreement for and on behalf of the City of Boise City.
Section 3. That this Resolution shall be in full force and effect immediately upon its
adoption and approval.
ADOPTED by the Council of the City of Boise, Idaho, this ___ day of November, 2011.
APPROVED by the Mayor of the City of Boise, Idaho this ___ day of November, 2011.
APPROVED: ATTEST:
David H. Bieter Debbie Broughton
MAYOR EX-OFFICIO CITY CLERK
R-389-11
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
AGREEMENT
FB 12 -021
THIS AGREEMENT is by and between the City of Boise (Owner) and RSCI (Contractor).
Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants set forth herein, agree as
follows:
1. WORK
1.1. Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Work is generally described in Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.
2. THE PROJECT
2.1. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the
whole or only a part is generally described as West Boise WWTF Headworks
Improvement and Secondary Clarifier Mechanism Replacement Project.
3. ENGINEER
3.1. The Project has been designed by CH2M HILL (Engineer), who is to act as
Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and
authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. CONTRACT TIMES
4.1. Time of the Essence: All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial
Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract
Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.2. Days to Achieve Substantial Completion and Final Payment:
4.2.1. The Work shall be substantially completed within 165 days from the
date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03
of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in
accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within 180 days
after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
NOVEMBER 16, 2011 00 52 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4.3. Liquidated Damages:
4.3.1. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this
Agreement and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not
completed within the times specified in Paragraph Contract Times above, plus
any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General
Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties
involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered
by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of
requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated
damages for delay (but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner
Seven Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($750) for each day that expires after the
time specified herein for Substantial Completion until the Work is
substantially complete. Contractor shall pay Owner Five Hundred Dollars
($500) for each day that expires after the time specified herein for Final
Completion until Work is finally complete.
5. CONTRACT PRICE
5.1. Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts
determined pursuant to the following:
5.1.1. Lump Sum: For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of:
Eight hundred and twelve thousand Dollars
(Words)
and zero Cents $812,000.00
(Words) (Figures)
6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.1. Submittal and Processing of Payments: Contractor shall submit Applications for
Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for
Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions.
6.2. Progress Payments and Retainage: Owner will make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Application for Payment on
the date of each month as established in the preconstruction conference during
performance of the Work as provided herein. All such payments will be measured by
the Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General
Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 2 NOVEMBER 16, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided in the General
Requirements.
6.2.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an
amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the
aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer
may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated
damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions:
6.2.1.1. Ninety five percent of Work completed (with the balance
being retainage).; and
6.2.1.2. Ninety five percent of cost of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).
6.2.2. Owner will release to Contractor retainage for those separate portions
of the Work determined substantially complete by Engineer and accepted by
Owner for use as intended.
6.2.3. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner will pay an amount sufficient to
increase total payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed,
less such amounts as Engineer will determine in accordance with
Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less 100 percent of
Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as
shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to
the certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.3. Final Payment:
6.3.1. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of
the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said
Paragraph 14.07.
7. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS
7.1. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the
following representations:
7.1.1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents
and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
NOVEMBER 16, 2011 00 52 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7.1.2. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is
satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost,
progress, and performance of the Work.
7.1.3. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and
local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of
the Work.
7.1.4. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and
tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of
physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at
or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of
the General Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous
Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which has been identified in the
Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General
Conditions.
7.1.5. Contractor has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions
(surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site
which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate
to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor, including any specific means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly
required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs
incident thereto.
7.1.6. Contractor does not consider that any further examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the
performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
7.1.7. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by
Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
7.1.8. Contractor has correlated the information known to Contractor,
information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and
drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 4 NOVEMBER 16, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the
Contract Documents.
7.1.9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors,
ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract
Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to
Contractor.
7.1.10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and
furnishing of the Work.
8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
8.1. Contents:
8.1.1. The Contract Documents that are attached to this Agreement (except as
expressly noted otherwise) consist of the following:
8.1.1.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 8, inclusive).
8.1.1.2. Performance bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
8.1.1.3. Payment bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).
8.1.1.4. General Conditions (pages 1 to 43, inclusive).
8.1.1.5. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 13, inclusive).
8.1.1.6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
8.1.1.7. Drawings consisting of 57 sheets with each sheet bearing the
following general title: “Headworks Improvement and Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism Replacement Project”.
8.1.1.8. Addenda (numbers 1 to 5, inclusive).
8.1.2. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the
Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto:
8.1.2.1. Notice to Proceed.
8.1.2.2. Work Change Directives.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
NOVEMBER 16, 2011 00 52 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8.1.2.3. Change Order(s).
8.2. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article.
8.3. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as
provided in Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.
9. MISCELLANEOUS
9.1. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.
9.2. Successors and Assigns: Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements,
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
9.3. Severability: Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or
unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all
remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and
Contractor, who agree the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such
stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as
close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
9.4. Assignment of Contract:
9.4.1. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract shall be binding on another party hereto without the written consent
of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation,
moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned
without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction
may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any
written consent to an assignment, no assignment shall release or discharge the
assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 6 NOVEMBER 16, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement in triplicate.
One counterpart each has been delivered to Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. All portions of
the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by Owner and Contractor or on their
behalf.
This Agreement will be effective on November 29, 2011 (which is the Effective Date of
the Agreement).
OWNER: CONTRACTOR: RSCI
By: By:
Title: Title:
[CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL]
Attest: Attest:
Title: Title:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence License No.
of authority to sign. If Owner is a public (Where applicable)
body, attach evidence of authority to sign
and resolution or other documents Agent for service or process:
authorizing execution of Owner-
Contractor Agreement.)
(If Contractor is a corporation or a
partnership, attach evidence of authority to
sign.)
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
NOVEMBER 16, 2011 00 52 13 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
REVIEW AS TO FORM AND CONTENT:
Public Works Department
Purchasing
Legal
END OF SECTION
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 8 NOVEMBER 16, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
__________________________________________________________
ADDENDUM 01
FB 12-021
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier
Public Works Department
Boise City Purchasing
Colin Millar
P.O. Box 500
Boise, Idaho 83701-0500
Phone (208) 395-7804
Fax (208) 384-3995
wmillar@cityofboise.org
Date: October 17, 2011
Total Pages Transmitted (Including this sheet): (1) Page 1 – Cover & Message
Message:
You are hereby notified of the following clarifications of and/or revisions to the Drawings and
Specifications for the above referenced project.
Pre-Bid Notification Error Correction
Pre-bid conference on DemandStar is listed as “Mandatory”. Although attendance is highly
recommended, it is not mandatory.
Correct info should read:
October 18, 2011
1:00 PM
West Boise Waste Water Treatment Facility
Operations Conference Room
11818 West Joplin Rd.
Boise, Idaho
This Addendum is hereby as of the above posted date made a part of the project requirements and
contract documents for the referenced project. You are to note the receipt of, and compliance with
this Addendum upon the space provided within the bid or proposal. Failure to acknowledge this
Addendum does not relieve you from fulfilling the Addendum requirements. This is the only
communication you will receive regarding this Addendum.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
__________________________________________________________
ADDENDUM 02
FB 12-021
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier
Public Works
Boise City Purchasing
Carolyn Estes, C.P.M.
P.O. Box 500
Boise, Idaho 83701-0500
Phone (208) 384-3778
Fax (208) 384-3995
cestes@cityofboise.org
Date: October 25, 2011 Total Pages (Including this sheet): Seven (7)
Message:
You are hereby notified of the following changes and/or clarifications to the above referenced
project.
Addendum 02 – 3 Pages
Pre Bid Sign In Sheet - 3 Pages
Please note: Addendum 02 includes a “Bid Alternate” that must be completed and returned with
your bid.
This Addendum is hereby as of the above posted date made a part of the project requirements and
contract documents for the referenced project. You are to note the receipt of, and compliance with
this Addendum upon the space provided within the bid or proposal. Failure to acknowledge this
Addendum does not relieve you from fulfilling the Addendum requirements. This is the only
communication you will receive regarding this Addendum.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
CITY OF BOISE, IDAHO
ADDENDUM NO. 2
to
Contract Documents for the Construction of
West Boise Wastewater Treatment Facilities Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier
Mechanism Replacement
FB 12-021, WBP 073
October 24, 2011
ADDENDUM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this addendum by entering the addendum number on page
00300 - 1 of the Bid Form.
CLARIFICATIONS
1. Section 00 41 13, Bid Form item 5.2, Base Bid Schedule A, No. 5., Bypass Pumping: The intent of this line is
for bidders to show the portion of the Schedule A lump sum bid allocated to bypass pumping. This is not an
allowance or contingency amount, and a value of $0.00 will indicate the bidder believes the work can be
completed without bypass pumping using the option for multiple shut-downs described in Section 01 31 13
paragraph 1.04.E.1. Bidders are advised to make the decision to bypass pump or to use multiple shut-downs
carefully. No change orders will be authorized for bypass pumping if multiple shutdowns are planned but work
cannot ultimately be completed without bypass pumping.
2. Standard limit switches are required for FV 10054, consistent with W-PID-PI-0475 and Section 40 27 02
paragraphs 2.06.B.2.c.1) and 2.06.B.3.c. The limit switch control feature is not included in the Section 40 27
02 Supplement Schedule because no special limit switches are required, just standard end-of-travel Open and
Closed switches.
3. Sheet W-HDW-EL-0194, Note 1 says “Provide breaker settings testing and certified breaker test report per
NETA standards.” The Engineer will provide the settings. The contractor shall provide the testing of the
breaker’s performance.
4. Section 40 27 02 won't be changed to add Val-Matic as an acceptable manufacturer for type V407 valves. Three
brands are already listed, so a specific manufacturer's product is clearly not required. If Val-Matic manufactures
a product that meets the technical specifications then it can be offered to bidders.
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 00 21 13.
1. In article 16, replace item 16.1.2 with the following; "For determination of the Apparent Low Bidder, bids will
be compared on the basis of the sum of the lump sum base bids for each Schedule plus the lump sums for
the selected Alternatives."
Section 00 41 13
1. Add paragraph 5.6: "Bid Alternative Price: Coat Owner-Furnished Secondary Clarifier Mechanisms.
Dollars
(words)
and Cents $
(numerals)
The above paragraph must be filled out and turned in with your bid form to be considered a responsive
bid. It is acceptable to use this page of the addendum and attach it to your bid form.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
Section 00 52 13
1. Replace paragraphs 6.2.1.1 with the following: 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being
retainage).
2. Replace paragraph 6.2.1.2 with the following: 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in
the Work (with the balance being retainage).
Section 01 11 00
1. Add item 1.01.D: "D. Bid Alternative 2 includes coating the Owner-furnished secondary clarifier mechanisms
within 30 days of their delivery."
Section 01 57 28
1. Add paragraph 1.05.A.4 as follows; "4. Wet Well Top of Rock Rack Elevation: 2556.75”
2. Add paragraph 1.05.A.5 as follows; "5. In lieu of bypass pumping, Contractor may use multiple influent pump
shut-downs as described in Section 01 31 13 paragraph 1.04.E.1."
Section 09 90 00
1. In paragraph 3.07.B.1.a., add item: "4) Submerged portions of the Owner-furnished secondary clarifier
mechanisms. Note that all clarifier mechanisms coating work must be completed within 30 days of delivery of
the mechanisms to the job site.
2. In paragraph 3.07.C.1.a., at end of existing text add: ", and non-submerged portions of the Owner-furnished
secondary clarifier mechanisms."
Section 44 42 56.01 SUPPLEMENT
1. On page 2 under the Long Radius Suction Elbow item, delete the note “(By Others)”. The suction elbow must
be supplied by the contractor. It will not be included with the pump that the City is furnishing.
DRAWINGS
Drawing sheet W-HDW-ME-0080
1. The top of the rock rack in the wet well is at elevation 2556.75
Drawing sheet W-SCL-ME-0307
1. Revise note at A-2 to read "For concrete demolition see W-SCL-ST-0303." Revise note at L-2 to read "For
concrete demolition see W-SCL-ST-0304."
Drawing sheet W-SCL-ME-0310
1. Revise note at J-6 to read "Concrete fill underneath new sludge manifold as required, see W-SCL-ST-0303 and
W-SCL-ST-0304."
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
City of Boise - Public Works Department
150 N. Capitol Boulevard
Boise, ID 83701
West Boise Wastewater Treatment Facility PRE-BID TOUR AGENDA
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier October 18, 2011, 1:00 pm
Mechanism Replacement
City Project WBP 073, City Contract No. FB 12-021
Introductions
- Purchasing advisor: Carolyn Estes
- Sign-in sheet
- Introduce City staff and consultant staff attending
Contract items
- Publicly advertised for bids on Oct 12 and 19, 2011
- Bids open Nov 2, 2011, at 10:30 am (Wednesday)
- Bids good for 60 days after bid opening
- Engineer's estimate: $1,115,000 (for Base Bid)
- Number of calendar days in contract: 165 to substantial completion; 180 days to final completion.
Must coordinate schedule with acceptance of City-furnished pump.
- Liquidated damages: $750 per day for each day after substantial completion deadline that work is not
substantially completed, $500 per day after substantial completion and after final completion
deadline that work is not completed in all respects.
- Retainage is 5% of amount earned to date (held on materials on hand and work in place).Note there
will be an addendum to change the language now in the documents, which calls for 10% retainage.
- Bid form includes two Base Bid Schedules. Bid will be evaluated based on total lump sum of both
Base Bid Schedules added together. Bid form also includes additive alternate for 18" septage piping
work.
- Addenda status
On site activities
- Site security (Section 01 55 00)
- Allowable work hours
Construction details
Base Bid Schedule A:
• Install Owner furnished pump.
• Furnish & install pump piping and valves.
• Demolish existing pump discharge header in screen influent channel.
• Furnish and install new stop log structure in screen influent channel.
• Provide bypass pumping – if necessary.
• Furnish and install electrical, instrumentation, and control systems.
Base Bid Schedule B:
• Install Owner furnished secondary clarifier mechanisms, weirs, baffles, and launder covers in 4
existing clarifiers.
• Install Owner furnished launder covers on 2 other existing clarifiers.
• Furnish and install scum piping.
• Demolish existing 4 existing clarifier mechanisms.
• Furnish and install water piping.
Additive Alternate:
• 18" pipe in east wet well plus wall penetration & connection to 72" raw sewage pipe.
Respond to questions, then visit construction work area
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
__________________________________________________________
ADDENDUM 03
FB 12-021
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier
Public Works
Boise City Purchasing
Carolyn Estes, C.P.M.
P.O. Box 500
Boise, Idaho 83701-0500
Phone (208) 384-3778
Fax (208) 384-3995
cestes@cityofboise.org
Date: October 25, 2011 Total Pages (Including this sheet): One (1)
Message:
You are hereby notified of the following changes and/or clarifications to the above referenced
project.
The due date has been changed for this project.
Was: November 2, 2011 at 10:00 AM Local Time
Is: November 10, 2011 at 10:00 AM Local Time
Please return your bid no later than November 10, 2011 at 10:00 AM Local Time
This Addendum is hereby as of the above posted date made a part of the project requirements and
contract documents for the referenced project. You are to note the receipt of, and compliance with
this Addendum upon the space provided within the bid or proposal. Failure to acknowledge this
Addendum does not relieve you from fulfilling the Addendum requirements. This is the only
communication you will receive regarding this Addendum.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
__________________________________________________________
ADDENDUM 04
FB 12-021
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier
Public Works
Boise City Purchasing
Carolyn Estes, C.P.M.
P.O. Box 500
Boise, Idaho 83701-0500
Phone (208) 384-3778
Fax (208) 384-3995
cestes@cityofboise.org
Date: November 4, 2011 Total Pages (Including this sheet): Nine (9)
Message:
You are hereby notified of the following changes and/or clarifications to the above referenced
project.
Addendum 04 (8 pages) is attached.
This Addendum is hereby as of the above posted date made a part of the project requirements and
contract documents for the referenced project. You are to note the receipt of, and compliance with
this Addendum upon the space provided within the bid or proposal. Failure to acknowledge this
Addendum does not relieve you from fulfilling the Addendum requirements. This is the only
communication you will receive regarding this Addendum.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
CITY OF BOISE, IDAHO
ADDENDUM NO. 4
to
Contract Documents for the Construction of
West Boise Wastewater Treatment Facilities Headworks Improvement and Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism Replacement
FB 12-021, WBP 073
November 4, 2011
ADDENDUM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this addendum by entering the addendum number on
page 00300 - 1 of the Bid Form.
CLARIFICATIONS
1. Replace page (iii) of the TABLE OF CONTENTS with the revised page (iii) which is
included as an attachment to this addendum.
2. Replace pages 4 and 5 of the bid form with revised pages 4 and 5 which are included as an
attachment to this addendum.
3. Add specification section 31 23 19 DEWATERING which is included as an attachment to
this addendum.
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1. Add the following paragraph:
6.08.B. A Cash Allowance for the building permit and inspection fees shall be
included in the Lump Sum Bid in accordance with the Bid Form.
SECTION 01 29 90 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1. Add the following paragraph:
1.08 CASH ALLOWANCES
A. Bidders shall include in their Total Bid Price the following Cash
Allowances. The stated allowances are estimated amounts for the item.
Payments will be made from the allowance on the basis of the required
supporting documentation, up to the amount of the allowance. Should the
actual cost for the item exceed or be less than the allowance, an
adjustment in the Contract Price will be made by Change Order.
a. Permit Fee Allowance: Boise City Planning and Development
Services Building Permit and Inspection Fees. The
documentation shall include a copy of the invoices from the City
for the permits and associated fees, and a receipt from the City
for payment in full.
SECTION 09 90 00, PAINTING AND COATING
1. Add: 3.07.B.1.a.4) Clarifier Mechanisms
SECTION 44 42 24.03, Secondary Clarifier Mechanism (Suction Header/Manifold Type)
1. 3.01 INSTALLATION: Remove reference to BY OTHERS. This is included in this
contract.
2. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING: Remove reference to BY OTHERS. This is included in
this contract.
3. 3.02.A Modify cleaning from SP 7 to SP 5 as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating.
4. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Remove reference to BY OTHERS. This is
included in this contract.
SECTION 44 42 28, WEIRS, BAFFLE PLATES, AND LAUNDER COVERS
1. 3.01 INSTALLATION: Remove reference to BY OTHERS. This is included in this
contract.
2. 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION: Remove reference to BY OTHERS. This is
included in this contract.
SECTION 44 42 56.01, SCREW-INDUCED FLOW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
1. Data Sheet: Long Radius Suction Elbow will not be supplied by pump manufacturer
and is to be supplied by the installation contractor.
__________________________________________________________
ADDENDUM 05
FB 12-021
Headworks Improvements & Secondary Clarifier
Public Works
Boise City Purchasing
Carolyn Estes, C.P.M.
P.O. Box 500
Boise, Idaho 83701-0500
Phone (208) 384-3778
Fax (208) 384-3995
cestes@cityofboise.org
Date: November 7, 2011 Total Pages (Including this sheet): Two (2)
Message:
You are hereby notified of the following changes and/or clarifications to the above referenced
project.
Addendum Change:
Specification Section 44 42 24.03, paragraph 3.02.A: Keep reference to brush-off blast cleaning SP 7. Do
not change to white metal blast cleaning SP 5 as was called for in Addendum No. 4. Primer provided by
the manufacturer that is damaged by the SP 7 cleaning shall be repaired/replaced to a minimum 4 mils
thickness. Coating work shall be provided as specified in Section 09 00 00.
Question:
Addendum #2 added the Submerged and Non-Submerged portions of the Secondary Clarifiers to be
coated in accordance with either Paint System 2 or System 4 of Specification 09 90 00. Addendum #4
states in Specification Section 44 42 24.03 “Owner-Furnished Secondary Clarifier Mechanism” that the
reference to “BY OTHERS” be removed and changed the cleaning specification from SP7 to SP5.
However, Paragraph 3.02 A. still indicates that the surfaces are to be shop primed. Paragraph 2.18 D.1
also states that all ferrous metal surfaces are to be shop primed with an epoxy primer. I am not sure
whether the intent is to shop prime the mechanisms or blast and coat them complete in the field. If you
are going to shop prime them, then the SP7 reference for abrasive blasting of the prime coat would be
applicable and the SP5 reference would only be applicable to bare metal surfaces or damaged areas of
the shop primer that was removed to bare metal.
Could you clarify whether the mechanisms will be shop blasted, shop primed and field finish painted or
completely blasted, primed and finish painted in the field. If the intent is to shop prime, then there should
be some reference in one or both specifications of how many mils are to be applied as a shop primer, so
we would know how many mils we would have to apply in the field to complete the total mils required by
System 2. Also, you may want to reference Specification Section 09 00 00 in Specification 44 42 24.03 as
a tie-in between the two sections. At this point Specification 44 42 24.03 only refers to an epoxy primer
and not necessarily to the epoxy primer required in System 2, nor does it specify how many mils of
primer is required to be applied.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
Response:
Mechanisms will be shop primed. Use the SP 7 blast clean that was originally specified and not the SP 5
that was required as part of Addendum No. 4. Concern in the question is correct, that the SP 5 blast will
strip the primer provided by WesTech and require the contractor to replace it.
This Addendum is hereby as of the above posted date made a part of the project requirements and
contract documents for the referenced project. You are to note the receipt of, and compliance with
this Addendum upon the space provided within the bid or proposal. Failure to acknowledge this
Addendum does not relieve you from fulfilling the Addendum requirements. This is the only
communication you will receive regarding this Addendum.
IF ALL PAGES WERE NOT RECEIVED OR THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE TRANSMITTAL, PLEASE CONTACT OUR OFFICE.
CITY OF BOISE, IDAHO
BOISE, IDAHO
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
for the construction of the
WEST BOISE WWTF
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND SECONDARY CLARIFIER
MECHANISM REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Contract No. FB 12 - 021
****
****
CH2M HILL
Boise, Idaho
October 2011
©CH2M HILL 2011. All rights reserved.
Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of
the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to CH2M HILL and its employees and all professional seals
shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.
Project No. 426399 Copy No.
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
PART 1—PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids ............................................................ 1- 2
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders ............................................................. 1- 13
00 41 13 Bid Form (Stipulated Price Basis) ........................................... 1- 7
Naming of Subcontractor Form ............................................... 1- 2
00 43 13 Bid Bond .................................................................................. 1- 3
PART 2—CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTING FORMS
00 45 55 Affidavit of Payment or Securement of All Taxes................... 1- 1
00 52 13 Agreement ................................................................................ 1- 9
PROJECT FORMS
00 61 13.13 Performance Bond Form .......................................................... 1- 4
00 61 13.16 Payment Bond Form ................................................................ 1- 4
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00 72 00 General Conditions .................................................................. 1- 43
00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions ....................................................... 1- 13
PART 3—SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 Summary of Work....................................................................... 1- 1
01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures .............................................. 1- 7
01 29 00 Payment Procedures .................................................................... 1- 5
01 31 13 Project Coordination ................................................................... 1- 5
01 31 19 Project Meetings ......................................................................... 1- 3
01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation ....................................... 1- 6
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures .................................................................. 1- 10
Supplement: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal ................... 1- 1
01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms...................................................... 1- 5
01 43 33 Manufacturers’ Field Services .................................................... 1- 5
Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance ............ 1- 1
Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation .. 1- 1
PW/WBG/426399 TABLE OF CONTENTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 01 10 - i
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pages
01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control ......................................................... 1- 10
01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing ............................. 1- 5
Supplement: Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility .............. 1- 1
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls .............................................. 1- 7
01 55 00 Site Security ................................................................................ 1- 2
01 57 28 Temporary Sanitary Sewer Flow Control ................................... 1- 6
01 64 00 Owner-Furnished Products ......................................................... 1- 7
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures.................................................................... 1- 4
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................ 1- 7
Supplement: Maintenance Summary Form................................. 1- 2
01 88 15 Seismic Anchorage and Bracing ................................................. 1- 6
01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup...................................... 1- 6
Supplement: Unit Process Startup Form ..................................... 1- 1
Supplement: Facility Performance Demonstration/
Certification Form ....................................................................... 1- 1
DIVISION 2—EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 Demolition .................................................................................. 1- 8
DIVISION 3—CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories............................................. 1- 5
03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories ................................................. 1- 9
03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel ........................................................................ 1- 5
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete................................................................ 1- 22
03 39 00 Concrete Curing .......................................................................... 1- 4
03 62 00 Nonshrink Grouting .................................................................... 1- 7
Supplement: 24-Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout
Test Form .................................................................................... 1- 3
03 63 00 Concrete Doweling ..................................................................... 1- 5
DIVISION 4—MASONRY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 5—METALS
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ...................................................................... 1- 16
05 52 00 Metal Railings ............................................................................. 1- 12
05 53 00 Metal Gratings ............................................................................ 1- 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS PW/WBG/426399
00 01 10 - ii OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pages
DIVISION 6—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 82 00 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic ................................................... 1- 4
DIVISIONS 7 THROUGH 8 (NOT USED)
DIVISION 9—FINISHES
09 90 00 Painting and Coating ................................................................... 1- 23
Supplement: Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) ........................... 1- 1
Supplement: Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS) .......................... 1- 1
DIVISIONS 10 THROUGH 25 (NOT USED)
DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL
26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements .................................................... 1- 5
26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods...................................... 1- 8
26 05 05 Conductors .................................................................................. 1- 13
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.......................... 1- 4
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes .................................................................... 1- 15
26 20 00 Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors ............................................ 1- 8
26 29 23 Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System..................... 1- 13
26 43 00.02 Low-Voltage Active Harmonic Correction Equipment .............. 1- 9
DIVISIONS 27 THROUGH 31 (NOT USED)
DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving ............................................................................ 1- 9
DIVISIONS 33 THROUGH 39 (NOT USED)
DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTEGRATION
40 05 15 Piping Support Systems .............................................................. 1- 10
Supplement: Table 1, Nonchemical Areas .................................. 1- 1
40 27 00 Process Piping—General ............................................................ 1- 20
Supplement: Piping Schedule Legend ........................................ 1- 1
Supplement: Piping Schedule ..................................................... 1- 1
40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar and Glass-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe
and Fittings.................................................................................. 1- 3
PW/WBG/426399 TABLE OF CONTENTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 01 10 - iii
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pages
40 27 00.04 Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 1- 1
40 27 00.07 Galvanized Steel Pipe and Malleable Iron Fittings ..................... 1- 3
40 27 00.13 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings ................. 1- 1
40 27 01 Process Piping Specialties........................................................... 1- 10
40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators ..................................................... 1- 12
Supplement: Pneumatic Actuator Schedule ................................ 1- 1
40 80 01 Process Piping Leakage Testing.................................................. 1- 3
40 90 01 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems ...................... 1- 12
Supplement: Component Specifications ..................................... 1- 5
Supplement: Headworks Modifications Input/Output List ......... 1- 1
Supplement: Instrument Calibration Sheet ................................. 1- 2
Supplement: I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet ................................ 1- 4
Supplement: Performance Acceptance Test Sheet...................... 1- 2
DIVISIONS 41 THROUGH 43 (NOT USED)
DIVISION 44—POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT
44 42 24.03 Owner-Furnished Secondary Clarifier Mechanism
(Suction Header/Manifold Type) ................................................ 1- 26
Supplement: Induction Motor Data Sheet ................................... 1- 1
44 42 28 Owner-Furnished Weir, Baffle Plates, and Launder Cover ........ 1- 10
44 42 56.01 Owner-Furnished Screw-Induced Flow Centrifugal Pumps ....... 1- 8
Supplement: Screw-Induced Flow Centrifugal Pump
Data Sheet ................................................................................... 1- 3
DIVISIONS 45 THROUGH 49 (NOT USED)
PART 4—DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
END OF SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS PW/WBG/426399
00 01 10 - iv OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
PART 1
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
FB 12 - 021
Sealed Bids for construction of the Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier
Mechanism Replacement Project will be received at the office of the City of Boise,
Department of Finance, Purchasing Office, 1st Floor City Hall, 150 North Capitol Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho (Owner), until 10:30 a.m., local time, on the 2nd day of November, 2011. Any
Bids received after the specified time will not be considered.
Bids will then be publicly opened and read.
The Project contemplated consists of installing the Owner-furnished influent pump and
secondary clarifier mechanisms; furnishing and installing piping, valves, electrical, and
control systems for the influent pump; furnishing and installing septage piping; and
furnishing and installing improvements to the screen distribution channel.
A pre-bid meeting will be held on October 18, 2011, at 1:00 p.m. at the West Boise
Operations Conference Room, at 11818 West Joplin Road, Boise, ID 83713.
The Work will be completed in all respects within 180 calendar days from the date when the
Contract Times commence to run.
Bidding Documents may be examined at the following locations:
Department of Finance & Administration, Purchasing Office of Boise City –
150 North Capitol, Boise, ID
AGC – 1649 West Shoreline, Boise, ID
Bids must be prepared on forms supplied by the Owner. Bidding Documents may be obtained
from the Purchasing Office at City Hall on a CD. A nonrefundable payment in the amount of
$5 is required.
Bidding Documents can be obtained at no charge by registering with Onvia Demand Star.
Companies choosing to register with Onvia Demand Star can do so online or by calling
(800) 711-1712. We have provided a link on our Web site (www.cityofboise.org) to the
Onvia Demand Star registration page as well as a tutorial. Registration with Onvia Demand
Star is optional for companies and is in no way a requirement to bid. However, if you choose
not to register, we cannot guarantee future bid notification. Direct questions to Purchasing
Office: (208) 384-3775.
PW/WBG/426399 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 11 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
Each Bid must be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form and accompanied by Bid security as
prescribed in the Instructions to Bidders.
The Successful Bidder will be required to furnish the additional bond(s) prescribed in the
Bidding Documents.
In order to perform Work under these Bidding Documents, Bidders and Subcontractors shall
be licensed as Public Works Contractors in accordance with Idaho Code 54-1902 and shall
obtain and hold such other licenses as required by Federal and local Laws and Regulations.
Bids will be accepted from those Bidders only who, prior to the Bid opening, hold current
licenses as Public Works Contractors in the State of Idaho.
Owner’s right is reserved to reject all Bids or any Bid not conforming to the intent and
purpose of the Bidding Documents.
City of Boise
Dates Advertised: October 12 and 19
END OF SECTION
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS PW/WBG/426399
00 11 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. DEFINED TERMS
1.1. Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings assigned to them
in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in
these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below:
1.1.1. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to
be issued and where the Bidding procedures are to be administered.
1.1.2. Owner—City of Boise.
1.1.3. Purchasing Specialist—Individual responsible for the coordination of
the Bid.
1.1.4. Engineer—CH2M HILL, 322 East Front Street, Suite 200, Boise, ID
83702.
2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids. Neither
Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.2. Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents made available
on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do
not confer a license or grant for any other use.
3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.1. In order to perform public work, Bidder and its Subcontractors, prior to award of
Contract or as otherwise required by the jurisdiction, shall hold or obtain such
licenses as required by State Statutes, and federal and local Laws and Regulations.
3.2. To demonstrate apparent low Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work,
apparent low Bidder shall submit written evidence such as financial data, previous
experience, present commitments, and such other data including AGC Document
220—Construction Contractor Qualification Statement for Engineered Construction
within 2 days of bid opening.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. LICENSE REQUIREMENTS.
4.1. Public Works Contractor’s License shall be evidenced as required in the
Advertisement for Bids of these Bidding Documents.
4.2. Before entering into an Agreement for public work, Bidders must be authorized
to do business within the state as provided by Idaho Code 63-1502.
5. EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND
SITE
5.1. Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
5.1.1. The Supplementary Conditions identify:
5.1.1.1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in
preparing the Bidding Documents.
5.1.1.2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface and subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site
(except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing
the Bidding Documents.
5.1.2. Copies of reports and drawings referenced will be made available by
Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of
the Contract Documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon
which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions has been identified and established in Paragraph 4.02 of the
Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or
conclusion Bidder draws from any “technical data” or any other data,
interpretations, or information contained in such reports or show or indicated
in such drawings. Costs associated with making available copies of reports
and drawings shall be borne by Bidder.
5.2. Underground Facilities:
5.2.1. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with
respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based
upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such
Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.3. Hazardous Environmental Condition:
5.3.1. The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings
relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any,
that Engineer has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.
5.3.2. Copies of reports and drawings referenced will be made available by
Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the
Contract Documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon which
Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General
Conditions has been identified and established in Paragraph 4.06 of the
Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or
conclusion Bidder draws from any “technical data” or any other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings. Costs associated with making available copies of
reports and drawings shall be borne by Bidder.
5.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to
prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions
and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to
differing or unanticipated conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02 through 4.04 of the
General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data
furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition
at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any
Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not
shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract
Documents to be within the scope of the Work appear in Paragraph 4.06 of the General
Conditions.
5.5. On request, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the Site to conduct such
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems
necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore
the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations,
tests, and studies. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations
relative to excavation and utility locates.
5.6. Reference is made to the General Requirements for identification of the general
nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as
utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work contemplated by these
Bidding Documents. On request, Owner will provide to each Bidder, for examination,
access to or copies of contract documents (other than portions thereof related to price)
for such other work.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.7. It is responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
5.7.1. Examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, other related
data identified in the Bidding Documents, and any Addenda.
5.7.2. Visit the Site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the
general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and
performance of the Work.
5.7.3. Become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all federal, state, and
local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of
the Work.
5.7.4. Carefully study all:
5.7.4.1. Reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at
or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to
the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in
the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the
General Conditions.
5.7.4.2. Reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental
Conditions at the Site which have been identified in the Supplementary
Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.
5.7.5. Obtain and carefully study (or accept consequences of not doing so) all
additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground
Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or
performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by
Bidder, including applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences,
and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents,
and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
5.7.6. Agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the
determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and
within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the
Bidding Documents.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.7.7. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by
Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the
Bidding Documents.
5.7.8. Correlate the information known to Bidder, information and
observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in
the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents.
5.7.9. Promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors,
ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents
and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to
Bidder.
5.7.10. Determine Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work.
5.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by
Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this article; that without
exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by
Bidding Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques,
sequences, and procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or
expressly required by Bidding Documents; that Bidder has given Engineer written
notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has
discovered in Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are
acceptable to Bidder; and that Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate
and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing the Work.
6. PREBID CONFERENCE
6.1. A prebid conference will be held as stated in the Advertisement for Bids.
Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders
are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. Engineer will transmit to
prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in
response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied
upon and will not be binding or legally effective.
7. SITE AND OTHER AREAS
7.1. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by
Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and
access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained
and paid for by Contractor.
8. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
8.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be
submitted to the Purchasing Specialist (Carolyn Estes, cestes@cityofboise.org) in
writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Purchasing
Specialist in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda and posted on
Demand Star. Questions received less than 3 working days prior to the date for
opening of Bids may not be answered. Questions will state the exact nature of the
clarification or protest, describing the location of the portion or clause in the
documents and explaining the question or why the provision should be struck, added,
or altered and contain suggested corrections. Only questions answered by Addenda
will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal
effect.
8.2. Addenda may also be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding
Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer.
9. BID SECURITY
9.1. Bid shall be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount
of 5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check,
cash, or bank money order or a penal Bid Bond (on the attached form), issued by a
surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 and Paragraph 5.02 of the General
Conditions.
9.2. The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met
the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be
returned upon request. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within the time period
specified in Article Signing of Agreement, Owner may annul the Notice of Award
and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Bid security of other Bidders
whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be
retained by Owner until the earlier of the 7th day after the Effective Date of the
Agreement or the number of days specified for all Bids to remain subject to
acceptance in Article Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance, whereupon Bid security
furnished by such Bidders will be returned upon request.
9.3. Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes do not have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award will be returned within 7 days after Bid opening upon
request.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9.4. Protest of Contractor Selection or Contract Award:
9.4.1. Any actual Bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the selection of
a Contractor or award of the Contract or Bid may submit a protest to the
Purchasing Agent. The protest will be submitted in writing within 7 calendar
days after such aggrieved person knows or should have known the facts which
give rise to the protest. The protest must set forth in specific terms the alleged
reason the Contractor selection or contract award is erroneous. Any protest
addressed to the Mayor or City Council will be referred to the City Purchasing
Agent.
9.4.2. Written protests are to be directed to:
Denis Ryall
Purchasing Agent
Fax: (208) 384-3995
purchasing@cityofboise.org
10. CONTRACT TIMES
10.1. The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be
substantially completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.
11. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
11.1. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.
12. SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS
12.1. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment
specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible
substitute or “or-equal” items. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding
Documents that a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment may be
furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such
acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
13. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
13.1. Pursuant to Idaho Code 67-2310, when Owner is the State of Idaho, a County,
Town, Village, or School District, and when the Work involves plumbing, heating
and air conditioning, or electrical Work, Bidder shall include in its Bid the name and
address of each Subcontractor who, in the event the Bidder is awarded the Contract,
will perform the Work. Subcontractors named in accordance with the provisions of
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
this section must possess appropriate license or Certificate of Competency issued by
the State of Idaho covering the applicable classification of Work proposed. Failure of
any Bidder to comply with this provision of the Idaho Code shall render Bid
submitted by the Bidder unresponsive and void.
13.2. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any
proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice
of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute in which
case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit an acceptable substitute.
13.3. If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution Owner
may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable
Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested
substitutions will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any
Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which
Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of
Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of
such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in General
Conditions Paragraph 6.06.B.
14. EMPLOYMENT REQUIREMENTS
14.1. Pursuant to Idaho Code 44-1001 and 44-1002, Bidder shall employ 95 percent
bona fide Idaho residents as employees, except under contracts where 50 or less
persons are employed, Bidder may employ 10 percent nonresidents provided they
give preference to employment of bona fide residents in performance of said Work.
No Contract will be let to any person, firm, association, or corporation refusing to
execute an agreement with above-mentioned provisions in it.
15. PREPARATION OF BID
15.1. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by typing or printing with black
ink and the Bid signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the
person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each Bid item listed
therein or the words “No Bid,” “No Change,” or “Not Applicable” entered.
15.2. A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the
president or a vice-president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of
authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or
an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown
below the signature.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
15.3. A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by
a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of
authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the
signature.
15.4. A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm
by a member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of
formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown below the
signature.
15.5. A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.
15.6. A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner
indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown
below the signature.
15.7. All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signatures.
15.8. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda; the
numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form.
15.9. The address, telephone number, and e-mail address for communications
regarding the Bid shall be shown.
15.10. The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do
business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such
qualification prior to award of the Contract. Bidder’s state contractors’ license
number and class, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.
16. BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS
16.1. Lump Sum:
16.1.1. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid
Form.
16.1.2. For determination of Apparent Low Bidder, Bids will be compared on
the basis of the lump sum.
17. SALES AND USE TAXES
17.1. Certain items of equipment may be exempt from sales tax per Idaho Code
Section 63-3622X and other sections. Contractor is responsible for determining which
pieces of equipment are exempt and shall be responsible for all taxes due.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
18. SUBMISSION OF BID
18.1. The Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the
following data:
18.1.1. Listing of Subcontractors in accordance with Article Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and Others.
18.2. Sealed Submissions. Submit one (1) original and one (1) copy of your Bid.
Two copies total to the Boise City Purchasing Office, 150 North Capitol Boulevard.
Boise, ID 83702. The submission package or envelope must be sealed and plainly
marked with the following: Addressed to Boise City Purchasing Office 150 North
Capitol Boulevard, Boise, ID 83702, FB 12-021, Headworks/Improvement and
Secondary Clarifier Mechanism Replacement Project and the opening date and time.
The submitting Vendor’s return address must appear on the envelope or package.
18.3. A submission made using “Express/Overnight” services must be shipped in a
separate sealed inner envelope/package identified as stated above. No responsibility
will attach to the City, or to any official or employee thereof, for the pre-opening of,
post-opening of, or the failure to open a submission not properly addressed and
identified.
18.4. Bids and Proposals must be submitted in writing. No oral, telephone, facsimile
or late submissions will be considered. All submissions must be received at the City
Purchasing Office and time and date stamped prior to the closing date and time. It is
the submitting Vendor’s responsibility to timely submit their Bid or Proposal in a
properly marked envelope, prior to the scheduled closing, for receipt in sufficient
time to allow the submission to be time and date stamped.
18.5. E-Bids:
18.5.1. Electronic Bids submitted through DemandStar will also be accepted
for this Project. Bids must be signed and submitted in same required format.
Submit one (1) electronic copy if using E-Bidding.
18.5.2. Sign your electronic bid. Bids without written signature will not be
accepted.
18.5.3. All E-Bids must be submitted before the scheduled bid opening. In
the event of a technology failure, the City reserves the right to accept all bids
submitted and electronically time stamped prior to bid opening. The City will
require bid receipt document to be on file as proof of timely submission.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
19. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
19.1. A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly
executed in the manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where
Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.
19.2. If within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written
notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction
of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its
Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned.
Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding
on the Work.
20. OPENING OF BIDS
Bids will be publicly opened at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement for
Bids and unless obviously nonresponsive, read aloud. A Bid tabulation will be posted
on DemandStar and on the City Web site: www.cityofboise.org/purchasing.
21. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
21.1. All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the
Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid
security prior to the end of this period.
22. EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
22.1. Significant Local Presence:
22.1.1. All contracts or award of Bids shall be awarded to the lowest
responsible and responsive Bidder to the Base Bid price, with all costs to the
City considered, provided that the City Council may award contracts to the
Bidder or Offeror it determines appropriate and may include entities with a
significant local economic presence as described in the Boise City Code
Section 1-11. To qualify as a Bidder with a significant local economic
presence, a firm must maintain in the Metropolitan Impact Area a fully staffed
office, or fully staffed sales offices, or fully staffed sales outlets, or
manufacturing facilities, or warehouses, and, if required, be registered with
the Secretary of State of Idaho to do business in Idaho at the time of the Bid
opening. Metropolitan Impact Area includes and is limited to the counties of
Ada, Boise, Canyon, Elmore, Gem, and Payette in the State of Idaho.
22.2. Owner reserves its right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation
nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Owner further
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds after reasonable
inquiry and evaluation to not be responsible. Owner may also reject the Bid of any
Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to
make an award to that Bidder. Owner also reserves the right to waive all informalities
not involving price, time, or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with
the Successful Bidder.
22.3. More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the
same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that
any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for
disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an
interest.
22.4. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with
the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may
be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
22.5. In evaluating Bidders, Owner may consider the qualifications of Bidders and
may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which the
identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be
submitted either with the Bid, or otherwise prior to issuance of the Notice of Award.
22.6. Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish
responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and individuals, or entities to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
22.7. If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will award the Contract to Bidder
whose Bid is in the best interests of the Project.
23. CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE
23.1. Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary
Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to bonds and insurance. When
Successful Bidder delivers executed Agreement to Owner, it shall be accompanied by
such bonds.
24. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
24.1. Prior to the execution of the Agreement for public work in Idaho, Successful
Bidder shall file notice of award information on form obtained from Idaho State Tax
Commission and provide a copy to the Administrator of the Division of Building
Safety in compliance with Idaho Code 54-1904A.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PW/WBG/426399
00 21 13 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
24.2. When Owner gives a Notice of Award to Successful Bidder, it shall be
accompanied by required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with the
other Contract Documents that are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto.
Within 10 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required
number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner. Within
10 days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Successful
Bidder with a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
25. PUBLIC RECORDS
25.1. The Idaho Public Records Law, Idaho Code Sections 9-337 through 9-348,
allows the open inspection and copying of public records. Public records include any
writing containing information relating to the conduct or administration of the
public’s business prepared, owned, used, or retained by a State or local agency
regardless of the physical form or character. The City is a public agency. All
documents in its possession are public records. Bids are public records and, except as
noted below, will be available for inspection and copying by any person. If any
Bidder claims any material to be exempt from disclosure under the Idaho Public
Records Law, the Bidder will expressly agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless
the City from any claim or suit arising from the City’s refusal to disclose any such
material. No such claim of exemption will be valid or effective without such express
agreement.
26. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
26.1. The City will take reasonable efforts to protect any information marked
“confidential” by the Bidder, to the extent permitted by the Idaho Public Records
Law. Confidential information must be submitted in a separate envelope, sealed, and
marked “Confidential Information” and will be returned to the Bidder upon request
after the award of the Contract. Include the specific basis for your position that it be
treated as exempt from disclosure. Marking your entire Bid or Proposal as exempt is
not acceptable or in accordance with the Solicitation documents or the Public Records
Law and will not be honored. It is understood, however, that the City will have no
liability for disclosure of such information. Any questions regarding the applicability
of the Public Records Law should be addressed to your own legal counsel PRIOR
TO SUBMISSION. Any proprietary or otherwise sensitive information contained in
or with any Bid is subject to potential disclosure.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 21 13 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
NOTE TO BIDDER: Use typewriter or ink for completing this Bid Form.
FB 12 - 021 BID FORM
(STIPULATED PRICE BASIS)
1. BID RECIPIENT
1.1. This Bid is submitted to:
Owner: City of Boise, Department of Finance and Administration,
Purchasing Office.
Address: 1st Floor, City Hall, 150 North Capitol Boulevard, Boise, ID.
Project Identification: Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier
Mechanism Replacement Project.
1.2. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into
an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform
all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within
the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Bidding Documents.
2. BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
2.1. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders,
including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This
Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such
longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
3. BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
3.1. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:
3.1.1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the
other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following
Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged.
Addendum No. Addendum Date
(Bidder shall insert number of each Addendum received.)
PW/WBG/426399 BID FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 41 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.1.2. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as
to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and
performance of the Work.
3.1.3. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local
Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the
Work.
3.1.4. Bidder has carefully studied all: i) reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical
conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or
contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been
identified in Paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions; and ii) reports
and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been
identified in Paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary Conditions.
3.1.5. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or accepts the consequences
for not doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost,
progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be
employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by
the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto.
3.1.6. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this
Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and within the times and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
3.1.7. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by
Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the
Bidding Documents.
3.1.8. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information
and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings
identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding
Documents.
BID FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 41 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.1.9. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors,
ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding
Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to
Bidder.
3.1.10. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the
Work for which this Bid is submitted.
3.1.11. Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in
the state where the Project is located not later than the date of its execution of
the Agreement.
4. FURTHER REPRESENTATIONS
4.1. Bidder further represents that:
4.1.1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any
undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any
agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation;
4.1.2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other
Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;
4.1.3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain
from bidding; and
4.1.4. Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage
over any other Bidder or over Owner.
5. BASIS OF BIDS
5.1. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for
the following price(s):
5.2. Base Bid Schedule A Lump Sum Base Bid Price:
Base Bid Schedule A
No. Description Unit Amount
1. Influent Pump Installation L.S. $
2. Influent Pump Piping L.S. $
PW/WBG/426399 BID FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 41 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Base Bid Schedule A
No. Description Unit Amount
3. Discharge Header Demolition L.S. $
4. Stop Log Structure L.S. $
5. Bypass Pumping L.S. $
6. Electrical Systems L.S. $
7. Instrumentation and Controls L.S. $
Total $
5.3. Base Bid Schedule B Lump Sum Bid:
Base Bid Schedule B
No. Description Unit Amount
1. Secondary Clarifier Mechanism and L.S. $
Launder Cover Installation
(Clarifiers 1 through 4)
2. Launder Cover Installation L.S. $
(Clarifiers 5 and 6)
3. Scum Piping L.S. $
4. Secondary Clarifier Mechanism L.S. $
Demolition (Clarifiers 1 through 4)
5. Water Piping L.S. $
Total $
5.4. Total Base Bid Schedule A and Schedule B.
Dollars
(words)
and Cents $
(numerals)
BID FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 41 13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.5. Bid Alternative Price: 18-Inch Septage Piping.
Dollars
(words)
and Cents $
(numerals)
6. BID EVALUATION
6.1. Bids will be evaluated and the apparent low Bidder determined from
Paragraph 5.4, Total Base Bid Schedule A and Schedule B. Bid Alternative 1 may be
included in the project based on price and at the convenience of the Owner.
7. TIME OF COMPLETION
7.1. Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete within 165 calendar
days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in
Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and will be completed and ready for final
payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B of the General Conditions within
180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
7.2. Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the
event of failure to complete the Work, and any specified Milestones, within the
Contract Times.
8. ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID
8.1. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:
8.1.1. Required Bid security in the form of Bid bond.
8.1.2. Name and address of proposed plumbing, heating and air conditioning,
and electrical Subcontractors on attached form.
8.1.3. Public Works Contractor License Number.
9. DEFINED TERMS
9.1. The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in
the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary
Conditions.
PW/WBG/426399 BID FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 41 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. BID SUBMITTAL
10.1. This Bid submitted by:
If Bidder is:
An Individual
Name (typed or printed):
By (signature):
Doing business as:
A Partnership
Partnership Name: (SEAL)
By:
(Signature of general partner – attach evidence of authority to sign)
Name (typed or printed):
A Corporation
Corporation Name: (SEAL)
State of Incorporation:
Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):
By:
(Signature – attach evidence of authority to sign)
Name (typed or printed):
Title: (CORPORATE SEAL)
Attest:
(Signature of Corporate Secretary)
Date of Qualification to do business is:
BID FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 41 13 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
A Joint Venture
Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL)
By:
(Signature of joint venture partner – attach evidence of authority to sign)
Name (typed or printed):
Title:
(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual,
partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in
the manner indicated above.)
Bidder’s Business Address:
Phone No.: FAX No.:
BID SUBMITTED on , 20
Idaho Contractor’s License No.:
Contractor’s License Class (where applicable):
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 BID FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 41 13 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Naming of Subcontractors Form
FB 12 - 021
Per Idaho Code, 67-2310, Bidder shall include in his or her Bid the names and address, and
Idaho Public Works Contractor License Number of the Subcontractors who shall, in the event
the Bidder secures the Contract, subcontract the plumbing, heating and air-conditioning
work, and electrical work under the general Contract. Failure to name Subcontractors as
required shall render any Bid submitted by the Bidder unresponsive and void.
In the event that the general contractor intends to self-perform the plumbing, HVAC or
electrical work, the general contractor must be properly licensed by the state of Idaho
to perform such work.
The general contractor shall demonstrate compliance with this requirement by listing
the valid contractor's license number for the plumbing, HVAC or electrical work to be
self-performed by the general contractor on the bid form.
Bidder Name:
Name and Address License Number
Plumbing:
HVAC:
Electrical:
PW/WBG/426399 BID FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 41 13 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Other:
BID FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 41 13 SUPPLEMENT - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
BID BOND
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
City of Boise
150 North Capitol Boulevard
Boise, ID
BID
Bid Due Date:
Project (FB 12 - 021): West Boise WWTF Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier Mechanism
Replacement Project
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not later than Bid due date):
Penal sum
(Words) (Figures)
Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof,
do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.
PW/WBG/426399 BID BOND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 43 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
BIDDER SURETY
(Seal) (Seal)
Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By: By:
Signature and Title Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
Attest: Attest:
Signature and Title Signature and Title
Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice.
BID BOND PW/WBG/426399
00 43 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of
successors and assigns to pay to Owner upon default default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by
of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year
Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of after Bid due date.
Surety’s liability.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction
Bidder to deliver within the time required by the located in the state in which the Project is located.
Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed
to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement 8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and
required by the Bidding Documents and any sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective
performance and payment bonds required by the addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such
Bidding Documents. notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial
courier, or by United States Registered or Certified
3. This obligation shall be null and void if: Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and
shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the
3.1. Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder party concerned.
delivers within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a
writing by Owner) the executed Agreement current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing
required by the Bidding Documents and any the authority of the officer, agent, or representative
performance and payment bonds required by the who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to
Bidding Documents, or execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the
Surety thereby.
3.2. All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable
3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement
Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding of any applicable statute that has been omitted from
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if
writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond
by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof). conflicts with any applicable statute, then the
provision of said statute shall govern and the
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict
upon default by Bidder and within 30 calendar days therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of
default from Owner, which notice will be given with 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid,
reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the offer, or proposal as applicable.
Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses
based on or arising out of any time extension to issue
Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and
Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice
of Award including extensions shall not in the
aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without
Surety’s written consent.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 BID BOND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 43 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
PART 2
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OR SECUREMENT OF ALL TAXES
STATE OF IDAHO }
} ss
COUNTY OF _____________ }
, being first duly sworn, on oath
deposes and says that they are in conformance with Idaho Code 63-1502; that they have paid
or secured to the satisfaction of the respective taxing units all taxes for which they or their
property is liable, now due or delinquent, including assessments, excises and license fees
levied by the State of Idaho or any taxing unit within the State of Idaho.
Signed:
Titled:
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20
My commission expires:
Notary Public
(SEAL)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OR
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECUREMENT OF ALL TAXES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 00 45 55 - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
AGREEMENT
FB –12 - 021
THIS AGREEMENT is by and between the City of Boise (Owner) and
(Contractor).
Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants set forth herein, agree as
follows:
1. WORK
1.1. Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Work is generally described in Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.
2. THE PROJECT
2.1. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the
whole or only a part is generally described as West Boise WWTF Headworks
Improvement and Secondary Clarifier Mechanism Replacement Project.
3. ENGINEER
3.1. The Project has been designed by CH2M HILL (Engineer), who is to act as
Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and
authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the
completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. CONTRACT TIMES
4.1. Time of the Essence: All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial
Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract
Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
4.2. Days to Achieve Substantial Completion and Final Payment:
4.2.1. The Work shall be substantially completed within 165 days from the
date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03
of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in
accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within 180 days
after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 52 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4.3. Liquidated Damages:
4.3.1. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this
Agreement and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not
completed within the times specified in Paragraph Contract Times above, plus
any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General
Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties
involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered
by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of
requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated
damages for delay (but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner
Seven Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($750) for each day that expires after the
time specified herein for Substantial Completion until the Work is
substantially complete. Contractor shall pay Owner Five Hundred Dollars
($500) for each day that expires after the time specified herein for Final
Completion until Work is finally complete.
5. CONTRACT PRICE
5.1. Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts
determined pursuant to the following:
5.1.1. Lump Sum: For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of:
Dollars
(Words)
and Cents $
(Words) (Figures)
6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.1. Submittal and Processing of Payments: Contractor shall submit Applications for
Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for
Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions.
6.2. Progress Payments and Retainage: Owner will make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Application for Payment on
the date of each month as established in the preconstruction conference during
performance of the Work as provided herein. All such payments will be measured by
the Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General
Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided in the General
Requirements.
6.2.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an
amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the
aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer
may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated
damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions:
6.2.1.1. Ninety percent of Work completed (with the balance being
retainage). If the Work has been 50 percent completed as determined
by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been
satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, Owner, on recommendation of
Engineer, may determine that as long as the character and progress of
the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional
retainage; and
6.2.1.2. Ninety percent of cost of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).
6.2.2. Owner will release to Contractor retainage for those separate portions
of the Work determined substantially complete by Engineer and accepted by
Owner for use as intended.
6.2.3. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner will pay an amount sufficient to
increase total payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed,
less such amounts as Engineer will determine in accordance with
Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less 100 percent of
Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as
shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to
the certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.3. Final Payment:
6.3.1. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of
the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said
Paragraph 14.07.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 52 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS
7.1. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the
following representations:
7.1.1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents
and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents.
7.1.2. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is
satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost,
progress, and performance of the Work.
7.1.3. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and
local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of
the Work.
7.1.4. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and
tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of
physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at
or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of
the General Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous
Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which has been identified in the
Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General
Conditions.
7.1.5. Contractor has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions
(surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site
which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate
to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor, including any specific means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly
required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs
incident thereto.
7.1.6. Contractor does not consider that any further examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the
performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7.1.7. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by
Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
7.1.8. Contractor has correlated the information known to Contractor,
information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and
drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the
Contract Documents.
7.1.9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors,
ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract
Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to
Contractor.
7.1.10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and
furnishing of the Work.
8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
8.1. Contents:
8.1.1. The Contract Documents that are attached to this Agreement (except as
expressly noted otherwise) consist of the following:
8.1.1.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to , inclusive).
8.1.1.2. Performance bond (pages to , inclusive).
8.1.1.3. Payment bond (pages to , inclusive).
8.1.1.4. General Conditions (pages to , inclusive).
8.1.1.5. Supplementary Conditions (pages to , inclusive).
8.1.1.6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 52 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8.1.1.7. Drawings consisting of sheets with each sheet bearing the
following general title: “Headworks Improvement and Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism Replacement Project”.
8.1.1.8. Addenda (numbers to , inclusive).
8.1.2. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the
Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto:
8.1.2.1. Notice to Proceed (pages to , inclusive).
8.1.2.2. Work Change Directives.
8.1.2.3. Change Order(s).
8.2. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article.
8.3. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as
provided in Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.
9. MISCELLANEOUS
9.1. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.
9.2. Successors and Assigns: Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements,
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
9.3. Severability: Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or
unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all
remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and
Contractor, who agree the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such
stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as
close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9.4. Assignment of Contract:
9.4.1. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract shall be binding on another party hereto without the written consent
of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation,
moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned
without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction
may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any
written consent to an assignment, no assignment shall release or discharge the
assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 52 13 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement in triplicate.
One counterpart each has been delivered to Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. All portions of
the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by Owner and Contractor or on their
behalf.
This Agreement will be effective on , 20 (which is the Effective Date of the
Agreement).
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
By: By:
Title: Title:
[CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL]
Attest: Attest:
Title: Title:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence License No.
of authority to sign. If Owner is a public (Where applicable)
body, attach evidence of authority to sign
and resolution or other documents Agent for service or process:
authorizing execution of Owner-
Contractor Agreement.)
(If Contractor is a corporation or a
partnership, attach evidence of authority to
sign.)
AGREEMENT PW/WBG/426399
00 52 13 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
REVIEW AS TO FORM AND CONTENT:
Public Works Department
Purchasing
Legal
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 AGREEMENT
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 52 13 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PERFORMANCE BOND FORM
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR SURETY
(Name and Address): (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
City of Boise
150 North Capitol Boulevard
Boise, ID
CONTRACT
Date:
Amount:
Description (FB 12 - 021): West Boise WWTF Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier
Mechanism Replacement Project
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Contract Date):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side
hereof, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent,
or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company:
Signature: (Seal) (Seal)
Name and Title Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
(Space is provided below for signatures of additional
parties, if required.)
Attest:
Signature and Title
PW/WBG/426399 PERFORMANCE BOND FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 61 13.13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company:
Signature: (Seal) (Seal)
Name and Title Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
Attest:
Signature and Title
PERFORMANCE BOND FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 61 13.13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind 4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, Contract itself, through its agents or through
successors, and assigns to Owner for the performance independent contractors; or
of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by
reference. 4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from
qualified contractors acceptable to Owner for a
2. If Contractor performs the Contract, Surety and contract for performance and completion of the
Contractor have no obligation under this Bond, Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for
except to participate in conferences as provided in execution by Owner and Contractor selected with
Paragraph 3.1. Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with
performance and payment bonds executed by a
3. If there is no Owner Default, Surety’s obligation qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on
under this Bond shall arise after: the Contract, and pay to Owner the amount of
damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of
3.1. Owner has notified Contractor and Surety, at the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by
the addresses described in Paragraph 10 below, Owner resulting from Contractor Default; or
that Owner is considering declaring a Contractor
Default and has requested and attempted to 4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete,
arrange a conference with Contractor and Surety arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor
to be held not later than 15 days after receipt of and with reasonable promptness under the
such notice to discuss methods of performing the circumstances:
Contract. If Owner, Contractor and Surety agree,
Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to 1. After investigation, determine the
perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall amount for which it may be liable to Owner
not waive Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to and, as soon as practicable after the amount
declare a Contractor Default; and is determined, tender payment therefor to
Owner; or
3.2. Owner has declared a Contractor Default
and formally terminated Contractor’s right to 2. Deny liability in whole or in part and
complete the Contract. Such Contractor Default notify Owner citing reasons therefor.
shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after
Contractor and Surety have received notice as 5. If Surety does not proceed as provided in
provided in Paragraph 3.1; and Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, Surety shall
be deemed to be in default on this Bond 15 days after
3.3. Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the receipt of an additional written notice from Owner to
Contract Price to: Surety demanding that Surety perform its obligations
under this Bond, and Owner shall be entitled to
1. Surety in accordance with the terms of enforce any remedy available to Owner. If Surety
the Contract; proceeds as provided in Paragraph 4.4, and Owner
refuses the payment tendered or Surety has denied
2. Another contractor selected pursuant to liability, in whole or in part, without further notice
Paragraph 4.3 to perform the Contract. Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy
available to Owner.
4. When Owner has satisfied the conditions of
Paragraph 3, Surety shall promptly and at Surety’s 6. After Owner has terminated Contractor’s right to
expense take one of the following actions: complete the Contract, and if Surety elects to act
under Paragraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the
4.1. Arrange for Contractor, with consent of responsibilities of Surety to Owner shall not be
Owner, to perform and complete the Contract; or greater than those of Contractor under the Contract,
and the responsibilities of Owner to Surety shall not
be greater than those of Owner under the Contract.
To a limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to
PW/WBG/426399 PERFORMANCE BOND FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 61 13.13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
commitment by Owner of the Balance of the Contract 10. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be
Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the mailed or delivered to the address shown on the
Contract, Surety is obligated without duplication for: signature page.
6.1. The responsibilities of Contractor for 11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply
correction of defective Work and completion of with a statutory requirement in the location where the
the Contract; Contract was to be performed, any provision in this
Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement
6.2. Additional legal, design professional, and shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions
delay costs resulting from Contractor’s Default, conforming to such statutory requirement shall be
and resulting from the actions or failure to act of deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this
Surety under Paragraph 4; and Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not
as a common law bond.
6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated
damages are specified in the Contract, actual 12. Definitions.
damages caused by delayed performance or non-
performance of Contractor. 12.1. Balance of the Contract Price: The total
amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the
7. Surety shall not be liable to Owner or others for Contract after all proper adjustments have been
obligations of Contractor that are unrelated to the made, including allowance to Contractor of any
Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall amounts received or to be received by Owner in
not be reduced or set off on account of any such settlement of insurance or other Claims for
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue damages to which Contractor is entitled, reduced
on this Bond to any person or entity other than by all valid and proper payments made to or on
Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, or behalf of Contractor under the Contract.
successors.
12.2. Contract: The agreement between Owner
8. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, and Contractor identified on the signature page,
including changes of time, to Contract or to related including all Contract Documents and changes
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. thereto.
9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this 12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of Contractor,
Bond may be instituted in any court of competent which has neither been remedied nor waived, to
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of
of the Work is located and shall be instituted within the Contract.
two years after Contractor Default or within two
years after Contractor ceased working or within two 12.4. Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has
years after Surety refuses or fails to perform its neither been remedied nor waived, to pay
obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. Contractor as required by the Contract or to
If the provisions of this paragraph are void or perform and complete or comply with the other
prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation terms thereof.
available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of
the suit shall be applicable.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY – Name, Address and Telephone
Surety Agency or Broker
Owner’s Representative (engineer or other party)
END OF SECTION
PERFORMANCE BOND FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 61 13.13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PAYMENT BOND FORM
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR SURETY
(Name and Address): (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
City of Boise
150 North Capitol Boulevard
Boise, ID
CONTRACT
Date:
Amount:
Description (FB 12 - 021): West Boise WWTF Headworks Improvement and Secondary Clarifier
Mechanism Replacement Project
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Contract Date):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side
hereof, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or
representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company:
Signature: (Seal) (Seal)
Name and Title Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
(Space is provided below for signatures of additional
parties, if required.)
Attest:
Signature and Title
PW/WBG/426399 PAYMENT BOND FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 61 13.16 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company:
Signature: (Seal) (Seal)
Name and Title Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)
Attest:
Signature and Title
PAYMENT BOND FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 61 13.16 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind were furnished or supplied, or for whom the
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, labor was done or performed; and
successors, and assigns to Owner to pay for labor,
materials, and equipment furnished by Claimants for 2. Have either received a rejection in
use in the performance of the Contract, which is whole or in part from Contractor, or not
incorporated herein by reference. received within 30 days of furnishing the
above notice any communication from
2. With respect to Owner, this obligation shall be Contractor by which Contractor had
null and void if Contractor: indicated the claim will be paid directly or
indirectly; and
2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or
indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 3. Not having been paid within the above
30 days, have sent a written notice to Surety
2.2. Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner,
Owner from all claims, demands, liens, or suits stating that a claim is being made under this
alleging non-payment by Contractor by any Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous
person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or written notice furnished to Contractor.
equipment for use in the performance of the
Contract, provided Owner has promptly notified 5. If a notice by a Claimant required by Paragraph 4
Contractor and Surety (at the addresses described is provided by Owner to Contractor or to Surety, that
in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens, or is sufficient compliance.
suits and tendered defense of such claims,
demands, liens, or suits to Contractor and Surety, 6. Reserved.
and provided there is no Owner Default.
7. Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond
null and void if Contractor promptly makes payment, shall be credited for any payments made in good faith
directly or indirectly, for all sums due. by Surety.
4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants 8. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the
under this Bond until: Contract shall be used for the performance of the
Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any
4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have a performance bond. By Contractor furnishing and
direct contract with Contractor have given notice Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds
to Surety (at the addresses described in earned by Contractor in the performance of the
Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of
to Owner, stating that a claim is being made under Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to
this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion
amount of the claim. of the Work.
4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract 9. Surety shall not be liable to Owner, Claimants, or
with Contractor: others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated
to the Contract. Owner shall not be liable for
1. Have furnished written notice to payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant
Contractor and sent a copy, or notice under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no
thereof, to Owner, within 90 days after obligations to make payments to, give notices on
having last performed labor or last furnished behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants
materials or equipment included in the claim under this Bond.
stating, with substantial accuracy, the
amount of the claim and the name of the 10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change,
party to whom the materials or equipment including changes of time, to the Contract or to
PW/WBG/426399 PAYMENT BOND FORM
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 61 13.16 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
related Subcontracts, purchase orders and other 14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to
obligations. be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, Contractor
shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall
11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a permit a copy to be made.
Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of
competent jurisdiction in the location in which the 15. Definitions:
Work or part of the Work is located or after the
expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the 15.1. Claimant: An individual or entity having a
Claimant gave the notice required by Paragraph 4.1 direct contract with Contractor, or with a first-tier
or Paragraph 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or subcontractor of Contractor, to furnish labor,
service was performed by anyone or the last materials materials, or equipment for use in the
or equipment were furnished by anyone under the performance of the Contract. The intent of this
Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first Bond shall be to include without limitation in the
occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or terms “labor, materials or equipment” that part of
prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,
available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of telephone service, or rental equipment used in the
the suit shall be applicable. Contract, architectural and engineering services
required for performance of the Work of
12. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors, and
mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on the all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be
signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,
Owner, or Contractor, however accomplished, shall materials, or equipment were furnished.
be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the
address shown on the signature page. 15.2. Contract: The agreement between Owner
and Contractor identified on the signature page,
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply including all Contract Documents and changes
with a statutory requirement in the location where the thereto.
Contract was to be performed, any provision in this
Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement 15.3. Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has
shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions neither been remedied nor waived, to pay
conforming to such statutory requirement shall be Contractor as required by the Contract or to
deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this perform and complete or comply with the other
Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not terms thereof.
as a common law bond.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY – Name, Address and Telephone
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owner’s Representative (engineer or other party):
END OF SECTION
PAYMENT BOND FORM PW/WBG/426399
00 61 13.16 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
STANDARD
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Prepared by
ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE
and
Issued and Published Jointly By
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE
a practice division of the
NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS
___________________
AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES
___________________
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
This document has been approved and endorsed by
The Associated General Contractors of America
Construction Specifications Institute
Copyright ©2002
National Society of Professional Engineers
1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314
American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
00 72 00 - 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................. 7
1.01 Defined Terms .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.02 Terminology ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................................................... 10
2.02 Copies of Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................................................. 10
2.04 Starting the Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.05 Before Starting Construction ..................................................................................................................................... 10
2.06 Preconstruction Conference ...................................................................................................................................... 10
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ................................................................................................................................. 11
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ...................................................................... 11
3.01 Intent .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.02 Reference Standards .................................................................................................................................................. 11
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies .................................................................................................................... 11
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .................................................................................................. 12
3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.06 Electronic Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................ 12
4.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................................................. 12
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions.......................................................................................................................... 13
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................................................ 13
4.04 Underground Facilities .............................................................................................................................................. 14
4.05 Reference Points ........................................................................................................................................................ 14
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ............................................................................................................. 15
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 16
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds.................................................................................................................. 16
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................................................................................................................. 16
5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................................................ 16
5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ............................................................................................................................... 16
5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance ...................................................................................................................................... 17
5.06 Property Insurance .................................................................................................................................................... 17
5.07 Waiver of Rights......................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ........................................................................................................ 19
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................................................................................... 19
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ......................................................................................... 19
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 19
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................................................. 19
6.02 Labor; Working Hours ............................................................................................................................................... 19
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 20
6.04 Progress Schedule...................................................................................................................................................... 20
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ..................................................................................................................................... 20
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others................................................................................................... 22
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .......................................................................................................................................... 22
6.08 Permits ....................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.09 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................................................ 23
6.10 Taxes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas....................................................................................................................................... 23
6.12 Record Documents ..................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................................................. 24
00 72 00 - 3
Page
6.14 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................................................. 24
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ............................................................................................................................ 24
6.16 Emergencies ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ..................................................................................................................................... 24
6.18 Continuing the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 26
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee........................................................................................................ 26
6.20 Indemnification .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .............................................................................................................. 26
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ......................................................................................................................... 27
7.01 Related Work at Site................................................................................................................................................... 27
7.02 Coordination .............................................................................................................................................................. 27
7.03 Legal Relationships.................................................................................................................................................... 28
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 28
8.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................................................. 28
8.02 Replacement of Engineer ........................................................................................................................................... 28
8.03 Furnish Data .............................................................................................................................................................. 28
8.04 Pay When Due ........................................................................................................................................................... 28
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .................................................................................................................. 28
8.06 Insurance ................................................................................................................................................................... 28
8.07 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................................................... 28
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................................................. 28
8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................... 28
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................................................................................... 28
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ......................................................................................................................... 28
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 28
9.01 Owner’s Representative ............................................................................................................................................. 28
9.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................................................... 29
9.03 Project Representative ............................................................................................................................................... 29
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................................................. 29
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ........................................................................................................................................... 29
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ......................................................................................................... 29
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 29
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ....................................................... 29
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ......................................................................................... 30
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 30
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................................... 30
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................................... 30
10.03 Execution of Change Orders .................................................................................................................................. 30
10.04 Notification to Surety ............................................................................................................................................. 31
10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................................................... 31
ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................. 31
11.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 31
11.02 Allowances ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
11.03 Unit Price Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 33
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................................................... 34
12.01 Change of Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 34
12.02 Change of Contract Times ..................................................................................................................................... 34
12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................................... 34
ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 35
13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 35
13.02 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 35
13.03 Tests and Inspections ............................................................................................................................................. 35
13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................................................... 36
00 72 00 - 4
Page
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................................................... 36
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................................. 36
13.07 Correction Period .................................................................................................................................................. 36
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................................................... 37
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work...................................................................................................................... 37
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................................. 37
14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................................................................................................................. 37
14.02 Progress Payments ................................................................................................................................................ 38
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .............................................................................................................................. 39
14.04 Substantial Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 39
14.05 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................................................. 40
14.06 Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................................................... 40
14.07 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................ 40
14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................................................... 41
14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................................................... 41
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................... 41
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work..................................................................................................................................... 41
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause........................................................................................................................... 41
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience............................................................................................................... 42
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .............................................................................................................. 42
ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................................................................................................ 43
16.01 Methods and Procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 43
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................................................... 43
17.01 Giving Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 43
17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................................................ 43
17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................................................. 43
17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................................................... 43
17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................................................... 43
17.06 Headings ................................................................................................................................................................ 43
00 72 00 - 5
00 72 00 - 6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or
Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or
1.01 Defined Terms Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the
terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements a third party is not a Claim.
or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital
letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings 11. Contract--The entire and integrated written
indicated which are applicable to both the singular and agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning
plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,
terms with initial capital letters in the Contract representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.
Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so
designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies
1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract
issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor’s
or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface
Contract Documents. and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
2. Agreement--The written instrument which is 13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by
evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in
covering the Work. accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the
Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03
3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable in the case of Unit Price Work).
to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the
course of the Work in requesting progress or final pay- 14. Contract Times--The number of days or the
ments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii)
complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as
4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final
than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing payment.
asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels
established by the United States Occupational Safety and 15. Contractor--The individual or entity with
Health Administration. whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.
5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder 16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for
submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices definition.
for the Work to be performed.
17. Drawings--That part of the Contract
6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
a Bid directly to Owner. graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the
Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and
7. Bidding Documents--The Bidding other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so
Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents defined.
(including all Addenda).
18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date
8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on
acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last
supplements. of the two parties to sign and deliver.
9. Change Order--A document recommended by 19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as
Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and such in the Agreement.
authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work
or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract 20. Field Order--A written order issued by
Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but
Agreement.
00 72 00 - 7
which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times. 32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and
maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and
21. General Requirements--Sections of Division duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan
1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.
to all sections of the Specifications.
33. Project--The total construction of which the
22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may
presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, be the whole, or a part.
Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such
quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial 34. Project Manual--The bound documentary
danger to persons or property exposed thereto in information prepared for bidding and constructing the
connection with the Work. Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual,
which may be bound in one or more volumes, is
23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous contained in the table(s) of contents.
Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of
the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as 35. Radioactive Material--Source, special
amended from time to time. nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic
Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as
24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations- amended from time to time.
-Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations,
ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner,
bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor.
jurisdiction.
37. Resident Project Representative--The
25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or authorized representative of Engineer who may be
encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or assigned to the Site or any part thereof.
personal property.
38. Samples--Physical examples of materials,
26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the equipment, or workmanship that are representative of
Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- some portion of the Work and which establish the
tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the standards by which such portion of the Work will be
Work. judged.
27. Notice of Award--The written notice by 39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared
Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and
compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions the time requirements to support scheduled performance
precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the of related construction activities.
Agreement.
40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared
28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the
Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used
Contract Times will commence to run and on which as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for
Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Payment.
Contract Documents.
41. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams,
29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom illustrations, schedules, and other data or information
Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for
the Work is to be performed. Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some
portion of the Work.
30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls.
42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract
31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the
any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and
of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and easements for access thereto, and such other lands
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petro- furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of
leum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, Contractor.
and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude
oils.
00 72 00 - 8
43. Specifications--That part of the Contract Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the
Documents consisting of written requirements for Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface
materials, equipment, systems, standards and workman- or physical conditions under which the Work is to be per-
ship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative formed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will
requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is
evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or
44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity documented by a Work Change Directive will be
having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order
Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if
at the Site. any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.
45. Substantial Completion--The time at which 1.02 Terminology
the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to
the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or A. The following words or terms are not defined
a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract
accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Documents, have the following meaning.
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the
purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives
complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all
or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as
thereof. allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered”, “as directed” or
terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of
46. Successful Bidder--The Bidder submitting a professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the
responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,”
“proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or
47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the import are used to describe an action or determination of
Contract Documents which amends or supplements these Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise
General Conditions. of professional judgment, action or determination will be
solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance
48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, with the requirements of and information in the Contract
supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a Documents and conformance with the design concept of
direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or
to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a
Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any
such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be
49. Underground Facilities--All underground effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to
pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any
tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to
any encasements containing such facilities, including the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of
those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petro- the Contract Documents.
leum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids C. Day
or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24
50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
basis of unit prices.
D. Defective
51. Work--The entire construction or the various
separately identifiable parts thereof required to be 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the
provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
and is the result of performing or providing all labor, faulty, or deficient in that it:
services, and documentation necessary to produce such
construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating a. does not conform to the Contract Documents,
all materials and equipment into such construction, all as or
required by the Contract Documents.
b. does not meet the requirements of any
52. Work Change Directive--A written statement applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the approval referred to in the Contract Documents,
Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by or
00 72 00 - 9
2.02 Copies of Documents
c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recom-
mendation of final payment (unless A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten
responsibility for the protection thereof has been printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project
assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request
accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). at the cost of reproduction.
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to
Proceed
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection
with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to A. The Contract Times will commence to run on
supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement
to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in
or installation and in usable or operable condition. the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given
at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
2. The word “install,” when used in connection Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times
with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day
into use or place in final position said services, materials, of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date
or equipment complete and ready for intended use. of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used 2.04 Starting the Work
in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on
equipment complete and ready for intended use. the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No
Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which
4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or the Contract Times commence to run.
“provide” is not used in connection with services,
materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an 2.05 Before Starting Construction
obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied.
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise
Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are submit to Engineer for timely review:
used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such
recognized meaning. 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating
the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and
completing the various stages of the Work, including any
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the
A. When Contractor delivers the executed Work which includes quantities and prices of items which
counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall when added together equal the Contract Price and
also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient
required to furnish. detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during
performance of the Work. Such prices will include an
B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to
the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each each item of Work.
deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of 2.06 Preconstruction Conference
insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either
of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a
which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and
purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. others as appropriate will be held to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work and to
discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A,
procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other
00 72 00 - 10
submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and
maintaining required records. 3.02 Reference Standards
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and
Regulations
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first
Application for Payment a conference attended by 1. Reference to standards, specifications,
Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization,
held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such
below the schedules submitted in accordance with reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the
Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or
days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on
and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no
made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in
submitted to Engineer. the Contract Documents.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to 2. No provision of any such standard, specifica-
Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work tion, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall
to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of
will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcon-
Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or tractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set
progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or
Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, or
Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be authority to supervise or direct the performance of the
acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrange- Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
ment for reviewing and processing the required inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract
submittals. Documents.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it
provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to A. Reporting Discrepancies
component parts of the Work.
1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
AMENDING, REUSE Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures therein and all applicable field measurements.
Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer
3.01 Intent any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which
Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; interpretation or clarification from Engineer before
what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. proceeding with any Work affected thereby.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) During Performance of Work: If, during the performance
to be constructed in accordance with the Contract of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error,
Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents
materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred or between the Contract Documents and any provision of
from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of
or trade usage as being required to produce the intended the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or
result will be provided whether or not specifically called code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
for at no additional cost to Owner. shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor
shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until
Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents
provided in Article 9. has been issued by one of the methods indicated in
Paragraph 3.04.
00 72 00 - 11
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or
Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the
unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known Project or any other project without written consent of
thereof. Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or
adaption by Engineer.
B. Resolving Discrepancies
B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated survive final payment, or termination of the Contract.
in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining
Documents shall take precedence in resolving any copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.
conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the
provisions of the Contract Documents and: 3.06 Electronic Data
a. the provisions of any standard, specification, A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or
manual, code, or instruction (whether or not Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or
specifically incorporated by reference in the Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the
Contract Documents); or printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in
electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations types are furnished only for the convenience of the
applicable to the performance of the Work receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s
of the Contract Documents would result in sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic
violation of such Law or Regulation). files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract B. Because data stored in electronic media
Documents format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or
otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform
provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which
or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the
Change Order or a Work Change Directive. data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-
day acceptance period will be corrected by the
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents transferring party.
may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more C. When transferring documents in electronic
of the following ways: media format, the transferring party makes no representa-
tions as to long term compatibility, usability, or read-
1. A Field Order; ability of documents resulting from the use of software
application packages, operating systems, or computer
2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator.
Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph
6.17.D.3); or
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;
3. Engineer’s written interpretation or SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
clarification. HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier 4.01 Availability of Lands
or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all
of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall
Contractor, shall not: notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not
of general application but specifically related to use of the
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights Site with which Contractor must comply in performing
in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay
documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or for easements for permanent structures or permanent
bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer’s consultants, changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are
including electronic media editions; or unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
00 72 00 - 12
extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor
may make a Claim therefor as provided in A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any
Paragraph 10.05. subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the
Site that is uncovered or revealed either:
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall
furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any
title and legal description of the lands upon which the “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as
Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or
construction lien against such lands in accordance with 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the
applicable Laws and Regulations. Contract Documents; or
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated
lands and access thereto that may be required for in the Contract Documents; or
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment. 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially
from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions recognized as inherent in work of the character provided
for in the Contract Documents;
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary
Conditions identify: then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or
1. those reports of explorations and tests of sub- physical conditions or performing any Work in
surface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that connection therewith (except in an emergency as required
Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in
and writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further
disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection
2. those drawings of physical conditions in or therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or order to do so.
contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities)
that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written
Documents. notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will
promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or
Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and
and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not conclusions.
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified
in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or
their Related Entities with respect to: both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the
existence of such differing subsurface or physical
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s
for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, subject, however, to the following:
sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed
by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs a. such condition must meet any one or more of
incident thereto; or the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A;
and
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and
information contained in such reports or shown or b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit
indicated in such drawings; or Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price
will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion 9.07 and 11.03.
drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information.
00 72 00 - 13
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjust-
ment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: c. coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities, including Owner,
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such during construction, and
conditions at the time Contractor made a final
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract d. the safety and protection of all such
Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Underground Facilities and repairing any
Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated damage thereto resulting from the Work.
contract; or
B. Not Shown or Indicated
b. the existence of such condition could
reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or
result of any examination, investigation, revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown
exploration, test, or study of the Site and or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable
contiguous areas required by the Bidding accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall,
Requirements or Contract Documents to be promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
conducted by or for Contractor prior to disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any
Contractor's making such final commitment; or Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as
required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as Underground Facility and give written notice to that
required by Paragraph 4.03.A. owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will
promptly review the Underground Facility and determine
3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of Contract Documents to reflect and document the con-
any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, sequences of the existence or location of the Underground
or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be respon-
Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any sible for the safety and protection of such Underground
of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor Facility.
for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or Contract Documents is required, a Work Change
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or document such consequences. An equitable adjustment
anticipated project. shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, to the extent that they are attributable to the
4.04 Underground Facilities existence or location of any Underground Facility that
was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably
respect to existing Underground Facilities at or have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated.
contiguous to the Site is based on information and data If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitle-
furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such ment to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such
Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or
Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in
Supplementary Conditions: Paragraph 10.05.
1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible 4.05 Reference Points
for the accuracy or completeness of any such information
or data; and A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to
establish reference points for construction which in
2. the cost of all of the following will be Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor
included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible
full responsibility for: for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the
established reference points and property monuments, and
a. reviewing and checking all such information shall make no changes or relocations without the prior
and data, written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to
Engineer whenever any reference point or property
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
indicated in the Contract Documents, because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and
00 72 00 - 14
shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to
relocation of such reference points or property evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any.
monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site Work in connection with such condition or in any affected
area until after Owner has obtained any required permits
A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice:
the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is
those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or
Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such
have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor
the Contract Documents. cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work
Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may
and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified
in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance F. If after receipt of such written notice
on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to
their Related Entities with respect to: resume such Work under such special conditions, then
Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings area affected by such condition to be deleted from the
for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an
and procedures of construction to be employed by adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result
Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party
thereto; or may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance
information contained in such reports or shown or with Article 7.
indicated in such drawings; or
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless
drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the
interpretations, opinions or information. officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
Documents to be within the scope of the Work. costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous
Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous
Environmental Condition created with any materials Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated
brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the
Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is Contract Documents to be included within the scope of
responsible. the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by
anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify
Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for any individual or entity from and against the
whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own
Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: negligence.
(i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all
Work in connection with such condition and in any area H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
(and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
00 72 00 - 15
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or A. All bonds and insurance required by the
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or
created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue
obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages
from and against the consequences of that individual’s or so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall
entity’s own negligence. also meet such additional requirements and qualifications
as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and
4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental 5.03 Certificates of Insurance
Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies
to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence
of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds maintain.
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies
payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence
payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the of insurance requested by Contractor or any other
Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase
until one year after the date when final payment becomes and maintain.
due or until completion of the correction period specified
in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance
otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and as will provide protection
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and
Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract
sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor,
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or
on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be
the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, liable:
U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the 1. claims under workers’ compensation,
agent’s authority to act. disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit
acts;
C. If the surety on any bond furnished by
Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
its right to do business is terminated in any state where occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s
any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the employees;
requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall
promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
days after the event giving rise to such notification, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
provide another bond and surety, both of which shall Contractor’s employees;
comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and
5.02. 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably
available personal injury liability coverage which are
sustained:
00 72 00 - 16
a. by any person as a result of an offense directly claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years
or indirectly related to the employment of such after final payment.
person by Contractor, or
a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other
b. by any other person for any other reason; additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate
5. claims for damages, other than to the Work of insurance has been issued, evidence
itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible satisfactory to Owner and any such additional
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting insured of continuation of such insurance at final
therefrom; and payment and one year thereafter.
6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. A. In addition to the insurance required to be
provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at
B. The policies of insurance required by this Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s
Paragraph 5.04 shall: expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect
Owner against claims which may arise from operations
1. with respect to insurance required by under the Contract Documents.
Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include
as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion 5.06 Property Insurance
regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and
any other individuals or entities identified in the A. Unless otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and
additional insureds, and include coverage for the maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in
respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such such deductible amounts as may be provided in the
additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and
additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all Regulations). This insurance shall:
claims covered thereby;
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor,
2. include at least the specific coverages and be Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals
written for not less than the limits of liability provided in or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
Regulations, whichever is greater; consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,
each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and
3. include completed operations insurance; shall be listed as an insured or additional insured;
4. include contractual liability insurance 2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or
covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall
Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to
the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials
5. contain a provision or endorsement that the and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least
coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning,
changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious
written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal,
and to each other additional insured identified in the demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and
Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of Regulations, water damage, (other than caused by flood)
insurance has been issued (and the certificates of and such other perils or causes of loss as may be
insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions;
Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or
6. remain in effect at least until final payment replacement of any insured property (including but not
and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the
Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by
7. with respect to completed operations Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided
insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a
00 72 00 - 17
that such materials and equipment have been included in 5.07 Waiver of Rights
an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;
A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies
5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect
Owner; Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all
other individuals or entities identified in the
6. include testing and startup; and Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or
additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners,
7. be maintained in effect until final payment is employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each
made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, and any of them) in such policies and will provide
Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by
each other additional insured to whom a certificate of the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such
insurance has been issued. policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the
event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will
B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or
boiler and machinery insurance or additional property additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor
insurance as may be required by the Supplementary waive all rights against each other and their respective
Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them
Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or
in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered
directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and by such policies and any other property insurance
subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such
deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other
an insured or additional insured. individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
C. All the policies of insurance (and the (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them)
purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph under such policies for losses and damages so caused.
5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that
coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds
changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise
written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor payable under any policy so issued.
and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate
of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing subcontractors of each and any of them for:
and maintaining any property insurance specified in this
Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use,
Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any or other consequential loss extending beyond direct
deductible amounts that are identified in the physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work
Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other
identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, perils whether or not insured by Owner; and
Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if
any of them wishes property insurance coverage within 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or
the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and main- part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from
tain it at the purchaser’s own expense. fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any
property insurance maintained on the completed Project
E. If Contractor requests in writing that other or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization
special insurance be included in the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion
policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment
possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.
be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner
shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred
other insurance has been procured by Owner. to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any such loss,
damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no
00 72 00 - 18
rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or
Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of Insurer
them.
A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph
A. Any insured loss under the policies of 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before
insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to
with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in
the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated
requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance
Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,
account any money so received and shall distribute it in but the property insurance shall not be canceled or
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or
may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the occupancy.
damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys
so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and
the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order . ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence
parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days
after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct
power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as
such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with
such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely
Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the responsible for the means, methods, techniques,
insurers and, if required in writing by any party in sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor
interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or
performance of such duties. Engineer in the design or specification of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
Replace required by the Contract Documents.
A. If either Owner or Contractor has any B. At all times during the progress of the Work,
objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions Contractor shall assign a competent resident
of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and superintendent who shall not be replaced without written
maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary
on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor’s
Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on
party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or
certificates (or other evidence requested) required by received from the superintendent shall be binding on
Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each Contractor.
provide to the other such additional information in respect
of insurance provided as the other may reasonably 6.02 Labor; Working Hours
request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all
of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably
Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and
party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the perform construction as required by the Contract
start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to discipline and order at the Site.
any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to
obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or
party's interests at the expense of the party who was protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site
required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the
shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be
performed during regular working hours. Contractor will
00 72 00 - 19
not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, quality required. Unless the specification or description
Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written contains or is followed by words reading that no like,
consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is
after prior written notice to Engineer. permitted, other items of material or equipment or
material or equipment of other Suppliers may be
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances
described below.
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full 1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by
transportation, construction equipment and machinery, Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will
water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an
facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the
testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be
accomplished without compliance with some or all of the
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into requirements for approval of proposed substitute items.
the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed
of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in item of material or equipment will be considered
the Contract Documents. All special warranties and functionally equal to an item so named if:
guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly
run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including Engineer determines that:
reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and
quality of materials and equipment. 1) it is at least equal in materials of
construction, quality, durability, appearance,
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, strength, and design characteristics;
applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used,
cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions 2) it will reliably perform at least
of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be equally well the function and achieve the results
provided in the Contract Documents. imposed by the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole,
6.04 Progress Schedule
3) it has a proven record of performance
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress and availability of responsive service; and
Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07
as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and
below. incorporated into the Work:
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for 1) there will be no increase in cost to
acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and
proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will
not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjust- 2) it will conform substantially to the
ments will comply with any provisions of the General detailed requirements of the item named in the
Requirements applicable thereto. Contract Documents.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress 2. Substitute Items
Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of
12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by material or equipment proposed by Contractor
a Change Order. does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under
Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” proposed substitute item.
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information
specified or described in the Contract Documents by as provided below to allow Engineer to deter-
using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a mine that the item of material or equipment
particular Supplier, the specification or description is proposed is essentially equivalent to that named
intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests
00 72 00 - 20
for review of proposed substitute items of 4) and shall contain an itemized
material or equipment will not be accepted by estimate of all costs or credits that will result
Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. directly or indirectly from use of such substitute
item, including costs of redesign and claims of
c. The requirements for review by Engineer will other contractors affected by any resulting
be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as change,
supplemented in the General Requirements and
as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the B. Substitute Construction Methods or
circumstances. Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly
d. Contractor shall make written application to required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may
Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique,
of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to sequence, or procedure of construction approved by
furnish or use. The application: Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information
to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to
1) shall certify that the proposed determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that
substitute item will: expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The
requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to
a) perform adequately the functions and those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
achieve the results called for by the
general design, C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be
allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each
b) be similar in substance to that proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A
specified, and and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish
additional data about the proposed substitute item.
c) be suited to the same use as that Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-
specified; equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized
until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be
2) will state: evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an
approved Shop Drawing for an “or-equal.” Engineer will
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of advise Contractor in writing of any negative
the proposed substitute item will determination.
prejudice Contractor’s achievement of
Substantial Completion on time; D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require
Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special
b) whether or not use of the proposed performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any
substitute item in the Work will require substitute.
a change in any of the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer
other direct contract with Owner for will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute
other work on the Project) to adapt the proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to
design to the proposed substitute item; Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Whether or not Engineer
and approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by
Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the
c) whether or not incorporation or use charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed
of the proposed substitute item in substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the
connection with the Work is subject to charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract
payment of any license fee or royalty; Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct
contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of
3) will identify: each proposed substitute.
a) all variations of the proposed F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall
substitute item from that specified , and provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.
b) available engineering, sales,
maintenance, repair, and replacement
services;
00 72 00 - 21
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect
Others contract with Contractor.
A. Contractor shall not employ any E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities
(including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate
Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, with Engineer through Contractor.
against whom Owner may have reasonable objection.
Contractor shall not be required to employ any F. The divisions and sections of the
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings
furnish or perform any of the Work against whom shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among
Contractor has reasonable objection. Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be
performed by any specific trade.
B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the
identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other G. All Work performed for Contractor by a
individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date appropriate agreement between Contractor and the
prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and
the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
(either in writing or by failing to make written objection Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is
thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an
in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of additional insured on the property insurance provided in
any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor
entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions
reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights
shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer,, and all other
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds
cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them)
any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of,
entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of
constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to loss covered by such policies and any other property
reject defective Work. insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any
such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed
C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain
and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the the same.
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or
entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties
Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and
omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and
royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
1. shall create for the benefit of any such performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any of any invention, design, process, product, or device
contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or others. If a particular invention, design, process, product,
entity, nor or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use
in the performance of the Work and if to the actual
2. shall create any obligation on the part of knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any
moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such
individual or entity except as may otherwise be required rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract
by Laws and Regulations. Documents.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harm-
Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or less Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
00 72 00 - 22
subcontractors of each and any of them from and against 6.10 Taxes
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place
or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copy- of the Project which are applicable during the
rights incident to the use in the performance of the Work performance of the Work.
or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product, or device not 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas
specified in the Contract Documents.
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas
6.08 Permits
1. Contractor shall confine construction equip-
A. Unless otherwise provided in the ment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the
Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and operations of workers to the Site and other areas
pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not
assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with
permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all govern- construction equipment or other materials or equipment.
mental charges and inspection fees necessary for the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any
prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or
of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas
Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all resulting from the performance of the Work.
charges of utility owners for connections for providing
permanent service to the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner
or occupant because of the performance of the Work,
6.09 Laws and Regulations Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by
negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.
and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harm-
Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be respon- less Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
sible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any partners, employees, agents, consultants and
Laws or Regulations. subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance
However, it shall not be Contractor’s primary of the Work.
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the
but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall
obligations under Paragraph 3.03. keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris
the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on
the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of
subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work
Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the
entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the
such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and
provided in Paragraph 10.05. machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to
original condition all property not designated for
alteration by the Contract Documents.
00 72 00 - 23
perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of
D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor
nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of
manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of
Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent Owner or Engineer, or anyone employed by any of them,
property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and
not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part,
6.12 Record Documents to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field D. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for
Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until
good order and annotated to show changes made during such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has
construction. These record documents together with all issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance
approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable
Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection
Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, with Substantial Completion).
Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to
Engineer for Owner. 6.14 Safety Representative
6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and
experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. and programs.
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
A. Contractor shall be responsible for
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets
by the Work; or other hazard communication information required to be
made available to or exchanged between or among
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or
be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Regulations.
Site; and
6.16 Emergencies
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, A. In emergencies affecting the safety or
roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site
not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to
the course of construction. prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable believes that any significant changes in the Work or
Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused
property, or to the protection of persons or property from thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer
damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all determines that a change in the Contract Documents is
necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. required because of the action taken by Contractor in
Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive
Underground Facilities and other utility owners when or Change Order will be issued.
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal, 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples
relocation, and replacement of their property.
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property Samples to Engineer for review and approval in
referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, accordance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals
directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be
any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or identified as Engineer may require.
entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
00 72 00 - 24
1. Shop Drawings Drawings and Samples and with the require-
ments of the Work and the Contract Documents.
a. Submit number of copies specified in the
General Requirements. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific
written certification that Contractor has satisfied
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents
complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that
specified performance and design criteria, submittal.
materials, and similar data to show Engineer the
services, materials, and equipment Contractor 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give
proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the
review the information for the limited purposes Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements
required by Paragraph 6.17.D. of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a
written communication separate from the Shop Drawing’s
2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific
Samples to Engineer for review and approval in notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample
accordance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals. submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each
such variation.
a. Submit number of Samples specified in the
Specifications. D. Engineer’s Review
b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop
Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule
the use for which intended and other data as of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review
Engineer may require to enable Engineer to and approval will be only to determine if the items
review the submittal for the limited purposes covered by the submittals will, after installation or
required by Paragraph 6.17.D. incorporation in the Work, conform to the information
given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with
B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required the design concept of the completed Project as a
by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review Documents.
and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole
expense and responsibility of Contractor. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not
extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
C. Submittal Procedures procedures of construction (except where a particular
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con-
1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or struction is specifically and expressly called for by the
Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate
a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
specified performance and design criteria, which the item functions.
installation requirements, materials, catalog
numbers, and similar information with respect 3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not
thereto; relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation
from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
b. the suitability of all materials with respect to Contractor has complied with the requirements of
intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written
storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to approval of each such variation by specific written
the performance of the Work; notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the
Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval
c. all information relative to Contractor’s respon- shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for
sibilities for means, methods, techniques, complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.
sequences, and procedures of construction, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto; E. Resubmittal Procedures
and
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by
d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Engineer and shall return the required number of
Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as
required, new Samples for review and approval.
00 72 00 - 25
Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to 6.20 Indemnification
revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals. A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harm-
6.18 Continuing the Work less Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagree- all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
ments with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
postponed pending resolution of any disputes or attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that
any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but
that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission
Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any
Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any
of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable .
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee
hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: B. In any and all claims against Owner or
Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents,
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance officers, directors, partners, or employees by any
or operation by persons other than Contractor, employee (or the survivor or personal representative of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or
constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance other individual or entity under workers’ compensation
with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the acts.
Contract Documents:
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor
1. observations by Engineer; under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of
Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners,
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising
Owner of any progress or final payment; out of:
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to
Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports,
by Owner; surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to
thereof by Owner; give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or
damage.
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services
acceptability by Engineer;
A. Contractor will not be required to provide
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or professional design services unless such services are
specifically required by the Contract Documents for a
7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. portion of the Work or unless such services are required
to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction
00 72 00 - 26
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a
Contractor shall not be required to provide professional Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
services in violation of applicable law. 10.05.
B. If professional design services or B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor
certifications by a design professional related to systems, who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner
materials or equipment are specifically required of and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with
Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a
Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause materials and equipment and the execution of such other
such services or certifications to be provided by a work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs.
properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the
shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, Work that may be required to properly connect or other-
certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals wise make its several parts come together and properly
prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not
submittals related to the Work designed or certified by endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or
such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter
professional’s written approval when submitted to their work with the written consent of Engineer and the
Engineer. others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to
upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the the extent that there are comparable provisions for the
services, certifications or approvals performed by such benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between
design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.
specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. C. If the proper execution or results of any part
of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such
review and approval of design calculations and design other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any
drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that
for conformance with performance and design criteria render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s
Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such
Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations other work as fit and proper for integration with
and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and
in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. deficiencies in such other work.
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the 7.02 Coordination
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required
by the Contract Documents. A. If Owner intends to contract with others for
the performance of other work on the Project at the Site,
the following will be set forth in Supplementary
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE Conditions:
1. the individual or entity who will have
7.01 Related Work at Site authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various contractors will be identified;
A. Owner may perform other work related to the
Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or via other 2. the specific matters to be covered by such
direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the
Contract Documents, then: 3. the extent of such authority and
responsibilities will be provided.
1. written notice thereof will be given to
Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and B. Unless otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole
2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree authority and responsibility for such coordination.
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of
any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
00 72 00 - 27
7.03 Legal Relationships 8.06 Insurance
A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to
for utilities not under the control of Owner. purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in Article 5.
B. Each other direct contract of Owner under
Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is 8.07 Change Orders
liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct
delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders
result of the other contractor’s actions or inactions. as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.
C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and
disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to certain
result of Contractor’s action or inactions. inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph
13.03.B.
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have
8.01 Communications to Contractor control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor
Contractor through Engineer. to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible
8.02 Replacement of Engineer for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
A. In case of termination of the employment of
Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental
Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status Condition
under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
Engineer. A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an
undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set
8.03 Furnish Data forth in Paragraph 4.06.
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to
8.04 Pay When Due furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner’s
when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the
14.07.C. Supplementary Conditions.
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING
A. Owner’s duties in respect of providing lands CONSTRUCTION
and easements and providing engineering surveys to
establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01
and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying 9.01 Owner’s Representative
and making available to Contractor copies of reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing during the construction period. The duties and responsi-
surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the bilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as
Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Owner’s representative during construction are set forth
Contract Documents. in the Contract Documents and will not be changed with-
out written consent of Owner and Engineer.
00 72 00 - 28
9.02 Visits to Site who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner
or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to
as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment,
experienced and qualified design professional the a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
progress that has been made and the quality of the various 10.05.
aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on infor-
mation obtained during such visits and observations, 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work
Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in
general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work
Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer
make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to believes will not produce a completed Project that con-
check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s forms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice
efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a the integrity of the design concept of the completed
greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to
basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep require special inspection or testing of the Work as
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is
endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. fabricated, installed, or completed.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and
without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see
visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will Paragraph 6.17.
not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and
sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any drawings submitted in response to a delegation of
failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21.
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to
9.03 Project Representative Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to
furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the
Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work
Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limita- A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities
tions on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representa- Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the
tive or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters
Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the before rendering a written decision thereon (by recom-
responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of mendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise).
such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and
Supplementary Conditions. binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect
changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of
Paragraph 10.05.
A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in
the Work from the requirements of the Contract 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Documents and Acceptability of Work
Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in
and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, question and other matters between Owner and Contractor
00 72 00 - 29
arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and
the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the approvals, and other documentation required to be
requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine
performance of the Work, will be referred initially to generally that their content complies with the require-
Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise ments of, and in the case of certificates of inspections,
to the question. tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate
compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness,
render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner E. The limitations upon authority and
or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also
to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and
or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. assistants, if any.
The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the
event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes
of Paragraph 10.05.B. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue
referred will be final and binding on Owner and 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without
D. When functioning as interpreter and judge notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time
under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the
partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive.
connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall
good faith in such capacity. promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be
performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
Responsibilities
B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an
under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or Paragraph 10.05.
performance of any authority or responsibility by
Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the
individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with
agent of any of them. respect to any work performed that is not required by the
Contract Documents as amended, modified, or
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the
have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in
means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph
construction, or the safety precautions and programs 13.04.B.
incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the per- 10.03 Execution of Change Orders
formance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible
for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in A. Owner and Contractor shall execute
accordance with the Contract Documents. appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer
covering:
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts
or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by
Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required
any of the Work. because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph
13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
00 72 00 - 30
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s
Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).
undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually
performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each
and Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last
submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the
3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions
Times which embody the substance of any written in writing:
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph
10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part,
Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such
decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract 2. approve the Claim, or
Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but
during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to
Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it
Paragraph 6.18.A. would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For
purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice
10.04 Notification to Surety shall be deemed a denial.
A. If notice of any change affecting the general D. In the event that Engineer does not take action
scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price deemed denied.
or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any
bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph
will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or
applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and
any such change. Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the
dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within
10.05 Claims 30 days of such action or denial.
A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price
except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in
referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any
exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies
either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK;
or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
B. Notice: Written notice stating the general
nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to 11.01 Cost of the Work
Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but
in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work
giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in
Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by
of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When
shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or
the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is
(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of such be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional
Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall or incremental costs required because of the change in the
be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim.
Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by
Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than
of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include
by claimant's written statement that the adjustment only the following items, and shall not include any of the
claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B.
believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The
opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct
employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work
00 72 00 - 31
under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by market value, of such items used but not
Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, consumed which remain the property of
without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other Contractor.
personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for
employees not employed full time on the Work shall be c. Rentals of all construction equipment and
apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented
Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries from Contractor or others in accordance with
and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall rental agreements approved by Owner with the
include social security contributions, unemployment, advice of Engineer, and the costs of
excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs
holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of shall be in accordance with the terms of said
performing Work outside of regular working hours, on rental agreements. The rental of any such equip-
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the
the above to the extent authorized by Owner. use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes
and incorporated in the Work, including costs of related to the Work, and for which Contractor is
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
services required in connection therewith. All cash
discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence
deposits funds with Contractor with which to make of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone
payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and for whose acts any of them may be liable, and
returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall royalty payments and fees for permits and
accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so licenses.
that they may be obtained.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses)
3. Payments made by Contractor to caused by damage to the Work, not compensated
Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If by insurance or otherwise, sustained by
required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive Contractor in connection with the performance
bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and of the Work (except losses and damages within
Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will the deductible amounts of property insurance
then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, established in accordance with Paragraph
if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have
the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the resulted from causes other than the negligence of
Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone
and fee shall be determined in the same manner as directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such
Paragraph 11.01. losses shall include settlements made with the
written consent and approval of Owner. No such
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not losses, damages, and expenses shall be included
limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of
surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for determining Contractor’s fee.
services specifically related to the Work.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary
5. Supplemental costs including the following: facilities at the Site.
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long
travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s distance telephone calls, telephone service at the
employees incurred in discharge of duties Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in
connected with the Work. connection with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and
maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equip- insurance Contractor is required by the Contract
ment, machinery, appliances, office, and Documents to purchase and maintain.
temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools
not owned by the workers, which are consumed B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work
in the performance of the Work, and cost, less shall not include any of the following items:
00 72 00 - 32
B. Cash Allowances
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of
Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partner- 1. Contractor agrees that:
ships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety
managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, a. the cash allowances include the cost to
auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)
expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel of materials and equipment required by the
employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all
Contractor’s principal or branch office for general applicable taxes; and
administration of the Work and not specifically included
in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling
to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit,
Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered and other expenses contemplated for the cash
administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances, and no demand
2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch for additional payment on account of any of the
offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. foregoing will be valid.
3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, C. Contingency Allowance
including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for
the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency
payments. allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover
unanticipated costs.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change
by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to
liable, including but not limited to, the correction of reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work
defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be
wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to correspondingly adjusted.
property.
11.03 Unit Price Work
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of
any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and A. Where the Contract Documents provide that
expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B. all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price
performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work
be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in
value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a the Agreement.
Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined
on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit
determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial
D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities
Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the
and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally provisions of Paragraph 9.07.
accepted accounting practices and submit in a form
acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
together with supporting data. amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately
11.02 Allowances identified item.
A. It is understood that Contractor has included D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered Paragraph 10.05 if:
to be performed for such sums and by such persons or
entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor differs materially and
00 72 00 - 33
significantly from the estimated quantity of such item
indicated in the Agreement; and a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1
and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with percent;
respect to any other item of Work; and
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3,
3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;
to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having
incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on
is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no
are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph
or decrease. 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who
actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will
be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs
CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier
Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a
fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next
12.01 Change of Contract Price lower tier Subcontractor;
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs
Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5,
Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted and 11.01.B;
by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the
other party to the Contract in accordance with the e. the amount of credit to be allowed by
provisions of Paragraph 10.05. Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal
Price will be determined as follows: to five percent of such net decrease; and
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit f. when both additions and credits are involved
prices contained in the Contract Documents, by in any one change, the adjustment in
application of such unit prices to the quantities of the Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis
items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs
11.03); or 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.
2. where the Work involved is not covered by 12.02 Change of Contract Times
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a
mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an A. The Contract Times may only be changed by
allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the
accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted
by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the
3. where the Work involved is not covered by other party to the Contract in accordance with the
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph
12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (deter- B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times
mined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjust-
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as ment in the Contract Times will be determined in
provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). accordance with the provisions of this Article 12.
C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for 12.03 Delays
overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
A. Where Contractor is prevented from
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or completing any part of the Work within the Contract
Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to
based on the following percentages of the various portions the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor
of the Cost of the Work: as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the
00 72 00 - 34
control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, 13.02 Access to Work
acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners
or other contractors performing other work as A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other
contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, representatives and personnel of Owner, independent
abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with
jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the
B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or Work at reasonable times for their observation,
utility owners performing other work for Owner as inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them
contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is proper and safe conditions for such access and advise
responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the per- them of Contractor’s Site safety procedures and programs
formance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall so that they may comply therewith as applicable.
be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s 13.03 Tests and Inspections
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is
conditioned on such adjustment being essential to A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice
Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
Contract Times. tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or
progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services
weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract
causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Documents except:
Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjust- 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by
ment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;
Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment
shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or
delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B
shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and
D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of
each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the
claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not Contract Documents.
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an
anticipated project. employee or other representative of such public body,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging
E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjust- and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all
ment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the
within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to required certificates of inspection or approval.
and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall
be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging
and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with
any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s
ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials,
DEFECTIVE WORK mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to
Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the
Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be
13.01 Notice of Defects performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which
Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to
Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor
corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if
requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation.
00 72 00 - 35
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or
13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless agent of any of them.
Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of
Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice. A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor
shall correct all defective Work, whether or not
13.04 Uncovering Work fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall
request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but
uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
Contractor’s expense. attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable or relating to such correction or removal (including but
that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, others).
shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may B. When correcting defective Work under the
require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,
all necessary labor, material, and equipment. Contractor shall take no action that would void or other-
wise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if
C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is any, on said Work.
defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and 13.07 Correction Period
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute A. If within one year after the date of Substantial
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Completion (or such longer period of time as may be
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and prescribed by the terms of any applicable special
testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work
replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as
Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be
Paragraph 10.05. defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to
Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written
D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be instructions:
defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or 1. repair such defective land or areas; or
both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and 2. correct such defective Work; or
reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with
Work that is not defective, and
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others
supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way
that the completed Work will conform to the Contract B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with
Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss
order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner or damage, Owner may have the defective Work
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work
of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges
of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
00 72 00 - 36
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply
costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair with any other provision of the Contract Documents,
or such removal and replacement (including but not Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor,
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of correct or remedy any such deficiency.
others) will be paid by Contractor.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under
C. In special circumstances where a particular this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
item of equipment is placed in continuous service before In connection with such corrective or remedial action,
Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the
period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and
so provided in the Specifications. suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take
possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in
Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or
and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
period hereunder with respect to such Work will be elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s
extended for an additional period of one year after such representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other
correction or removal and replacement has been contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants
satisfactorily completed. access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights
and remedies under this Paragraph.
E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph
13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages
The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be
charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner
Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of
pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or
Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of
defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as Contractor’s defective Work.
to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work
to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension
this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to of the Contract Times because of any delay in the
Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by
Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this
in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Paragraph 13.09.
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work
so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefore as COMPLETION
provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs
after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be
paid by Contractor to Owner. 14.01 Schedule of Values
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. The Schedule of Values established as
provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of
after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress
Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on
by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if the number of units completed.
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with
00 72 00 - 37
14.02 Progress Payments functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial
Completion, to the results of any subsequent
A. Applications for Payments tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a
final determination of quantities and
1. At least 20 days before the date established in classifications for Unit Price Work under
the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications
often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to stated in the recommendation); and
Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out
and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being
of the date of the Application and accompanied by such entitled to such payment appear to have been
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s
Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of responsibility to observe the Work.
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer
location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:
shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or
other documentation warranting that Owner has received a. inspections made to check the quality or the
the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens quantity of the Work as it has been performed
and evidence that the materials and equipment are have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect
covered by appropriate property insurance or other of the Work in progress, or involved detailed
arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of inspections of the Work beyond the
which must be satisfactory to Owner. responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer
in the Contract Documents; or
2. Beginning with the second Application for
Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of b. that there may not be other matters or issues
Contractor stating that all previous progress payments between the parties that might entitle Contractor
received on account of the Work have been applied on to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle
account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s
3. The amount of retainage with respect to Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor
progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including
final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:
B. Review of Applications
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a b. for the means, methods, techniques,
recommendation of payment and present the Application sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
to Owner or return the Application to Contractor safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to or
recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may
make the necessary corrections and resubmit the c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws
Application. and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s
performance of the Work, or
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a d. to make any examination to ascertain how or
representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s for what purposes Contractor has used the
observations on the Site of the executed Work as an moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or
experienced and qualified design professional and on
Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the e. to determine that title to any of the Work,
accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free
Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: and clear of any Liens.
a. the Work has progressed to the point 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole
indicated; or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it
would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner
b. the quality of the Work is generally in stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse
accordance with the Contract Documents to recommend any such payment or, because of sub-
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a sequently discovered evidence or the results of
00 72 00 - 38
subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such Contractor corrects to Owner’s satisfaction the reasons for
payment recommendation previously made, to such extent such action.
as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect
Owner from loss because: 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner’s
refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrong-
a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has fully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as
been damaged, requiring correction or determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1.
replacement;
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by
Change Orders; A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the
Work or complete Work in accordance with Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of
Paragraph 13.09; or payment free and clear of all Liens.
d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the 14.04 Substantial Completion
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraph 15.02.A. A. When Contractor considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner
C. Payment Becomes Due and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is
substantially complete (except for items specifically listed
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer
for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification,
paid by Owner to Contractor. Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of
D. Reduction in Payment completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work sub-
stantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in
1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full writing giving the reasons therefor.
amount recommended by Engineer because:
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially
a. claims have been made against Owner on complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative
account of Contractor’s performance or certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the
furnishing of the Work; date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to
the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven
Work, except where Contractor has delivered a days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which
specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such
objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not
c. there are other items entitling Owner to a substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after
set-off against the amount recommended; or submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify
Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after
d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers
of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within
14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor
15.02.A. a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or
2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative
amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give certificate as Engineer believes justified after considera-
Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to tion of any objections from Owner.
Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly
pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of D. At the time of delivery of the tentative
the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will
Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommenda-
thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when tion as to division of responsibilities pending final pay-
ment between Owner and Contractor with respect to
00 72 00 - 39
security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and 14.06 Final Inspection
guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise
in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the
Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with
be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in
writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
E. Owner shall have the right to exclude that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall
Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial immediately take such measures as are necessary to
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.
14.07 Final Payment
14.05 Partial Utilization
A. Application for Payment
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of
completed part of the Work which has specifically been Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in
Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance
functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
by Owner for its intended purpose without significant certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of
interference with Contractor’s performance of the inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in
remainder of the Work, subject to the following Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may
conditions. make application for final payment following the
procedure for progress payments.
1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in
writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of 2. The final Application for Payment shall be
the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:
intended use and substantially complete. If and when
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is a. all documentation called for in the Contract
substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner Documents, including but not limited to the
and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially evidence of insurance required by Paragraph
complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of 5.04.B.7;
Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and
Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such c. a list of all Claims against Owner that
part of the Work ready for its intended use and Contractor believes are unsettled; and
substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a
certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the d. complete and legally effective releases or
Work. waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights
arising out of or Liens filed in connection with
3. Within a reasonable time after either such the Work.
request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens
of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by
the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full
notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and
therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be receipts include all labor, services, material, and equip-
substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 ment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls,
will apply with respect to certification of Substantial material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. property might in any way be responsible have been paid
or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor
part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to
requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
insurance.
00 72 00 - 40
B. Engineer’s Review of Application and 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against
Acceptance Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens,
from defective Work appearing after final inspection
1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with
the Work during construction and final inspection, and the Contract Documents or the terms of any special
Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s
and accompanying documentation as required by the continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;
Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work and
has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against
Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Owner other than those previously made in accordance
Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged
recommendation of payment and present the Application by Owner in writing as still unsettled.
for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time
Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will TERMINATION
return the Application for Payment to Contractor,
indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work
make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application for Payment. A. At any time and without cause, Owner may
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of
C. Payment Becomes Due not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to
Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which
1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work
the Application for Payment and accompanying on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an
documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such
Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as
liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by provided in Paragraph 10.05.
Owner to Contractor.
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
14.08 Final Completion Delayed
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the
A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final following events will justify termination for cause:
completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the
Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient
Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established
fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time
be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the
Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required 2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations
in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the of any public body having jurisdiction;
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work
fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by 3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of
Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such Engineer; or
payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms
and conditions governing final payment, except that it 4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way
shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
14.09 Waiver of Claims B. If one or more of the events identified in
Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving
A. The making and acceptance of final payment Contractor (and surety ) seven days written notice of its
will constitute: intent to terminate the services of Contractor:
00 72 00 - 41
terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be
1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take paid for (without duplication of any items):
possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools,
appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in
Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the
used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for effective date of termination, including fair and
trespass or conversion), reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
2. incorporate in the Work all materials and 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid of termination in performing services and furnishing
Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract
Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus
3. complete the Work as Owner may deem fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such
expedient. expenses;
C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages
15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
further payment until the Work is completed. If the engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and
other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to
of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be termination.
paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and
damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss
pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss
and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by arising out of or resulting from such termination.
Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so
approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
When exercising any rights or remedies under this
Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i)
lowest price for the Work performed. the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days
by Owner or under an order of court or other public
D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application
15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii)
Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally
of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven
proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided
than 30 days of receipt of said notice. Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or
failure within that time, terminate the Contract and
E. Where Contractor’s services have been so recover from Owner payment on the same terms as
terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any provided in Paragraph 15.03.
rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then
existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and
payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
release Contractor from liability. Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment
within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed
F. If and to the extent that Contractor has for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined
provided a performance bond under the provisions of to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice
Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is
shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B, and made of all such amounts due Contractor, including
15.02.C. interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04
are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s
and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.
prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner,
00 72 00 - 42
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a
ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for
whom it is intended, or
16.01 Methods and Procedures 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known
A. Either Owner or Contractor may request to the giver of the notice.
mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a
decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision 17.02 Computation of Times
becomes final and binding. The mediation will be
governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules A. When any period of time is referred to in the
of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If
mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or
Arbitration Association and the other party to the Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the
Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the
effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. computation.
B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the 17.03 Cumulative Remedies
mediation process in good faith. The process shall be
concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The A. The duties and obligations imposed by these
date of termination of the mediation shall be determined General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
by application of the mediation rules referenced above. hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are
not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any
C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, rights and remedies available to any or all of them which
Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or
pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other
final and binding 30 days after termination of the provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of
mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated
Contractor: specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with
each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to
1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute which they apply.
resolution process provided for in the Supplementary
Conditions, or 17.04 Survival of Obligations
2. agrees with the other party to submit the A. All representations, indemnifications,
Claim to another dispute resolution process, or warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given
in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all
3. gives written notice to the other party of their continuing obligations indicated in the Contract
intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and
jurisdiction. acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of
the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.05 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of
17.01 Giving Notice the state in which the Project is located.
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract 17.06 Headings
Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if: A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for
convenience only and do not constitute parts of these
General Conditions.
00 72 00 - 43
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of
the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated
below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and
effect.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings
stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
SC-1.01. Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 1.01.A.45:
Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completion of the
Project’s operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner the full time,
uninterrupted, and continuous beneficial operation of the Work; and (ii) all required
functional, performance and acceptance or startup testing has been successfully
demonstrated for all components, devices, equipment, and instrumentation and
control to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the requirements of the
Specifications.
SC-1.01. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 1.01.A.52:
1.01.A.53. Specialist—The term Specialist refers to a person, partnership, firm, or
corporation of established reputation (or if newly organized, whose personnel have
previously established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in,
and which maintains a regular force of workers skilled in either (as applicable)
manufacturing or fabricating items required by the Contract Documents, or otherwise
performing Work required by the Contract Documents. Where the Specifications
require the installation by a Specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either
the manufacturer of the item, a person, partnership, firm, or corporation licensed by
the manufacturer, or a person, partnership, firm, or corporation who will perform the
Work under the manufacturer’s direct supervision.
SC-2.02. Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
2.02.A. Owner will furnish to Contractor up to 3 printed or hard copies of the
Drawings and Project Manual and one set in electronic format. Additional copies will
be furnished upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-3.01. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 3.01.C:
3.01.D. Sections of Division 1, General Requirements, govern the execution of the
Work of all sections of the Specifications.
SC-4.06. Delete Paragraphs 4.06.A and 4.06.B in their entirety and insert the following in
their place:
4.06.A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are
known to Owner or Engineer.
SC-5.02. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.02.A:
SC-5.02.B. Surety and insurance companies from which the bonds and insurance for
this Project are purchased shall have an A.M. Best’s rating of no less than VII, in
addition to other requirements specified herein.
SC-5.03. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.B:
SC-5.03.C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of full
compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a
deficiency from evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s
obligation to maintain such insurance.
SC-5.03.D. By requiring such insurance and insurance limits herein, Owner does not
represent that coverage and limits will necessarily be adequate to protect Contractor,
and such coverage and limits shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s
liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.
SC-5.04. Add the following language after Paragraph 5.04.B.1:
Include the following parties or entities as additional insured:
5.04.B.1.a. City of Boise, 150 N. Capitol Blvd., Boise, ID
5.04.B.1.b. CH2M HILL, 322 E. Front St., Suite 200, Boise, ID.
SC-5.04. Add the following new paragraph immediately following Paragraph 5.04.B:
5.04.C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the
General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or
greater where required by Laws and Regulations:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.04.C.1. Worker’s Compensation and related coverages under
Paragraphs 5.04.A.1 and 5.04.A.2 of the General Conditions:
5.04.C.1.a. State: Statutory.
5.04.C.1.b. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory.
5.04.C.1.c. Employer’s Liability: $1,000,000
5.04.C.2. Contractor’s General Liability under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3
through 5.04.A.6 of the General Conditions shall include completed
operations and product liability coverages and eliminate the exclusion with
respect to property under the care, custody and control of Contractor:
5.04.C.2.a. General Aggregate $2,000,000
5.04.C.2.b. Products - Completed Operations
Aggregate $2,000,000
5.04.C.2.c. Personal and Advertising Injury
(per person/Organization) $1,000,000
5.04.C.2.d. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and
Property Damage) $1,000,000
5.04.C.2.e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide
Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverages where applicable.
5.04.C.2.f. Excess or Umbrella Liability
1) General Aggregate $4,000,000
2) Each Occurrence $4,000,000
5.04.C.3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 5.04.A.6:
5.04.C.3.b. Property Damage and Bodily Injury:
Each Accident $1,000,000
5.04.C.3.c. Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-5.06. Delete Paragraph 5.06.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.06.A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at
the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof including Owner-furnished
products, the estimated cost of which is $1,250,000 Contractor shall be responsible
for any deductible or self-insured retention.
5.06.A.1 This insurance shall:
5.06.A.1.a. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors,
Engineer and any other individuals or entities identified herein, and the
officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other consultants
and subcontractors of any of them each of whom is deemed to have an
insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional
insured;
5.06.A.1.b. in addition to the individuals and entities specified, include
as additional insureds, the following:
5.06.A.1.b.(1) Here list by name (not genre) other persons or
entities to be included on policy as additional insureds; City of
Boise, 150 N. Capitol Blvd., Boise, ID.
5.06.A.1.c. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or open peril or
special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance
for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false
work, and materials and equipment in transit and shall insure against at
least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended
coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake,
collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of
Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood),
and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required
by the Supplementary Conditions;
5.06.A.1.c.(1) In addition to the above listed perils, the
property insurance shall include wind, mechanical/electrical
breakdown/failure, damage to electrical apparatus from
electrical currents, and loss of occupancy or business
interruption.
5.06.A.1.d. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of
any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers and architects);
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5.06.A.1.e. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at
another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being
incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment
have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by
Engineer;
5.06.A.1.f. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;
5.06.A.1.g. include testing and startup; and
5.06.A.1.h. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless
otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer
with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued.
5.06.A.2. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained
by Contractor in accordance with this Paragraph SC-5.06.A shall comply with
the requirements of Paragraph 5.06.C of the General Conditions.
SC-5.06. Delete Paragraph 5.06.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.06.B. Boiler and machinery insurance is not required for this Project.
SC-5.06. Delete Paragraph 5.06.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.06.B. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance
or additional property insurance as set forth below, which will include the interests of
Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, and any other persons or parties
indicated in Paragraph 5.04.B.1 of the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall
be listed as additional insured:
SC-5.06. Delete Paragraph 5.06.C in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.06.C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof)
required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor in accordance with
Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B shall contain a provision or endorsement that the
coverage afforded shall not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused
until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to Owner and to each other
additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and shall
contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-5.06. Delete Paragraph 5.06.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.06.E. If Owner requests in writing that other special perils be included in the
property insurance policies provided under Paragraphs 5.06.A or 5.06.B, Contractor
shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to
Owner by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site,
Contractor shall in writing advise Owner whether or not such other insurance has
been procured by Contractor.
SC-5.07. Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 5.07.A in its entirety and insert the following
in its place:
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such
waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Contractor as trustee or
otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
SC-5.08. Delete Paragraph 5.08.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.08.A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06
will be adjusted with Contractor and made payable to Contractor as fiduciary for the
insured, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable
mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Contractor shall deposit in a separate
account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is
reached the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received
applied on account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an
appropriate Change Order.
SC-5.08. Delete Paragraph 5.08.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
5.08.B. Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the
insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days
after the occurrence of loss to Contractor’s exercise of this power. If such objection
be made, Contractor as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such
agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Contractor as fiduciary shall
adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in
interest, Contractor as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such
duties.
SC-5.10. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 5.10.A:
The property insurance shall contain no partial occupancy restriction for utilization of
the Project by Owner for the purpose intended.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-6.02. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 6.02.B:
Contractor (and Subcontractor) regular working hours consist of up to 10 working
hours within an 11-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., excluding weekends
and holidays. Overtime work is work in excess of 40 hours per week.
SC-6.02. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B:
6.02.C. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s additional extraordinary
costs for onsite personnel overtime work resulting from Contractor’s overtime
operations. Reimbursement shall be on the cost basis defined in Paragraph 14.02.D.4
of these Supplementary Conditions.
SC-6.05. Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 6.05.E:
Reimbursement rates for Engineer or Related Entities for evaluation of proposed
substitutes shall be on the basis as established in Paragraph 14.02.D.4 of these
Supplementary Conditions.
SC-6.09. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.09.C:
6.09.D. While not intended to be inclusive of all Laws or Regulations for which
Contractor may be responsible under Paragraph 6.09, the following Laws or
Regulations are included as mandated by statute or for the convenience of Contractor:
6.09.D.1. Employment of Idaho State Residents: Pursuant to Idaho
Codes 44-1001 and 44-1002, Contractor shall employ 95 percent bona fide
Idaho residents as employees, except contracts where 50 or less persons are
employed Contractor may employ 10 percent nonresidents provided
Contractor gives preference to employment of bona fide residents in
performance of said Work.
SC-6.10. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.10.A:
6.10.B. In accordance with Idaho Code 63-1503, Contractor shall:
6.10.B.1. pay promptly when due all taxes, (other than on real property),
excises, and license fees due to the state, its subdivisions, and municipal and
quasi-municipal corporations therein, accrued or accruing during the term of
this Contract, whether or not the same shall be payable at the end of such
term;
6.10.B.2. if the said taxes, excises, and license fees are not payable at the end
of said term, but liability for the payment thereof exists, even though the same
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
constitute liens upon its property, secure the same to the satisfaction of the
respective officers charged with the collection thereof; and
6.10.B.3. in the event that its default in the payment or securing of such taxes,
excises, and license fees, consent that Owner entering into this Contract may
withhold any payment due it hereunder the estimated amount of such accrued
and accruing taxes, excises, and license fees for the benefit of all taxing units
to which said Contractor is liable.
SC-6.11. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 6.11.A.1:
Contractor shall not enter upon nor use property not under Owner control until
appropriate easements have been executed and a copy is on file at the Site.
SC-6.17. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.17.E.1:
6.17.E.2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and
accuracy in order to obtain required approval of an item with no more than the
number of submittals specified in Paragraph 14.02.D.4 of these Supplementary
Conditions. Engineer will record time for reviewing subsequent submittals of Shop
Drawings, samples or other items requiring approval and Contractor shall reimburse
Owner for Engineer’s charges for such time in accordance with Paragraph 14.02.D.4
of these Supplementary Conditions.
6.17.E.3. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously
approved item, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s charges for such
time, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor.
SC-8.12. Add the following new paragraph(s) immediately following Paragraph 8.11:
8.12. Owner As Resident Project Representative
8.12.A. Owner will furnish Project representation during the construction
period. The duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority specified for
Engineer in Article 9, Engineer’s Status During Construction, and elsewhere
in the Contract Documents will be those of Owner.
SC-9.03. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.03.A:
9.03.B. Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be furnished by Owner. The
responsibilities, authority, and limitations of the RPR are limited to those of Engineer
in accordance with Paragraph 9.09 and as set forth elsewhere in the Contract
Documents and are further limited and described below.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9.03.C. Responsibilities and Authority:
9.03.C.1. Schedules: Review and monitor Progress Schedule, Schedule of
Submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with
Engineer concerning acceptability.
9.03.C.2. Conferences and Meetings: Conduct or attend meetings with
Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, Work
conferences and other Project related meetings.
9.03.C.3. Liaison: (i) Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor, working
principally through Contractor’s superintendent and assist in understanding
the intent of the Contract Documents; (ii) assist Engineer in serving as
Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s
onsite operations; (iii) assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or
information when required for proper execution of the Work.
9.03.C.4. Submittals: Receive Submittals that are furnished at the Site by
Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability for examination. Advise
Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any Work or arrival of
Products at Site, when recognized, requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample if the
Submittal has not been approved by Engineer.
9.03.C.5. Review of Work, Rejection of defective Work, Inspections and
Tests: (i) Conduct onsite observations of the Work in progress to assist
Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance
with the Contract Documents; (ii) inform Engineer and Contractor whenever
RPR believes that any Work is defective; (iii) advise Engineer whenever RPR
believes that any Work will not produce a completed Project that conforms
generally to the Contract Documents or will prejudice the integrity of the
design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in
the Contract Documents, or whenever RPR believes Work should be
uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection, or approval;
(iv) monitor that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and
maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel,
and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof; (v) observe, record
and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and
startups; and (vi) accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other
agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these
inspections and report to Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9.03.C.6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Inform Engineer when
clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and
transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer.
9.03.C.7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for
modifications in Drawings or Specifications and provide recommendations to
Engineer; transmit to Contractor the decisions issued by Engineer.
9.03.C.8. Records: (i) Maintain at the Site files for correspondence,
conference records, Submittals including Shop Drawings and Samples,
reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Addenda, signed
Agreement, Work Change Directives, Change Orders, Field Orders, additional
Drawings issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer’s written
clarifications and interpretations, progress reports, and other Project related
documents; (ii) keep a diary or log book recording pertinent Site conditions,
activities, decisions and events.
9.03.C.9. Reports: (i) Furnish Engineer periodic reports of progress of the
Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and
Schedule of Submittals; (ii) consult with Engineer in advance of scheduled
major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work; and
(iii) assist in drafting proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and
Field Orders, obtain backup material from Contractor as appropriate.
9.03.C.10. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with
Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission
and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the
relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work
completed and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not
incorporated in the Work.
9.03.C.11. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Record
Documents, and Site Records: During the course of the Work, monitor that
these documents and other data required to be assembled, maintained, and
furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and have this material delivered to
Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to final payment for the
Work.
9.03.C.12. Substantial Completion: (i) Conduct an inspection in the company
of Engineer, Owner, and Contractor and prepare a list of items to be
completed or corrected; (ii) submit to Engineer a list of observed items
requiring completion or correction.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9.03.C.13. Completion: (i) Conduct final inspection in the company of
Engineer, Owner and Contractor; and (ii) notify Contractor and Engineer in
writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective; and (iii) observe that all items on final list have been
completed, corrected, or accepted by Owner and make recommendations to
Engineer concerning acceptance.
9.03.D. Limitations of Authority: Resident Project Representative will not:
9.03.D.1. have authority to authorize any deviation from the Contract
Documents or substitution of materials or equipment, unless authorized by
Engineer; or
9.03.D.2. undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors,
or Contractor’s superintendent; or
9.03.D.3. accept Submittals from anyone other than Contractor; or
9.03.D.4. authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part; or
9.03.D.5. participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections
conducted by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.
SC-9.09. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.09.E:
9.09.F. Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others on the Project, or their
sureties, shall maintain no direct action against Engineer, its officers, employees,
affiliated corporations, and subcontractors, for any Claim arising out of, in connection
with, or resulting from the engineering services performed. Only the Owner will be
the beneficiary of any undertaking by Engineer.
SC-12.01. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 12.01.C.2.c:
except, the maximum total allowable cost to Owner shall be the Cost of the Work
plus a maximum collective aggregate fee for Contractor and all tiered Subcontractors
of 26.8 percent;
SC-14.02. Delete Paragraph 14.02.C.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
14.02.C.1. Forty-five days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner
with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due and when due will be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-14.02. Add the following new paragraph(s) immediately after Paragraph 14.02.D.3:
14.02.D.4. Items entitling Owner to retain set-offs from the amount recommended,
including but not limited to:
14.02.D.4.a. Owner compensation to Engineer at an estimated average rate of
$120 per each extra personnel hour for labor plus expenses, if applicable,
because of the following Contractor-caused events:
14.02.D.4.a.(2). Submittal review in excess of two reviews by
Engineer for substantially the same Submittal, in accordance with
Paragraph 6.17.E of these Supplementary Conditions;
14.02.D.4.a.(3). evaluation of proposed substitutes and in making
changes to Contract Documents occasioned thereby, in accordance
with Paragraph 6.05. of these Supplementary Conditions;
14.02.D.4.a.(4). Overtime worked by Contractor necessitating
Engineer, Related Entities, Resident Project Representative or
Resident Project Representative’s Site staff, if any, to work
extraordinary overtime in accordance with Paragraph 6.02.C. of these
Supplementary Conditions. For purposes of administering this
requirement, additional extraordinary overtime costs are defined as
overtime that the Contractor may schedule on a regular basis to
accomplish project work. Should the work planned for those overtime
periods be such that, in the Engineer’s sole judgment, the Engineer’s
observation is needed, this paragraph shall apply. This paragraph is not
intended to apply to the sporadic overtime required for connections to
existing facilities, emergencies, and other sporadic activities.
14.02.D.4.b. Liability for liquidated damages incurred by Contractor as set
forth in the Agreement.
SC-15.03.A. Delete the first sentence of Paragraph 15.03.A in its entirety and insert the
following in its place:
Upon 7 days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract
or any portion of the Contract.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PW/WBG/426399
00 73 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SC-16.01. Delete Paragraph 16.01.C in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
16.01.C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under
Paragraph 10.05.C shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the
mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:
16.01.C.1. gives to the other party written notice of intent to submit the Claim
to a court of competent jurisdiction, or
16.01.C.2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute
resolution process.
16.01.D. Notwithstanding any applicable statute of limitations, a party giving notice
under Paragraph SC-16.01.C.1 shall commence an action on the Claim within one
year of giving such notice. Failure to do so shall result in the Claim being time-barred
and Engineer’s action or denial shall become final and binding.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 00 73 00 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
PART 3
SPECIFICATIONS
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Base Bid Schedule A:
1. The completed Work will provide Owner with the following:
a. Installation of the Owner-furnished influent pump.
b. Influent pump piping and valves.
c. Demolition of the existing discharge header in the screen
distribution channel.
d. Stop log structure in the screen distribution channel.
B. Base Bid Schedule B:
1. The completed work will provide the Owner with the following:
a. Demolition of secondary clarifier mechanisms (Clarifiers 1
through 4).
b. Installation of Owner-furnished secondary clarifier mechanisms
and launder covers (Clarifiers 1 through 4).
c. Installation of Owner-furnished launder covers (Clarifiers 5
and 6).
d. Installation of scum piping.
e. Installation of W3 piping.
C. Bid Alternative 1 includes the 18-inch septage piping in the wet well.
1.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Section 01 64 00, Owner-Furnished Products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 SUMMARY OF WORK
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 11 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner may, in anticipation of ordering an addition, deletion, or revision to the
Work, request Contractor to prepare a detailed proposal of cost and times to
perform contemplated change.
B. Proposal request will include reference number for tracking purposes and
detailed description of and reason for proposed change, and such additional
information as appropriate and as may be required for Contractor to accurately
estimate cost and time impact on Project.
C. Proposal request is for information only; Contractor is neither authorized to
execute proposed change nor to stop Work in progress as result of such
request.
D. Contractor’s written proposal shall be transmitted to Engineer promptly, but
not later than 14 days after Contractor’s receipt of Owner’s written request.
Proposal shall remain firm for a maximum period of 45 days after receipt by
Engineer.
E. Owner’s request for proposal or Contractor’s failure to submit such proposal
within the required time period will not justify a Claim for an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones).
1.02 CLAIMS
A. Include, at a minimum:
1. Specific references including (i) Drawing numbers, (ii) Specification
section and article/paragraph number, and (iii) Submittal type, Submittal
number, date reviewed, Engineer’s comment, as applicable, with
appropriate attachments.
2. Stipulated facts and pertinent documents, including photographs and
statements.
3. Interpretations relied upon.
4. Description of (i) nature and extent of Claim, (ii) who or what caused
the situation, (iii) impact to the Work and work of others, and
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 PROCEDURES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 26 00 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
(iv) discussion of claimant’s justification for requesting a change to
price or times or both.
5. Estimated adjustment in price claimant believes it is entitled to with full
documentation and justification.
6. Requested Change in Contract Times: Include at least (i) Progress
Schedule documentation showing logic diagram for request,
(ii) documentation that float times available for Work have been used,
and (iii) revised activity logic with durations including sub-network
logic revisions, duration changes, and other interrelated schedule
impacts, as appropriate.
7. Documentation as may be necessary as set forth below for Work Change
Directive, and as Engineer may otherwise require.
1.03 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A. Procedures:
1. Engineer will:
a. Initiate, including a description of the Work involved and any
attachments.
b. Affix signature, demonstrating Engineer’s recommendation.
c. Transmit six copies to Owner for authorization.
2. Owner will:
a. Affix signature, demonstrating approval of the changes involved.
b. Return four copies to Engineer, who will retain two copies, send
one copy to the Resident Project Representative or other field
representative, and forward two copies to Contractor.
3. Upon completion of Work covered by the Work Change Directive or
when final Contract Times and Contract Price are determined,
Contractor shall submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order.
4. Contractor’s documentation shall include but not be limited to:
a. Appropriately detailed records of Work performed to enable
determination of value of the Work.
b. Full information required to substantiate resulting change in
Contract Times and Contract Price for Work. On request of
Engineer, provide additional data necessary to support
documentation.
c. Support data for Work performed on a unit price or Cost of the
Work basis with additional information such as:
1) Dates Work was performed, and by whom.
2) Time records, wage rates paid, and equipment rental rates.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PW/WBG/426399
PROCEDURES OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 26 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3) Invoices and receipts for materials, equipment, and
subcontracts, all similarly documented.
B. Effective Date of Work Change Directive: Date of signature by Owner, unless
otherwise indicated thereon.
1.04 CHANGE ORDERS
A. Procedure:
1. Engineer will prepare six copies of proposed Change Order and transmit
such with Engineer’s written recommendation and request to Contractor
for signature.
2. Contractor shall, upon receipt, either: (i) promptly sign copies and send
all copies to Engineer for Owner’s signature, or (ii) return unsigned
copies with written justification for not executing Change Order.
3. Engineer will, upon receipt of Contractor signed copies, promptly
forward Engineer’s written recommendation and partially executed
copies for Owner’s signature, or if Contractor fails to execute the
Change Order, Engineer will promptly so notify Owner and transmit
Contractor’s justification to Owner.
4. Upon receipt of Contractor-executed Change Order, Owner will
promptly either:
a. Execute Change Order, retaining two copies for its file and
returning four copies to Engineer; or
b. Return to Engineer unsigned copies with written justification for
not executing Change Order.
5. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order, Engineer will transmit
two copies to Contractor, one copy to Resident Project Representative or
other field representative, and retain one copy, or if Owner fails to
execute the Change Order, Engineer will promptly so notify Contractor
and transmit Owner’s justification to Contractor.
6. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order, Contractor shall:
a. Perform Work covered by Change Order.
b. Revise Schedule of Values to adjust Contract Price and submit
with next Application for Payment.
c. Revise Progress Schedule to reflect changes in Contract Times, if
any, and to adjust times for other items of Work affected by
change.
d. Enter changes in Project record documents after completion of
change related Work.
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 PROCEDURES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 26 00 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. In signing a Change Order, Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree
that:
1. Stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set
forth includes payment for (i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change
Order, (ii) Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of
Progress Schedule, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on
other Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overheads.
2. Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the
change to the Work.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the Change Order, all requirements of the
original Contract Documents apply to the Work covered by the Change
Order.
1.05 COST OF THE WORK
A. In determining the supplemental costs allowed in Paragraph 11.01.A.5 of the
General Conditions for rental equipment and machinery, the following will
apply.
B. Rental of construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof having a
replacement value in excess of $1,000, whether owned by Contractor or rented
or leased from others, shall meet the following requirements:
1. Full rental costs for leased equipment shall not exceed rates listed in the
Rental Rate Blue Book published by Equipment Watch, San Jose,
California, as adjusted to the regional area of the Project. Owned
equipment costs shall not exceed the single shift rates established in the
Cost Reference Guide (CRG) also published by Equipment Watch. The
most recent published edition in effect at commencement of actual
equipment use shall be used.
2. Rates shall apply to equipment in good working condition. Equipment not
in good condition, or larger than required, may be rejected by Engineer or
accepted at reduced rates.
3. Leased Equipment: For equipment leased or rented in arm’s length
transactions from outside vendors, maximum rates shall be determined by
the following actual usage/Blue Book Payment Category:
a. Less than 8 hours: Hourly Rate.
b. 8 or more hours but less than 7 days: Daily Rate.
c. 7 or more days but less than 30 days: Weekly Rate.
d. 30 days or more: Monthly Rate.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PW/WBG/426399
PROCEDURES OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 26 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Arm’s length rental and lease transactions are those in which the firm
involved in the rental or lease of equipment is not associated with, owned
by, have common management, directorship, facilities and/or stockholders
with the firm renting the equipment.
5. Leased Equipment in Use: Actual equipment use time documented by
Engineer shall be the basis that equipment was on and utilized at the
Project Site. In addition to the leasing rate above, equipment operational
costs shall be paid at the estimated hourly operating cost rate set forth in
the Blue Book if not already included in the lease rate. Hours of operation
shall be based upon actual equipment usage to the nearest quarter hour, as
recorded by Engineer.
6. Leased Equipment, When Idle (Standby): Idle or standby equipment is
equipment onsite or in transit to and from the Work Site and necessary to
perform the Work under the modification, but not in actual use. Idle
equipment time, as documented by Engineer, shall be paid at the leasing
rate determined above, excluding operational costs.
7. Owned and Other Equipment in Use: Equipment rates for owned
equipment or equipment provided in other than arm’s length transaction
shall not exceed the single shift total hourly costs rate developed in
accordance with the CRG and as modified herein for multiple shifts. This
total hourly rate will be paid for each hour the equipment actually
performs work. Hours of operation shall be based upon actual equipment
usage as recorded by Engineer. This rate shall represent payment in full
for Contractor’s direct costs.
8. Owned and Other Equipment, When Idle (Standby): Equipment necessary
to be onsite to perform the Work on single shift operations, but not
utilized, shall be paid for at the ownership hourly expense rate developed
in accordance with the CRG, provided its presence and necessity onsite
has been documented by Engineer. Payment for idle time of portions of a
normal workday, in conjunction with original contract Work, will not be
allowed. In no event shall idle time claimed in a day for a particular piece
of equipment exceed the normal Work or shift schedule established for the
Project. It is agreed that this rate shall represent payment in full for
Contractor’s direct costs. When Engineer determines that the equipment is
not needed to continuously remain at the Work Site, payment will be
limited to actual hours in use.
9. Owned and Other Equipment, Multiple Shifts: For multiple shift
operations, the CRG single shift total hourly costs rate shall apply to the
operating equipment during the first shift. For subsequent shifts, up to 2 in
a 24-hour day, operating rate shall be the sum of the total hourly CRG
operating cost and 60 percent of the CRG ownership and overhaul
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 PROCEDURES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 26 00 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
expense. Payment for idle or standby time for second and third shifts shall
be 20 percent of the CRG ownership and overhaul expense.
10. When necessary to obtain owned equipment from sources beyond the
Project limits, the actual cost to transfer equipment to the Work Site and
return it to its original location will be allowed as an additional item of
expense. Move-in and move-out allowances will not be made for
equipment brought to the Project if the equipment is also used on original
Contract or related Work.
11. If the move-out destination is not to the original location, payment for
move-out will not exceed payment for move-in.
12. If move is made by common carrier, the allowance will be the amount
paid for the freight. If equipment is hauled with Contractor’s own forces,
rental will be allowed for the hauling unit plus the hauling unit operator’s
wage. If equipment is transferred under its own power, the rental will be
75 percent of the appropriate total hourly costs for the equipment, without
attachments, plus the equipment operator’s wage.
13. Charges for time utilized in servicing equipment to ready it for use prior to
moving and similar charges will not be allowed.
14. When a breakdown occurs on any piece of owned equipment, payment
shall cease for that equipment and any other owned equipment idled by
the breakdown.
15. If any part of the Work is shut down by Owner, standby time will be paid
during nonoperating hours if diversion of equipment to other Work is not
practicable. Engineer reserves the right to cease standby time payment
when an extended shutdown is anticipated.
16. If a rate has not been established in the CRG for owned equipment,
Contractor may:
a. If approved by Engineer, use the rate of the most similar model
found, considering such characteristics as manufacturer, capacity,
horsepower, age, and fuel type, or
b. Request Equipment Watch to furnish a written response for a rate
on the equipment, which shall be presented to Engineer for
approval; or
c. Request Engineer to establish a rate.
1.06 FIELD ORDER
A. Engineer will issue Field Orders, with three copies to Contractor.
B. Effective date of the Field Order shall be the date of signature by Engineer,
unless otherwise indicated thereon.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PW/WBG/426399
PROCEDURES OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 26 00 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Contractor shall acknowledge receipt by signing and returning one copy to
Engineer.
D. Field Orders will be incorporated into subsequent Change Orders, as a no-cost
change to the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 PROCEDURES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 26 00 - 7
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Schedule of Values: Submit on Contractor’s standard form.
2. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments:
a. Submit with initially acceptable Schedule of Values.
b. Submit adjustments thereto with Application for Payment.
3. Application for Payment.
4. Final Application for Payment.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prepare a separate Schedule of Values for each schedule of the Work under
the Agreement.
B. Upon request of Engineer, provide documentation to support the accuracy of
the Schedule of Values.
C. Lump Sum Work:
1. List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization,
preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment
testing, facility startup, and contract closeout separately.
2. Break down by Division 02 through 49 with appropriate subdivision of
each Specification.
D. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable.
E. Summation of the complete Schedule of Values representing all the Work
shall equal the Contract Price.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating
initial Contract Price.
PW/WBG/426399 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 29 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule.
Adjust to reflect subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract
Price as reflected by modifications to the Contract Documents.
1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach one Summary Form with each detailed
Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment
of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by
authorized officer of Contractor.
B. Use detailed Application for Payment Form suitable to Engineer.
C. Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable.
D. Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump
sum Work and the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit
priced basis.
E. Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive
executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as
requested by Engineer.
F. Preparation:
1. Round values to nearest dollar.
2. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary
Form and detailed Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule
as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as
applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by Engineer.
1.05 PAYMENT
A. Payment for all Lump Sum Work shown or specified in Contract Documents
is included in the Contract Price. Payment will be based on a percentage
complete basis for each line item of the accepted Schedule of Values.
B. Base Bid Schedule A Item Description:
1. Influent Pump Installation: Unload, install, and assist with testing of
owner furnished Raw Wastewater Influent Pump in the headworks
facility including, but not limited to, the screw-induced flow centrifugal
pump, extended shaft, motor, concrete pump supports, pump access
PAYMENT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 29 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
platform, and other appurtenances and accessories required for a
complete installation.
2. Influent Pump Piping: Furnish and install piping for Owner-furnished
Raw Wastewater Influent Pump in the headworks facility including, but
not limited to, the suction and discharge piping, reducers, actuated plug
valve, pipe supports, coupling adapters, and other appurtenances and
accessories required for a complete installation.
3. Discharge Header Demolition: Furnish all labor and materials required
for demolition of the existing raw wastewater influent discharge header
in the screen distribution channel including, but not limited to, cutting
the pipe off each pump discharge pipe, removing and disposing the
header supports, rerouting the sample piping, and other appurtenances
and accessories required for the demolition.
4. Stop Log Structure: Furnish and install the stop log structure in the
screen distribution channel including, but not limited to, the stop log
channel guides, fiberglass stop logs, cleaning the screen distribution
channel, demolition and removal of the suspended concrete slab for
access to the stop log structure, and other appurtenances and accessories
required for a complete installation.
5. Bypass Pumping: Furnish all labor and materials required for raw
wastewater bypass pumping from the wet well to the screen influent
channels during the installation of the proposed improvements
including, but not limited to, pumps, piping, temporary power supply,
and other appurtenances and accessories required for bypass pumping.
6. Electrical Systems: Furnish and install the electrical systems required
for the proposed improvements including, but not limited to, conduit,
wiring, switchgear, starters, and other appurtenances and accessories
required for a complete installation.
7. Instrumentation and Controls: Furnish and install the instrumentation
and control systems required for the proposed improvements including,
but not limited to, variable frequency drive, harmonic conditioner, flow
meter, valve actuator, local control stations, programmable logic
controller programming, and other appurtenances and accessories
required for a complete installation.
C. Base Bid Schedule B Item Description:
1. Clarifier Mechanism Demolition: Furnish all labor and materials
required for demolition of the existing clarifier mechanisms including,
but not limited to cutting the existing RAS pipe, concrete demolition,
removal and disposal of existing walkways, center influent columns,
rake arms, weirs, baffles, scum troughs, and other appurtenances and
accessories required for the demolition.
PW/WBG/426399 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 29 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Clarifier Mechanism Installation: Unload, install, and assist with testing
of owner furnished clarifier mechanisms in Secondary Clarifiers 1
through 4 including, but not limited to, the walkway, center influent
column, rake arm, feedwell, drive cage, skimmer blades, scum trough,
sludge manifold, suction header, RAS pipe connection, and other
appurtenances and accessories required for a complete installation.
3. Weirs, Baffle Plates, and Launder Cover Installation in Secondary
Clarifiers 1 through 4: Unload, install, and assist with testing of Owner-
furnished weirs, baffle plates, and launder covers in Secondary
Clarifiers 1 through 4, including other appurtenances and accessories
required for a complete installation.
4. Launder Cover Installation in Secondary Clarifiers 5 and 6: Unload,
install, and assist with testing of owner furnished launder covers in
Secondary Clarifiers 5 and 6, including other appurtenances and
accessories required for a complete installation.
5. Scum Piping: Furnish and install scum piping in Secondary Clarifiers 1
through 4 including, but not limited to, piping, bends, connection to
existing scum collection pipe, and other appurtenances and accessories
required for a complete installation.
6. Water Piping: Furnish and install water piping in Secondary Clarifiers 1
through 4 including, but not limited to, piping, bends, connection to
existing water pipe, spray nozzles, and other appurtenances and
accessories required for a complete installation.
7. Electrical Systems: Furnish and install the electrical systems required
for the proposed improvements including, but not limited to, conduit,
wiring, switchgear, starters, lighting on clarifier walkways and other
appurtenances and accessories required for a complete installation.
8. Instrumentation and Controls: Furnish and install the instrumentation
and control systems required for the proposed improvements including,
but not limited to, local control stations, programmable logic controller
programming, and other appurtenances and accessories required for a
complete installation.
D. Bid Alternative 1:
1. Septage Piping: Furnish and install septage piping in the wet well at the
headworks facility including, but not limited to, piping, bends, pipe
supports, core hole in wet well wall, link seals, connection to existing
raw wastewater influent pipe, backfill operations, re-pavement of
disturbed surfaces, and other appurtenances and accessories required for
a complete installation.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 29 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.06 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS
A. Payment will not be made for following:
1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material.
2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for
under Contract Documents.
3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been
placed by reason of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of
Contract Documents.
4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle.
5. Defective Work not accepted by Owner.
6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work.
1.07 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Partial Payment: No partial payments will be made for materials and
equipment delivered or stored unless Shop Drawings and preliminary
operation and maintenance data is acceptable to Engineer.
B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in Work;
remaining products, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert
to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those
items will be deducted from final payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 29 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 31 13
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK AT SITE
A. Applications Software Development will be Owner-furnished.
B. Owner will furnish programming of applications software for the Process
Instrumentation and Control Subsystem. Refer to Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, for information pertaining
to Owner-furnished programming.
1. Coordinate and deliver to Owner’s office hardware and standard
software components, as specified for PICS.
2. Sequencing: Include sequencing constraints specified herein as part of
Progress Schedule.
3. Owner will confirm delivery date with Contractor 10 days prior to
scheduled delivery, and within 24 hours of expected delivery time.
1.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Section 01 64 00, Owner-Furnished Products.
1.03 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with various utilities within Project limits. Notify
applicable utilities prior to commencing Work, if damage occurs, or if
conflicts or emergencies arise during Work.
1. Public Works Department:
a. Contact Person: Tony Perreira.
b. Telephone: (208) 384-3799.
1.04 FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. Continuous operation of Owner’s facilities is of critical importance. Schedule
and conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously,
unless otherwise specified.
PW/WBG/426399 PROJECT COORDINATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 31 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, and
as required to prevent interruption of Owner’s operations.
C. When necessary, plan, design, and provide various temporary services,
utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access, and similar items
to maintain continuous operations of Owner’s facility.
D. Do not close lines, open or close valves, or take other action which would
affect the operation of existing systems, except as specifically required by the
Contract Documents and after authorization by Owner and Engineer. Such
authorization will be considered within 48 hours after receipt of Contractor’s
written request.
E. Construct Work in the following stages to allow for Owner’s continuous
occupancy and for uninterrupted operation during construction.
1. Option available to Contractor to use 45-minute shut-down of influent
pumps between 4:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. to conduct work in the screen
distribution channel instead of using bypass pumps.
2. Only two clarifier mechanisms may be removed and replaced at one
time - either Clarifiers 1 and 3 or Clarifiers 2 and 4. The first set of
existing clarifier mechanisms must be demolished, the new clarifier
mechanisms installed, and then started up. After the first set of clarifier
mechanisms have been started up and accepted as substantially
complete, the second set of clarifier mechanisms may be worked on.
1. After all four clarifier mechanisms, 1 through 4, have been replaced,
started up, and accepted, the launder covers for either Clarifier 5 or
Clarifier 6 may be installed. Once the launder covers for the first
clarifier have been installed and accepted, the launder covers for the
other clarifier may be installed.
F. Install and maintain bypass facilities and temporary connections required to
keep Owner’s headworks facilities operations on line. Sequences other than
those specified will be considered upon written request to Owner and
Engineer, provided they afford equivalent continuity of operations.
G. Do not proceed with Work affecting a facility’s operation without obtaining
Owner’s and Engineer’s advance approval of the need for and duration of such
Work.
PROJECT COORDINATION PW/WBG/426399
01 31 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
H. Relocation of Existing Facilities:
1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will
be necessary.
2. Provide complete relocation of existing structures and Underground
Facilities, including piping, utilities, equipment, structures, electrical
conduit wiring, electrical duct bank, and other necessary items.
3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of
existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified.
4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities.
5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior
to removal of existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer.
1.05 ADJACENT FACILITIES AND PROPERTIES
A. Examination:
1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is
started, Contractor, Engineer, and affected property owners and utility
owners shall make a thorough examination of pre-existing conditions
including existing buildings, structures, and other improvements in
vicinity of Work, as applicable, which could be damaged by
construction operations.
2. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not
limited to, cracks in structures, settlement, leakage, and similar
conditions.
B. Documentation:
1. Record and submit documentation of observations made on examination
inspections in accordance with paragraph Construction Photographs and
Audio-Video Recordings.
2. Upon receipt, Engineer will review, sign, and return one record copy of
documentation to Contractor to be kept on file in field office.
3. Such documentation shall be used as indisputable evidence in
ascertaining whether and to what extent damage occurred as a result of
Contractor’s operations, and is for the protection of adjacent property
owners, Contractor, and Owner.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographically document all phases of the project including preconstruction,
construction progress, and post-construction.
PW/WBG/426399 PROJECT COORDINATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 31 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Film handling and development shall be done by a commercial laboratory.
C. Engineer shall have the right to select the subject matter and vantage point
from which photographs are to be taken.
D. Preconstruction and Post-Construction:
1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is
started, and again upon issuance of Substantial Completion, take
pictures of Construction Site and property adjacent to perimeter of
Construction Site.
2. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and
outside the Site.
3. Format: Color, digital, minimum 8 MP camera.
E. Construction Progress Photos:
1. Photographically demonstrate progress of construction, showing every
aspect of Site and adjacent properties as well as interior and exterior of
new or impacted structures.
2. Weekly: Take 48 pictures using color, digital, minimum 8 MP camera.
F. Digital Images:
1. Archive using a commercially available photo management system.
2. Label each disk with Project and Owner’s name, and week and year
images were produced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING
A. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work and work of others, including excavation and
backfill as required, to make Work complete.
B. Obtain prior written authorization of Owner before commencing Work to cut
or otherwise alter:
1. Structural or reinforcing steel, structural column or beam, elevated slab,
trusses, or other structural member.
2. Weather- or moisture-resistant elements.
PROJECT COORDINATION PW/WBG/426399
01 31 13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Work of others.
C. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish.
1. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection.
2. Refinish entire assemblies.
3. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no
transition between existing work and Work is evident in finished
surfaces.
D. Restore existing work, Underground Facilities, and surfaces that are to remain
in completed Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other
utilities as specified and as shown.
E. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for
new Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of
manufacturer or appropriate trade association.
F. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations
through surfaces and fill voids.
G. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 PROJECT COORDINATION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 31 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Owner will schedule physical arrangements for meetings throughout progress
of the Work, prepare meeting agenda with regular participant input and
distribute with written notice of each meeting, preside at meetings, record
minutes to include significant proceedings and decisions, and reproduce and
distribute copies of Record of Discussion within 5 working days after each
meeting to participants and parties affected by meeting decisions.
1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a minimum:
1. Required schedules.
2. Status of Bonds and insurance.
3. Sequencing of critical path work items.
4. Progress payment procedures.
5. Project changes and clarification procedures.
6. Use of Site, access, office and storage areas, security and temporary
facilities.
7. Major product delivery and priorities.
8. Contractor’s safety plan and representative.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owner’s representatives.
2. Contractor’s office representative.
3. Contractor’s resident superintendent.
4. Contractor’s quality control representative.
5. Subcontractors’ representatives whom Contractor may desire or
Engineer may request to attend.
6. Engineer’s representatives.
7. Others as appropriate.
PW/WBG/426399 PROJECT MEETINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 31 19 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULES REVIEW MEETING
A. As set forth in General Conditions and Section 01 32 00, Construction
Progress Documentation.
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Engineer will schedule regular progress meetings at Site, conducted weekly to
review the Work progress, Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals,
Application for Payment, contract modifications, and other matters needing
discussion and resolution.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Owner’s representative(s).
2. Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers, as appropriate.
3. Engineer’s representative(s).
4. Others as appropriate.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL MEETINGS
A. In accordance with Section 01 45 16.13, Contractor Quality Control.
1.06 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS)
COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Engineer will schedule a meeting at Site to review specific requirements of
PICS work.
B. Attendees will include:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. PICS Subcontractor/Installer.
4. Engineer’s representatives.
1.07 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual Specification sections, convene at Site prior to
commencing the Work of that section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the Work of
that section.
PROJECT MEETINGS PW/WBG/426399
01 31 19 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Notify Engineer 4 days in advance of meeting date.
D. Provide suggested agenda to Engineer to include reviewing conditions of
installation, preparation and installation or application procedures, and
coordination with related Work and work of others.
1.08 FACILITY STARTUP MEETINGS
A. Schedule and attend the pump startup meetings. The first of such meetings
shall be held prior to submitting Facility Startup Plan, as specified in
Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, and shall include
preliminary discussions regarding such plan.
B. Agenda items shall include, but not be limited to, content of Facility Startup
Plan, coordination needed between various parties in attendance, and potential
problems associated with startup.
C. Attendees will include:
1. Contractor.
2. Contractor’s designated quality control representative.
3. Subcontractors and equipment manufacturer’s representatives whom
Contractor deems to be directly involved in facility startup.
4. Engineer’s representatives.
5. Owner’s operations personnel.
6. Others as required by Contract Documents or as deemed necessary by
Contractor.
1.09 OTHER MEETINGS
A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner and
Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 PROJECT MEETINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 31 19 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Submit within time specified in
paragraph 2.05 of the General Conditions.
2. Detailed Progress Schedule:
a. Submit initial Detailed Progress Schedule within 30 days after
Effective Date of the Agreement.
b. Submit an Updated Progress Schedule at each update, in
accordance with Article Detailed Progress Schedule.
3. Submit with Each Progress Schedule Submission:
a. Contractor’s certification that Progress Schedule submission is
actual schedule being utilized for execution of the Work.
b. Progress Schedule: Four legible copies.
c. Narrative Progress Report: Same number of copies as specified
for Progress Schedule.
4. Prior to final payment, submit a final Updated Progress Schedule.
1.02 PRELIMINARY PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. In addition to basic requirements outlined in General Conditions, show a
detailed schedule, beginning with Notice to Proceed, for minimum duration of
120 days, and a summary of balance of Project through Final Completion.
B. Show activities including, but not limited to the following:
1. Notice to Proceed.
2. Permits.
3. Submittals, with review time. Contractor may use Schedule of
Submittals specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
4. Early procurement activities for long lead equipment and materials.
5. Initial Site work.
6. Earthwork.
7. Specified Work sequences and construction constraints.
8. Contract Milestone and Completion Dates.
9. Owner-furnished products delivery dates or ranges of dates.
PW/WBG/426399 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 DOCUMENTATION
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 32 00 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. Major structural, mechanical, equipment, electrical, architectural, and
instrumentation and control Work.
11. System startup summary.
12. Project close-out summary.
13. Demobilization summary.
C. Update Preliminary Progress Schedule monthly as part of progress payment
process. Failure to do so may result in the Owner withholding all or part of the
monthly progress payment until the Preliminary Progress Schedule is updated
in a manner acceptable to Engineer.
D. Format: In accordance with Article Progress Schedule—Bar Chart.
1.03 DETAILED PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. In addition to requirements of General Conditions, submit Detailed Progress
Schedule beginning with Notice to Proceed and continuing through Final
Completion.
B. Show the duration and sequences of activities required for complete
performance of the Work reflecting means and methods chosen by Contractor.
C. When accepted by Engineer, Detailed Progress Schedule will replace
Preliminary Progress Schedule and become Baseline Schedule. Subsequent
revisions will be considered as Updated Progress Schedules.
D. Format: In accordance with Article Progress Schedule—Bar Chart.
E. Update monthly to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date, including
weather delays.
1.04 PROGRESS SCHEDULE—BAR CHART
A. General: Comprehensive bar chart schedule, generally as outlined in
Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) 580, “Construction Project
Planning and Scheduling Guidelines.” If a conflict occurs between the AGC
publication and this Specification, this Specification shall govern.
B. Format:
1. Unless otherwise approved, white paper, 11-inch by 17-inch sheet size.
2. Title Block: Show name of project and Owner, date submitted, revision
or update number, and name of scheduler.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PW/WBG/426399
DOCUMENTATION OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 32 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Identify horizontally, across the top of the schedule, the time frame by
year, month, and day.
4. Identify each activity with a unique number and a brief description of
the Work associated with that activity.
5. Legend: Describe standard and special symbols used.
C. Contents: Identify, in chronological order, those activities reasonably required
to complete the Work, including as applicable, but not limited to:
1. Obtaining permits, submittals for early product procurement, and long
lead time items.
2. Mobilization and other preliminary activities.
3. Initial Site work.
4. Specified Work sequences, constraints, and Milestones, including
Substantial Completion date(s).
5. Subcontract Work.
6. Major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates.
7. Delivery dates for Owner-furnished products, as specified in
Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work.
8. Sitework.
9. Concrete Work.
10. Structural steel Work.
11. Architectural features Work.
12. Conveying systems Work.
13. Equipment Work.
14. Mechanical Work.
15. Electrical Work.
16. Instrumentation and control Work.
17. Interfaces with Owner-furnished equipment.
18. Other important Work for each major facility.
19. Equipment and system startup and test activities.
20. Project closeout and cleanup.
21. Demobilization.
1.05 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A. Updated Progress Schedule shall reflect:
1. Progress of Work to within 5 working days prior to submission.
2. Approved changes in Work scope and activities modified since
submission.
3. Delays in Submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work.
4. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work.
PW/WBG/426399 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 DOCUMENTATION
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 32 00 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Other identifiable changes.
6. Revised projections of progress and completion.
7. Report of changed logic.
B. Produce detailed subschedules during Project, upon request of Owner or
Engineer, to further define critical portions of the Work such as facility
shutdowns.
C. If Contractor fails to complete activity by its latest scheduled completion date
and this Failure is anticipated to extend Contract Times (or Milestones),
Contractor shall, within 7 days of such failure, submit a written statement as
to how Contractor intends to correct nonperformance and return to acceptable
current Progress Schedule. Actions by Contractor to complete the Work
within Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be justification for adjustment
to Contract Price or Contract Times.
D. Owner may order Contractor to increase plant, equipment, labor force or
working hours if Contractor fails to:
1. Complete a Milestone activity by its completion date.
2. Satisfactorily execute Work as necessary to prevent delay to overall
completion of Project, at no additional cost to Owner.
1.06 NARRATIVE PROGRESS REPORT
A. Format:
1. Organize same as Progress Schedule.
2. Identify, on a cover letter, reporting period, date submitted, and name of
author of report.
B. Contents:
1. Number of days worked over the period, work force on hand,
construction equipment on hand (including utility vehicles such as
pickup trucks, maintenance vehicles, stake trucks).
2. General progress of Work, including a listing of activities started and
completed over the reporting period, mobilization/demobilization of
subcontractors, and major milestones achieved.
3. Contractor’s plan for management of Site (e.g., lay down and staging
areas, construction traffic), utilization of construction equipment,
buildup of trade labor, and identification of potential Contract changes.
4. Identification of new activities and sequences as a result of executed
Contract changes.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PW/WBG/426399
DOCUMENTATION OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 32 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Documentation of weather conditions over the reporting period, and any
resulting impacts to the work.
6. Description of actual or potential delays, including related causes, and
the steps taken or anticipated to mitigate their impact.
7. Changes to activity logic.
8. Changes to the critical path.
9. Identification of, and accompanying reason for, any activities added or
deleted since the last report.
10. Steps taken to recover the schedule from Contractor-caused delays.
1.07 SCHEDULE ACCEPTANCE
A. Engineer’s acceptance will demonstrate agreement that:
1. Proposed schedule is accepted with respect to:
a. Contract Times, including Final Completion and all intermediate
Milestones are within the specified times.
b. Specified Work sequences and constraints are shown as specified.
c. Specified Owner-furnished Equipment or Material arrival dates,
or range of dates, are included.
d. Access restrictions are accurately reflected.
e. Startup and testing times are as specified.
f. Submittal review times are as specified.
g. Startup testing duration is as specified and timing is acceptable.
2. In all other respects, Engineer’s acceptance of Contractor’s schedule
indicates that, in Engineer’s judgment, schedule represents reasonable
plan for constructing Project in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s review will not make any change in Contract
requirements. Lack of comment on any aspect of schedule that is not in
accordance with the Contract Documents will not thereby indicate
acceptance of that change, unless Contractor has explicitly called the
nonconformance to Engineer’s attention in submittal. Schedule remains
Contractor’s responsibility and Contractor retains responsibility for
performing all activities, for activity durations, and for activity
sequences required to construct Project in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B. Unacceptable Preliminary Progress Schedule:
1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days.
2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue
review and revision process, during which time Contractor shall update
PW/WBG/426399 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 DOCUMENTATION
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 32 00 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
schedule on a monthly basis to reflect actual progress and occurrences
to date.
C. Unacceptable Detailed Progress Schedule:
1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days.
2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue
review and revision process.
D. Narrative Report: All changes to activity duration and sequences, including
addition or deletion of activities subsequent to Engineer’s acceptance of
Baseline Progress Schedule, shall be delineated in Narrative Report current
with proposed Updated Progress Schedule.
1.08 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES
A. Reference General Conditions and Section 01 26 00, Contract Modification
Procedures.
B. Evaluation and reconciliation of Adjustments of Contract Times shall be
based on the Updated Progress Schedule at the time of proposed adjustment or
claimed delay.
C. Claims Based on Contract Times:
1. Where Engineer has not yet rendered formal decision on Contractor’s
Claim for adjustment of Contract Times, and parties are unable to agree
as to amount of adjustment to be reflected in Progress Schedule,
Contractor shall reflect an interim adjustment in the Progress Schedule
as acceptable to Engineer.
2. It is understood and agreed that such interim acceptance will not be
binding on either Contractor or Owner, and will be made only for the
purpose of continuing to schedule Work until such time as formal
decision has been rendered as to an adjustment, if any, of the Contract
Times.
3. Contractor shall revise Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in
accordance with Engineer’s formal decision.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PW/WBG/426399
DOCUMENTATION OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 32 00 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor
that requires Engineer’s and Owner’s approval.
B. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor that requires
Engineer’s and Owner’s review and determination that submitted information
is in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
1.02 PROCEDURES
A. Direct submittals to Owner at the following, unless specified otherwise.
1. City of Boise
Attn: Rick Cummings
11818 West Joplin Road
Boise, ID 83714
rcummings@cityofboise.org
B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals shall, unless specifically accepted, be made
in electronic format, with one hardcopy submittal to the City.
1. Each submittal shall be an electronic file in Adobe Acrobat Portable
Document Format (PDF). Use the latest version available at time of
execution of the Agreement.
2. Electronic files that contain more than 10 pages in PDF format shall
contain internal bookmarking from an index page to major sections of
the document.
3. PDF files shall be set to open “Bookmarks and Page” view.
4. Add general information to each PDF file, including title, subject,
author, and keywords.
5. PDF files shall be set up to print legibly at 8.5-inch by 11-inch, 11-inch
by 17-inch, or 22-inch by 34-inch. No other paper sizes will be accepted.
6. Submit new electronic files and one hardcopy for each resubmittal.
7. Include a copy of the Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal form,
located at end of section, with each electronic file.
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8. Engineer will reject submittal that is not electronically submitted, except
for required hardcopy.
9. Provide Engineer with authorization to reproduce and distribute each
file as many times as necessary for Project documentation.
10. Detailed procedures for handling electronic submittals will be discussed
at the preconstruction conference.
C. Transmittal of Submittal:
1. Contractor shall:
a. Review each submittal and check for compliance with Contract
Documents.
b. Stamp each submittal with uniform approval stamp before
submitting to Engineer.
1) Stamp to include Project name, submittal number,
Specification number, Contractor’s reviewer name, date of
Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying submittal
has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance
with Contract Documents.
2) Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear
Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without
action.
2. Complete, sign, and transmit with each submittal package, one
Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal form attached at end of this
section.
3. Identify each submittal with the following:
a. Numbering and Tracking System:
1) Sequentially number each submittal.
2) Resubmission of submittal shall have original number with
sequential alphabetic suffix.
b. Specification section and paragraph to which submittal applies.
c. Project title and Engineer’s project number.
d. Date of transmittal.
e. Names of Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, and manufacturer
as appropriate.
4. Identify and describe each deviation or variation from Contract
Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 33 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Format:
1. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of Contract Documents.
2. Package submittal information by individual specification section. Do
not combine different specification sections together in submittal
package, unless otherwise directed in specification.
3. Present in a clear and thorough manner and in sufficient detail to show
kind, size, arrangement, and function of components, materials, and
devices, and compliance with Contract Documents.
4. Index with labeled tab dividers in orderly manner.
E. Timeliness: Schedule and submit in accordance Schedule of Submittals, and
requirements of individual specification sections.
F. Processing Time:
1. Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal.
2. Engineer will act upon Contractor’s submittal and transmit response to
Contractor not later than 15 days after receipt, unless otherwise specified.
3. Resubmittals will be subject to same review time.
4. No adjustment of Contract Times or Price will be allowed as a result of
delays in progress of Work caused by rejection and subsequent
resubmittals.
G. Resubmittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made.
H. Incomplete Submittals:
1. Engineer will return entire submittal for Contractor’s revision if
preliminary review deems it incomplete.
2. When any of the following are missing, submittal will be deemed
incomplete:
a. Contractor’s review stamp; completed and signed.
b. Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal; completed and signed.
I. Submittals not required by Contract Documents:
1. Will not be reviewed and will be returned stamped “Not Subject to
Review.”
2. Engineer will keep one copy and return submittal to Contractor.
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual specification
sections.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Identify and Indicate:
a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units
and assemblies, and system or equipment identification or tag
numbers.
b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on
Drawings.
c. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical features
of Work. Note dimensions established by field measurement.
d. Project-specific information drawn accurately to scale.
2. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows:
a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work.
b. Supplement standard information to provide information
specifically applicable to the Work.
3. Product Data: Provide as specified in individual specifications.
4. Deferred Submittal: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals.
a. Contractor-design drawings and product data related to permanent
construction.
1) Written and graphic information.
2) Drawings.
3) Cut sheets.
4) Data sheets.
5) Action item submittals requested in individual specification
section.
b. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural
element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its
anchorage, submit required supporting data and drawings for
review and acceptance by Engineer. Documentation of review and
approval provided on Engineer’s comment form, along with
completed submittal, shall be filed with permitting agency by
Contractor and approved by permitting agency prior to
installation.
5. Foreign Manufacturers: When proposed, include names and addresses of
at least two companies that maintain technical service representatives
close to Project.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 33 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Samples:
1. Copies: Two, unless otherwise specified in individual specifications.
2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to
facilitate review of quality. Attach label on unexposed side that includes
the following:
a. Manufacturer name.
b. Model number.
c. Material.
d. Sample source.
3. Manufacturer’s Color Chart: Units or sections of units showing full
range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
4. Full-size Samples:
a. Size as indicated in individual specification section.
b. Prepared from same materials to be used for the Work.
c. Cured and finished in manner specified.
d. Physically identical with product proposed for use.
D. Action Submittal Dispositions: Engineer will review, comment, stamp, and
distribute as noted:
1. Approved:
a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work
covered by submittal.
b. Distribution: Electronic.
2. Approved as Noted:
a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work
covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer’s notations.
b. Distribution: Electronic.
3. Partial Approval, Resubmit as Noted:
a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions, and resubmit.
b. Except for portions indicated, Contractor may begin to incorporate
product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in
accordance with Engineer’s notations.
c. Distribution: Electronic.
4. Revise and Resubmit:
a. Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work
covered by submittal.
b. Distribution: Electronic.
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Refer to individual specification sections for specific submittal
requirements.
2. Engineer will review each submittal. If submittal meets conditions of the
Contract, Engineer will forward copy to appropriate parties. If Engineer
determines submittal does not meet conditions of the Contract and is
therefore considered unacceptable, Engineer will retain one copy and
return remaining copy with review comments to Contractor, and require
that submittal be corrected and resubmitted.
B. Certificates:
1. General:
a. Provide notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification.
b. Signed by officer or other individual authorized to sign documents
on behalf of that entity.
2. Welding: In accordance with individual specification sections.
3. Installer: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead
certifying installer complies with requirements as specified in individual
specification section.
4. Material Test: Prepared by qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for
compliance with requirements.
5. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or
inspection is required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or
specified in individual specification sections.
6. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: In accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
7. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: In accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
C. Construction Photographs and Video: In accordance with Section 01 31 13,
Project Coordination, and as may otherwise be required in Contract
Documents.
D. Closeout Submittals: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, Closeout
Procedures.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 33 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Contractor-design Data (related to temporary construction):
1. Written and graphic information.
2. List of assumptions.
3. List of performance and design criteria.
4. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable.
5. Calculations.
6. List of applicable codes and regulations.
7. Name and version of software.
8. Information requested in individual specification section.
F. Deferred Submittals: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals.
1. Contractor-design data related to permanent construction:
a. List of assumptions.
b. List of performance and design criteria.
c. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable.
d. Calculations.
e. List of applicable codes and regulations.
f. Name and version of design software.
g. Factory test results.
h. Informational submittals requested in individual specification
section.
2. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural element,
equipment, distribution system, or component or its anchorage, submit
calculations and test results of Contractor-designed components for
review by Engineer. Documentation of review and indication of
compliance with general design intent and project criteria provided on
Engineer’s comment form as meets conditions of the Contract, along
with completed submittal, shall be filed with permitting agency by
Contractor and approved by permitting agency prior to installation.
G. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Written or published information that documents
manufacturer’s recommendations, guidelines, and procedures in accordance
with individual specification section.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: As required in Section 01 78 23, Operation
and Maintenance Data.
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
I. Payment:
1. Application for Payment: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, Payment
Procedures.
2. Schedule of Values: In accordance with Section 01 29 00, Payment
Procedures.
J. Quality Control Documentation: As required in Section 01 45 16.13,
Contractor Quality Control.
K. Schedules:
1. Schedule of Submittals: Prepare separately or in combination with
Progress Schedule as specified in Section 01 32 00, Construction
Progress Documentation.
a. Show for each, at a minimum, the following:
1) Specification section number.
2) Identification by numbering and tracking system as specified
under Paragraph Transmittal of Submittal.
3) Estimated date of submission to Engineer, including
reviewing and processing time.
b. On a monthly basis, submit updated Schedule of Submittals to
Engineer if changes have occurred or resubmittals are required.
2. Progress Schedules: In accordance with Section 01 32 00, Construction
Progress Documentation.
L. Special Guarantee: Supplier’s written guarantee as required in individual
specification sections.
M. Submittals Required by Laws, Regulations, and Governing Agencies:
1. Promptly submit promptly notifications, reports, certifications, payrolls,
and otherwise as may be required, directly to the applicable federal,
state, or local governing agency or their representative.
2. Transmit to Engineer for Owner’s records one copy of correspondence
and transmittals (to include enclosures and attachments) between
Contractor and governing agency.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 33 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
N. Test, Evaluation, and Inspection Reports:
1. General: Shall contain signature of person responsible for test or report.
2. Factory:
a. Identification of product and specification section, type of
inspection or test with referenced standard or code.
b. Date of test, Project title and number, and name and signature of
authorized person.
c. Test results.
d. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in
compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action
necessary to bring into compliance.
e. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.
f. Other items as identified in individual specification sections.
3. Field:
a. As a minimum, include the following:
1) Project title and number.
2) Date and time.
3) Record of temperature and weather conditions.
4) Identification of product and specification section.
5) Type and location of test, Sample, or inspection, including
referenced standard or code.
6) Date issued, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone
number, and name and signature of laboratory inspector.
7) If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in
compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective
action necessary to bring into compliance.
8) Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by
Engineer.
9) Other items as identified in individual specification sections.
O. Testing and Startup Data: In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment
Testing and Facility Startup.
P. Training Data: In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field
Services.
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this
specification.
1. Forms: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 33 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
TRANSMITTAL OF CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL
(ATTACH TO EACH SUBMITTAL)
DATE:
TO: Submittal No.:
New Submittal Resubmittal
Project:
Project No.:
Specification Section No.:
(Cover only one section with each transmittal)
FROM: Schedule Date of Submittal:
Contractor
SUBMITTAL TYPE: Shop Drawing Sample Informational
Deferred O&M
The following items are hereby submitted:
Contains Variation
Number of Description of Item Submitted Spec. and Drawing or to Contract
Copies (Type, Size, Model Number, Etc.) Para. No. Brochure No. No Yes
Contractor hereby certifies that (i) Contractor has complied with the requirements of Contract Documents in
preparation, review, and submission of designated Submittal and (ii) the Submittal is complete and in
accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of laws and regulations and governing agencies.
By:___________________________________
Contractor (Authorized Signature)
PW/WBG/426399 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 33 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 42 13
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TECHNICAL
SOCIETIES
A. Reference to standards and specifications of technical societies and reporting
and resolving discrepancies associated therewith shall be as provided in
Article 3 of the General Conditions, and as may otherwise be required herein
and in the individual Specification sections.
B. Work specified by reference to published standard or specification of
government agency, technical association, trade association, professional
society or institute, testing agency, or other organization shall meet
requirements or surpass minimum standards of quality for materials and
workmanship established by designated standard or specification.
C. Where so specified, products or workmanship shall also meet or exceed
additional prescriptive or performance requirements included within Contract
Documents to establish a higher or more stringent standard of quality than
required by referenced standard.
D. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, product and
workmanship shall meet or exceed requirements of most stringent.
E. Where both a standard and a brand name are specified for a product in
Contract Documents, proprietary product named shall meet or exceed
requirements of specified reference standard.
F. Copies of standards and specifications of technical societies:
1. Copies of applicable referenced standards have not been bound in these
Contract Documents.
2. Where copies of standards are needed by Contractor, obtain a copy or
copies directly from publication source and maintain in an orderly
manner at the Site as Work Site records, available to Contractor’s
personnel, Subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 42 13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Abbreviations for trade organizations and government agencies: Following is
a list of construction industry organizations and government agencies to which
references may be made in the Contract Documents, with abbreviations used.
1. AA Aluminum Association
2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers
Association
4. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
5. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers’ Association
6. ACI American Concrete Institute
7. AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
8. AGA American Gas Association
9. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers’ Association
10. AI Asphalt Institute
11. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
12. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
13. AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
14. ALS American Lumber Standards
15. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
16. ANSI American National Standards Institute
17. APA APA – The Engineered Wood Association
18. API American Petroleum Institute
19. APWA American Public Works Association
20. AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute
21. ASA Acoustical Society of America
22. ASABE American Society of Agricultural and Biological
Engineers
23. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
24. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
25. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
26. ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
27. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
28. ASTM ASTM International
29. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
30. AWPA American Wood Preservers’ Association
31. AWPI American Wood Preservers’ Institute
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS PW/WBG/426399
01 42 13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
32. AWS American Welding Society
33. AWWA American Water Works Association
34. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
35. CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturer
36. CDA Copper Development Association
37. CGA Compressed Gas Association
38. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
39. CMAA Crane Manufacturers’ Association of America
40. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
41. CS Commercial Standard
42. CSA Canadian Standards Association
43. CSI Construction Specifications Institute
44. DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.
45. DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
46. EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
47. EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents’ Committee
48. ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
49. FAA Federal Aviation Administration
50. FCC Federal Communications Commission
51. FDA Food and Drug Administration
52. FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
53. FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
54. FM FM Global
55. Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications (FAA Specifications)
56. FS Federal Specifications and Standards
(Technical Specifications)
57. GA Gypsum Association
58. GANA Glass Association of North America
59. HI Hydraulic Institute
60. HMI Hoist Manufacturers’ Institute
61. IBC International Building Code
62. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
63. ICC International Code Council
64. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers’ Association
65. IFC International Fire Code
66. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
67. IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
68. IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute
69. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturer’s Alliance
70. IMC International Mechanical Code
71. INDA Association of the Nonwoven Fabrics Industry
PW/WBG/426399 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 42 13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
72. IPC International Plumbing Code
73. ISA International Society of Automation
74. ISO International Organization for Standardization
75. ITL Independent Testing Laboratory
76. JIC Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic
Manufacturers
77. MIA Marble Institute of America
78. MIL Military Specifications
79. MMA Monorail Manufacturers’ Association
80. MSS Manufacturer’s Standardization Society
81. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
82. NACE NACE International
83. NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association
84. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
85. NEC National Electrical Code
86. NECA National Electrical Contractor’s Association
87. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
88. NESC National Electrical Safety Code
89. NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
90. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
91. NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
92. NICET National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies
93. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
94. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
95. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories
96. NSF NSF International
97. NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers
98. NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
99. NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
100. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act (both
Federal and State)
101. PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
102. PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
103. PPI Plastic Pipe Institute
104. PS Product Standards Section-U.S. Department of
Commerce
105. RMA Rubber Manufacturers’ Association
106. RUS Rural Utilities Service
107. SAE SAE International
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS PW/WBG/426399
01 42 13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
108. SDI Steel Deck Institute
109. SDI Steel Door Institute
110. SJI Steel Joist Institute
111. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association
112. SPI Society of the Plastics Industry
113. SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings
114. STI/SPFA Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators
Association
115. SWI Steel Window Institute
116. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers’ Association
117. TCA Tile Council of North America
118. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
119. UBC Uniform Building Code
120. UFC Uniform Fire Code
121. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
122. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
123. USBR U.S. Bureau of Reclamation
124. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
125. WI Wood Institute
126. WWPA Western Wood Products Association
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 42 13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 43 33
MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Training Schedule: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this
Specification, not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment
installation and revise as necessary for acceptance.
2. Lesson Plan: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this
Specification, proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to
scheduled training and revise as necessary for acceptance.
3. Training Session Recordings: Furnish Owner with two complete sets of
recordings fully indexed and cataloged with printed label stating session
and date recorded.
1.03 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and
experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and
maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, with full
authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications required of
the manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual
specification section.
B. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute
representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been
given.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturers’ services, when required by an individual specification
section, to meet the requirements of this section.
PW/WBG/426399 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 43 33 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for
manufacturers’ services, or when a minimum time is not specified, time
required to perform specified services shall be considered incidental.
C. Schedule manufacturer’ services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or
other manufacturers’ onsite services.
D. Determine, before scheduling services, that conditions necessary to allow
successful testing have been met.
E. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill
specified minimum services.
F. When specified in individual specification sections, manufacturer’s onsite
services shall include:
1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component)
installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor’s
assembly, erection, installation or application procedures.
2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system,
subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and
necessary to furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of manufacturers’ representatives
field notes and data to Owner.
4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation
and operation are acceptable to Engineer.
5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to or
associated with respective manufacturer’s products and systems.
6. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility
startup and evaluation.
7. Training of Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of
respective product as required.
3.02 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a copy of
which is attached to this section, shall be completed in full, signed by entity
supplying the product, material, or service, and submitted prior to shipment of
product or material or execution of the services.
B. Engineer may permit use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling
and testing if accompanied by accepted certification of compliance.
MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/426399
01 43 33 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Such form shall certify proposed product, material, or service complies with
that specified. Attach supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications
as appropriate.
D. May reflect recent or previous test results on material or product, if acceptable
to Engineer.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation form, a
copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by
equipment manufacturer’s representative.
B. Such form shall certify signing party is a duly authorized representative of
manufacturer, is empowered by manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate
their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to
ensure equipment is complete and operational.
3.04 TRAINING
A. General:
1. Furnish manufacturers’ representatives for detailed classroom and
hands-on training to Owner’s personnel on operation and maintenance
of specified product (system, subsystem, component) and as may be
required in applicable Specifications.
2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training,
to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and
familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified
in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.
3. Manufacturer’s representative shall be familiar with facility operation
and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment.
4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and
maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee.
B. Training Schedule:
1. List specified equipment and systems that require training services and
show:
a. Respective manufacturer.
b. Estimated dates for installation completion.
c. Estimated training dates.
2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved.
PW/WBG/426399 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 43 33 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed
necessary by Owner, and to allow full participation by manufacturers’
representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of
equipment.
4. Coordinate with Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress
Documentation, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility
Startup.
C. Lesson Plan: When manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is
specified, prepare a lesson plan for each required course containing the
following minimum information:
1. Title and objectives.
2. Recommended attendees (such as, managers, engineers, operators,
maintenance).
3. Course description, outline of course content, and estimated class
duration.
4. Format (such as, lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on).
5. Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
6. Resumes of instructors providing training.
D. Prestartup Training:
1. Coordinate training sessions with Owner’s operating personnel and
manufacturers’ representatives, and with submission of operation and
maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation
and Maintenance Data.
2. Complete at least 14 days prior to beginning of facility startup.
E. Post-startup Training: If required in Specifications, furnish and coordinate
training of Owner’s operating personnel by respective manufacturer’s
representatives.
F. Recording of Training Sessions:
1. Furnish audio and color recording of prestartup and post-startup
instruction sessions, including manufacturers’ representatives’ hands-on
equipment instruction and classroom sessions.
2. Use DVD format suitable for playback on standard equipment available
commercially in the United States. Blu-ray® DVD format is not
acceptable without Engineer’s prior approval.
3. DVD may contain multiple training sessions. If multiple training
sessions included on a DVD, provide with on-screen menu for playback
selection.
MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/426399
01 43 33 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section”, are part of this
Specification.
1. Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
2. Form: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 43 33 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
OWNER: PRODUCT, MATERIAL, OR SERVICE
SUBMITTED:
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT NO:
Comments:
I hereby certify that the above-referenced product, material, or service called for by the
Contract for the named Project will be furnished in accordance with all applicable
requirements. I further certify that the product, material, or service are of the quality
specified and conform in all respects with the Contract requirements, and are in the
quantity shown.
Date of Execution: ________________________________________, 20___
Manufacturer:
Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative (print):
(Authorized Signature)
PW/WBG/426399 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 43 33 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO:
EQPT TAG NO: EQPT/SYSTEM:
PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION:
I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been:
(Check Applicable)
Installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Inspected, checked, and adjusted.
Serviced with proper initial lubricants.
Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards.
All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed.
Functional tests.
System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance
requirements. (When complete system of one manufacturer)
Note: Attach any performance test documentation from manufacturer.
Comments:
I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly
authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to
inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and (iii) authorized to make
recommendations required to ensure equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete
and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all
information contained herein is true and accurate.
Date: _________________________________, 20___
Manufacturer:
By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)
PW/WBG/426399 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 43 33 SUPPLEMENT 02 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 45 16.13
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and
Construction.
b. E329, Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies
as Used in Construction.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The means by which Contractor ensures
that the construction, to include that performed by subcontractors and
suppliers, complies with the requirements of the Contract.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. CQC Plan: Submit, not later than 30 days after receipt of Notice to
Proceed.
2. CQC Report: Submit, weekly, an original and one copy in report form.
1.04 OWNER’S QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All Work is subject to Owner’s quality assurance inspection and testing at all
locations and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict
compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents.
B. Owner’s quality assurance inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of
Owner and do not:
1. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality
control measures;
2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the
material before acceptance;
3. Constitute or imply acceptance; or
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 45 16.13 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Affect the continuing rights of Owner after acceptance of the completed
Work.
C. The presence or absence of a quality assurance inspector does not relieve
Contractor from any Contract requirement.
D. Promptly furnish all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for
performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required
by Engineer.
E. Owner may charge Contractor for any additional cost of inspection or test
when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or
test, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Quality
assurance inspections and tests will be performed in a manner that will not
unnecessarily delay the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will
ensure that the Work conforms to the Contract Documents.
B. Maintain complete inspection records and make them available at all times to
Owner and Engineer.
C. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization
necessary to produce an end product that complies with the Contract
Documents. The system shall cover all construction and demolition
operations, both onsite and offsite, including Work by subcontractors,
fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents, and shall be keyed to the
proposed construction sequence.
3.02 COORDINATION MEETING
A. After the Preconstruction Conference, but before start of construction, and
prior to acceptance of the CQC Plan, schedule a meeting with Engineer and
Owner to discuss the quality control system.
B. Develop a mutual understanding of the system details, including the forms for
recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing, administration of the
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
01 45 16.13 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
system for both onsite and offsite Work, and the interrelationship of
Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance.
C. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences may be called by either
party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the
CQC system or procedures that may require corrective action by Contractor.
3.03 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
A. CQC System Manager:
1. Designate an individual within Contractor’s organization who will be
responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to
act in CQC matters for the Contractor.
2. CQC System Manager may perform other duties on the Project.
3. CQC System Manager shall be an experienced construction person, with
a minimum of 3 years construction experience on similar type Work.
4. CQC System Manager shall report to the Contractor’s project manager
or someone higher in the organization. Project manager in this context
shall mean the individual with responsibility for the overall quality and
production management of the Project.
5. CQC System Manager shall be onsite during construction; periods of
absence may not exceed 2 weeks at any one time.
6. Identify an alternate for CQC System Manager to serve with full
authority during the System Manager’s absence. The requirements for
the alternate will be the same as for designated CQC System Manager.
B. CQC Staff:
1. Designate a CQC staff, available at the Site at all times during progress,
with complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure
compliance with the Contract. CQC staff members shall be subject to
acceptance by Engineer.
2. CQC staff shall take direction from CQC System Manager in matters
pertaining to QC.
3. CQC staff must be of sufficient size to ensure adequate QC coverage of
Work phases, work shifts, and work crews involved in the construction.
These personnel may perform other duties, but must be fully qualified
by experience and technical training to perform their assigned QC
responsibilities and must be allowed sufficient time to carry out these
responsibilities.
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 45 16.13 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. The actual strength of the CQC staff may vary during any specific Work
period to cover the needs of the Project. Add additional staff when
necessary for a proper CQC organization.
C. Organizational Changes: Obtain Engineer’s acceptance before replacing any
member of the CQC staff. Requests for changes shall include name,
qualifications, duties, and responsibilities of the proposed replacement.
3.04 QUALITY CONTROL PHASING
A. CQC shall include at least three phases of control to be conducted by CQC
System Manager for all definable features of Work, as follows:
1. Preparatory Phase:
a. Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning any of the
required action of the preparatory phase.
b. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System
Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC
personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the
definable feature. The CQC System Manager shall instruct
applicable CQC staff as to the acceptable level of workmanship
required in order to meet Contract requirements.
c. Document the results of the preparatory phase meeting by separate
minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to
the QC report.
d. Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of
Work:
1) Review applicable Contract Specifications.
2) Review applicable Contract Drawings.
3) Verify that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,
submitted, and approved.
4) Verify that provisions have been made to provide required
control inspection and testing.
5) Examine the Work area to verify that all required
preliminary Work has been completed and is in compliance
with the Contract.
6) Perform a physical examination of required materials,
equipment, and sample Work to verify that they are on
hand, conform to approved Shop Drawing or submitted
data, and are properly stored.
7) Review the appropriate activity hazard analysis to verify
safety requirements are met.
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
01 45 16.13 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8) Review procedures for constructing the Work, including
repetitive deficiencies.
9) Document construction tolerances and workmanship
standards for that phase of the Work.
10) Check to verify that the plan for the Work to be performed,
if so required, has been accepted by Engineer.
2. Initial Phase:
a. Accomplish at the beginning of a definable feature of Work:
1) Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the
initial phase.
2) Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature
of Work:
a) Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b) Check preliminary Work to verify compliance with
Contract requirements.
c) Verify required control inspection and testing.
d) Establish level of workmanship and verify that it
meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards.
Comparison with sample panels is appropriate.
e) Resolve all differences.
f) Check safety to include compliance with and
upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard
analysis. Review the activity analysis with each
worker.
3) Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC
System Manager and attached to the QC report. Exact
location of initial phase shall be indicated for future
reference and comparison with follow-up phases.
4) The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to
work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality
standards are not being met.
3. Follow-up Phase:
a. Perform daily checks to verify continuing compliance with
Contract requirements, including control testing, until completion
of the particular feature of Work.
b. Daily checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC
documentation and shall document specific results of inspections
for all features of Work for the day or shift.
c. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior
to the start of additional features of Work that will be affected by
the deficient Work. Constructing upon or concealing
nonconforming Work will not be allowed.
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 45 16.13 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases: Additional preparatory and
initial phases may be conducted on the same definable features of Work
as determined by Owner if the quality of ongoing Work is unacceptable;
or if there are changes in the applicable QC staff or in the onsite
production supervision or work crew; or if work on a definable feature
is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems
develop.
3.05 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
A. General:
1. Plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, test,
records, and forms to be used.
2. An interim plan for the first 30 days of operation will be considered.
3. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the
CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular
feature of Work to be started.
4. Work outside of the features of Work included in an accepted interim
plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or
another interim plan containing the additional features of Work to be
started.
B. Content:
1. Plan shall cover the intended CQC organization for the entire Contract
and shall include the following, as a minimum:
a. Organization: Description of the quality control organization,
including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment
that the CQC staff will implement the three-phase control system
(see Paragraph QC Phasing) for all aspects of the Work specified.
b. CQC Staff: The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties,
responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a QC
function.
c. Letters of Authority: A copy of a letter to the CQC System
Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm, describing
the responsibilities and delegating sufficient authorities to
adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager,
including authority to stop Work which is not in compliance with
the Contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of
direction to all other various quality control representatives
outlining duties, authorities and responsibilities. Copies of these
letters will also be furnished to Owner.
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
01 45 16.13 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. Submittals: Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and
managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite
fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents.
e. Testing: Control, verification and acceptance testing procedures
for each specific test to include the test name, frequency,
specification paragraph containing the test requirements, the
personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test, and an
estimate of the number of tests required.
f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control
phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests, including
documentation.
g. Procedures for tracking deficiencies from identification through
acceptable corrective action. These procedures will establish
verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.
h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats;
include a copy of the CQC report form.
C. Acceptance of Plans: Acceptance of the Contractor’s basic and addendum
CQC plans is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is
conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the
construction. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes
in the CQC plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary,
to obtain the quality specified.
D. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, Contractor shall
notify Engineer, in writing, a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to any
proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by Engineer.
3.06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT
A. As a minimum, prepare a CQC report for every 7 calendar days. Account for
all days throughout the life of the Contract. Reports shall be signed and dated
by CQC System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports
prepared by QC staff.
B. Maintain current records of quality control operations, activities, and tests
performed, including the Work of subcontractors and suppliers.
C. Records shall be on an acceptable form and shall be a complete description of
inspections, the results of inspections, daily activities, tests, and other items,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Contractor/subcontractor and their areas of responsibility.
2. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 45 16.13 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Work performed today, giving location, description, and by whom.
When a network schedule is used, identify each phase of Work
performed each day by activity number.
4. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to
specifications/plan requirements. The control phase should be identified
(Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List deficiencies noted along with
corrective action.
5. Material received with statement as to its acceptability and storage.
6. Identify submittals reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and
action taken.
7. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
8. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and
instructions or corrective actions.
9. List instructions given/received and conflicts in Drawings and/or
Specifications.
10. Contractor’s verification statement.
11. Indicate a description of trades working on the Project; the number of
personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays
encountered.
12. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and
shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in
file work and workmanship comply with the Contract.
3.07 SUBMITTAL QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals
are in compliance with the Contract requirements. Owner will furnish copies
of test report forms upon request by Contractor. Contractor may use other
forms as approved.
3.08 TESTING QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Procedure:
1. Perform tests specified or required to verify that control measures are
adequate to provide a product which conforms to Contract requirements.
Perform the following activities and record the following data:
a. Verify testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b. Verify facilities and testing equipment are available and comply
with testing standards.
c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
01 45 16.13 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. Verify recording forms and test identification control number
system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have
been prepared.
e. Documentation:
1) Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing, on
the CQC report for the date taken.
2) Include specification paragraph reference, location where
tests were taken, and the sequential control number
identifying the test.
3) Actual test reports may be submitted later, if approved by
Engineer, with a reference to the test number and date taken.
4) Provide directly to Engineer an information copy of tests
performed by an offsite or commercial test facility. Test
results shall be signed by an engineer registered in the state
where the tests are performed.
5) Failure to submit timely test reports, as stated, may result in
nonpayment for related Work performed and disapproval of
the test facility for this Contract.
B. Testing Laboratories: Laboratory facilities, including personnel and
equipment, utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt and steel shall meet
criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329, and be accredited by the
American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program (NVLAP), the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or other approved national
accreditation authority. Personnel performing concrete testing shall be
certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI).
3.09 COMPLETION INSPECTION
A. CQC System Manager shall conduct an inspection of the Work at the
completion of all Work or any milestone established by a completion time
stated in the Contract.
B. Punchlist:
1. CQC System Manager shall develop a punchlist of items which do not
conform to the Contract requirements.
2. Include punchlist in the CQC report, indicating the estimated date by
which the deficiencies will be corrected.
PW/WBG/426399 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 45 16.13 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to
ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the
Owner.
4. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required will be
accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire Work
or any particular increment thereof if the Project is divided into
increments by separate completion dates.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
01 45 16.13 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 45 33
SPECIAL INSPECTION, OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section covers requirements for Special Inspection, Observation, and
Testing required in accordance with Chapter 17 of the 2009 International
Building Code and is in addition to and supplements requirements included in
Statement of Special Inspections (Plan) shown on Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. International Code Council (ICC):
a. 2009 International Building Code (IBC).
b. Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Reports and Legacy Reports.
2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7-05, Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Agencies and Personnel:
1. Approved Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly
engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, when
such agency has been approved.
2. Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge: An individual
who is registered or licensed to practice their respective design
profession as defined by the statutory requirements of the professional
registration laws of the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is to be
constructed.
3. Special Inspector: Qualified person employed by Owner who will
demonstrate competence to the satisfaction of the building official for
inspection of a particular type of construction or operation requiring
Special Inspection.
PW/WBG/426399 SPECIAL INSPECTION,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 45 33 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Special Inspection:
1. Special Inspection: Inspection required of materials, installation,
fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections
requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved Contract
Documents and referenced standards.
2. Special Inspection, Continuous: Full-time observation of work requiring
Special Inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in
the area where the Work is being performed.
3. Special Inspection, Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of
work requiring Special Inspection by an approved Special Inspector
who is present in the area where the Work has been or is being
performed, and at the completion of the Work.
C. Structural Systems and Components:
1. Diaphragm: Component of structural lateral load resisting system
consisting of roof, floor, or other membrane or bracing system acting to
transfer lateral forces to vertical resisting elements of structure.
2. Drag Strut or Collector: Component of structural lateral load resisting
system consisting of a diaphragm or shear wall element that collects and
transfers diaphragm shear forces to vertical force-resisting elements or
distributes forces within diaphragm or shear wall.
3. Seismic-Force-Resisting System: That part of structural lateral load
resisting system that has been considered in the design to provide
required resistance to seismic forces identified on Drawings.
4. Shear Wall: Component of structural lateral load resisting system
consisting of a wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane
of the wall. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, load-bearing walls
with direct in-plane connections to roof and floors shall be considered to
be shear walls.
5. Wind Force Resisting System: That part of the structural system that has
been considered in the design to provide required resistance to wind
forces identified on Drawings.
D. Nonstructural Components:
1. Architectural Component Supports: Structural members or assemblies
of members which transmit loads and forces from architectural systems
or components to the structure, including braces, frames, struts, and
attachments.
2. Electrical Component Supports: Structural members or assemblies
which transmit loads and forces from electrical equipment to the
SPECIAL INSPECTION, PW/WBG/426399
OBSERVATION, AND TESTING OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 45 33 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
structure, including braces, frames, legs, pedestals, and tethers, as well
as elements forged or cast as part of component for anchorage.
3. Mechanical Component Supports: Structural members or assemblies
which transmit loads and forces from mechanical equipment to the
structure, including braces, frames, skirts, legs, saddles, pedestals,
snubbers, and tethers, as well as elements forged or cast as part of
component for anchorage.
E. Professional Observation:
1. Does not include or waive responsibility for required Special Inspection
or inspections by building official.
2. Requirements are indicated on Statement of Special Inspections (Plan)
provided on Drawings.
3. Geotechnical Observation: Visual observation of selected subgrade
bearing surfaces by a registered design professional for general
conformance to Contract Documents.
4. Structural Observation: Visual observation of structural system(s) by a
registered design professional for general conformance to Contract
Documents.
5. Statement of Special Inspections (Plan): Detailed written procedure
contained on Drawings establishing systems and components subject to
Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing during construction, type
and frequency of testing, extent and duration of Special Inspection, and
reports to be completed and distributed by Special Inspector.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility: Form shall be completed by
general contractor responsible for construction, listed in Statement of
Special Inspections (Plan). Refer to Article Supplements located at end
of section.
PW/WBG/426399 SPECIAL INSPECTION,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 45 33 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS (PLAN) REQUIREMENTS
A. Statement of Special Inspections (Plan):
1. As included in Drawings and in support of the building permit
application, the Project specific plan was prepared by the registered
design professional in responsible charge. The following identifies
elements of the inspection, observation, and testing program to be
followed in construction of the Work:
a. Special Inspection and testing required by IBC Section 1704 and
Section 1708, and other applicable sections and referenced
standards therein.
b. Type and frequency of Special Inspection required.
c. Type and frequency of testing required.
d. Required frequency and distribution of testing and Special
Inspection reports to be distributed by Special Inspector to
Engineer, Contractor, building official, and Owner.
B. Special Inspection and associated testing of shop fabrication and field
construction will be performed by an approved accredited independent
agency. Owner will secure and pay for the services of the agency to perform
Special Inspection and associated testing.
C. Owner’s plan for code required Special Inspection with associated testing and
Professional Observation, as provided in Statement of Special Inspections
(Plan) on Drawings and further provided in this section, is for the sole benefit
of Owner and does not:
1. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality
control measures.
2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of material
before acceptance.
3. Constitute or imply acceptance.
4. Affect continuing rights of Owner after acceptance of completed Work.
D. The presence or absence of code required Special Inspector and Professional
Observer does not relieve Contractor from Contract requirements.
E. Contractor is responsible for additional costs associated with Special
Inspection, Testing, and Observation when Work is not ready at time
identified by Contractor, and Special Inspectors and Professional Observer are
on Site but not able to provide contracted services.
SPECIAL INSPECTION, PW/WBG/426399
OBSERVATION, AND TESTING OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 45 33 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Contractor is responsible for associated costs for additional Special
Inspection, Testing, and Professional Observation by Special Inspectors and
Professional Observers required due to rejection of materials of in place Work
that cannot be made compliant to Contract Document without additional Site
visits or testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide access to shop or Site for Special Inspection, Testing, and
Professional Observation.
B. Notify Engineer in advance of required Special Inspection and Professional
Observation no later than 48 hours prior to date of Special Inspection and
Professional Observation.
C. When required by Registered Design Professional, provide access for
mechanical and electrical component inspections for those items requiring
certification.
D. Materials and systems, inclusive, shall be inspected during placement where
Continuous Special Inspection is required.
E. Materials and systems shall be inspected during or at completion of their
placement where Periodic Special Inspection is allowed.
1. Periodic Special Inspection shall be performed so that Work inspected
after, but not during, its placement can be corrected prior to other related
Work proceeding and covering inspected Work.
2. Periodic Special Inspection does not allow sampling of a portion of the
Work. All Work shall be inspected.
3.02 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this
Specification:
1. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 SPECIAL INSPECTION,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 45 33 - 5
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY
(Project)
(Name of Contracting Company)
(Business Address)
(_____) (_____)
(Telephone) (Fax)
I, (We) hereby certify that I am (we are) aware of the Special Inspection, Testing, and
Professional Observation requirements contained in Contract Documents for this
Project, as listed in Statement of Special Inspections (Plan) on Drawings, and that:
1. Control of this Work will be exercised to obtain conformance with the
Contract Documents approved by the building official.
2. Procedures to be used for exercising control of the Work, the method and
frequency of reporting, and distribution of reports required under the
Statement of Special Inspections (Plan) for this Project are attached.
3. I, (We) will provide 48-hour notification to Engineer and approved agency as
required for structural tests and Special Inspection for this Project.
4. The following person is hereby identified as exercising control over the
requirements of this section for the Work designated above:
Name:
Qualifications:
(Print name and official title of person signing this form)
Signed by:
Date:
Project Name:
PW/WBG/426399 SPECIAL INSPECTION,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 45 33 SUPPLEMENT - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA): American
Standards for Nursery Stock.
2. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA).
3. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA): 241, Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.
4. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 568-C, Commercial
Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
5. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA): Urban Hydrology for Small
Watersheds.
6. U.S. Weather Bureau: Rainfall-Frequency Atlas of the U.S. for
Durations from 30 Minutes to 24 Hours and Return Periods from 1 to
100 Years.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Copies of permits and approvals for construction as required by Laws
and Regulations and governing agencies.
2. Temporary Utility Submittals: Dewatering well locations and sanitary.
3. Temporary Construction Submittals:
a. Contractor’s field office, storage yard, and storage building plans,
including gravel surfaced area.
b. Fencing and protective barrier locations and details.
c. Staging area location plan.
d. Plan for maintenance of existing plant operations.
4. Temporary Control Submittals:
a. Noise control plan.
b. Dust control plan.
c. Plan for disposal of waste materials and intended haul routes.
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 50 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 MOBILIZATION
A. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, these principal items:
1. Obtaining required permits.
2. Moving Contractor’s field office and equipment required for first month
operations onto Site.
3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
4. Providing onsite communication facilities, including telephones.
5. Providing onsite sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as
specified and as required by Laws and Regulations, and governing
agencies.
6. Arranging for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard.
7. Posting OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs and
procedures.
8. Having Contractor’s superintendent at Site full time.
1.04 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Comply with Owner’s safety rules while on Owner’s property.
B. Keep Owner informed of serious onsite accidents and related claims.
C. Use of Explosives: No blasting or use of explosives will be allowed onsite.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Power: Electric power will be available at or near Site. Determine type and
amount available and make arrangements for obtaining temporary electric
power service as necessary. Available power is limited to 5 hp motors.
B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting to meet applicable safety requirements to
allow erection, application, or installation of materials and equipment, and
observation or inspection of the Work.
C. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating:
1. Provide as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to
facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW/WBG/426399
01 50 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
for installation of materials, and to protect materials, equipment, and
finishes from damage because of temperature or humidity.
2. Provide adequate forced air ventilation of enclosed areas to cure
installed materials, to dispense humidity, and to prevent hazardous
accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
3. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation, removal, and fuel
consumed.
4. Provide portable unit heaters, complete with controls, oil- or gas-fired,
and suitably vented to outside as required for protection of health and
property.
5. If permanent natural gas piping is used for temporary heating units, do
not modify or reroute gas piping without approval of utility company.
Provide separate gas metering as required by utility.
D. Water: Potable water is not available onsite. Contractor to provide potable
water as necessary.
E. Sanitary and Personnel Facilities: Provide and maintain facilities for
Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, and other onsite employees. Service,
clean, and maintain facilities and enclosures. Use of Owner's existing sanitary
facilities by construction personnel will not be allowed.
F. Telephone Service:
1. Contractor: Arrange and provide onsite telephone service for use during
construction. Pay costs of installation and monthly bills.
2. No incoming calls allowed to Owner’s plant telephone system.
G. Fire Protection: Furnish and maintain on Site adequate firefighting equipment
capable of extinguishing incipient fires. Comply with applicable parts of
NFPA 241.
3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. General:
1. Perform Work within right-of-way and easements in a systematic
manner that minimizes inconvenience to property owners and the public.
2. No residence or business shall be cut off from vehicular traffic for a
period exceeding 4 hours, unless special arrangements have been made.
3. Maintain in continuous service existing oil and gas pipelines,
underground power, telephone or communication cable, water mains,
irrigation lines, sewers, poles and overhead power, and other utilities
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 50 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
encountered along line of the Work, unless other arrangements
satisfactory to owners of said utilities have been made.
4. Where completion of the Work requires temporary or permanent
removal or relocation of existing utility, coordinate activities with owner
of said utility and perform work to their satisfaction.
5. Protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain underground pipes,
conduits, drains, and other underground utility construction uncovered
or otherwise affected by construction operations.
6. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and
available for use at all times.
7. In areas where Contractor’s operations are adjacent to or near a utility,
such as gas, telephone, television, electric power, water, sewer, or
irrigation system, and such operations may cause damage or
inconvenience, suspend operations until arrangements necessary for
protection have been made by Contractor.
8. Notify property owners and utility offices that may be affected by
construction operation at least 2 days in advance: Before exposing a
utility, obtain utility owner’s permission. Should service of utility be
interrupted due to Contractor’s operation, notify proper authority
immediately. Cooperate with said authority in restoring service as
promptly as possible and bear costs incurred.
9. Do not impair operation of existing sewer system. Prevent construction
material, pavement, concrete, earth, volatile and corrosive wastes, and
other debris from entering sewers, pump stations, or other sewer
structures.
10. Maintain original Site drainage wherever possible.
B. Barricades and Lights:
1. Provide as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas
and affected roads, streets, and alleyways, inside and outside of fenced
area, and as required to ensure public safety and the safety of
Contractor’s employees, other employer’s employees, and others who
may be affected by the Work.
2. Provide to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from
potential damage.
3. Locate to enable access by facility operators and property owners.
4. Protect streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are
closed to traffic by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW/WBG/426399
01 50 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Locate barricades at the nearest intersecting public thoroughfare on each
side of blocked section.
6. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset
to sunrise.
C. Trees and Plantings: Protect from damage and preserve trees, shrubs, and
other plants outside limits of the Work and within limits of the Work, which
are designated on Drawings to remain undisturbed.
D. Existing Structures:
1. Where Contractor contemplates removal of small structures such as
signposts and culverts that interfere with Contractor’s operations, obtain
approval of property owner and Engineer.
2. Replace items removed in their original location and a condition equal
to or better than original.
E. Finished Construction: Protect finished floors and concrete floors exposed as
well as those covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing.
F. Dewatering: Construct, maintain, and operate cofferdams, channels, flume
drains, sumps, pumps, or other temporary diversion and protection works.
Furnish materials required, install, maintain, and operate necessary pumping
and other equipment for the environmentally safe removal and disposal of
water from the various parts of the Work. Maintain foundations and parts of
the Work free from water.
3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Air Pollution Control:
1. Minimize air pollution from construction operations.
2. Burning of waste materials, rubbish, or other debris will not be
permitted on or adjacent to Site.
3. Conduct operations of dumping rock and of carrying rock away in trucks
to cause a minimum of dust. Give unpaved streets, roads, detours, or
haul roads used in construction area a dust-preventive treatment or
periodically water to prevent dust. Strictly adhere to applicable
environmental regulations for dust prevention.
4. Provide and maintain temporary dust-tight partitions, bulkheads, or
other protective devices during construction to permit normal operation
of existing facilities. Construct partitions of plywood, insulating board,
plastic sheets, or similar material. Construct partitions in such a manner
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 50 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
that dust and dirt from demolition and cutting will not enter other parts
of existing building or facilities. Remove temporary partitions as soon as
need no longer exists.
B. Noise Control: Provide acoustical barriers so noise emanating from tools or
equipment will not exceed legal noise levels.
C. Water Pollution Control:
1. Divert sanitary sewage and nonstorm waste flow interfering with
construction and requiring diversion to sanitary sewers. Do not cause or
permit action to occur which would cause an overflow to existing
waterway.
2. Prior to commencing excavation and construction, obtain Owner’s
agreement with detailed plans showing procedures intended to handle
and dispose of sewage, groundwater, and dewatering pump discharges.
3. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, chemicals,
or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. Disposal of wastes into
streams or waterways is prohibited. Provide acceptable containers for
collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
D. Erosion, Sediment, and Flood Control: Provide, maintain, and operate
temporary facilities to control erosion and sediment releases, and to protect the
Work and existing facilities from flooding during construction period.
3.04 STAGING AREA, STORAGE YARDS AND BUILDINGS
A. Staging Area: Contractor to keep equipment and materials in an Owner
approved location to be designated in the pre-construction conference.
B. Staging areas must be constructed with an all-weather surface that is durable
and will adequately protect the stored materials and equipment.
C. Temporary Storage Yards: Construct temporary storage yards for storage of
products that are not subject to damage by weather conditions.
D. Temporary Storage Buildings:
1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of
manufacturers of equipment and materials stored.
2. Arrange or partition to provide security of contents and ready access for
inspection and inventory.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PW/WBG/426399
01 50 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Store combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels) in a well-ventilated
and remote building meeting safety standards.
3.05 ACCESS
A. Coordinate with Owner detours and other operations affecting access. Provide
at least 72 hours’ notice to Engineer of operations that will alter access to Site.
3.06 PARKING AREAS
A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with traffic or parking,
access by emergency vehicles, Owner’s operations, or construction operations.
3.07 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. In accordance with General Conditions, as may be specified in other
Specification sections, and as required herein.
B. Wet down exterior surfaces prior to sweeping to prevent blowing of dust and
debris. At least weekly, sweep floors (basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways,
roof surfaces), and pick up and dispose of debris.
C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials,
debris, and rubbish. At least weekly, dispose of such waste materials, debris,
and rubbish offsite.
D. At least weekly, brush sweep entry drive, roadways, and other streets and
walkways affected by the Work and where adjacent to the Work.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 50 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 55 00
SITE SECURITY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. This section covers Contractor work requirements regarding Site security.
1.02 SITE SECURITY
A. Background Checks:
1. Contractor shall hire an independent security firm (specialist) to perform
background checks on all employees, subcontractors, vendors, delivery
personnel, or others required to have regular and full access to Site.
2. Contractor shall submit a written plan to the Owner’s construction Site
representative for review and approval. The plan shall outline
procedures proposed for conducting background checks. Submittal shall
also contain name and qualifications of the security firm that will
perform background checks.
3. The background checks shall verify U.S. citizen or appropriate work
visa, and shall check for outstanding warrants (both local and national),
and known ties to terrorist groups. Only personnel who are legally
allowed to work in the U.S. and whose background is clear of the listed
items shall be allowed to obtain security badges and gain full access to
the Site. The Contractor shall provide a list to the Owner with personnel
proposed to have Site access privileges. The Contractor must further
certify that a background check has determined each individual is clear
of the listed items.
B. Security Badges:
1. Security badges shall be worn at all times by onsite personnel
(Contractor employees, subcontractors, vendors, and others required to
have access to Site). Only personnel that pass specified background
check shall be allowed to wear security badges. Background check not
required for “GUEST” badges.
2. Personnel will not be allowed to access Site without security badges.
Personnel found onsite without badges are to be immediately removed
from Site.
3. Security badges shall be issued by the Owner. Contractor shall schedule
arrangements with plant staff.
PW/WBG/426399 SITE SECURITY
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 55 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Badges containing the word “GUEST” in lieu of a photo can be used for
personnel whose activities are contained between the main plant gate
and secondary security gate. Personnel with guest badges are not
allowed beyond secondary security gates unless continuously escorted
by member of Contractor’s staff who has a regular security badge with
photo.
C. Vehicular Access:
1. Contractor vehicles to be confined to current work areas when behind
secondary security gates.
2. Contractor may request from Owner vehicle pass approval for any
vehicle that is needed for regular construction activities. If approved,
Owner will track passes by vehicle license plate. Contractor to provide
12-inch-square magnetic emblem with Contractor’s logo on driver and
passenger doors of approved vehicles.
3. Any vehicle outside of specified area without a pass will be immediately
removed from Site.
4. Deliveries will only be allowed Monday through Friday between
7:30 a.m. and 3:00 p.m.
D. Security requirements subject to change depending on national security
concerns.
E. Contractor to coordinate and address timing of meeting security procedures in
schedule to allow for unhindered flow of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SITE SECURITY PW/WBG/426399
01 55 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 57 28
TEMPORARY SANITARY SEWER FLOW CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM): D3350, Standard Specification for
Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C110/A21.20, ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron
Fittings, 3 in. - 48 in. (76 mm - 1219 mm), for Water.
b. C111/A21.11, ANSI Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
c. C151/A21.51, ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Flow Control: Procedure and method to reduce or eliminate flow in a
downstream facility to a level adequate for proper inspection and
rehabilitation.
B. Temporary Bypass Pumping: Flow control method that uses a temporary
bypass pumping system.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. It is essential to operation of existing sewerage system that there be no
interruption in flow of sewage throughout duration of Project.
B. Provide, maintain, and operate temporary facilities such as dams, plugs,
pumping equipment conduits, and necessary power to intercept sewage flow
before it reaches point where it would interfere with the Work.
C. Maintain sewer flow around Work area in a manner that will not cause
surcharging of sewers, damage to sewers, and that will protect public and
private property from damage.
D. Protect water resources, wetlands, and other natural resources.
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY SANITARY
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SEWER FLOW CONTROL
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 57 28 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Flow Control Plan: Submit at least 2 weeks prior to controlling flows.
Include, as a minimum, the following:
a. Peak Amount of Flow to be Controlled: 25 mgd.
b. Detailed procedures for handling peak estimated flow.
c. Schedule.
d. Drawing of plug and/or bypass pump and pipeline locations.
e. Listing of equipment.
1) Bypass pump sizes, capacities, number of each size to be
onsite, and power requirements including standby
equipment.
2) Bypass pipeline sizes and material types.
f. Sewer user notification plan.
g. Operation plan.
h. Emergency procedures.
2. Permits to locate and operate flow control system.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Temporary Bypass Pumping provided by the Contractor will be required for
demolition of the existing discharge header and installation of the stop log
structure in the screen distribution channel. The sequencing or schedule for
isolating the screen distribution channel will be discussed and agreed to during
the Preconstruction Conference.
1. Bypass pumping will be from the wet well to each of the screen influent
channels as shown on the Drawings.
2. Wet Well Water Surface Elevations:
a. Low Water Level: 2558.5.
b. High Water Level: 2563.5.
3. Screen Influent Channel Water Surface Elevation: 2596.4.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General: Provide adequate capacity and size to handle existing flows plus
additional flows that may occur during periods of rainstorm. Provide bypass
flow capacity of at least 125 percent of peak flow estimate.
TEMPORARY SANITARY PW/WBG/426399
SEWER FLOW CONTROL OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 57 28 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Plugs:
1. Provide with taps for connection of pressure gauges and air hoses, and
flow-through capability.
2. Pipe Diameters 24 inches and Smaller: Use mechanical plugs with
rubber gaskets or pneumatic plugs with rubber boots.
3. Pipe Diameters Larger than 24 inches:
a. Use inflatable bag stoppers made in two or more pieces.
b. Manufacturer: Lansas, Cherne Industries.
C. High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or Ductile Iron Discharge Piping:
1. Leak free.
2. Pressure rating at least 1.5 times the operating pressure.
3. HDPE Pressure Piping:
a. In accordance with ASTM D3350.
b. SDR of 32.5, maximum.
c. Joints: Butt-fusion welded.
4. Ductile Iron:
a. AWWA C151/A21.51, Centrifugally cast, Grade 60-42-10 iron.
b. Joints: Rubber gasketed push-on in accordance with
AWWA C111/21.11.
c. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C110/A21.20.
5. May reuse for subsequent flow bypass pumping system placements.
Owner or Engineer, at their sole discretion, shall have right to reject
sections deemed unserviceable.
D. Bypass Pumps:
1. Fully automatic, self-priming units that do not require use of foot valves
or vacuum pumps in priming system.
2. Open impeller design with ability to pump minimum 3-inch-diameter
solids.
3. Able to run dry for long periods of time to accommodate cyclical nature
of flows.
4. Engine: Equipped to minimize noise. Noise levels shall not exceed
86 dBA at a distance of 50 feet from the source.
5. Standby Pump: One of each size to be available onsite.
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY SANITARY
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SEWER FLOW CONTROL
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 57 28 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Notify Engineer and Owner at least 48 hours prior to implementing flow
control system.
B. Operate and maintain 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, including holidays,
as required, to control flow.
C. Take all necessary precautions to ensure no private or public properties are
subjected to a sewage backup or spill. Contractor shall be solely responsible
for all cleanup, damages, and resultant fines in the event of a backup or spill.
D. After the Work is completed, return flow to normal and remove temporary
equipment.
3.02 BLOCKING FLOW
A. Flow control may consist of blocking flow with mechanical or pneumatic
plugs if only a small amount of flow needs to be controlled and adequate
storage is available.
B. Use primary and secondary plugs for each flow control location.
C. When blocking flow is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of
the Work, removed plugs in a manner that permits sewage flow to slowly
return to normal without surcharging or causing other major disturbances
downstream.
D. Remove temporary plugs at end of each working day and restore normal flow.
If downstream work is not or cannot be completed during the workday
provide, operate, and maintain bypass pumping system.
E. Use bypass pumping if the Work cannot be scheduled at a time when flow is
low or completed during low flow period.
F. Existing slide gates and stop log assemblies may be used to block flow and
isolate the screen distribution channel.
TEMPORARY SANITARY PW/WBG/426399
SEWER FLOW CONTROL OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 57 28 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 BYPASS PUMPING
A. When blocking flow in upstream sewers is not appropriate, use flow bypass
pumping for reducing flow below the maximum depth or for completely
bypassing flow.
B. Design, furnish, install, and maintain all power, primary and standby pumps,
appurtenances, tanks and trucks, and bypass piping required to maintain
existing flows and services.
C. Obtain approval and secure all permits for placement of temporary bypass
pumping system and pipeline within public right-of-way.
D. Site Verification:
1. Locate existing utilities in area of bypass pipelines.
2. Bypass Pipeline Location:
a. Minimize disturbance of existing utilities.
b. Confine bypass discharge pipeline within public rights-of-way or
temporary construction area and permanent easement.
c. When bypass pipeline crosses local streets and private driveways,
place bypass pipeline in trench and cover with temporary
pavement.
d. Installation of bypass pipelines is prohibited in salt marsh/wetland
areas.
E. Flow bypass shall be done in such a manner that will not damage private or
public property, or create a nuisance or public menace. Pumped sewage shall
be in an enclosed pipe that is adequately protected from traffic, and shall be
redirected into sanitary sewer system. Dumping or free flow of sewage on
private or public property, gutters, streets, sidewalks, or into storm sewers is
prohibited.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatic Pressure Test for Pump Bypass System:
1. Prior to operation, test each section of discharge piping with maximum
pressure equal to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure of system.
2. Notify Engineer and Owner 48 hours prior to testing.
PW/WBG/426399 TEMPORARY SANITARY
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SEWER FLOW CONTROL
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 57 28 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 CLEANING
A. Before bypass pumping system is broken down, and moved to next section or
removed at the completion of the Work, discharge sewage remaining in bypass
discharge pipeline and pumping equipment to working sewer.
B. Disturbed Areas: Upon completion of bypass pumping operation, clean
disturbed areas, restoring to condition, including pavement restoration, at least
equal to that which existed prior to start of the Work.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY SANITARY PW/WBG/426399
SEWER FLOW CONTROL OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 57 28 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 64 00
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Seller: The party under separate contract with Owner to furnish the products
or special services specified herein.
1.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Raw Wastewater Influent Pump:
1. Quantity: One.
2. Estimated Date of Arrival: Between January 15, 2012, and April 15,
2012.
3. Influent Pump Components:
a. Pump.
b. Motor.
c. Extended shaft.
4. Estimated Weight of Product:
a. Bare Shaft Pump: 6,811 pounds.
b. Baseplate: 6,000 pounds.
c. Motor: 5,500 pounds.
5. Special Handling or Storage Instructions: See manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6. Associated special services to be provided by Seller to Owner
(coordinated by Contractor):
a. Technical installation assistance as described.
b. Certification of proper installation.
c. Functional testing assistance.
d. Performance testing assistance.
e. Training of Owner’s personnel.
B. Secondary Clarifier Mechanisms:
1. Quantity: Four.
2. Estimated Date of Arrival: Between December 1, 2011, and
December 31, 2011.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 64 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Clarifier Mechanism Components:
a. Walkway.
b. Center column.
c. Rake arm.
d. Feedwell.
e. Drive cage.
f. Skimmer blade.
g. Scum trough.
h. Sludge manifold.
i. Suction header.
j. Weirs.
k. Baffles.
l. Launder covers.
4. Estimated Weight of Product:
a. Feedwell Section: 20,352 pounds.
b. Rake Arm Truss:11,760 pounds.
c. Header Arm Truss: 10,952 pounds.
d. Center Column: 10,172 pounds.
e. EDI Well Section: 7,656 pounds.
f. Suction Header Inner: 5,224 pounds.
g. Suction Header Outer: 3,176 pounds.
h. Counterweight Plate: 4,352 pounds.
i. Cage Truss: 4,120 pounds.
j. Drive Unit: 3,000 pounds.
5. Special Handling or Storage Instructions: See manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6. Associated special services to be provided by Seller to Owner
(coordinated by Contractor):
a. Technical installation assistance as described.
b. Certification of proper installation.
c. Functional testing assistance.
d. Performance testing assistance.
e. Training of Owner’s personnel.
C. Parts of the Process Instrumentation and Control System (PICS) applications
software programming will be provided by Owner. Refer to Section 01 31 13,
Project Coordination.
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PW/WBG/426399
01 64 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY OWNER
A. Shop drawings related to Owner-furnished products will be made available for
Contractor’s use in performing the work under this section.
B. Manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for
Owner-furnished products will be made available.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Show layout, location, and identification of materials provided by
Contractor for installation of Owner-furnished products.
b. Include pipe, fittings, valves, specialties, hangers, supports,
equipment, and required specialties.
c. Accurately show openings in floors, walls, and other parts of
structure.
d. Provide electrical and instrumentation diagrams to indicate
connecting and interconnecting electrical and control work.
e. Submit complete list of materials to be furnished, and include data
necessary to allow Owner to determine their fitness for the work.
1.05 TRANSFER OF PRODUCTS
A. Unless indicated otherwise, items will be furnished f.o.b. the Project Site.
B. Upon delivery, conduct with Owner or Engineer a joint inspection for the
purpose of identifying product, general verification of quantities, and
observation of apparent condition. Such inspection will not be construed as
final or as receipt of any product that, as a result of subsequent inspections and
tests, are determined to be nonconforming.
C. Damaged or incomplete products to be returned for replacement will not be
unloaded, except as necessary to expedite return shipment. Owner will submit
claims for transportation damage and expedite replacement of damaged,
defective, or deficient items.
D. Indicate signed acceptance of delivery on a copy of the invoice.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 64 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. If Contractor is not prepared to accept delivery of Owner-furnished products
by either the specified Estimated Date of Arrival or such Owner-confirmed
delivery date, associated costs incurred by Owner shall be borne by
Contractor. Such costs may include, but not be limited to, demurrage, interest,
insurance costs, additional administrative and engineering costs, additional
factory and field technical support, additional storage and reshipping costs,
cost escalation, and extended warranty costs due.
1.06 UNLOADING, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
A. Subsequent to transfer, Contractor shall have complete responsibility for
unloading Owner-furnished products. Unload product in accordance with
manufacturers’ instructions, or as specified.
B. Store, protect, and maintain product to prevent damage until final acceptance
of completed work. Damage to or loss of products after date of transfer to
Contractor shall be repaired to original condition, or replaced with new
identical products, at the discretion of Engineer.
C. Maintain complete inventory of all Owner-furnished products after their
transfer to Contractor.
D. Refer to Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for staging area
requirements.
1.07 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Include sequencing constraints specified herein as part of Progress Schedule.
B. Owner will keep Contractor informed of probable delivery date changes.
C. Owner will confirm delivery date with Contractor 10 days prior to scheduled
delivery, and within 24 hours of expected delivery time.
D. Where a preinstallation meeting is required by this Section, provide a
minimum of 10 days’ advance written notice to Owner of the proposed date
for starting installation.
E. Provide a minimum of 10 days notice to Owner that Owner-furnished product
is ready for all special services listed herein to be furnished by Owner through
its contract with seller. Contractor shall bear the cost of all damages assessed
to Owner by seller resulting from delays caused by Contractor.
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PW/WBG/426399
01 64 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.08 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. Arrange and attend a preinstallation meeting with the Engineer and Owner to
review general procedures, erection and installation instructions, and
installation sequence.
B. Additional meetings prior to installation may be required, as determined by
Owner, to transmit Owner’s installation instructions to Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in conformance with Owner-furnished product shop drawings
and installation instructions.
B. Provide all interconnecting structures, equipment, piping, electrical and
instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a
complete and functional system.
C. Provide foundation pads for Owner-furnished products as shown. Verify exact
dimensions and configuration of all pads, including penetrations, with Owner-
furnished product shop drawings.
D. Anchor Bolts:
1. Where required, provide anchor bolts, fasteners, washers, and templates
needed for installation of Owner-furnished equipment.
2. Size and locate anchor bolts in accordance with Owner-furnished
product shop drawings and installation instructions.
E. Mechanical and electrical equipment shall be properly aligned, plumb and
level, with no stresses on connecting piping or conduit.
F. Verify direction of motor rotation before starting equipment drives.
G. Verify operability and safety of electrical system needed to operate equipment.
Check electrical system for continuity, phasing, grounding, and proper
functions.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 64 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
H. Base Bid Schedule A:
1. Pump Installation: See Section 44 42 56.01, Screw Induced Flow
Centrifugal Pumps.
2. Motor Installation: Per manufacturer’s instructions.
I. Base Bid Schedule B:
1. Clarifier Mechanism Installation: See Section 44 42 24.03, Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism.
2. Weir, Baffle Plate, and Launder Cover Installation: See
Section 44 42 28, Weir, Baffle Plates, and Launder Covers.
J. Motor Installation: Per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.02 FIELD FINISHING
A. Products will be delivered with prime coat(s) applied.
1. Finish coat as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
2. Touch up or repair damage to coatings resulting from unloading,
storage, installation, testing, and startup.
3. If finish coats are damaged extensively after transfer, completely repaint.
4. Touch up, repair, or complete repainting shall match color of original
paint, and shall be fully compatible with applied primers and finish.
3.03 PRODUCT PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, lubricate components in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for protection and maintenance during
storage, after installation but prior to testing and startup, and after startup but
prior to acceptance.
C. Furnish incidental supplies including lubricants, cleaning fluids, and similar
products as needed for protecting and maintaining the Owner-furnished
products.
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS PW/WBG/426399
01 64 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Assist with performing tests and inspections of installed products in
accordance with requirements shown herein, Section 01 91 14, Equipment
Testing and Facility Startup, and manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Base Bid Schedule A Functional Test: See Section 44 42 56.01, Screw
Induced Flow Centrifugal Pumps.
2. Base Bid Schedule B Functional Testing:
a. Section 44 42 24.03, Secondary Clarifier Mechanism.
b. Section 44 42 28, Weir, Baffle Plates, and Launder Covers.
3. Functional Test: See Section 44 42 56.01, Screw-Induced Flow
Centrifugal Pumps.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 64 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Submit prior to application for final payment.
a. Record Documents: As required in General Conditions.
b. Special bonds, Special Guarantees, and Service Agreements.
c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: As required in General
Conditions.
d. Releases or Waivers of Liens and Claims: As required in General
Conditions.
e. Releases from Agreements.
f. Final Application for Payment: Submit in accordance with
procedures and requirements stated in Section 01 29 00, Payment
Procedures.
g. Extra Materials: As required by individual Specification sections.
1.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Furnish qualified and experienced person, whose duty and responsibility
shall be to maintain record documents.
2. Accuracy of Records:
a. Coordinate changes within record documents, making legible and
accurate entries on each sheet of Drawings and other documents
where such entry is required to show change.
b. Purpose of Project record documents is to document factual
information regarding aspects of the Work, both concealed and
visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed
without lengthy and expensive Site measurement, investigation,
and examination.
3. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change
in the Work has occurred.
PW/WBG/426399 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 77 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request
Engineer’s review and approval of current status of record documents.
Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may
result in a deferral by Engineer to recommend whole or any part of
Contractor’s Application for Payment, either partial or final.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General:
1. Promptly following commencement of Contract Times, secure from
Engineer at no cost to Contractor, one complete set of Contract
Documents.
2. Label or stamp each record document with title, “RECORD
DOCUMENTS,” in neat large printed letters.
3. Record information concurrently with construction progress and within
24 hours after receipt of information that change has occurred. Do not
cover or conceal Work until required information is recorded.
B. Preservation:
1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
2. Make documents and Samples available at all times for observation by
Engineer.
C. Making Entries on Drawings:
1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly
describe change by graphic line and note as required.
a. Color Coding:
1) Green when showing information deleted from Drawings.
2) Red when showing information added to Drawings.
3) Blue and circled in blue to show notes.
2. Date entries.
3. Call attention to entry by “cloud” drawn around area or areas affected.
4. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction,
including, but not limited to:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 77 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished
first floor data if not shown or where depth differs from that
shown.
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new
Underground Facilities and appurtenances, and other underground
structures, equipment, or Work. Reference to at least two
measurements to permanent surface improvements.
c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
d. Locate existing facilities, piping, equipment, and items critical to
the interface between existing physical conditions or construction
and new construction.
e. Changes made by Addenda and Field Orders, Work Change
Directive, Change Order, and Engineer’s written interpretation
and clarification using consistent symbols for each and showing
appropriate document tracking number.
5. Dimensions on Schematic Layouts: Show on record drawings, by
dimension, the centerline of each run of items such as are described in
previous subparagraph above.
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as “cast iron
drain,” “galv. water,” and the like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item (“under slab,”
“in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” and the like).
c. Make identification so descriptive that it may be related reliably to
Specifications.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. At completion of the Work or of a part thereof and immediately prior to
Contractor’s request for certificate of Substantial Completion; or if no
certificate is issued, immediately prior to Contractor’s notice of completion,
clean entire Site or parts thereof, as applicable.
1. Leave the Work and adjacent areas affected in a cleaned condition
satisfactory to Owner.
2. Remove grease, dirt, dust, paint or plaster splatter, stains, labels,
fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed surfaces.
3. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish and
match adjacent surfaces.
4. Clean all windows.
5. Clean and wax wood, vinyl, or painted floors.
PW/WBG/426399 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 77 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. Broom clean exterior paved driveways and parking areas.
7. Hose clean sidewalks, loading areas, and others contiguous with
principal structures.
8. Rake clean all other surfaces.
9. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings.
10. Replace air-handling filters and clean ducts, blowers, and coils of
ventilation units operated during construction.
11. Leave water courses, gutters, and ditches open and clean.
B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be
cleaned.
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/426399
01 77 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Detailed information for the preparation, submission, and Engineer’s review
of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Data, as required by individual
Specification sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for Engineer’s review.
B. Final Data: Engineer-accepted data, submitted as specified herein.
C. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined
to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and
longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are
lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine
adjustments.
1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Equipment and System Data:
1. Preliminary Data:
a. Do not submit until Shop Drawing for equipment or system has
been reviewed and approved by Engineer.
b. Submit prior to shipment date.
2. Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than
30 days prior to equipment or system field functional testing. Submit
Compilation Formatted and Electronic Media Formatted data prior to
Substantial Completion of Project.
1.04 DATA FORMAT
A. Prepare preliminary and final data in the form of an instructional manual.
Prepare final data in data compilation format.
PW/WBG/426399 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 78 23 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Instructional Manual Format:
1. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three-post binders
with durable plastic cover.
2. Size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, minimum.
3. Cover: Identify manual with typed or printed title “OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA” and list:
a. Project title.
b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish.
c. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
d. Identify volume number if more than one volume.
e. Identity of equipment numbers and Specification sections.
4. Spine:
a. Project title.
b. Identify volume number if more than one volume.
5. Title Page:
a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number.
b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor’s
name, address, and telephone number, as appropriate.
1) Identify area of responsibility of each.
2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of
supply for parts and replacement.
6. Table of Contents:
a. Neatly typewritten and arranged in systematic order with
consecutive page numbers.
b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying
numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
7. Paper: 20-pound minimum, white for typed pages.
8. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten.
9. Three-hole punch data for binding and composition; arrange printing so
that punched holes do not obliterate data.
10. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to
original. Photocopying of material will be acceptable, except for
material containing photographs.
C. Data Compilation Format:
1. Compile all Engineer-accepted preliminary O&M data into a hard-copy,
hard-bound set.
2. Each set shall consist of the following:
a. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three-post
binders with durable plastic cover.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/426399
01 78 23 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title
“OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, VOLUME
NO. ___ OF ___”, and list:
1) Project title.
2) Contractor’s name, address, and telephone number.
3) If entire volume covers equipment or system provided by
one Supplier include the following:
a) Identity of general subject matter covered in manual.
b) Identity of equipment number and Specification
section.
c. Provide each volume with title page and typed table of contents
with consecutive page numbers. Place contents of entire set,
identified by volume number, in each binder.
d. Table of contents neatly typewritten, arranged in a systematic
order:
1) Include list of each product, indexed to content of each
volume.
2) Designate system or equipment for which it is intended.
3) Identify each product by product name and other identifying
numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
e. Section Dividers:
1) Heavy, 80 pound cover weight, tabbed with numbered
plastic index tabs.
2) Fly-Leaf:
a) For each separate product, or each piece of operating
equipment, with typed description of product and
major component parts of equipment.
b) List with Each Product:
(1) Name, address, and telephone number of
Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, and
maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
(2) Identify area of responsibility of each.
(3) Provide local source of supply for parts and
replacement.
c) Identity of separate structure as applicable.
f. Assemble and bind material, as much as possible, in same order as
specified in the Contract Documents.
PW/WBG/426399 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 78 23 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational:
1. Data Outline: Submit two copies of a detailed outline of proposed
organization and contents of Final Data prior to preparation of
Preliminary Data.
2. Preliminary Data:
a. Submit three copies for Engineer’s review.
b. If data meets conditions of the Contract:
1) One copy will be returned to Contractor.
2) One copy will be forwarded to Resident Project
Representative.
3) One copy will be retained in Engineer’s file.
c. If data does not meet conditions of the Contract:
1) All copies will be returned to Contractor with Engineer’s
comments (on separate document) for revision.
2) Engineer’s comments will be retained in Engineer’s file.
3) Resubmit three copies revised in accordance with
Engineer’s comments.
3. Final Data: Submit three copies in format specified herein.
1.06 DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Content For Each Unit (or Common Units) and System:
1. Product Data:
a. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product.
b. Clearly annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
c. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
d. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests.
e. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
f. Original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly
drawings showing each part with part numbers and sequentially
numbered parts list, and diagrams required for maintenance.
g. Spare parts ordering instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/426399
01 78 23 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
h. Where applicable, identify installed spares and other provisions
for future work (e.g., reserved panel space, unused components,
wiring, terminals).
2. As-installed, color-coded piping diagrams.
3. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each
valve.
4. Drawings: Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to
clearly illustrate:
a. Format:
1) Provide reinforced, punched, binder tab; bind in with text.
2) Reduced to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, or 11 inches by
17 inches folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches.
3) Where reduction is impractical, fold and place in 8-1/2-inch
by 11-inch envelopes bound in text.
4) Identify Specification section and product on Drawings and
envelopes.
b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
c. Control and flow diagrams.
d. Coordinate drawings with Project record documents to assure
correct illustration of completed installation.
5. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement
product data.
a. Format:
1) Organize in consistent format under separate heading for
each different procedure.
2) Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
3) Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, including:
a) Proper procedures in event of failure.
b) Instances that might affect validity of guarantee or
Bond.
b. Installation Instructions: Including alignment, adjusting,
calibrating, and checking.
c. Operating Procedures:
1) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
2) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required.
3) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions.
4) Description of operation sequence by control manufacturer.
5) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended duration.
6) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable.
7) Safety precautions.
8) Special operating instructions.
PW/WBG/426399 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 78 23 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures:
1) Routine maintenance.
2) Guide to troubleshooting.
3) Disassembly, removal, repair, reinstallation, and re-
assembly.
6. Guarantee, Bond, and Service Agreement: In accordance with
Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures.
B. Content for Each Electric or Electronic Item or System:
1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
d. Interconnection wiring diagrams, including control and lighting
systems.
2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards:
3. Electrical service.
4. Control requirements and interfaces.
5. Communication requirements and interfaces.
6. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings.
7. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including as applicable,
single-line, three-line, schematic and internal wiring, and external
interconnection wiring.
8. As-installed control diagrams by control manufacturer.
9. Operating Procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Startup and shutdown sequences, normal and emergency.
c. Safety precautions.
d. Special operating instructions.
10. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine maintenance.
b. Guide to troubleshooting.
c. Adjustment and checking.
d. List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings.
11. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions.
12. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current
prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/426399
01 78 23 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Maintenance Summary:
1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary for each applicable
equipment item, respective unit or system, and for components or
sub-units.
2. Format:
a. Use Maintenance Summary Form bound with this section or
electronic facsimile of such.
b. Each Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required.
c. Use only 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch size paper.
d. Complete using typewriter or electronic printing.
3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to
be greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of
lubricants and frequency of lubrication.
4. Recommended Spare Parts:
a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer’s Bill of Materials/Parts
List furnished in O&M manuals.
b. “Unit” is the unit of measure for ordering the part.
c. “Quantity” is the number of units recommended.
d. “Unit Cost” is the current purchase price.
1.07 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this
Specification.
1. Maintenance Summary Form.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 78 23 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM
PROJECT: CONTRACT NO.:
1. EQUIPMENT ITEM
2. MANUFACTURER
3. EQUIPMENT/TAG NUMBER(S)
4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)
5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.)
6. MANUFACTURER’S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
a. Name Telephone No.
b. Address
7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maintenance Operation Lubricant
Comments Frequency (If Applicable)
List briefly each maintenance operation List required Refer by symbol
required and refer to specific information in frequency of each to lubricant
manufacturer’s standard maintenance manual, maintenance required.
if applicable. (Reference to manufacturer’s operation.
catalog or sales literature is not acceptable.)
PW/WBG/426399 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 78 23 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8. LUBRICANT LIST
Reference Exxon Chevron
Symbol Shell Mobile Texaco BP Amoco Or Equal
List symbols List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the
used in No. 7 specific use recommended.
above.
9. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER’S INVENTORY.
Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Cost
Note: Identify parts provided by this Contract with two asterisks.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/426399
01 78 23 SUPPLEMENT - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 88 15
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section covers requirements for seismic anchorage and bracing for
equipment and nonstructural components required in accordance with the
International Building Code (IBC).
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7, Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
3. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC).
4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association
(SMACNA): Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical
Systems.
1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for designing code required seismic
attachments, braces, and anchors to the structure for elements of the
architectural, mechanical, and electrical systems included in the Work in
accordance with this section unless a design is specifically provided
within the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall also be responsible for designing seismic anchorage for
modified existing architectural, mechanical, or electrical systems where
code requirements would dictate design for similar new components.
B. Design Requirements:
1. In accordance with 2009 IBC, Section 1613 and Chapter 13 of ASCE 7.
2. Architectural, mechanical, electrical and other nonstructural systems,
components, and elements permanently attached to the structure shall be
designed to transfer the component seismic forces specified in ASCE 7
Section 13.3.1 to the structure.
PW/WBG/426399 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 88 15 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Design forces for anchors in concrete or masonry shall be in accordance
with ASCE 7, Section 13.4.2.
4. Seismic anchorage and bracing systems shall be designed by a qualified
professional engineer registered in the State of Idaho.
5. Nonstructural Components: Design as nonbuilding structures for
components with weights greater than or equal to 25 percent of the
effective seismic weight of the overall structure.
6. Architectural Components: Includes, but are not limited to,
nonstructural walls and elements, partitions, cladding and veneer, access
flooring, signs, cabinets, suspended ceilings, and glass in glazed curtain
walls and partitions.
7. Design seismic attachments, braces, and anchorages for parts or
elements of the architectural, mechanical, and electrical systems in
accordance with the provisions of the International Building Code and
the following site-specific seismic criteria, unless noted otherwise on
the Drawings.
a. Site-Specific Spectral Response Coefficients:
1) Short Period Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake,
5 Percent Damped: Ss equals 0.305 g.
2) 1 Period Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake,
5 Percent Damped: S1 equals 0.105 g.
3) Short Period Design Spectral Response Acceleration,
5 Percent Damped: SDS equals 0.316 g.
4) 1 Second Period Design Spectral Response Acceleration,
5 Percent Damped: SD1 equals 0.166 g.
8. Site Class: D.
9. Seismic Design Category (SDC): C, unless noted otherwise. Same as
supporting structure’s SDC, as shown on Drawings.
10. Occupancy Category: III, unless noted otherwise. The anchorage and
bracing Occupancy Category shall be the same as that for supporting
structure as shown on Drawings.
11. Analyze local region of body of nonstructural component for load
transfer of anchorage attachment if component Ip = 1.5.
12. Component Important Factor:
a. Ip = 1.0, unless noted otherwise.
b. Ip shall be taken as 1.5 for components needed for or whose
failure could impair continued operation of hazardous or essential
facilities.
c. Ip shall be taken as 1.5 for components that contain hazardous
materials or that are required for life safety to be functional after a
seismic event.
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PW/WBG/426399
01 88 15 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. In accordance with ASCE 7, the following are exempt from the requirements
of the section for provision of seismic anchorages and bracing, in addition to
those items specifically exempted in ASCE 7, Part 13.6 for electrical and
mechanical equipment:
1. Mechanical and electrical components with Ip equals 1.0 that weigh
400 pounds or less and are mounted 4 feet or less above adjacent
finished floor elevation, or are provided with flexible connections
between the components and associated ductwork, piping, or conduit.
2. Mechanical and electrical components with Ip equals 1.0 that weigh
20 pounds or less, are mounted at any height, and are provided with
flexible connections to attached ductwork, piping, and conduit.
3. Distribution systems with Ip equals 1.0 weighing 5 pounds per foot or
less.
D. Support drawings and calculations for electrical distribution components shall
be provided if any of the following conditions apply:
1. Supports are cantilevered up from floor.
2. Supports include bracing to limit deflection and are constructed as rigid
welded frames.
3. Attachments utilize spot welds, plug welds, or minimum size welds as
defined by AISC.
E. Existing components, systems, and equipment that are modified by the Project
requirements and are not exempted by the above section in their final
condition shall require the same anchorage and bracing drawing and
calculation submittals as new equipment. Field verify existing conditions.
F. Other seismic design and detailing requirements identified in ASCE 7,
Chapter 13 are required to be provided for new and modified or noted
architectural, mechanical and electrical component, system, or equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit shop drawings with supporting calculations no less than
4 weeks in advance of installation of component, equipment or
distribution system to be anchored to structure.
b. Submitted anchorage drawings and calculations are identified as
IBC deferred submittals and will be submitted to and accepted by
PW/WBG/426399 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 88 15 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
permitting agency prior to installation of component, equipment
or distribution system.
c. List of architectural, mechanical, and electrical equipment
weighing more than 20 pounds, and electrical, piping, and
mechanical distribution systems weighing more than 5 pounds per
foot shall be anchored, unless specifically exempted hereinafter.
d. Manufacturers’ engineered seismic hardware product data.
e. Seismic attachment assemblies’ drawing; include connection
hardware, braces, and anchors or anchor bolts for nonexempt
components, equipment, and systems.
f. List of existing architectural, mechanical, and electrical equipment
or component required to be modified by Work required in the
Project weighing more than 20 pounds and electrical, piping, or
mechanical distribution systems weighing more than 5 pounds per
foot in the final retrofitted condition.
g. Seismic attachment assemblies’ drawing; include connection
hardware, braces, and anchors or anchor bolts for modified,
nonexempt existing components, equipment, and systems where
combination of new and existing systems or component’s final
condition would require seismic anchorage or bracing under this
Specification for new equipment.
h. Submittals will be rejected if proposed anchorage method would
create an overstressed condition of supporting member. Revise
anchorages and strengthening of structural support so there is no
overstressed condition.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Seismic Anchorage and Bracing Calculations: For seismic attachments,
braces, and anchorages. Include IBC and project specific criteria as
noted herein, in addition to manufacturer’s specific criteria used for the
design; sealed by a civil or structural engineer registered in the State of
Idaho.
2. Manufacturer’s seismic hardware installation requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Attachments and supports transferring seismic loads to structure shall be
constructed of materials and products suitable for the application and be
designed and constructed in accordance with the design criteria shown on
Drawings and nationally recognized standards.
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PW/WBG/426399
01 88 15 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. In accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Source quality
control shall be in accordance with the referenced section.
C. Provide anchor bolts, and concrete and masonry anchors for anchorage of
equipment in concrete or masonry in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications. Size of anchor bolts and anchors, and required minimum
embedment and spacing shall be based on calculations submitted by
Contractor.
D. Powder actuated fasteners and sleeve anchors shall not be used for seismic
attachments and anchorage where resistance to tension loads is required.
Expansion anchors, other than undercut anchors, shall not be used for
nonvibration isolated mechanical equipment rated over 10 hp.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Make seismic attachments, bracing, and anchorage in such a manner that
component seismic force is transferred to the lateral force resisting system of
the structure through a complete load path.
B. Overall seismic anchorage system shall provide restraint in all directions,
including vertical, for each component or system so anchored.
C. Components mounted on vibration isolation systems shall have snubbers in
each horizontal direction and vertical restraints where required to resist
overturning.
D. Anchor piping in such a manner as to ensure piping system has adequate
flexibility and expansion capabilities at flexible connections and expansion
joints. Piping and ductwork suspended more than 12 inches below the
supporting structure shall be braced for seismic effects to avoid significant
bending of the hangers and their attachments, unless high-deformability
piping is used per ASCE 7, Section 13.6.8 or HVAC ducts have a cross-
sectional area of less than 6 square feet.
E. Tall and narrow equipment such as motor control centers and telemetry
equipment shall be anchored at the base and within 12 inches from the top of
the equipment, unless approved otherwise by Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 01 88 15 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Architectural, mechanical, or electrical components shall not be attached to
more than one element of a building structure at a single restraint location
where such elements may respond differently during a seismic event. Such
attachments shall also not be made across building expansion and contraction
joints.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install components or their seismic anchorages or restraints prior to
review and acceptance by Engineer and permitting agency.
B. Notify Engineer upon completion of seismic restraints in accordance with
Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Quality Control shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
END OF SECTION
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING PW/WBG/426399
01 88 15 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 01 91 14
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Facility: Entire Project, or an agreed-upon portion, including all of its unit
processes.
B. Functional Test: Test or tests in presence of Engineer and Owner to
demonstrate that installed equipment meets manufacturer’s installation,
calibration, and adjustment requirements and other requirements as specified.
C. Performance Test: Test or tests performed after any required functional test in
presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate and confirm individual
equipment meets performance requirements specified in individual sections.
D. Unit Process: As used in this section, a unit process is a portion of the facility
that performs a specific process function, such as the influent pump.
E. Facility Performance Demonstration:
1. A demonstration, conducted by Contractor, with assistance of Owner, to
demonstrate and document the performance of the entire operating
facility, both manually and automatically (if required), based on criteria
developed in conjunction with Owner and as accepted by Engineer.
2. Such demonstration is for the purposes of (i) verifying to Owner entire
facility performs as a whole, and (ii) documenting performance
characteristics of completed facility for Owner’s records. Neither the
demonstration nor the evaluation is intended in any way to make
performance of a unit process or entire facility the responsibility of
Contractor, unless such performance is otherwise specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan.
2. Functional and performance test results.
3. Completed Unit Process Startup Form for each unit process.
4. Completed Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form.
PW/WBG/426399 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FACILITY STARTUP
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 91 14 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 FACILITY STARTUP AND PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION PLAN
A. Develop a written plan, in conjunction with Owner’s operations personnel; to
include the following:
1. Step-by-step instructions for startup of each unit process and the
complete facility.
2. Unit Process Startup Form (sample attached), to minimally include the
following:
a. Description of the unit process, including equipment
numbers/nomenclature of each item of equipment and all included
devices.
b. Detailed procedure for startup of the unit process, including valves
to be opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.
c. Startup requirements for each unit process, including water,
power, chemicals, etc.
d. Space for evaluation comments.
3. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form (sample
attached), to minimally include the following:
a. Description of unit processes included in the facility startup.
b. Sequence of unit process startup to achieve facility startup.
c. Description of computerized operations, if any, included in the
facility.
d. Contractor certification facility is capable of performing its
intended function(s), including fully automatic operation.
e. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Facility Startup Meetings: Schedule, in accordance with requirements of
Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings, to discuss test schedule, test methods,
materials, chemicals and liquids required, facilities operations interface, and
Owner involvement.
B. Contractor’s Testing and Startup Representative:
1. Designate and furnish one or more personnel to coordinate and expedite
testing and facility startup.
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW/WBG/426399
FACILITY STARTUP OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 91 14 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Representative(s) shall be present during startup meetings and shall be
available at all times during testing and startup.
C. Provide temporary valves, gauges, piping, test equipment and other materials
and equipment required for testing and startup.
D. Provide Subcontractor and equipment manufacturers’ staff adequate to prevent
delays. Schedule ongoing work so as not to interfere with or delay testing and
startup.
E. Owner will:
1. Provide water, power, chemicals, and other items as required for startup,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Operate process units and facility with support of Contractor.
3. Provide labor and materials as required for laboratory analyses.
4. Furnish assistance of manufacturer’s representative(s) for Owner-
furnished products, as specified in Section 01 64 00, Owner-Furnished
Products.
5. Make available spare parts, special tools, and operation and maintenance
information for Owner-furnished products.
3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING
A. Preparation:
1. Complete installation before testing.
2. Furnish qualified manufacturers’ representatives, when required by
individual Specification sections.
3. Obtain and submit from equipment manufacturer’s representative
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation Form, in accordance
with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, when required by
individual Specification sections.
4. Equipment Test Report Form: Provide written test report for each item
of equipment to be tested, to include the minimum information:
a. Owner/Project Name.
b. Equipment or item tested.
c. Date and time of test.
d. Type of test performed (Functional or Performance).
e. Test method.
PW/WBG/426399 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FACILITY STARTUP
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 91 14 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
f. Test conditions.
g. Test results.
h. Signature spaces for Contractor and Engineer as witness.
5. Cleaning and Checking: Prior to beginning functional testing:
a. Calibrate testing equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
b. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, connected piping, and
structures to ensure they are free of foreign material.
c. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
d. Turn rotating equipment by hand when possible to confirm that
equipment is not bound.
e. Open and close valves by hand and operate other devices to check
for binding, interference, or improper functioning.
f. Check power supply to electric-powered equipment for correct
voltage.
g. Adjust clearances and torque.
h. Test piping for leaks.
6. Ready-to-test determination will be by Engineer based at least on the
following:
a. Acceptable Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Notification by Contractor of equipment readiness for testing.
c. Receipt of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, if so
specified.
d. Adequate completion of work adjacent to, or interfacing with,
equipment to be tested, including items to be furnished by Owner.
e. Availability and acceptability of manufacturer’s representative,
when specified, to assist in testing of respective equipment.
f. Satisfactory fulfillment of other specified manufacturer’s
responsibilities.
g. Equipment and electrical tagging complete.
h. Delivery of all spare parts and special tools.
B. Functional Testing:
1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections.
2. Notify Owner and Engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled
date of testing.
3. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results.
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW/WBG/426399
FACILITY STARTUP OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 91 14 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. When, in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets functional requirements
specified, such equipment will be accepted for purposes of advancing to
performance testing phase, if so required by individual Specification
sections. Such acceptance will be evidenced by Engineer/Owner’s
signature as witness on Equipment Test Report.
C. Performance Testing:
1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections.
2. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled
date of test.
3. Performance testing shall not commence until equipment has been
accepted by Engineer as having satisfied functional test requirements
specified.
4. Type of fluid, gas, or solid for testing shall be as specified.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish labor, materials, and supplies for
conducting the test and taking samples and performance measurements.
6. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results.
7. When, in Engineer’s opinion, equipment meets performance
requirements specified, such equipment will be accepted as to
conforming to Contract requirements. Such acceptance will be
evidenced by Engineer’s signature on Equipment Test Report.
3.03 STARTUP OF UNIT PROCESSES
A. Prior to unit process startup, equipment within unit process shall be accepted
by Engineer as having met functional and performance testing requirements
specified.
B. Startup sequencing of unit processes shall be as chosen by Contractor to meet
schedule requirements.
C. Make adjustments, repairs, and corrections necessary to complete unit process
startup.
D. Startup shall be considered complete when, in opinion of Engineer and
Owner, unit process has operated in manner intended for 5 continuous days
without significant interruption. This period is in addition to functional or
performance test periods specified elsewhere.
PW/WBG/426399 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FACILITY STARTUP
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 91 14 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Significant Interruption: May include any of the following events:
1. Failure of Contractor to provide and maintain qualified onsite startup
personnel as scheduled.
2. Failure to meet specified functional operation for more than
2 consecutive hours.
3. Failure of any critical equipment or unit process that is not satisfactorily
corrected within 2 hours after failure.
4. Failure of any noncritical equipment or unit process that is not
satisfactorily corrected within 8 hours after failure.
5. As determined by Engineer.
F. A significant interruption will require startup then in progress to be stopped.
After corrections are made, startup test period to start from beginning again.
3.04 FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION
A. When, in the opinion of Engineer, startup of all unit processes has been
achieved, sequence each unit process to the point that facility is operational.
B. Demonstrate proper operation of required interfaces within and between
individual unit processes.
C. After facility is operating, complete performance testing of equipment and
systems not previously tested.
D. Document, as defined in Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration
Plan, the performance of the facility.
E. Certify, on the Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form, that
facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully
automatic operation.
3.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. Supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this
Specification:
1. Unit Process Startup Form.
2. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND PW/WBG/426399
FACILITY STARTUP OCTOBER 7, 2011
01 91 14 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
UNIT PROCESS STARTUP FORM
OWNER: PROJECT:
Unit Process Description: (Include description and equipment number of all equipment and devices):
Startup Procedure (Describe procedure for sequential startup and evaluation, including valves to be
opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.):
Startup Requirements (Water, power, chemicals, etc.):
Evaluation Comments:
PW/WBG/426399 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FACILITY STARTUP
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
FACILITY PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION/CERTIFICATION FORM
OWNER: PROJECT:
Unit Processes Description (List unit processes involved in facility startup):
Unit Processes Startup Sequence (Describe sequence for startup, including computerized operations,
if any):
Contractor Certification that Facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully
automatic operation:
Contractor: Date: _________________________, 20____
Engineer: Date: _________________________, 20____
(Authorized Signature)
PW/WBG/426399 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FACILITY STARTUP
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT 02 - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI):
Guideline K, Containers for Recovered Non-flammable Fluorocarbon
Refrigerants.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A10.6, Safety
Requirements for Demolition Operations.
3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1926—Occupational Safety
and Health Regulations for Construction.
4. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR), Title 40:
a. Part 61—National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants.
b. Part 82—Protection of Stratospheric Ozone.
c. Part 273—Standards for Universal Waste Management.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ACM: Asbestos-containing material.
B. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed
building or structure or any part thereof.
C. Modify: Provide all necessary material and labor to modify an existing item to
the condition indicated or specified.
D. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean and reinstall equipment, including electrical,
instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment
fully functional, to the new location identified on the Drawings.
E. Renovation: Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way.
PW/WBG/426399 DEMOLITION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 02 41 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Salvage/Salvageable: Remove and deliver, to the specified location(s), the
equipment, building materials, or other items so identified to be saved from
destruction, damage, or waste; such property to remain that of Owner. Unless
otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to
Contractor.
G. Universal Waste Lamp: In accordance with 40 CFR 273, the bulb or tube
portion of an electric lighting device, examples of which include, but are not
limited to, fluorescent, high-intensity discharge, neon, mercury vapor, high-
pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps.
H. Universal Waste Thermostat: A temperature control device that contains
metallic mercury in an ampule attached to a bimetal sensing element, and
mercury-containing ampules that have been removed from these temperature
control devices in compliance with the requirements of 40 CFR 273.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Submit proposed Demolition/Renovation Plan, in accordance with
requirements specified herein, for approval before such Work is started.
2. Submit copies of any notifications, authorizations and permits required
to perform the Work.
1.04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. When applicable, demolition Work shall be accomplished in strict accordance
with 29 CFR 1926-Subpart T.
B. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In
addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractor’s safety
requirements shall conform to ANSI A10.6.
1.05 DEMOLITION PLAN
A. Demolition Plan shall provide for safe conduct of the Work and shall include:
1. Detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each
operation;
2. The Contractor’s planned sequence of operations, including
coordination with other work in progress;
DEMOLITION PW/WBG/426399
02 41 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. The Work of this Specification shall not commence until Contractor’s
Demolition Plan has been approved by Engineer and Owner.
B. Include the Work of this Specification in the progress schedule, as specified in
Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE DEMOLISHED OR RENOVATED
A. Utilities and Related Equipment:
1. Notify Engineer and Owner or appropriate utilities to turn off affected
services at least 48 hours before starting demolition activities.
2. Remove existing piping and supports as indicated and terminate in a
manner conforming to the nationally recognized code.
3. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the
Drawings, notify Engineer and Owner prior to further work in that area.
B. Concrete: Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than
2 inches. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment
with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete
provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished Work, and the
remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete. Where new
concrete adjoins existing, the new Work shall abut or tie into the existing
construction as indicated and specified.
C. Patching:
1. Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the
finished Work, patch and repair to match adjacent finished surfaces as
to texture and finish.
2. Where new Work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals
and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new
Work.
3. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and shall include: Fill holes
and depressions left as a result of removals in existing concrete walls
with an approved patching material, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
PW/WBG/426399 DEMOLITION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 02 41 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Electrical:
1. Cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials a
minimum of 3/4 inch below final finished surface.
2. When removing designated equipment, conduit and wiring may require
rework to maintain service to other equipment.
3. Rework existing circuits, or provide temporary circuits as necessary
during renovation to maintain service to existing lighting and equipment
not scheduled to be renovated. Existing equipment and circuiting shown
are based upon limited field surveys. Verify existing conditions, make
all necessary adjustments, and record the Work on the Record
Drawings. This shall include, but is not limited to, swapping and other
adjustments to branch circuits and relocation of branch circuit breakers
within panelboards as required to accomplish the finished work.
4. Reuse of existing luminaires, devices, conduits, boxes, or equipment
will be permitted only where specifically indicated.
5. Raceways and cabling not scheduled for reuse.
6. Inaccessibly Concealed: Cut off and abandon in place.
7. Exposed or Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Remove.
8. Raceways and Cabling Scheduled for Future Use: Cap/seal and tag.
9. Relocating Equipment: Extend existing wiring or run new wiring from
the source.
10. Where the existing raceway is concealed, the outlet box shall be
cleaned, and a blank cover plate installed.
11. Where the concealed raceway is uncovered remove raceway (or
extended to new location if appropriate).
12. Provide new typewritten panelboard circuit directory cards.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Building Occupancy: Refer to Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for
specific requirements related to concurrent occupancy of facilities to be
partially demolished.
B. Dust and Debris Control:
1. Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the
building and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the
surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or
pollution.
2. Vacuum and dust the Work area daily.
DEMOLITION PW/WBG/426399
02 41 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris
that may result in foreign object damage potential to vehicular traffic.
C. Traffic Control Signs: Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the
area of removal Work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights.
D. Existing Work:
1. Survey the site and examine the Drawings and Specifications to
determine the extent of the Work before beginning any demolition or
renovation.
2. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items scheduled
to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of Owner; any
Contractor-damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as directed by
Engineer.
3. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between removal
of existing exterior surfaces and installation of new to ensure that no
water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing
building.
4. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of or
during performance of the Work. Responsibility for additional structural
elements or increasing the strength of existing structural elements as
may be required as a result of any Work performed under this Contract
shall be that of the Contractor. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural
replacement must have Engineer approval.
5. Do not overload pavements to remain.
E. Weather Protection: For portions of the building scheduled to remain, protect
building interior and materials and equipment from weather at all times.
Where removal of existing roofing is necessary to accomplish the Work, have
materials and workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of
exposed areas so as to ensure effectiveness and to prevent loss.
F. Trees: Protect trees within the Site that might be damaged during demolition
and are indicated to be left in place, by a 6-foot-high fence. The fence shall be
securely erected a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Any tree designated
to remain that is damaged during the Work shall be replaced in kind, as
approved by the Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 DEMOLITION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 02 41 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
G. Facilities:
1. Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal
of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide
approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and
temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.
2. Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural elements
that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or
shoring, and are determined by Contractor to be in stable condition,
shall remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or lateral
support until demolished, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
3. Protect all facility elements not scheduled for demolition.
4. Provide interior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and
adjacent facilities.
H. Protection of Personnel:
1. During demolition, continuously evaluate the condition of the structure
being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel
working in and around the demolition site.
2. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect
Owner’s personnel and the general public from injury due to demolition
Work.
3. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage
of Owner’s personnel and the general public to occupied portions of the
structure.
3.03 BURNING
A. The use of burning at the Site for the disposal of refuse and debris is not
allowed.
3.04 RELOCATIONS
A. Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with
workmen skilled in the trades involved. Clean all items to be relocated prior to
reinstallation, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Repair items to be relocated
which are damaged or replace damaged items with new undamaged items as
approved by Engineer.
DEMOLITION PW/WBG/426399
02 41 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 BACKFILL
A. Do not use demolition debris as backfill material.
B. Fill excavations to existing ground level in accordance with this section.
C. Fill excavations to existing ground level of existing facilities as follows:
1. Granular fill:
a. 1-inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock.
b. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material.
c. Well-graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to
bind material when compacted, but with maximum 10 percent by
weight passing No. 200 sieve.
2. Place fill in lifts of 8-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to
minimum of 97 percent relative compaction as determine in accordance
with ASTM D698 Method.
3. Hand operated compaction equipment shall be used within 3 feet of
walls.
4. During placement of materials, Contractor shall arrange for testing (to
be paid by Owner) as follows:
a. For lifts placed in one continuous, systematic placement operation
with uniform material, perform three tests for each 5,000 square
feet, or each 200 cubic yards, whichever is greatest.
b. For lifts placed under different conditions – on different days, in
different locations, with different compaction procedures, with
different compaction processes and/or different materials –
perform minimum of three tests per 2,500 square feet, but not less
than three tests representing each different combination of
conditions.
c. The Engineer and Owner may select the testing location for tests
required by this Section.
d. Remove all material placed in Work that does not meet
Specification requirements.
3.06 SITE GRADATION TESTING
A. One sample for granular fill material used at each clarifier center column
retrofit.
B. Remove material placed in work that does not meet specification requirements
and replace with material that does conform.
PW/WBG/426399 DEMOLITION
OCTOBER 7, 2011 02 41 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.07 TITLE TO MATERIALS
A. All salvaged equipment and materials resulting from demolition work will
remain the property of Owner.
3.08 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Do not remove equipment and materials without approval of Contractor’s
Demolition Plan by Engineer.
B. Salvage equipment and material to the maximum extent possible.
3.09 REUSE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Remove and store materials and equipment listed in Article Title To Materials
to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the Work
progresses.
B. Properly store and maintain equipment and materials in same condition as
when removed.
C. Store equipment and material designated to be reused in a location designated
by Owner.
D. Equipment and material designated to be reused shall be cleaned, serviced and
checked for proper operability before being put back into service.
E. Engineer will determine condition of equipment and materials prior to
removal.
3.10 CLEANUP
A. Debris and rubbish shall be removed from basement and similar excavations.
Debris and rubbish shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents
spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local regulations regarding hauling and
disposal shall apply.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION PW/WBG/426399
02 41 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 117/117R, Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
b. 318/318R, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
and Commentary.
c. 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and ACI 318/318R to provide
concrete finishes specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. When high range water reducer (superplasticizer) is used in concrete mix,
forms shall be designed for full hydrostatic pressure per ACI 347.
C. Make joints in forms watertight.
D. Limit panel deflection to 1/360th of each component span to achieve
tolerances specified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Layout of panel joints and tie hole pattern.
b. Form Ties-Tapered Through-Bolts: Proposed method of sealing
form tie hole; coordinate with details shown.
c. Manufacturer’s data for form release agent.
2. Samples: One each as follows:
a. Form ties.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE FORMING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 10 00 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Formwork Designer: Formwork, falsework, and shoring design shall be by an
engineer licensed in the state of Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Wall Forms and Underside of Slabs and Beams:
1. Materials: Plywood, hard plastic finished plywood, overlaid waterproof
particle board, or steel in “new and undamaged” condition, of sufficient
strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish.
B. Form Release Agent:
1. Material: Release agent shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces, and shall not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces when applied to forms. A ready-to-use water based
material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections,
containing no mineral oil or organic solvents. Environmentally safe,
meeting local, state, and federal regulations and can be used in potable
water facilities.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF, Shakopee, MN; MBT, Rheofinish 211.
b. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Lease 20-VOC.
c. Unitex Chemicals; Farm Fresh.
d. Atlas Construction Supply, Inc.; Bio-Guard.
C. Rustication Grooves and Beveled Edge Corner Strips: Nonabsorbent material,
compatible with form surface, fully sealed on all sides prohibiting loss of
paste or water between the two surfaces.
D. Form Ties:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Spreader Inserts:
a. Conical or spherical type.
b. Design to maintain positive contact with forming material.
c. Furnish units that will leave no metal closer than 1.5 inches to
concrete surface when forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed.
3. Wire ties not permitted.
CONCRETE FORMING PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 10 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Flat bar ties for panel forms; furnish plastic or rubber inserts with
minimum 1.5-inch depth and sufficient dimensions to permit patching of
tie hole.
5. Water Stop Ties: For water-holding structures, basements, pipe
galleries, and accessible spaces below finish grade, furnish one of the
following:
a. Integral steel water stop 0.103 inch thick and 0.625 inch in
diameter tightly and continuously welded to tie.
b. Neoprene water stop 3/16 inch thick and 15/16 inch diameter
whose center hole is one half diameter of tie, or molded plastic
water stop of comparable size.
c. Orient water stop perpendicular to tie and symmetrical about
center of tie.
d. Design ties to prevent rotation or disturbance of center portion of
tie during removal of ends and to prevent water leaking along tie.
6. Through-Bolts: Tapered minimum 1-inch diameter at smallest end.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete or that
have been in contact with previously cast concrete, dirt, and other surface
contaminants prior to coating surface.
B. Exposed Wood Forms in Contact with Concrete: Apply form release agent as
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Steel Forms: Apply form release agent to steel forms as soon as they are
cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Unless specified otherwise, follow applicable recommendations of
ACI 347.
B. Beveled Edges (Chamfer):
1. Form 3/4-inch bevels at concrete edges, unless otherwise shown.
2. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are other than
3/4 inch, obtain Engineer’s approval of size prior to placement of
beveled edge.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE FORMING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 10 00 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Wall Forms:
1. Do not reuse forms with damaged surfaces.
2. Locate form ties and joints in an uninterrupted uniform pattern.
3. Inspect form surfaces prior to installation to assure conformance with
specified tolerances.
D. Form Tolerances: Provide forms in accordance with ACI 117/117R, ACI 347,
and ACI 318/318R and the following tolerances for finishes specified:
1. Wall Tolerances:
a. Straight Vertical or Horizontal Wall Surface: Flat planes within
tolerance specified.
b. Wall Type W-A:
1) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet or within 1 inch from top
to bottom for walls over 40 feet high.
2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 5/16 inch when
10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in all
directions.
c. Wall Type W-B:
1) Plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet or within 1/2 inch from top
to bottom for walls over 40 feet high.
2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 1/8 inch when
10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in all
directions.
d. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from
dimension shown.
e. Form Offset: Between adjacent pieces of formwork, facing
material shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
2. Beams and Columns Tolerances:
a. Exposed Straight Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: Flat planes
within tolerances specified.
b. Lateral Alignment:
1) Centerlines must be within plus or minus 1/2 inch from
dimensions shown.
2) At intersections, centerlines shall intersect within plus or
minus 1/2 inch of dimensions shown.
c. Beam Type B-A:
1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch
plus from dimension shown.
CONCRETE FORMING PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 10 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2) Elevations: Within plus or minus 1/2 inch, except where
tops of beams become part of finished slab. In this case refer
to slab tolerances.
d. Column Type C-A:
1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch
plus from dimension shown.
2) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet in all directions with
maximum 1/2 inch out-of-plumb at top with respect to
bottom.
3.03 FORM REMOVAL
A. Nonsupporting forms (sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of
Work) may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F
for 24 hours from time of concrete placement if:
1. Concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to sustain damage by form
removal operations.
2. Curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Elevated Structural Slabs or Beams: In accordance with ACI 318/318R,
Chapter 6, and at such time as concrete has reached compressive strength
equal to 80 percent of specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by
test cylinders.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE FORMING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 10 00 - 5
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 15 00
CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
c. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process.
d. A767/A767M, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
e. C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
f. D226, Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
g. D227, Specification for Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
h. D994, Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete (Bituminous Type).
i. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
j. D1171, Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics.
k. D1751, Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types).
l. D1752, Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
2. Corps of Engineers (COE): CRD-C-572, Corps of Engineers
Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.
3. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE JOINTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 15 00 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Waterstop: Details of splices, method of securing and supporting
waterstop in forms to maintain proper orientation and location
during concrete placement.
b. Construction and Control Joints: Layout and location for each
type.
2. Samples: PVC waterstop splice, joint, and fabricated cross of each size,
shape, and fitting of waterstop.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for product shipment, storage,
handling, installation/application, and repair for:
a. Waterstop.
b. Joint filler and primer.
c. Preformed control joint.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Acceptance at Site: Verify delivered materials are in accordance with
Specifications and manufacturer’s product data sheets prior to unloading and
storing onsite.
B. Storage: Store materials under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, and sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLASTIC WATERSTOP
A. Extruded from elastomeric plastic compound of which basic resin shall be
prime virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Compound shall not contain scrapped
material, reclaimed material, or pigment.
B. Specific Gravity: Approximately 1.37.
C. Shore Durometer Type A Hardness: Approximately 80.
D. Performance Requirements: COE Specification CRD-C-572.
CONCRETE JOINTS PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 15 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Type: Center bulb with parallel ribs or protrusions on each side of strip center.
F. Corrugated or tapered type waterstops are not acceptable.
G. Thickness: Constant from bulb edge to outside stop edge.
H. Minimum Weight per Foot of Waterstop:
1. 1.60 pounds for 3/8 inch by 6 inches.
2. 2.30 pounds for 3/8 inch by 9 inches.
I. Factory Fabrications: Use only factory fabrications for intersections,
transitions, and changes of direction.
J. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN; Catalog No. 03250/VIN: No. RB6-38H
(6 inches by 3/8 inch) and No. RB9-38H (9 inches by 3/8 inch).
2. Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO; Catalog No. 03150/GRD:
Style 732 (6 inches by 3/8 inch) and Style 735 (9 inches by 3/8 inch).
3. Four Seasons Industries Durajoint, Garrettsville, OH; Catalog
No. CSP-162: Type 9 (6 inches by 3/8 inch), and Type 10 (9 inches by
3/8 inch).
2.02 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP
A. For use at construction joints only, where new concrete is placed against
existing concrete and as shown on Drawings.
B. Material shall be a nonbentonite hydrophilic rubber compound.
C. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO; Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K
with Leakmaster LV-1 adhesive and sealant.
2. Adeka Ultra Seal, JLM Associates, Spearfish, SD; MC-2010M with
3M-2141 adhesive and P-201 sealant.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE JOINTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 15 00 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 INJECTION-TYPE WATERSTOP
A. Reinjectable waterstop hose system for use where shown on Drawings.
B. Reinjectable Water Stop Hose:
1. Fabricated of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound.
2. Contain discharge openings to allow for disbursement of an injection
material into expansion joint.
a. Discharge openings designed to be sealed tight during concreting
operation to prevent entry of mixing water and cement slurry.
3. Allows free and uniform discharge of injection material over entire
length of hose during injection process.
4. Able to be internally cleaned by using water and vacuum pressure.
C. Injection Material: Hydrophilic or hydrophobic resin grout for use in
expansion joints as recommended by reinjectable waterstop hose
manufacturer.
D. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Greenstreak/BBZ, Bristol, CT; Fuko Injection Hose System with
Multigel 850.
2. Deneef Construction Chemicals, Inc., Waller, TX; TRIOject Injection
Hose System with Hydro Active Grout.
2.04 BOND BREAKER
A. Tape for Joints: Adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape, same
width as joint that will adhere to premolded joint material or concrete surface.
B. Use either bond breaker tape or bond prevention material as specified in
Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete, except where tape is specifically
called for.
2.05 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER
A. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or ASTM D1751.
B. Sponge Rubber:
1. Neoprene, closed-cell, expanded; ASTM D1056, Type 2C5, with
compression deflection, 25 percent deflection (limits), 119 kPa to
CONCRETE JOINTS PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 15 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
168 kPa (17 psi to 24 psi) minimum. Use in joints for potable and
nonpotable water containment structures.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Rubatex Corp.; R-451-N.
2.06 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT
A. One-Piece, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride Joint Former:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN; Kold-Seal
Zip-Per Strip KSF-150-50-50.
B. One-Piece Steel Strip with Preformed Groove:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc., San
Mateo, CA; Keyed Kold Retained Kap.
C. Furnish in full-length, unspliced pieces.
2.07 POURABLE JOINT FILLERS
A. Filler for Nonpotable Water Containment Structures:
1. Pourable, two-component, cold-applied compound meeting
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
2. Color: Black.
3. Manufacturer and Product: W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, IL; Gardox.
2.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Nonshrink Grout: As specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting.
B. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, Type II, 30-pound asphalt-saturated or equal
weight of ASTM D227 coal-tar saturated felt.
C. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.
D. Nails: Galvanized, as required for securing premolded joint filler.
E. Masking Tape: As required to temporarily adhere to concrete at each side of
joint to receive filler.
F. Ties for PVC Waterstop: “Hog Rings” or grommets for each edge at 12-inch
maximum spacing.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE JOINTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 15 00 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Commence concrete placement after joint preparation is complete.
B. Time Between Concrete Pours: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-
Place Concrete.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact
surface:
1. Remove laitance and spillage from reinforcing steel and dowels.
2. Roughen surface to minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude:
a. Sandblast after concrete has fully cured.
b. Water blast after concrete has partially cured.
c. Green cut fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools.
3. Perform cleaning so as not to damage waterstop, if one is present.
B. Expansion Joint:
1. Use wire brush or other motorized device to mechanically roughen and
thoroughly clean concrete surfaces on each side of joint from plastic
waterstop to top of joint.
2. Use dry high pressure air to remove dust and foreign material, and dry
joint.
3. Prime surfaces as required before placing joint filler.
4. Avoid damage to waterstop.
C. Construction Joint with Hydrophilic Waterstop:
1. Follow hydrophilic waterstop manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Clean debris, dirt, dust, and foreign material from concrete surface.
Concrete surface must be smooth, clean, and dry. Grind concrete as
required.
CONCRETE JOINTS PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 15 00 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS
A. General:
1. Continuous waterstop (as specified) shall be installed in all construction
joints in walls and slabs of water holding basins and channels and in
walls of belowgrade structures, unless specifically noted otherwise.
2. Join waterstop at intersections to provide continuous seal.
3. Center waterstop on joint.
4. Secure waterstop in correct position. Tie waterstop to reinforcing steel
using grommets, “Hog Rings,” or tiewire at maximum spacing of
12 inches. Do not displace waterstop during concrete placement.
5. Repair or replace damaged waterstop.
6. Place concrete and vibrate to obtain impervious concrete in vicinity of
joints.
7. Joints in Footings and Slabs:
a. Ensure that space beneath plastic waterstop is completely filled
with concrete.
b. During concrete placement, make visual inspection of waterstop
area.
c. Limit concrete placement to elevation of waterstop in first pass,
vibrate concrete under waterstop, lift waterstop to confirm full
consolidation without voids, then place remaining concrete to full
height of slab.
B. Plastic Waterstop:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Splice in accordance with waterstop manufacturer’s written instructions
using Teflon-coated thermostatically controlled heating iron at
approximately 380 degrees F.
a. Allow at least 10 minutes before new splice is pulled or strained in
any way.
b. Finished splices shall provide cross section that is dense and free
of porosity with tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of
unspliced materials.
c. Use only factory made waterstop fabrications for all intersections,
changes of directions and transitions.
d. Field splice permitted only for straight butt welds.
3. Splice new waterstop to exist where shown on Drawings for secondary
clarifier retrofit.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE JOINTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 15 00 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Hydrophilic Waterstop:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Provide minimum of 2-1/2 inches of concrete cover over waterstop.
When structure has two layers of reinforcing steel, locate centered
between layers of steel or as shown.
3. Apply adhesive to concrete surface and allow to dry for specified time
before applying waterstop strip.
4. Butt ends of waterstop strip together at splices and corners and join with
sealant.
5. Verify that waterstop is anchored firmly in place before placing
concrete. Do not allow vibrator to come into contact with waterstop.
D. Injection-Type Waterstop:
1. Install reinjectable waterstop hose in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. After concrete has been placed and cured for a minimum of 28 days,
inject specified injection material into reinjectable waterstop hose in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Upon completion of injection process, clean out remaining injection
material in hose in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to allow
for future injections.
3.04 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Premolded Joint Filler:
1. Sufficient in width to completely fill joint space where shown.
2. If waterstop is in joint, cut premolded joint filler to butt tightly against
waterstop and concrete face.
3. Precut premolded joint filler to required depth at locations where joint
filler or sealant is to be applied.
4. Form cavities for joint filler with either precut, premolded joint filler, or
smooth removable accurately shaped material. Entire joint above
waterstop, in slabs, shall be formed and removed so that entire space
down to waterstop can be filled with the pourable joint filler.
5. Vibrate concrete thoroughly along joint form to produce dense, smooth
surface.
CONCRETE JOINTS PW/WBG/426399
AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 7, 2011
03 15 00 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Bituminous Type Premolded Joint Filler:
1. Drive nails approximately 1 foot 6 inches on center through filler, prior
to installing, to provide anchorage embedment into concrete during
concrete placement.
2. Secure premolded joint filler in forms before concrete is placed.
3. Install in walkways, at changes in direction, at intersections, at each side
of driveway entrances, and at 45-foot intervals, maximum.
C. Pourable Joint Filler:
1. General: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions, except as specified below:
a. Apply primer prior to pouring joint filler.
b. Fill entire joint above the waterstop with joint filler as shown.
c. Use masking tape on top of slabs at sides of joints; clean spillage.
Remove masking tape afterwards.
3.05 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS
A. Use only where specifically shown; do not use in water-holding basins.
B. Locate slightly below top of slab.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions in straight, full-
length pieces.
D. Steel Strip Type with Preformed Groove: Brace to withstand pressure of
concrete during and after placement.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE JOINTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND ACCESSORIES
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 03 15 00 - 9
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 21 00
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary.
b. SP-66, Detailing Manual.
2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding
Code - Reinforcing Steel.
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A82/A82M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A185/A185M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.
c. A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.
d. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
e. A706/A706M, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
f. A767/767M, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Steel bars for Concrete Reinforcement
g. A775/A775M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):
a. Placing Reinforcing Bars.
b. Manual of Standard Practice.
5. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Services Report.
6. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI): WWR-500, Manual of Standard
Practice, Structural Welded Wire Reinforcement.
PW/WBG/426399 REINFORCING STEEL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 21 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice and ACI SP-66:
a. Bending lists.
b. Placing drawings.
2. Welded, metallic sleeve splice, and mechanical threaded connection.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Lab test reports for reinforcing steel showing stress-strain curves and
ultimate strengths.
2. Mechanical Threaded Connections:
a. Current ICC Evaluation Services Report or equivalent code
agency report listing findings to include acceptance, special
inspection requirements, and restrictions.
b. Verification device threads have been tested and meet
requirements for thread quality, in accordance with manufacturer’s
published methods.
c. Manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Test results of field testing.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Unload, store, and handle bars in accordance with CRSI publication “Placing
Reinforcing Bars.”
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars:
1. Includes stirrups, ties, and spirals.
2. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60.
REINFORCING STEEL PW/WBG/426399
03 21 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tie Wire:
1. Black, soft-annealed 16-gauge wire.
2. Nylon-, epoxy-, or plastic-coated wire.
B. Bar Supports and Spacers:
1. Use precast concrete bar supports and side form spacers, unless noted
otherwise. Do not use other types of supports or spacers.
2. Bar supports shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to carry loads
without failure, displacement, or significant deformation. Space bar
supports so minimum concrete cover is maintained for reinforcing
between supports.
3. Use only precast concrete bar supports where concrete surfaces are
exposed to weather, earth, water, chloride intrusion, or corrosive
chemicals. Bar supports shall be nonconductive and have geometry and
bond characteristics that deter movement of moisture from the surface to
the reinforcement.
4. Precast concrete supports shall have same minimum strength and shall
be made from same materials as that of the concrete in which they are to
be embedded. Precast concrete supports shall be cast and properly cured
for at least 7 days before use and shall have a wire or other device cast
into each block for the purpose of attaching them securely to reinforcing
steel.
5. In Beams, Columns, Walls, and Slabs Exposed to View after Form
Removal: Use small precast concrete blocks made of same color as
concrete in which they are embedded.
6. Design and fabricate special bar supports for top reinforcing bars in
slabs where standard bar supports do not possess necessary geometry,
strength, or stiffness.
7. Precast Concrete Supports: Total bond precast high performance
concrete bar supports as supplied by Con Sys Inc., Pinawa, MB, Canada.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Follow CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Bend bars cold.
PW/WBG/426399 REINFORCING STEEL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 21 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify Engineer when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient
time for inspection prior to placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcing bars of loose mill scale, oil, earth, and other contaminants.
C. Coat wire projecting from precast concrete bar supports with dielectric
material, epoxy, or plastic.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Bundle or space bars, instead of field bending where construction access
through reinforcing is necessary.
B. Spacing and Positioning: Conform to ACI 318.
C. Location Tolerances: In accordance with CRSI publication, “Placing
Reinforcing Bars.”
D. Splicing:
1. Follow ACI 318.
2. Use lap splices, unless otherwise shown or permitted in writing by
Engineer.
3. Welded Splices: Not permitted.
4. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where indicated.
E. Mechanical Splices and Connections:
1. Use only in areas specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
2. Install threaded rods as recommended by manufacturer with threads
totally engaged into coupling sleeve and in accordance with ICC
Evaluation Services Report or equivalent code agency report.
3. For metal sleeve splice, follow manufacturer’s installation
recommendations.
4. Maintain minimum edge distance and concrete cover.
REINFORCING STEEL PW/WBG/426399
03 21 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Tying Reinforcing Bars:
1. Tie every other intersection on mats made up of Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6 bars
to hold them firmly at required spacing.
2. Bend tie wire away from concrete surface to provide clearance of 1 inch
from surface of concrete to tie wire.
G. Reinforcement Around Openings: On each side and above and below pipe or
opening, place an equivalent area of steel bars to replace steel bars cut for
opening. Extend steel reinforcing a standard lap length beyond opening at each
end.
H. Welding Reinforcement: Not permitted.
I. Straightening and Rebending: Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not
permitted.
J. Unless permitted by Engineer, do not cut reinforcing bars in field.
3.03 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 REINFORCING STEEL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 21 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
c. 302.1R, Guide For Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
d. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete.
e. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
f. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
g. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field.
b. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
c. C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
d. C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use
of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
e. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
f. C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete.
g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
h. C157/C157M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of
Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete.
i. C192/C192M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
j. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method.
k. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete.
l. C311, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash
or Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
m. C452, Standard Test Method for Potential Expansion of Portland-
Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulfate.
n. C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures
for Concrete.
o. C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
p. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
q. C1012, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic-
Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution.
r. C1218/C1218M, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble
Chloride in Mortar and Concrete.
s. D4580, Standard Practice for Measuring Delaminations in
Concrete Bridge Decks by Sounding.
t. E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness
and FL Floor Levelness Numbers.
3. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): Handbook 44,
Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Requirements for
Weighing and Measuring Devices.
4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Defective Areas: Surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets,
indentations greater than 3/16 inch, cracks 0.005 inch wide and larger, as well
as a crack that leaks for liquid containment basins and belowgrade habitable
spaces; cracks 0.010 inch wide and larger in nonfluid holding structures spalls,
chips, air bubbles greater than 3/4 inch in diameter, pinholes, bug holes,
embedded debris, lift lines, sand lines, bleed lines, leakage from form joints,
fins and other projections, form popouts, texture irregularities, and stains and
other color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
B. Exposed Concrete: Concrete surfaces that can be seen inside or outside of
structures regardless whether concrete is above water, dry at all times, or can
be seen when structure is drained.
C. Hydraulic Structures: Liquid containment basins.
D. New Concrete: Less than 60 days old.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product Data: Admixtures, bonding agent, bond breaker, and
patching materials.
b. Design Data: Concrete mix designs signed by qualified mix
designer.
c. Placement Drawings: Concrete, identifying location of each type
of construction joint.
d. Gradation for coarse and fine aggregates, and combined together.
List gradings, percent passing through each sieve size.
e. Detailed plan for cold weather curing and protection of concrete
placed and cured in weather below 40 degrees F.
f. Detailed plan for hot weather placements including curing and
protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over
80 degrees F.
g. Concrete repair methods and materials.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Preinstallation Conference minutes.
2. Manufacturer’s application instructions for bonding agent and bond
breaker.
3. Manufacturers’ Certificate of Compliance:
a. Portland cement.
b. Admixtures.
c. Fly ash.
d. Aggregates.
e. Bonding agent.
f. Bond breaker.
g. Patching materials.
h. Admixtures: Manufacturers’ Certificate of Proper Installation.
4. Test Reports:
a. Admixtures, test reports showing chemical ingredients and
percentage of chloride in each admixture and fly ash.
b. Source test analysis report for fly ash, including percentage of
chloride content.
c. Statement identifying aggregates reactivity. Determine water
soluble chloride in each component of aggregates in accordance
with ASTM C1218/C1218M.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. For each trial concrete mix design and signed by a qualified mix
designer.
e. Cylinder compressive test results for laboratory concrete mixes.
5. Concrete Delivery Tickets:
a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site.
b. Record of drum revolution counter, type, brand, test certification,
Amount of fly ash if used in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M,
Section 16.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Batch Plant: Currently certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association.
2. Mix Designer: Licensed professional engineer registered in the state of
the Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Furnish from one source.
1. Portland Cement Type I or Type II:
a. Meet ASTM C150.
b. Alkalies: Maximum 0.60 percent.
c. Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Type I Cement: Maximum
12 percent.
d. Nonhydraulic Abovegrade Structures: Type I or Type II cement.
e. Hydraulic and Belowgrade Structures and Sewers: Type II cement
or combination of Type I mixed with fly ash.
f. Combine fly ash with cement at batch plant or during production
of cement in accordance with ASTM C595, Type IP cement.
B. Aggregates: Furnish from one source.
1. Natural Aggregates:
a. Free from deleterious coatings and substances in accordance with
ASTM C33, except as modified herein.
b. Free of materials and aggregate types causing popouts,
discoloration, staining, or other defects on surface of concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Nonpotentially Reactive: In accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix XI,
Paragraph X1.1.
3. Aggregate Soundness: Test for fine and coarse aggregates in accordance
with ASTM C33 and ASTM C88 using sodium sulfate solution.
4. Fine Aggregates:
a. Clean, sharp, natural sand.
b. ASTM C33.
c. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 4 percent maximum.
d. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33,
Table 1 with material finer than 200 sieve limited to 3 percent,
coal and lignite limited to 0.5 percent.
5. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Natural gravels, combination of gravels and crushed gravels,
crushed stone, or combination of these materials containing no
more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension
more than five times the short dimension).
b. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 0.5 percent maximum.
c. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33,
Table 3 for exposed concrete.
C. Admixtures: Furnish from one manufacturer.
1. Characteristics: Compatible with each other and free of chlorides or
other corrosive chemicals.
2. Air-Entraining Admixture:
a. ASTM C260, nontoxic after 30 days and contains no chlorides.
b. Concrete with air-entrainment admixture added shall maintain air
percentage as batched, within plus or minus 2 percent for time
required for placement into structure.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A or Type D.
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Pozzolith or
Polyheed.
2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon WR-91.
3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; WRDA with HYCOL.
4. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer):
a. ASTM C494/C494M.
b. Hold slump of 5 inches or greater for time required for placement.
c. Furnish type as recommended by manufacturer for allowed
temperature ranges.
d. Type F or G.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
e. Manufacturers and Products:
1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Rheobuild or
Polyheed at dosage greater than 10 ounces per 100 pounds
of cement.
2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon 537.
3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; Daracem 100.
5. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class C or Class F fly ash in accordance with
ASTM C618, except as modified herein:
a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss of Ignition: Maximum 3 percent.
b. ASTM C618, Table 2, Water Requirement: Maximum
100 percent of control.
c. ASTM C618, Table 3, Uniformity Requirements: Apply when
loss on ignition of fly ash furnished exceeds 3 percent.
6. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent, of total weight of
fly ash plus cement.
7. Fly ash used in concrete containing aggregate classified as potentially
reactive for ASR (alkali-silica reactivity) shall be limited to Class F and
shall contain low levels of CaO.
D. Water: Clean and potable containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent:
1. Furnish two-component epoxy.
2. Consult manufacturer for surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or
horizontal application, and forming restrictions.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; Concresive.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco Epoxy System.
c. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur 32.
B. Bond Breaker:
1. Nonstaining type, providing positive bond prevention.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Burke Co., San Mateo, CA; Burke Clean Lift Bond Breaker or
Burke Tilt Free Bond Breaker.
b. Nox-Crete Products Group, Omaha, NE; Silcoseal Select.
c. Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle, WA; Williams Tilt-Up
Compound.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Design: Select and proportion ingredients using trial batches; sample, cure and
test concrete mix through approved independent testing laboratory in
accordance with ACI 211.1.
1. Concrete Compressive Strength, F’c:
a. 4,000 psi at 28 days, unless otherwise shown, except 3,000 psi at
28 days for secondary concrete elements such as curbs, sidewalks,
and pipe/conduit encasements.
b. Design lab-cured trial mix cylinders.
c. Use additional cement or cement plus fly ash above minimum
specified if required to meet average compressive strength, F’cr.
d. Use F’cr as basis for selection of concrete proportions as set forth
in ACI 301.
e. F’cr: Equal to F’c plus 1,200 when data are not available to
establish standard deviation.
2. Concrete Fill:
a. Design for 2,500 psi at 28 days using 1-inch aggregate, 4-inch
maximum slump and 0.46 maximum water to cementitious
materials ratio.
b. Use water-reducing admixture.
B. Proportions:
1. Design mix to meet aesthetic and structural concrete requirements.
2. In accordance with ACI 211.1, unless specified otherwise.
3. Unless specifically stated otherwise, water to cementitious materials
ratio shall control amount of total water added to concrete as follows:
Water to Cementitious Materials Ratio
Maximum W/C Maximum W/C
Coarse Aggregate Ratio w/ Ratio w/o
Size Superplasticizer Superplasticizer
1" 0.40 0.44
3/4" 0.40 0.44
4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content:
a. 517 pounds per cubic yard for concrete with 1-1/2-inch maximum
size aggregate.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. 540 pounds per cubic yard for 1-inch maximum size aggregate.
c. 564 pounds per cubic yard for 3/4-inch maximum size aggregate.
d. Increase cementitious materials content as required to obtain
strength requirements and water-cement ratio.
C. Admixtures:
1. Air Content:
a. 4 percent to 6 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C231.
b. 3 percent maximum for interior slabs where heavy-duty concrete
floor finish is required or for interior slabs with dense polished
machine-trowel surface.
c. Use 4 percent minimum for concrete placed under requirements of
cold weather concreting, unless noted otherwise.
2. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent of total weight of
fly ash plus cement.
3. Water Reducers: Use in all concrete.
4. High Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use in concrete with
compressive strength of 4,000 psi or greater. Control slump and
workability to at least 4-1/2-inch slump at discharge into forms by
adjusting high range water reducer at batch plant.
D. Slump Range at Site:
1. 4-1/2 inches minimum, 8 inches maximum for concrete with a high
range water reducing admixture.
2. 3 inches minimum and 5 inches maximum for concrete without high
range water reducing admixture.
E. Combined Aggregate Gradation:
1. Structures: Select one of the gradations shown in the following table.
2. Combined Gradation Limits: Limits shown are for coarse aggregates and
fine aggregates mixed together (combined).
Combined Gradation
Percentage Passing
Sieve Sizes 1" Max. 3/4" Max.
2" - -
1-1/2" - 100 -
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Combined Gradation
Percentage Passing
Sieve Sizes 1" Max. 3/4" Max.
1" 90 - 100 - 100
3/4" 70 - 90 92 - 100
1/2" 68 - 86
3/8" 45 - 65 57 - 74
No. 4 31 - 47 38 - 57
No. 8 23 - 40 28 - 46
No. 16 17 - 35 20 - 36
No. 30 10 - 23 14 - 25
No. 50 2 - 10 5 - 14
No. 100 0-3 0-5
No. 200 0-2 0-2
2.04 CONCRETE MIXING
A. General: In accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Concrete Mix Temperatures: As shown below for various stages of mixing
and placing:
Concrete Temperatures
Concrete Member Size, Minimum Dimension
Ambient Air Temp. 72"
Minimum concrete temperature as mixed for indicated air temperature:
Above 30 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F 45 deg F
0 to 30 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F
Below 0 deg F 70 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F
Maximum allowable gradual temperature drop in first 24 hours after curing
period and after end of protection:
– 50 deg F 40 deg F 30 deg F 20 deg F
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Truck Mixers:
1. Equip with electrically actuated counters to readily verify number of
revolutions of drum or blades.
2. Counter:
a. Resettable, recording type, mounted in driver’s cab.
b. Actuated at time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
3. Truck mixer operation shall furnish concrete batch as discharged that is
homogeneous with respect to consistency, mix, and grading.
4. If slump tests taken at approximately 1/4 point and 3/4 point of load
during discharge give slumps differing by more than 2 inches when
specified, slump is more than 4 inches, discontinue use of truck mixer
unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is
verified by additional slump tests.
5. Before attempting to reuse unit, check mechanical details of mixer, such
as water measuring, and discharge apparatus, condition of blades, speed
of rotation, general mechanical condition of unit, admixture dispensing
equipment, and clearance of drum.
6. Do not use nonagitating or combination truck and trailer equipment for
transporting ready-mixed concrete.
7. Concrete Volume in Truck:
a. Limit to 63 percent of total volume capacity in accordance with
ASTM C94/C94M when truck mixed.
b. Limit to 80 percent of total volume capacity when central mixed.
8. Mix each batch of concrete in truck mixer for minimum 70 revolutions
of drum or blades at rate of rotation designated by equipment
manufacturer.
9. Perform additional mixing, if required, at speed designated by
equipment manufacturer as agitating speed.
10. Place materials, including mixing water, in mixer drum before actuating
revolution counter for determining number of mixing revolutions.
D. Aggregates: Thoroughly and uniformly wash before use.
E. Admixtures:
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Add at plant through manufacturer-approved
dispensing equipment.
2. Water Reducers: Add prior to addition of high range water reducing
admixture (superplasticizers).
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. High range water reducing admixture (superplasticizers) and Air-
Entraining Admixtures:
a. Add at concrete plant only through equipment furnished or
approved by admixture manufacturer.
b. Accomplish variations in slump, working time, and air content for
flowable mixes by increasing or reducing high range water
reducing admixture (superplasticizers) dose or air-entraining
admixture dose at ready-mix plant only.
c. Equipment shall provide for easy and quick visual verification of
admixture amount used for each dose.
d. Add discharge amount to each load of concrete into separate
dispensing container, verify amount is correct, and add to
concrete.
e. Additional dosage of high range water reducing admixture
(superplasticizers) may be added in field using manufacturer-
approved dispensing when unexpected delays cause too great of
slump loss.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cement: Test for total chloride content.
B. Fly Ash: Test in accordance with ASTM C311.
C. Batch Plant Inspection: Engineer shall have access to and have right to inspect
batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers,
and Subcontractors, providing products included in these Specifications.
1. Weighing Scales: Tested and certified within tolerances set forth in the
NIST Handbook No. 44.
2. Batch Plant Equipment: Either semiautomatic or fully automatic in
accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation: Meet requirements and recommendations of ACI 304R and
ACI 301, except as modified herein.
B. Inspection: Notify Engineer at least 1 full working day in advance before
starting to place concrete.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Discharge Time:
1. As determined by set time, do not exceed 1-1/2 hours after adding
cement to water unless special approved time delay admixtures are used.
Coordinate time delay admixture information with manufacturer and
Engineer prior to placing concrete.
2. Adjust slump or air content at Site by adding admixtures for particular
load when approved by Engineer. Then, adjust plant dosage for
remainder of placement. Additional dosage at Site shall be through
approved dispenser supplied by admixture manufacturer.
3. Maintain required slump throughout time of concrete placement and
consolidation. Discontinue use of high range water reducing admixture
(superplasticizers) and provide new mix design if it fails to maintain
slump between 4 inches to 8 inches and produce good consolidation for
length of time required. Redesign mix adjusting set control admixtures
to maintain setting time in range required.
D. Placement into Formwork:
1. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by
concrete.
2. Prior to placement of concrete, dampen fill under slabs on ground,
dampen sand where vapor retarder is specified, and dampen wood
forms.
3. Reinforcement: Secure in position before placing concrete.
4. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without
segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel
above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep, except for slabs which shall
be placed full depth. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to
initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints.
5. Use placement devices, for example, chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps.
6. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement: 5 feet in forms 8 inches or
less wide and 8 feet in forms wider than 8 inches, except as specified.
a. For placements where drops are greater than specified, use
placement device such that free fall below placement device
conforms to required value.
b. Limit free fall to prevent segregation caused by aggregates hitting
reinforcing steel.
7. Do not use aluminum conveying devices.
8. Provide sufficient illumination in the interior of forms so concrete
deposition is visible, permitting confirmation of consolidation quality.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9. Joints in Footings and Slabs:
a. Ensure space beneath plastic water stop completely fills with
concrete.
b. During concrete placement, make visual inspection of entire water
stop area.
c. Limit concrete placement to elevation of waterstop in first pass,
vibrate concrete under waterstop, lift waterstop to confirm full
consolidation without voids, place remaining concrete to full
height of slab.
d. Apply procedure to full length of waterstops.
10. If reinforcement is in direct sunlight or is more than 20 degrees F higher
in temperature than concrete temperature before placement, wet
reinforcement with water fog spray before placing concrete to cool
reinforcement.
11. Trowel and round off top exposed edges of walls with 1/4-inch radius
steel edging tool.
E. Conveyor Belts and Chutes:
1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of
concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system
for concrete to pass without becoming segregated.
2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet.
3. Minimum Slopes of Chutes: Angled to allow concrete to readily flow
without segregation.
4. Conveyor Belts:
a. Approved by Engineer.
b. Wipe clean with device that does not allow mortar to adhere to
belt.
c. Cover conveyor belts and chutes.
F. Retempering: Not permitted for concrete where cement has partially hydrated.
G. Pumping of Concrete:
1. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or
other system onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to assure
completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of primary
placing equipment breakdown.
2. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches.
3. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not
functioning properly.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
H. Maximum Size of Concrete Placements:
1. Limit size of each placement to allow for strength gain and volume
change as a result of shrinkage.
2. Joints:
a. Locate expansion, control, contraction, and construction joints
where shown.
b. When expansion or control joints are not shown, provide
construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet.
c. When expansion or control joint spacing exceeds 60 feet, provide
intermediate construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet.
d. Uniformly space construction joints.
e. Vertical construction joint shall not be greater than 20 feet from
wall corners or intersections.
3. Consider beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, and haunches as part
of floor or roof system and place monolithically with floor or roof
system.
4. Should placement sequence result in cold joint located below finished
water surface, install waterstop in joint.
I. Minimum Time between Adjacent Placements:
1. Construction Joints: 14 days (7 days wet cure and 7 days dry cure).
2. Control Joints: 6 days.
3. Expansion Joints/Contraction Joints: 1 day.
4. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in long columns
and walls thicker than 8 inches before depositing concrete in beams,
girders, or slabs supported thereon.
5. For columns and walls 10 feet in height or less, wait at least 45 minutes
prior to depositing concrete in beams, girders, brackets, column capitals,
or slabs supported thereon.
J. Removal of Water: Unless tremie method for placing concrete is specified,
remove water from space to be occupied by concrete.
K. Consolidation and Visual Observation:
1. Consolidate concrete with internal vibrators with minimum frequency of
8,000 cycles per minute and amplitude as required to consolidate
concrete in section being placed.
2. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at placement
Site prior to placing concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 14 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Consolidation Equipment and Methods: ACI 309R.
4. Provide sufficient windows in forms or limit form height to allow for
concrete placement through windows and for visual observation of
concrete.
5. Vibration consolidation shall not exceed distance of 3 feet from point of
placement.
6. Vibrate concrete in vicinity of joints to obtain impervious concrete.
L. Hot Weather:
1. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with
ACI 305R.
2. Placement frequency shall be such that lift lines will not be visible in
exposed concrete finishes.
3. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 degrees F at time of placement,
or furnish test data or provide other proof that admixtures and mix
ingredients do not produce flash set plastic shrinkage, or cracking as a
result of heat of hydration. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain
fresh concrete temperatures as specified or less.
4. Provide for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, wet
cover, or other means as necessary to maintain concrete at or below
specified temperature.
5. Prevent differential temperature between reinforcing steel and concrete.
M. Cold Weather Placement:
1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F
or approaching 40 degrees F and falling, without special protection as
specified or approved by Engineer.
2. Do not place concrete against frozen earth or ice, or against forms and
reinforcement with frost or ice present.
3. Provide heated enclosures when air temperatures are below
40 degrees F.
4. Maintain surface temperature of concrete above 40 degrees F and cure
concrete as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, for
minimum of 7 days.
5. Provide maximum and minimum thermometers placed on concrete
surfaces spaced throughout Work to allow monitoring of concrete
surface temperatures representative of Work.
6. In accordance with ACI 306.1 and ACI 301.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 15
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7. External Heating Units:
a. Vent heating units to atmosphere and do not locally heat or dry
concrete. Where water cure is specified, maintain wet condition.
b. Do not exhaust heater flue gases (causes concrete carbonation as a
result of concentrated carbon dioxide) directly into enclosed area.
8. Maintain curing conditions as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete
Curing.
3.02 CONCRETE BONDING
A. To Existing Concrete:
1. Thoroughly clean and mechanically roughen existing concrete surfaces
to roughness profile of 1/4 inch.
2. Saturate surface with water for 24 hours prior to placing new concrete.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. As specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories.
3.04 REPAIRING CONCRETE
A. Tie Holes:
1. Fill with nonshrink grout as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink
Grouting.
2. Match color of adjacent concrete and demonstrate on mockup panels
first.
3. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high
density. Cure grout with water.
B. Alternate Form Ties; Through-Bolts:
1. Mechanically roughen entire interior surface of through hole. Epoxy
coat roughened surface and drive elastic vinyl plug to half depth. Dry
pack entire hole from both sides of plug with nonshrink grout, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Use only enough
water to dry pack grout. Dry pack while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy has
dried, remove epoxy by mechanical means and reapply new epoxy.
2. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high
density. Cure grout with water.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 16 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Exposed Metal Objects:
1. Metal objects not intended to be exposed in as-built condition of
structure including wire, nails, and bolts, shall be removed by chipping
back concrete to depth of 1 inch and then cutting or removing metal
object.
2. Repair area of chipped-out concrete. Submit materials and procedure to
Engineer for approval.
D. Blockouts at Pipes or Other Penetrations:
1. Install per details shown on Drawings or submit proposed blockouts for
review.
2. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, Category I or II as specified in
Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting.
3.05 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES
A. Type W-1 (Ordinary Wall Finish):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Knock off projections.
3. Patch defective areas.
B. Type W-2 (Smooth Wall Finish):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots.
3. Patch defective areas and repair rough spots resulting from form release
agent failure or other reasons to provide smooth uniform appearance.
C. Type W-5 (Finish for Painting):
1. Patch tie holes.
2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots.
3. Patch and repair defective areas as specified for Type W-2.
4. Leave surface ready for painting as specified in Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 17
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.06 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES
A. General:
1. Finish slab concrete per the requirements of ACI 302.1R.
2. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds, or roller compacting screeds to
place concrete level and smooth.
3. Do not use “jitterbugs” or other special tools designed for purpose of
forcing coarse aggregate away from surface and allowing layer of
mortar, which will be weak and cause surface cracks or delamination, to
accumulate.
4. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials.
5. Use evaporation retardant.
6. Round off edges of slabs with steel edging tool, except where cove
finish is shown. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/4 inch for slabs
subject to wheeled traffic.
B. Type S-1 (Steel Troweled Finish):
1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to
required finish elevation. Use evaporation retardant.
2. While concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a person’s
weight without deep imprint, wood float to true, even plane with no
coarse aggregate visible.
3. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to surface.
4. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand trowel concrete to produce
smooth, impervious surface, free from trowel marks.
5. Burnish surface with an additional troweling. Final troweling shall
produce ringing sound from trowel.
6. Do not use dry cement or additional water during troweling, nor will
excessive troweling be permitted.
7. Power Finishing:
a. Approved power machine may be used in lieu of hand finishing in
accordance with directions of machine manufacturer.
b. Do not use power machine when concrete has not attained
necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low
spots in slab.
c. Do first steel troweling for slab S-1 finish by hand.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 18 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Type S-2 (Wood Float Finish):
1. Finish slab to receive fill and mortar setting bed by screeding with
straightedges to bring surface to required finish plane.
2. Wood float finish to compact and seal surface.
3. Remove laitance and leave surface clean.
4. Coordinate with other finish procedures.
D. Type S-5 (Broomed Finish):
1. Finish as specified for Type S-1 floor finish, except omit final troweling
and finish surface by drawing fine-hair broom lightly across surface.
2. Broom in same direction and parallel to expansion joints, or, in the case
of inclined slabs, perpendicular to slope, except for round roof slab,
broom surface in radial direction.
E. Type S-6 (Sidewalk Finish):
1. Slope walks down 1/4 inch per foot away from structures, unless
otherwise shown.
2. Strike off surface by means of strike board and float with wood or cork
float to true plane, then flat steel trowel before brooming.
3. Broom surface at right angles to direction of traffic or as shown.
4. Lay out sidewalk surfaces in blocks, as shown or as directed by
Engineer, with grooving tool.
F. Concrete Curbs:
1. Float top surface of curb smooth, and finish all discontinuous edges with
steel edger.
2. After concrete has taken its initial set, remove front form and give
exposed vertical surface an ordinary wall finish, Type W-1.
3.07 CONCRETE SLAB TOLERANCES
A. Slab Tolerances:
1. Exposed Slab Surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as required within
tolerances specified.
2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Crowns on floor surface
not too high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on end
blocks, nor low spots that allow block of twice the tolerance in thickness
to pass under supported 10-foot straightedge.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 19
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Slab Type S-A: Steel gauge block 5/16 inch thick.
4. Slab Type S-B: Steel gauge block 1/8 inch thick.
5. Slab Type S-A and S-B: Finish Slab Elevation: Slope slabs to floor
drain and gutter, and shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances.
6. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness
shown. Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab
elevation, thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus.
3.08 BEAM AND COLUMN FINISHES
A. General: Patch and repair defective areas.
B. Type B-1: Match wall Type W-1.
C. Type B-2: Match wall Type W-2.
D. Type C-1: Match wall Type W-1.
E. Type C-2: Match wall Type W-2.
3.09 BACKFILL AGAINST WALLS
A. Do not backfill against walls until concrete has obtained specified 28-day
compressive strength.
B. Place backfill simultaneously on both sides of wall, where required, to prevent
differential pressures.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete
test cylinders onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be
required before transporting to test lab.
2. Provide concrete for testing of slump, air content, and for making
cylinders from the point of discharge into forms. When concrete is
pumped, Samples used shall be taken from discharge end of pump hose.
3. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI 301 and Specifications.
4. Specimens shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with
ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M.
5. Frequency of testing may be changed at discretion of Engineer.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 20 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. Pumped Concrete: Take concrete samples for slump (ASTM C143/
C143M) and test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M).
7. Reject concrete represented by cylinders failing to meet strength and air
content specified.
B. High Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer) Admixture Segregation Test:
Test each truck prior to use on job.
1. Segregation Test Objective: Concrete with 4-inch to 8-inch slump must
stay together when slumped. Segregation is assumed to cause mortar to
flow out of mix even though aggregate may stay piled enough to meet
slump test.
2. Test Procedure: Make slump test and check for excessive slump and
observe to see if mortar or moisture flows from slumped concrete.
3. Reject concrete if mortar or moisture separates and flows out of mix.
C. Cold Weather Placement Tests:
1. During cold weather concreting, cast cylinders for field curing as
follows. Use method that will produce greater number of specimens:
a. Six extra test cylinders from last 100 cubic yards of concrete.
b. Minimum three specimens for each 2 hours of placing time or for
each 100 cubic yards.
2. These specimens shall be in addition to those cast for lab testing.
3. Protect test cylinders from weather until they can be placed under same
protection provided for concrete of structure that they represent.
4. Keep field test cylinders in same protective environment as parts of
structure they represent to determine if specified strength has been
obtained.
5. Test cylinders in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM C31/
C31M and ASTM C39/C39M.
6. Use test results to determine specified strength gain prior to falsework
removal or for prestressing.
D. Tolerances:
1. Walls: Measure and inspect walls for compliance with tolerances
specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories.
2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances:
a. Floor flatness measurements shall be made day after floor is
finished and before shoring is removed to eliminate effects of
shrinkage, curing, and deflection.
PW/WBG/426399 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 30 00 - 21
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Support 10-foot-long straightedge at each end with steel gauge
blocks of thicknesses equal to specified tolerance.
c. Compliance with designated limits in four of five consecutive
measurements is satisfactory, unless defective conditions are
observed.
3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. After curing as specified in Section 03 39 00, Concrete Curing, and after
applying final floor finish, cover slabs with plywood or particle board or
plastic sheeting or other material to keep floor clean and protect it from
material and damage as a result of other construction work.
B. Repair defective areas and areas damaged by construction.
3.12 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Form Tolerances: As specified in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and
Accessories.
B. Provide concrete finishes as scheduled:
Required
Type of Form
Area Finish Tolerances
Interior Surfaces
All surfaces unless noted otherwise W-2 W-A
Interior Slabs
Buildings, pipe galleries, and other dry areas S-1 S-B
Beams and Columns
Beams B-2 B-A
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PW/WBG/426399
03 30 00 - 22 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing concrete.
b. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing
Concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Manufacturers’ data for the following products:
a. Exposed aggregate finish retardant on formed surface.
b. Evaporation retardant.
c. Curing compound.
d. Clear sealer.
e. Clear floor hardener.
2. Curing methods proposed.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Curing Compound: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance showing
moisture retention requirements.
2. Retardants for Exposed Aggregate Finish: Manufacturer’s Certification
of Compliance.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE CURING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 39 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound:
1. Water-based, high solids content non-yellowing curing compound
meeting requirements of ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315.
a. Moisture Loss: 0.40 kg/square m/72 hours maximum.
b. Capable of meeting moisture retention at manufacturer’s specified
application rate.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Chemrex, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Masterkure.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Super Diamond
Clear VOX.
c. WR Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, IL; VOCOMP-30.
d. Vexcon Chemical, Inc.; Philadelphia, PA; Starseal 1315.
e. Dayton Superior; Safe Cure and Seal 30%.
B. Evaporation Retardant:
1. Optional: Fluorescent color tint that disappears completely upon drying.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; Confilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar.
C. Clear Sealer (One-Component Penetrating Silane Sealer):
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Chemrex, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Masterseal SL.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.; Eucoguard 200.
D. Water: Clean and potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
CONCRETE CURING PW/WBG/426399
03 39 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CURING OF CONCRETE
A. Use one of the following methods as approved by Engineer:
1. Walls:
a. General: Where walls are to receive coatings, painting,
cementitious material, or other similar finishes, use only water
curing procedures.
b. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces
of forms and concrete wet for 7 days.
c. Method 2: Apply curing compound, where allowed, immediately
after removal of forms.
d. Method 3: Continuously sprinkle with water 100 percent of
exposed surfaces for 7 days starting immediately after removal of
forms.
2. Slabs and Curbs:
a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for 7 days.
b. Method 2: Cover with burlap or cotton mats and keep
continuously wet for 7 days.
c. Method 3: Cover with 1-inch layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust,
and keep continuously wet for 7 days.
d. Method 4: Continuously sprinkle exposed surface for 7 days.
e. Other agreed upon method that will keep moisture present and
uniform at all times on surface of slabs. Do not use curing
compounds.
f. Where water curing for slabs during cold weather is not possible,
use Engineer-approved curing compound at manufacturer’s
recommended coverage per gallon.
g. Where curing compound cannot be used, special methods using
moisture shall be agreed upon prior to placing the concrete slabs.
h. Protect slabs during cold weather with plastic sheets or other
material inside required heated enclosure if foot traffic is
permitted on slabs.
B. Use only water curing where additional finishes such as clear sealer,
hardeners, painting, and other special coatings are required.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE CURING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 39 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.02 EVAPORATION RETARDANT APPLICATION
A. Spray onto surface of fresh flatwork concrete immediately after screeding to
react with surface moisture.
B. Reapply as needed to ensure a continuous moist surface until final finishing is
completed.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance,
inspection, and certification of proper installation for products specified.
B. Provide clear sealer manufacturer’s representative to demonstrate proper
application of product.
C. Provide floor hardener manufacturer’s representative to demonstrate proper
mixing and application of product.
D. Provide curing compound manufacturer’s representative to demonstrate proper
application of curing compound to show coverage in one coat.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE CURING PW/WBG/426399
03 39 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 62 00
NONSHRINK GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C230, Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of
Hydraulic Cement.
b. C621, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Nonshrinkable).
c. C939, Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-
Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
d. C1107/C1107M, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product data of grouts.
2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to
placing grout.
3. Forming method for fluid grout placements.
4. Curing method for grout.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Written Instructions:
a. Adding fiber reinforcing to batching.
b. Cement-water ratio of grout topping.
c. Mixing of grout.
2. Manufacturer’s proposed training schedule for grout work.
3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance:
a. Grout free from chlorides and other corrosion-causing chemicals.
b. Nonshrink grout properties of Category II and Category III,
verifying expansion at 3 days or 14 days will not exceed the
28-day expansion and nonshrink properties are not based on gas or
gypsum expansion.
PW/WBG/426399 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
5. Statements of Qualification: Nonshrink grout manufacturer’s
representative.
6. Test Reports:
a. Test report for 24-hour evaluation of nonshrink grout.
b. Test results and service report from demonstration and training
session.
c. Field test reports and laboratory test results for field-drawn
Samples.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Nonshrink Grout Manufacturer’s Representative: Authorized and trained
representative of grout manufacturer. Minimum of 1-year experience that has
resulted in successful installation of grouts similar to those for this Project.
B. For grout suppliers not listed herein, provide completed 24-hour Evaluation of
Nonshrink Grout Test Form, attached at the end of this section. Independent
testing laboratory to certify that testing was conducted within last 18 months.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturer’s guarantee shall not contain disclaimer on the product data
sheet, grout bag, or container limiting responsibility to only the purchase price
of products and materials furnished.
B. Manufacturer guarantees participation with Contractor in replacing or
repairing grout found defective as a result of faulty materials, as determined by
industry standard test methods.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NONSHRINK GROUT SCHEDULE
A. Furnish nonshrink grout for applications in grout category in the following
schedule:
NONSHRINK GROUTING PW/WBG/426399
03 62 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Temperature
Range Max. Placing Time
40 deg F to Greater Than
Application 100 deg F 20 Min. 20 Min.
Filling tie holes I I I
Blockouts for gate guides I or II II
Column baseplates single- I or II II
story
Machine bases 25 hp or II II II
less
Baseplates for columns II II II
over one story
Machine bases 26 hp and III III III
up
Baseplates and/or III III III
soleplates with vibration,
thermal movement, etc.
2.02 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. Category I:
1. Nonmetallic and nongas-liberating.
2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of
water.
3. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M:
a. Grout shall have flowable consistency.
b. Flowable for 15 minutes.
4. Grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water.
5. Minimum strength of flowable grout, 3,000 psi at 3 days, 5,000 psi at
7 days, and 7,000 psi at 28 days.
6. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Construction
Grout.
b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; NS Grout.
PW/WBG/426399 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; 1107 Advantage Grout.
d. US MIX Co., Denver, CO; US Spec MP Grout.
e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Duragrout.
B. Category II:
1. Nonmetallic, nongas-liberating.
2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of
water.
3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at
specified times or temperatures.
4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M:
a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with
ASTM C939.
b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F, 80 degrees F, and 100 degrees F.
5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous
flow.
6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 3,500 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 3 days,
and 7,500 psi at 28 days.
7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 to 9 yard loads in ready-mix
truck.
8. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Master Flow 928.
b. Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star Fluid Grout 100.
c. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Hi Flow Grout.
d. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; Sure Grip High
Performance Grout.
e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Crystex.
C. Category III:
1. Metallic and nongas-liberating.
2. Prepackaged aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water.
3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at
specified times or temperatures.
4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M:
a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with
ASTM C939.
b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.
5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous
flow.
NONSHRINK GROUTING PW/WBG/426399
03 62 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days,
and 9,000 psi at 28 days.
7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1-yard to 9-yard loads in
ready-mix truck.
8. Manufacturer and Product:
a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; EMBECO 885.
b. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Ferrogrout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. General: Mix, place, and cure nonshrink grout in accordance with grout
manufacturer’s representative’s training instructions.
B. Form Tie or Through-Bolt Holes: Provide nonshrink grout, Category I and
Category II, fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool
and hammer. Through-bolt holes; coordinate dry pack dense grout application
with vinyl plug in Section 03 10 00, Concrete Forming and Accessories, and
bonding agent in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Grouting Machinery Foundations:
1. Block out original concrete or finish off at distance shown below bottom
of machinery base with grout. Prepare concrete surface by sandblasting,
chipping, or by mechanical means to remove any soft material.
2. Set machinery in position and wedge to elevation with steel wedges, or
use cast-in leveling bolts.
3. Form with watertight forms at least 2 inches higher than bottom of plate.
4. Fill space between bottom of machinery base and original concrete in
accordance with manufacturer’s representative’s training instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Evaluation and Acceptance of Nonshrink Grout:
1. Provide a flow cone and cube molds with restraining plates onsite.
Continue tests during Project as demonstrated by grout manufacturer’s
representative.
2. Perform flow cone and bleed tests, and make three 2-inch by 2-inch
cubes for each 25 cubic feet of each type of nonshrink grout used. Use
restraining caps for cube molds in accordance with
ASTM C1107/C1107M.
PW/WBG/426399 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. For large grout applications make three additional cubes and one more
flow cone test. Include bleed test for each additional 25 cubic feet of
nonshrink grout placed.
4. Consistency: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout with
consistencies outside range requirements shall be rejected.
5. Segregation: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout when
aggregate separates shall be rejected.
6. Nonshrink grout cubes shall test equal to or greater than minimum
strength specified.
7. Strength Test Failures: Nonshrink grout work failing strength tests shall
be removed and replaced.
8. Perform bleeding test to demonstrate grout will not bleed.
9. Store cubes at 70 degrees F.
10. Independent testing laboratory shall prepare, store, cure, and test cubes
in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. General:
1. Coordinate demonstrations, training sessions, and applicable Site visits
with grout manufacturer’s representative.
2. Provide and conduct onsite, demonstration and training sessions for
bleed tests, mixing, flow cone measurement, cube testing, application,
and curing for each category and type of nonshrink grout.
3. Necessary equipment and materials shall be available for demonstration.
B. Training:
1. Training is required for all Type II and Type III grout installations.
2. Grout manufacturer’s representative shall train Contractor to perform
grout work.
3. Establish location at Site and schedule time for grout manufacturer’s
demonstration and training session of proposed nonshrink grouts. Mix
nonshrink grouts to required consistency, test, place, and cure on actual
Project, such as, baseplates and tie holes to provide actual on-the-job
training.
4. Use minimum of five bags for each grout Category II and Category III.
Mix grout to fluid consistency and conduct flow cone and two bleed
tests, make a minimum of six cubes for testing of two cubes at 1 day,
3 days, and 28 days. Use remaining grout for final Work.
5. Training shall include methods for curing grout.
NONSHRINK GROUTING PW/WBG/426399
03 62 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. Transport test cubes to independent test laboratory and obtain test
reports.
3.04 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this
Specification.
1. 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing
Procedures.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
SUPPLEMENT 1
(Test Lab Name)
(Address)
(Phone No.)
24-HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM
OBJECTIVE: Define standard set of test procedures for an independent testing
laboratory to perform and complete within a 24-hour period.
SCOPE: Utilize test procedures providing 24-hour results to duplicate field
grouting demands. Intent of evaluation is to establish grout
manufacturer’s qualifications.
PRIOR TO TEST: Obtain five bags of each type of grout.
1. From intended grout supplier for Project.
2. Five bags of grout shall be of same lot number.
ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS FOR GROUT BEING TESTED FROM
LITERATURE, DATA, AND PRINTING ON BAG:
A. Product data and warranty information contained in company
literature and data? Yes_____ No_____
B. Literature and bag information meet specified requirements? Yes_____ No_____
C. Manufacturer guarantees grout as specified in
Article Guarantee? Yes_____ No_____
D. Guarantee extends beyond grout replacement value and
allows participation with Contractor in
replacing and repairing defective areas? Yes_____ No_____
E. Water demands and limits printed on bag? Yes_____ No_____
F. Mixing information printed on the bag? Yes_____ No_____
G. Temperature restrictions printed on bag? Yes_____ No_____
*Rejection of a grout will occur if one or more answers are noted NO.
PW/WBG/398678 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
GROUT TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Bagged Material:
1. List lot numbers.
2. List expiration date.
3. Weigh bags and record weight.
Owner’s Representative will disqualify grout if bag weights have misstated measure
plus or minus 2 pounds by more than one out of five bags. (Accuracy of weights is
required to regulate amount of water used in mixing since this will affect properties.)
B. Mixing and Consistency Determination:
1. Mix full bag of grout in 10 gallon pail.
2. Use electric drill with a paddle device to mix grout (jiffy or jiffler type paddle).
3. Use maximum water allowed per water requirements listed in bag instructions.
4. Mix grout to maximum time listed on bag instructions.
5. In accordance with ASTM C939 (flow cone) determine time of mixed grout
through the flow cone. __________ seconds
6. Add water to attain 20 to 30 second flow in accordance with ASTM C939.
7. Record time of grout through cone at new water demand. _______ seconds
8. Record total water needed to attain 20 to 30 second flow. _______ pounds
9. Record percent of water. __________ percent
C. When fluid grout is specified and additional water is required beyond grout
manufacturer’s listed maximum water, ASTM C1107/C1107M will be run at new
water per grout ratio to determine whether grout passes using actual water
requirements to be fluid. Use new water per grout ratio on remaining tests.
D. Bleed Test:
1. Fill two gallon cans half full of freshly mixed grout at ambient temperatures for
each category and at required consistency for each.
2. Place one can of grout in tub of ice water and leave one can at ambient
temperature.
3. Cover top of both cans with glass or plastic plate preventing evaporation.
4. Maintain 38 degrees F to 42 degrees F temperature with grout placed in ice and
maintain ambient temperature for second container for 1 hour.
NONSHRINK GROUTING PW/WBG/398678
03 62 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
5. Visually check for bleeding of water at 15-minute intervals for 2 hours.
6. Perform final observation at 24 hours.
If grout bleeds a small amount at temperatures specified, grout will be rejected.
E. Extended Flow Time and Segregation Test (for Category II and Category III):
1. Divide the remaining grout into two 3 gallon cans. Place the cans into the
40-degree F and 100-degree F containers and leave for 20, 40, and 60 minutes.
Every 20 minutes remove and check for segregation or settlement of aggregate.
Use a gloved hand to reach to the bottom of the can, if more than 1/4-inch of
aggregate has settled to the bottom or aggregate has segregated into clumps
reject the grout.
2. Right after the settlement test mix the grout with the drill mixer for 10 seconds.
Take a ASTM C939 flow cone test of grout and record flow time. Maintain this
process for 1 hour at ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.
a. 20 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
b. 40 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
c. 60 min _____, sec. @ 40 degrees F.
d. 20 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
e. 40 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
f. 60 min _____, sec. @ 100 degrees F.
All Category II and Category III grout that will not go through the flow cone with
continuous flow after 60 minutes will be disqualified.
____________ ____________
Qualified Disqualified
F. 24-hour Strength Test:
1. Using grout left in mixing cans in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M for
mixing and consistency determination test and for extended time flow test, make
minimum of nine cube samples.
2. Store cubes at 70 degrees F for 24 hours.
3. Record average compressive strength of nine cubes at 24 hours.
Grout will be disqualified if 24-hour compressive strengths are less than 2,500 psi for
grouts claiming fluid placement capabilities.
Grouts that have not been disqualified after these tests are qualified for use on the
Project for the application indicated in Nonshrink Grout Schedule.
Signature of Independent Testing Laboratory Date Test Conducted
PW/WBG/398678 NONSHRINK GROUTING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 62 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 03 63 00
CONCRETE DOWELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. ASTM International (ASTM): C881/C881M, Standard Specification for
Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.
3. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Services Report.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ICC Evaluation Services Report for concrete anchor manufacturers.
B. Special Inspection: Observation of Work by Special Inspector for
conformance to approved design Drawings and Specifications.
C. Special Inspector: Qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to
satisfaction of building official, for inspection of Work specified within this
section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog information.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s qualifications; include client name, address, contact
person, phone number, project location, and description of work.
2. Manufacturer’s instructions for preparation, placement, drilling of holes,
installation of anchors and adhesive, and handling of cartridges, nozzles,
and equipment.
3. Manufacturer’s written letter of certification identifying installer’s
qualifications to install products.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE DOWELING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 63 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. ICC Evaluation Services Report:
a. Doweling system manufacturer.
b. Detailed step-by-step instructions for Special Inspection
procedure.
5. Special Inspection report.
6. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: At least three similar projects with same products within
last 3 years.
2. Installer: Trained and certified by manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store adhesive cartridges and adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a
covered storage area.
B. Store at temperatures as indicated in manufacturer’s literature and ICC
Evaluation Services Report.
C. Dispose of When:
1. Shelf life has expired.
2. Stored other than per manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch
number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard
classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ADHESIVE
A. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both
components in the proper mixing ratio and that fit into manually or
pneumatically operated caulking gun.
B. Meet requirements of ASTM C881/C881M.
CONCRETE DOWELING PW/WBG/426399
03 63 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Two-component, insensitive to moisture, designed to be installed in adverse
freeze/thaw environments.
D. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use
and anticipated environmental conditions.
E. Mixed Adhesive: Nonsag light paste consistency with ability to remain in a
1-inch diameter overhead drilled hole without runout.
F. Adhesive anchor system used in concrete shall be approved by ICC Evaluation
Services Report for use in cracked concrete and for short and long-term loads
including wind and earthquake, and shall be approved for use with IBC 2009.
G. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti HIT-HY 150 MAX-SD or approved equal
meeting capacities determined with ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-3013 for
specific application geometry.
2.02 MIXING NOZZLES
A. Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate size of reinforcing
dowels.
B. Nonremovable internal static mixer required to ensure proper blending of
components.
2.03 REINFORCING DOWELS
A. As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Dispensing, Metering, and Mixing Adhesive Components: Use portable,
automatic metering and mixing device or machine capable of maintaining
prescribed mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent or less, by volume.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended instructions.
C. Dispense components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that
thoroughly mixes components and places mixed adhesive at base of predrilled
hole.
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE DOWELING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 63 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.02 DOWEL SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Install per adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Drilling Equipment:
1. Drilling Hammers for Dowel Holes: Electric or pneumatic rotary type
with medium or light impact.
2. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
3. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process.
C. Hole Diameter: Use drill bit diameter meeting ICC Evaluation Services Report
requirements and as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Obstructions in Drill Path:
1. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when
approved by Engineer, enlarge hole by 1/8 inch, core through existing
reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original
hole diameter; or redrill hole 1 inch from original location, beginning in
same line at surface, redirecting drill to miss reinforcing steel.
2. Place dowels in both the misdrilled hole and the new one.
3. When using epoxy anchors, dowels may be prebent prior to installation
to 15 degrees to align with other bars. Do not heat dowels to bend.
4. If bars have fused epoxy coating and coating is damaged, recoat
damaged area with epoxy.
5. Bent Bar Dowels: Where edge distances are critical, and striking
reinforcing steel is likely, drill hole at 10-degree angle or less and use
prebent reinforcing bars.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspection:
1. Special Inspector will be onsite during dowel installation.
2. Special Inspector will observe installation in accordance with
requirements of the ICC Evaluation Services Report and will submit
report containing the following:
a. Drill bit compliance.
b. Hole depth and cleanliness.
c. Product Description: Product name, rod diameter and length.
CONCRETE DOWELING PW/WBG/426399
03 63 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. Adhesive expiration date.
e. Verification of dowel installation in accordance with
manufacturer’s published instructions.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site
in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for
installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CONCRETE DOWELING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 03 63 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): The Aluminum Design Manual.
2. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Inspection of Products Hot-
Dip Galvanized After Fabrication.
3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): S329, Allowable
Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts.
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Stainless Steel Types.
5. American Ladder Institute (ALI): A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety
Requirements.
6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B1.1, Unified-inch
Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form).
8. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE): A10.11, Safety
Requirements for Personnel and Debris Nets.
9. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
b. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
c. D1.6, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.
10. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A48, Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
c. A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
d. A108, Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
Standard Quality.
e. A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
f. A143, Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for
Detecting Embrittlement.
g. A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
h. A193/A193M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.
i. A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for
Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both.
j. A240/A240M, Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels.
k. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
l. A278, Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-
Containing Parts for Temperatures Up to 650 Degree.
m. A283/A283M, Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile
Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
n. A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile.
o. A325, Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
p. A380, Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
q. A384, Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion
During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.
r. A385, Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-
Dip).
s. A489, Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
t. A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
u. A501, Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
v. A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
w. A653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
x. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
y. A786/A786M, Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.
z. A793, Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel.
aa. A967, Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts.
bb. A992/A992M, Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for
Use in Building Framing
cc. B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
dd. B308/B308M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6
Standard Structural Profiles.
ee. B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe
and Tube.
ff. B632/B632M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread
Plate.
gg. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
hh. F436, Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
ii. F468, Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs for General Use.
jj. F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
and Studs.
kk. F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
ll. F844, Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened
for General Use.
mm. F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength.
11. International Code Council (ICC): Evaluation Reports for Concrete and
Masonry Anchors.
12. NSF International (NSF).
13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
a. 29 CFR 1910.27, Fixed Ladders.
b. 29 CFR 1926.105, Safety Nets.
c. 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices.
14. Specialty Steel Industry of North America (SSINA):
a. Specifications for Stainless Steel.
b. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel.
c. Stainless Steel Fabrication.
d. Stainless Steel Fasteners.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Corrosive Area: Containment area or area exposed to delivery, storage,
transfer, or use of chemicals.
B. Exterior Area: Location not protected from the weather by a building or other
enclosed structure.
C. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not
subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to
a water-holding or earth-retaining structure.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped
to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where
wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining
structure.
E. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall of open water-holding structure,
such as a basin or channel, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a covered
water-holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water-
holding structure, open or covered.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Metal fabrications, including welding and fastener information.
b. Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including
drilled hole size, preparation, placement, procedures, and
instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems.
2. Samples: Color samples of abrasive stair nosings.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Concrete and Masonry Drilled Anchors:
a. Manufacturer’s product description and installation procedures.
b. Current test data or ICC Evaluation Report.
c. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification.
2. U-Channel Concrete Inserts:
a. Manufacturer’s product description.
b. Allowable load tables.
3. Ladders: Certification of load and fatigue tests.
4. Passivation method for stainless steel members.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Adhesive Anchor Installers: Trained and certified by manufacturer.
2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot-dip
galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of Quality
Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble items specified herein. Assemblies that
due to necessity have to be shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged
in manner that will protect materials from damage and will facilitate
identification and field assembly.
B. Package stainless steel items in a manner to provide protection from carbon
impregnation.
C. Protect painted coatings and hot-dip galvanized finishes from damage due to
metal banding and rough handling. Use padded slings and straps.
D. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. For hot-dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receive
paint, limit the combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. For
steels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon (such as plates over
1.5 inches thick for A36 steel), limit the maximum silicon content to
0.21 percent and the phosphorous content to 0.03 percent.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements:
Item ASTM Reference
Steel Shapes and Plates A36/A36M
Steel Pipe A501 or A53/A53M, Type E or S,
Grade B
Structural Steel Tubing A500, Grade B
Stainless Steel:
Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L for
welded connections)
Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L for
welded connections)
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316 (316L
for welded connections)
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Item ASTM Reference
Bolts, Threaded Rods, F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW
Anchor Bolts, and Anchor
Studs
Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW
Steel Bolts and Nuts:
Carbon Steel A307 bolts, with A563 nuts
High-Strength A325, Type 1 bolts, with A563 nuts
Anchor Bolts and Rods F1554, Grade 55, with weldability
supplement S1.
Eyebolts A489
Threaded Rods A36/A36M
Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844
Flat and Beveled Washers F436
(Hardened)
Thrust Ties for Steel Pipe:
Threaded Rods A193/A193M, Grade B7
Nuts A194/A194M, Grade 2H
Plate A283/A283M, Grade D
Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C-1010 through
C-1020
Aluminum Plates and Structural B209 and B308/B308M,
Shapes Alloy 6061-T6
Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F468, Alloy 2024-T4
Cast Iron A48, Class 35
C. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, zinc-
plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at
end of this section.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES
A. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts:
1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at
end of this section.
B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves:
1. Plastic:
a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve.
b. Top of sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of
threaded anchor bolt projection.
c. Material: High density polyethylene.
d. Manufacturer: Sinco Products, Inc., Middletown, CT,
(800) 243-6753.
2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A36/A36M.
2.03 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS
A. General:
1. AISI Type 316 stainless, hot-dip galvanized, or zinc-plated steel, as
shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section.
2. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code
organization.
3. Acceptable for use in potable water structures by EPA and local health
agencies or NSF.
B. Wedge Anchors:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Trubolt Wedge Anchor.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik-Bolt-3 (KB-3) Anchor.
c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Power-Stud Anchor.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Wedge-All
Anchor.
e. Wej-It Corp., Tulsa, OK; ANKRtite Wedge Anchor.
f. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Kingpin Wedge
Anchor.
g. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro-Poxy 300 and Pro-Poxy 300 Fast
Epoxy Adhesive Anchors.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Expansion Anchors:
1. Self-drilling anchors, snap-off or flush type, zinc-plated.
2. Nondrilling Anchors: Flush type for use with zinc-plated or stainless
steel bolt, or stud type with projecting threaded stud.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Multi-Set II Drop-In and
Self Drill Anchor.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Hilti HDI Drop-In Anchor.
c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Steel Drop-In Anchor.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Drop-In Anchor.
D. Sleeve Anchors:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Dynabolt Hex Nut Sleeve
Anchor.
b. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Hex Head Power-Bolt
Anchor.
c. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Sleeve-All Hex
Head Anchor.
d. Wej-It Corp., Tulsa, OK; Wej-It Sleeve Anchor.
e. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor.
E. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Threaded Rod:
a. ASTM F593 stainless steel threaded rod, diameter as shown on
Drawings.
b. Length as required, to provide minimum depth of embedment.
c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material.
d. For hollow-unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless steel
wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod.
2. Adhesive:
a. Two-component, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw
environments, with gray color after mixing.
b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for
intended use and environmental conditions.
c. Nonsag, with selected viscosity base on installation temperature
and overhead application where applicable.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Packaging and Storage:
a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing
both components in the proper mixing ratio and fitting into a
manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.
b. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in covered storage
area, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name,
material type, batch or serial number, and adhesive expiration
date.
d. Dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Ultrabond 1 Epoxy
Anchor System.
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT HY 150 Adhesive Anchor System, (use
HIT HY 20 for hollow masonry).
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; C6 Adhesive Anchor
System or A7 Adhesive Anchor System. (Use A7 Adhesive
Anchor System for hollow masonry.)
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; ET Epoxy-Tie
Adhesive or Acrylic-Tie Adhesive. (Use Acrylic-Tie Adhesive for
temperatures below 40 degrees F.)
e. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro-Poxy 300 Adhesive Anchors or
Pro-Poxy 300 Fast Epoxy Adhesive Anchors.
f. USP Structural Connectors CIA-Gel 7000 Epoxy Anchoring
System.
F. Adhesive Threaded Inserts:
1. Stainless steel, internally threaded insert.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIS-R Insert with HIT
HY 150 adhesive.
2.04 FLOOR PLATE
A. Material:
1. Galvanized Steel: Carbon steel, ASTM A786/A786M, commercial
grade, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A793, AISI Type 304.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Minimum Thickness:
1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2. Aluminum: 3/8 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
C. Surface shall be raised-lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise
on Drawings.
D. Slip-Resistant Surface:
1. Provide where indicated on Drawings.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. IKG/Borden, Clark, NJ; MEBAC 2.
b. W.S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI; SLIPNOT Grade 2–Medium.
2.05 SHAFT GUARD
A. General: Removable shaft guard to be placed around the exposed intermediate
shafting on Owner-furnished pump.
B. Manufacturers:
1. The Cline Company.
2. H.S. Watson Co.
3. Approved equal.
C. Materials:
1. Metal Cage: Carbon steel.
2. Base Plate: Carbon steel.
3. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Fabrication:
1. Base Plate: Accommodate top of pump bolt pattern.
2. Minimum Height: 48 inches.
3. Minimum Width: 11 inches.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well-defined lines.
2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled
in neat, substantial manner.
3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink.
4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching
hardware or other materials.
5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small
uniform radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth.
6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site.
B. Materials:
1. Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted.
2. Steel to be hot-dip galvanized: Limit silicon content to less than
0.04 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent.
3. Fabricate aluminum in accordance with AA Specifications for
Aluminum Structures – Allowable Stress Design.
C. Welding:
1. Weld connections and grind exposed welds smooth. When required to
be watertight, make welds continuous.
2. Welded fabrications shall be free from twisting or distortion caused by
improper welding techniques.
3. Steel: Meet fabrication requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 5.
4. Aluminum: Meet requirements of AWS D1.2.
5. Stainless Steel: Meet requirements of AWS D1.6.
6. Welded Anchor Studs: Prepare surface to be welded and weld with stud
welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 7, and
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Complete welding before applying finish.
D. Painting:
1. Shop prime with rust-inhibitive primer unless otherwise indicated.
2. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in
direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as
specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicated
otherwise.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or
galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise.
E. Galvanizing:
1. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143,
ASTM A384, and ASTM A385. Avoid fabrication techniques that could
cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel.
2. Provide venting and drain holes for tubular members and fabricated
assemblies in accordance with ASTM A385.
3. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, and
other deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing.
4. Remove by blast cleaning or other methods surface contaminants and
coatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in the
galvanizing operation.
5. Hot-dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
6. Hot-dip galvanize bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components in
accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zinc
alloy growth. Shop assemble bolts and nuts.
7. Galvanized steel sheets in accordance with ASTM A653.
8. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly.
Galvanizing of tapped holes is not required.
F. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, and
align items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sides
parallel.
G. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten by welding
or with stainless steel bolts or screws.
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Visually inspect all fabrication welds and correct any deficiencies.
1. Steel: AWS D1.1, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection
Acceptance Criteria.
2. Aluminum: AWS D1.2.
3. Stainless Steel: AWS D1.6.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Hot-Dip Galvanizing:
1. An independent testing agency will be retained by Owner to inspect and
test hot-dip galvanized fabricated items in accordance with
ASTM A123/A153M and ASTM A153/A153M.
2. Visually inspect and test for thickness and adhesion of zinc coating for
minimum of three test samples from each lot in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.
3. Reject and retest nonconforming articles in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General:
1. Install metal fabrications plumb or level, accurately fitted, free from
distortion or defects.
2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance.
3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making
adjustments not scheduled.
B. Aluminum:
1. Do not remove mill markings from concealed surfaces.
2. Remove inked or painted identification marks on exposed surfaces not
otherwise coated after installed material has been inspected and
approved.
3. Fabrication, mechanical connections, and welded construction shall be
in accordance with the AA Aluminum Design Manual.
3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Accurately locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at the time
concrete is placed.
B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one
washer per bolt of same material as bolt.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2-inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise
shown.
3.03 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS
A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors has
attained design strength.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as follows, unless
indicated otherwise by anchor manufacturer’s instructions or shown otherwise
on Drawings:
Min. Min. Edge
Anchor Embedment Distance Min. Spacing
Type (bolt diameters) (bolt diameters) (bolt diameters)
Wedge 9 6 12
Expansion 4 6 12
and Sleeve
Undercut 9 12 16
Adhesive 9 9 13.5
D. Use only drill type and bit type and diameter recommended by anchor
manufacturer. Clean hole of debris and dust with brush and compressed air.
E. For undercut anchors, use special undercutting drill bit and rotary hammer
drill and apply final torque as recommended by anchor manufacturer.
F. When embedded steel or rebar is encountered in the drill path, slant drill to
clear obstruction. If drill must be slanted more than 10 degrees to clear
obstruction, notify Engineer for direction on how to proceed.
G. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete is below
40 degrees F (25 degrees F for Simpson Strong-Tie Acrylic-Tie
Adhesive) or above 100 degrees F.
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 14 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Remove any standing water from hole with oil-free compressed air.
Inside surface of hole shall be dry where required by manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. For hollow-unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time.
5. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Do not install in overhead condition.
3.04 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION
A. Aluminum and Galvanized Steel:
1. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in
direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as
specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, unless indicated
otherwise.
2. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or
galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Allow coating to dry before installation of the material.
4. Protect coated surfaces during installation.
5. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up in accordance
with paint manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions to prevent
carbon impregnation of stainless steel members.
2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidence of
iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination.
3. Remove contamination in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A380 and ASTM A967.
4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainless
steel or nonmetallic bristles.
5. After treatment, visually inspect surfaces for compliance.
3.05 PAINTING AND REPAIR OF GALVANIZED STEEL
A. Painted Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare as specified in Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL FABRICATIONS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 50 00 - 15
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating:
1. Conform to ASTM A780.
2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to
ASTM A780.
3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc-based solder, or zinc sticks,
conforming to ASTM A780.
4. Use magnetic gauge to determine that thickness is equal to or greater
than the base galvanized coating.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete and Masonry Drilled Anchors: Special inspection and testing will be
provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings.
3.07 FASTENER SCHEDULE
A. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless steel threads.
B. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire-resistive construction or where
ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS PW/WBG/426399
05 50 00 - 16 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 05 52 00
METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Aluminum Association, Incorporated (AA): DAF45, Designation
System for Aluminum Finishes.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
c. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
d. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
e. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
f. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both.
g. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
h. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel
Mechanical Tubing.
i. E985, Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
4. International Code Council (ICC): International Building Code (IBC).
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 1910, Code of
Federal Regulations.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Handrails: Synonymous with terms; i.e., guardrail system, railing system,
ramp-rail system, and stair-rail system. Handrails are comprised of a
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
framework of vertical, horizontal, or inclined members, grillwork or panels,
accessories, or combination thereof.
B. ICC Evaluation Services Report for concrete anchor manufacturers.
C. Special Inspection: As governed by the ICC IBC.
D. Toeboards: Vertical barrier at floor level usually erected on handrails along
exposed edges of floor or wall openings, platforms, ramps, or stairs to prevent
miscellaneous items from falling through.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Indicate handrail profiles, sizes, connections, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories. Project-specific scale plans and
elevations of handrails.
b. Manufacturer’s literature and catalog data of handrail and
components.
c. Design Data: Calculations or test data using design performance
loads and include the following:
1) Bending stress in, and deflection of, posts in accordance
with ASTM E985.
2) Stress in post base connection.
3) Calculation of anchorage forces and comparison of these
forces to ICC IBC recommendations regarding safe
allowable design loads of anchorages.
4) For concrete anchor spacings less than 12 anchor diameters
and edge distances less than six anchor diameters, make
reduction in allowable pullout and shear values. Provide
independent laboratory inspection service for ICC
Evaluation Services Report values with Special Inspection.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s assembly and installation instructions.
2. Special Inspection:
a. Manufacturer’s instructions for Special Inspection of concrete
anchors.
b. Special Inspection report in accordance with Article Tests and
Inspections.
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Test Reports: Test data may supplement load calculations providing data
covers the complete handrail system, including anchorage:
a. Test data for handrail and components showing load and
deflection due to load, in enough detail to prove handrail is strong
enough and satisfies national, state, local standards, regulations,
code requirements, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910, using design loads
specified. Include test data for the following:
1) Railing and post connections.
2) Railing wall connections.
3) Post and base connections.
4) Railing expansion joint connections.
5) Railing gate assembly, including latch and gate stop. Both
gate latch and stop to support required loads applied,
independent of each other.
6) Railing gate hinges.
b. Deflection Criteria: In accordance with ASTM E985 and design
loads specified.
c. Aluminum Rail Piping: Test data showing yield strength of pipe
as-delivered equals or exceeds values specified in this section.
d. Concrete Anchors: Calculations and test data for review prior to
use, on anchors other than those specified.
4. Manufacturer’s written recommendations describing procedures for
maintaining handrails including cleaning materials, application methods,
and precautions to be taken in the use of cleaning materials.
5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Calculations required for design data stamped by a registered
civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project will be
constructed.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handrails adequately packaged and wrapped to prevent scratching and denting
during shipment, storage, and installation. Maintain protective wrapping until
railing is completely installed.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Aluminum Handrails:
1. Shop assemble into practical modules of lengths not exceeding 24 feet
for shipment.
2. Deliver toeboards loose for field assembly.
3. Deliver clear anodized handrail pipe and posts with protective plastic
wrap.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the
following maximum range in ambient temperature in design, fabrication, and
installation of handrails to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over
stressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base
design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss. Temperature change is difference
between high or low temperature and installation temperature.
1. Temperature Change Range: 70 degrees F, ambient; 100 degrees F,
material surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN PERFORMANCE
A. Structural Performance of Handrails: Design, test, fabricate, and install
handrails to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding
allowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load to
produce maximum stress and deflection in each of the respective components
comprising handrails.
1. Top Rail of Handrails: Capable of withstanding the following load cases
applied:
a. Concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and in any
direction in accordance with ICC IBC.
b. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction
in accordance with ICC IBC.
c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with
uniform loads in accordance with ICC IBC.
2. In-Fill Area of Railing Systems:
a. Capable of withstanding a horizontally applied normal load of
50 pounds applied to 1 square foot at any point in the system
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, and openings and
space between railings.
b. Horizontal concentrated load need not be assumed to act
concurrently with loads on top rails of handrails.
3. Mid-rails with corner returns to withstand a 300-pound concentrated
vertical load applied at any point or direction without damage and
loosening of pipe, fittings, or attachment hardware.
4. Concrete Anchors for Handrail Wall Brackets: Anchors with a strength
required by calculations with concrete strength assumed at 4,000 psi and
in conformance with ICC IBC.
5. Concrete Anchors: In accordance with ICC IBC for size, length,
embedment, spacing, and edge distance to match required loads shown
in calculations.
2.02 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS
A. General:
1. Furnish pre-engineered and prefabricated three picket handrails.
2. Pop rivets and glued railing construction not permitted.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL.
2. Moultrie Manufacturing, Moultrie, GA; Wesrail II.
C. Rails, Posts, and Formed Elbows: Extruded Alloy 6105-T5 or 6061-T6,
minimum tensile strength of 38,000 psi and minimum yield strength of
35,000 psi.
1. Miscellaneous Aluminum Parts: 6063-T6 or 6061-T6 extruded
aluminum of adequate strength for all loads.
2. Post and Railing: Nominal 1-1/2-inch diameter.
a. Rails: 1.900-inch outside diameter by 0.145-inch wall thickness,
Schedule 40.
b. Posts: 1.900-inch outside diameter by 0.200-inch wall thickness,
Schedule 80.
c. Solid dowel interconnectors of 6105-T5 or 6061-T6 aluminum.
D. Fittings:
1. Handrail and Post Fittings: Extruded, machined bar stock, permanent
mold castings, or die castings of sufficient strength to meet load
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
requirements. Fittings shall match color of pipe in handrails. Sand cast
parts not permitted.
2. Concrete Top Mount Post Base:
a. Four holes in base for concrete anchors. For narrow walls or
curbs, furnish two holes in base for concrete anchors with required
edge distance.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. TBF-3.4 and Part
No. TBF-3.2 for narrow walls and curbs.
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WII4HB and WII2HB
for narrow walls and curbs.
3. Concrete Side Mounted Handrail Bracket: Extruded aluminum,
Alloy 6063-T6 with four holes for bolts or concrete anchors.
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. TSM-1.5.
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMB.
4. Concrete Anchors for Securing Bases and Brackets to Concrete:
Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel 1/2-inch concrete anchors.
5. Handrail Connections for Metal Stairway Stringers:
a. Extruded aluminum bracket, Alloy 6063-T6.
b. Brackets bolts 1/2-inch diameter Type 304 or Type 316 stainless
steel bolts.
c. Offset Adjustable Stair Fitting:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. ASF of cast Al-mag.
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Standard and custom elbow
angles, Part No. W51XXX (numbers vary based on angle).
d. Additional Offset Adjustable Fitting for Picket Railing System:
Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. APF of cast Al-mag.
e. Base Connection:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. SMB-2 or
SMB-3, ASF, APF.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMBEXT.
6. Handrail Connections for Metal Beams:
a. Extruded aluminum bracket, Alloy 6063-T6.
b. Bracket bolts 1/2-inch diameter Type 304 stainless steel bolts.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. SMB-2 or SMB-3.
Use Part No. TSM-1.5 if bracket is attached to flat side of
channel.
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMBEXT. Use
Part No. WIISMB if bracket is attached to flat side of
channel.
7. Handrail Wall Brackets: Adjustable wall fitting, with provision for three
3/8-inch Type 304 stainless steel bolts or concrete anchors.
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. AWF cast Al-mag
aluminum bracket.
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. W41100.
8. Miscellaneous Rail to Post Fittings:
a. Aluminum Tee Fittings:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TF-1 and TX-1.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part Nos. WIIT40,
WIIT40/05, WIIT80, and WIIT80/05.
b. Aluminum Ell Fittings:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TE-1, TE-2, and
TE-3.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 51900.
c. Aluminum Splice Lock:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. SL-1.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIS40.
d. Aluminum Expansion Joint Splice:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. ES-1.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WII40, omit set
screws on one side.
e. Formed Aluminum Wall Flange:
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. CF-2.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 41250.
9. Handrail Gate: 6063-T6, 6105-T5, or 6061-T6 extruded aluminum.
a. Hardware Manufacturers and Products:
1) Julius Blum & Co., Inc., Carlstadt, NJ; No. 782/3 gate
hinges with springs, and No. 784 gate latch and stop.
2) CraneVeyor Corp., South El Monte, CA; No. C4370b gate
hinges with spring, No. C4369 gate latch, and No. C4368
gate stop.
3) Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4) Moultrie Manufacturing Co., Moultrie, GA; Part
No. W60006.
10. Toeboards and Accessories:
a. Material: Molded or extruded 6063 or 6061 aluminum.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Thompson Fabricating Co.
2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIKP20.
11. Castings for Handrails:
a. Cast Al-mag with sufficient strength to meet load and test
requirements.
b. Anodizable grade finish with excellent resistance to corrosion
when subject to exposure of sodium chloride solution intermittent
spray and immersion.
E. Concrete Embedded Metal Anchorages: In accordance with Section 05 50 00,
Metal Fabrications.
F. Finishes:
1. Handrail Pipe and Post: In accordance with AA DAF45, designation
AA-M32-C22-A41.
2. Cast Fittings and Toeboards: In accordance with AA DAF45,
designation AA-M10-C22-A41.
2.03 ANCHOR BOLTS, FASTENERS, AND CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Locknuts, Washers, and Screws:
1. Elastic Locknuts, Steel Flat Washers, RHMS Round Head Machine
Screws: Type A 304 or Type A 316 stainless steel.
2. Flat Washers: Molded nylon.
3. Manufacturer: McMaster-Carr Supply Co., Los Angeles, CA.
B. Bolts and Nuts for Bolting Handrail to Metal Beams: ASTM A193/A193M
and ASTM A194/A194M, Type A 316 stainless steel with minimum yield
strength for bolts of 95,000 psi, unless otherwise shown.
C. Concrete Anchors:
1. Stainless steel Type 304 or Type 316.
2. Use ICC IBC approved values for size, length, embedment, spacing, and
edge distance to match required loads shown in calculations.
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Epoxy Anchors:
1. Heavy-duty 1/2-inch diameter, for exterior use only in accordance with
Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, as an alternative to mechanical
concrete anchors.
2. Design and provide number required.
3. Do not use where fire or elevated temperatures above 110 degrees F
exist.
4. Do not use in overhead applications.
2.04 FABRICATION OF ALUMINUM HANDRAILS
A. Shop Assembly:
1. Post Spacing: Maximum 6-foot horizontal spacing.
2. Railing Posts Bolted to Metal or Concrete:
a. In lieu of field cutting, provide approved fitting with sufficient
post overlap, containing provisions for vertical adjustment.
b. Field fit-up is required.
3. Free of burrs, nicks, and sharp edges when fabrication is complete.
4. Welding is not permitted.
B. Shop/Factory Finishing:
1. Use same alloy for uniform appearance throughout fabrication for
railings.
2. Handrail and Post Fittings: Match fittings with color of pipe in handrail.
3. Sand cast parts not permitted.
C. Tolerances:
1. Shop assemble rails, posts, and formed elbows with a close tolerance for
tight fit.
2. Fit dowels tightly inside posts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide railing posts longer than needed and field cut to exact dimensions
required in order to satisfy vertical variations on the actual structure. Install
railing with a base that provides plus or minus 1/4-inch vertical adjustment
inside base fitting. If adjustment is required in the field and exceeds plus or
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
minus 1/4-inch, reduce post length not to exceed beyond bottom of lowest set-
screw or bolt in base fitting.
B. Field fabrication of aluminum railing systems not permitted.
C. Modification to structure not permitted where handrail is attached.
3.02 HANDRAIL INSTALLATION
A. Assembly and Installation: Perform in accordance with manufacturer’s written
recommendations for installation.
B. Protection from Entrapped Water:
1. Make provisions in exterior and interior installations subject to high
humidity to drain water from railing system.
2. Posts mounted in concrete, bends, and elbows occurring at low points
drill weep holes of 1/4-inch diameter at lowest possible elevations, one
hole per post or rail. Drill hole in the plane of the rail.
C. Expansion Joints:
1. Maximum intervals of 54 feet on center and at structural joints.
2. Slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond each side of
joint. Provide 1/2-inch slip joint gap to allow for expansion.
3. Fasten to one side using 3/8-inch diameter set-screw. Place set-screw at
bottom of pipe.
4. Locate joints within 12 inches of posts. Locate expansion joints in rails
that span expansion joints in structural walls and floors supporting the
posts.
D. Setting Posts:
1. Embedded:
a. Clean dust and foreign matter from sleeves or blockouts.
b. Moisten interior of hole and surrounding surface with clean water.
Fill hole with nonshrink grout prior to installing post.
c. Brace railing until grout sets.
d. Posts installed outside and exposed to freezing temperatures, drill
weep hole through post approximately 1/2 inch above level of
grout inside post and in plane of rail to prevent entrapment and
freezing of water inside post.
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Surface Mounted:
a. Bolt post baseplate connectors firmly in place.
b. Shims, wedges, grout, and similar devices for handrail post
alignment not permitted.
E. Posts and Rails:
1. Set posts plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
2. Set rails horizontal or parallel to slope of steps to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet.
3. Install posts and rails in same plane. Remove projections or
irregularities and provide a smooth surface for sliding hands
continuously along top rail. Use offset rail for use on stairs and
platforms if post is attached to web of stringers or structural platform
supports.
4. Support 1-1/2-inch rails directly above stairway stringers with offset
fittings.
F. Handrail Wall Brackets:
1. Support wall rails on brackets spaced maximum 6 feet on centers for
steel and 5 feet for aluminum as measured on the horizontal projection.
2. Install wall anchor backplates on solid blocking in stud walls.
G. Toeboard:
1. Provide at handrails, except where 4-inch or higher concrete curbs are
installed or at gates.
2. Accurately measure in field for correct length; after handrail post
installation cut and secure to posts.
3. Dimension between bottom of toeboard and walking surface not to
exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Aluminum Toeboards: Provide expansion and contraction connections
between each post.
5. Steel Toeboards: Between each post cut toeboard and provide slotted
holes for expansion and contraction.
H. Railing Gate: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL RAILINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 52 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 FIELD FINISHING
A. Corrosion Protection: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion
caused from direct contact with concrete and dissimilar metals by coating
metal surfaces as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
1. Treatment of Field Welds for Galvanized Steel Railings: Touch up
welds by application of two coats high-zinc dust content paint to dry
film thickness of 2 mils.
3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Perform Special Inspection for anchors where ICC Evaluation Services
Reports require them for anchor strength value used.
B. Provide an independent test laboratory to perform Special Inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Wash railing system thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse with clean
water.
B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasive.
C. If stain remains after washing, restore in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations or replace stained handrails.
END OF SECTION
METAL RAILINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 52 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 05 53 00
METAL GRATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A510, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire
Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.
c. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
d. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
Strength.
e. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
a. MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual.
b. MBG 532, Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of
connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work.
b. Grating Anchorage: Show details of anchorage to supports to
prevent displacement from traffic impact.
c. Product data for grating, grating clips, anchors, accessories, and
other manufactured products specified herein.
d. Manufacturer’s specifications, including coatings, surface
treatment, and finishes.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL GRATINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 53 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Special handling and storage requirements.
2. Installation instructions.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items.
B. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are, due to necessity,
shipped unassembled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be
products of:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO), Birmingham, AL.
2. IKG Industries, Houston, TX.
3. Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH.
4. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., South San Francisco, CA.
2.02 GRATING MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper as designated below.
1. Bearing Bars and Banding: ASTM B221 alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.
2. Swaged Crossbar Rods: ASTM B221 alloy 6061 or 6063, or
ASTM B210 alloy 3003.
3. Finish: Mill.
2.03 METAL BAR GRATING
A. General Requirements:
1. Maximum Service Load:
a. Light Duty (Type A): 100 psf uniformly distributed load.
b. Medium Duty (Type B): 500 psf uniformly distributed load.
2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.
METAL GRATINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 53 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Bearing Bar Spacing:
a. Light Duty: 1-3/16 inch maximum, center-to-center.
b. Medium Duty: 15/16 inch maximum, center-to-center.
4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum, center-to-center. For aluminum
I-bar grating with depths greater than 2 inches, provide cross bars at
2 inches maximum, center-to-center.
5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specified
in NAAMM MBG 531 or as shown on Drawings.
B. Grating Materials: Aluminum, pressure-locked.
C. Surface: Plain.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Grating Clamps:
1. Use at flanged beam and bolted angle frame supports.
2. Removable from above grating walkway surface.
3. Provide hat bracket, recessed bolt, and bottom clamp of same material
as grating.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Grating Clamp.
b. Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; G-Clip.
B. Anchor Stud and Saddle Clip:
1. Use at embedded angle frame supports with stud anchor and nut
recessed below top of grating surface.
2. Removable from above grating walkway surface.
3. Provide Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded stud anchor, nut,
washer, and saddle clip.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Welded Stud Anchor:
1) Nelson Stud Welding, Inc., Elyria, OH.
2) Stud Welding Associates, Inc. Elyria, OH.
b. Saddle Clip:
1) Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Saddle Clip.
2) Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; Saddle Clip.
3) Struct-Fast, Inc., Baltimore, MD; Gratefast.
PW/WBG/426399 METAL GRATINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 53 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.05 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. In accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532.
2. Do not weld aluminum grating.
3. Conceal fastenings where practical.
4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching
hardware or other materials.
5. Cutouts:
a. Fabricate in grating sections for penetrations indicated.
b. Arrange to permit grating removal without disturbing items
penetrating grating.
c. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing
bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.
6. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
7. Field measure areas to receive grating. Verify dimensions of new
fabricated supports, and fabricate to dimension required for specified
clearances.
8. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent section from falling through clear
opening when oriented in the span direction and one end is touching
either the concrete or the vertical leg of grating support.
9. Minimum Bearing: 1 inch for grating depth up to 2-1/4 inches and
2 inches for grating depth greater than 2-1/4 inches.
10. Banding and Toe Plates: Same material as grating and welded to bearing
bars in accordance with requirements of NAAMM MBG 531 and
NAAMM MBG 532.
B. Metal Bar Grating: A single grating section shall be not less than 1.5 feet or
greater than 3 feet in width, or weigh more than 150 pounds.
C. Supports:
1. Same material as grating, except that supports which are to be embedded
in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless part of an extruded
aluminum system.
2. Coordinate dimensions and fabrication with grating to be supported.
METAL GRATINGS PW/WBG/426399
05 53 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Electrolytic Protection:
1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals, or
embedded or in contact with masonry, grout, or concrete as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
2. Allow paint to dry before installation of material.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Until grating sections are securely fastened in place, area shall be
appropriately barricaded or flagged to alert people working in the area of
potential fall hazard.
B. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Install supports such that grating sections have a solid bearing on both ends,
and that grating sections will not rock or wobble under design loads.
D. Install grating supports plumb and level as applicable.
E. Install sections of welded frames with anchors to straight plane without
offsets.
F. Field locate and install fasteners to fit grating layout.
G. Anchor grating securely to supports using minimum of four fastener clips and
bolts per grating section.
H. Each grating or plank section shall be easily removable and replaceable.
I. Completed installation shall be rigid and neat in appearance.
J. Protect painted and galvanized surfaces during installation.
K. Repair damaged coatings as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 METAL GRATINGS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 05 53 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 06 82 00
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux
Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
the Guarded Hot-Plate Apparatus.
b. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
c. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent
and Time of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
d. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
f. D696, Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C.
g. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
h. D792, Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) by Plastics Displacement.
i. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications.
j. D2344, Standard Test Method for Apparent Interlaminar Shear
Strength of Parallel Fiber Composites by Short-Beam Method.
k. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid
Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
l. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
2. Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA):
National Building Code (NBC).
3. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO): Uniform
Building Code (UBC).
4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): 29 CFR 19.10, Code of
Federal Regulations.
PW/WBG/426399 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 06 82 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI): Standard
Building Code (SBC).
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 94, UL Standard for Safety Test
for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances.
1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This section contains components and connectors that require Contractor design.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product Data: Catalog information and catalog cuts showing
materials, include manufacturer’s specifications.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Handling and storage requirements.
2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. Factory test reports for physical properties of product.
4. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance for specified products.
5. Fabricator’s qualification experience.
6. Manufacturer’s qualification experience.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Designer: Calculations required for Contractor design shall be stamped by a
registered engineer, licensed in state where Project will be constructed.
B. Fabricator: Minimum of 5 years’ experience.
C. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years’ experience in manufacturing of products
meeting these specifications.
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PW/WBG/426399
06 82 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Shipment:
1. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items provided hereunder.
2. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are of necessity
shipped unassembled in a manner that will protect materials from
damage, and facilitate identification and final assembly in field.
B. Storage and Handling: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
and in such a manner as to prevent damage of any kind, including
overexposure to sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Like Items of Materials: Where possible, provide end products of one
manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance,
and replacement.
2.02 STOP LOG STRUCTURE
A. General:
1. Each log shall be molded individually to the dimensions shown on
Drawings.
2. Shall be manufactured of reinforced thermoset plastic containing
ultraviolet absorbers.
3. Surface shall be resin-rich to a depth of 0.010 inch to 0.020 inch.
4. Shall be reinforced with C-glass or polymeric fiber surfacing material.
5. Structural reinforcing shall be used to attain the necessary stiffness to
withstand the maximum seating head with a deflection less than
1/4-inch.
6. Lifting pins shall be Type 316 stainless steel and shall be fastened to the
log with sufficient reinforcing to withstand the lifting force.
7. All stop logs shall be flat and level.
8. Stop log seals and in channel seals shall be molded of extruded virgin
neoprene per ASTM D2000. Neoprene shall have a hardness of 55-65
Shore A Durometer with a maximum compression of 25 percent and
low temperature brittleness to meet suffix F-17 (minus 40 degrees F).
PW/WBG/426399 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 06 82 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Stop Log Guides and Bolts:
1. Guides shall be in-channel mounted.
2. Guides and bolts shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Stop Log Lifting Beam:
1. A lifting beam with automatic lifting hooks shall be provided for stop
logs that weigh more than 95 pounds.
2. Shall have tagline release mechanism.
3. Hook pins shall be fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Plasti-Fab, Inc., Tualatin, OR.
2. Or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Stop logs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.02 STOP LOG GUIDES AND BOLTS
A. Shall be in-channel mounted.
B. Shall be bolted to wall with 2 feet 0 inch bolt spacing, or as per
manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.03 STOP LOG LIFTING BEAM
A. Shall be built in such a manner to automatically latch on to the stop logs when
lowered into the guide frame.
END OF SECTION
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PW/WBG/426399
06 82 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines—Enamel and Tape—Hot-Applied.
b. C209, Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special
Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
c. C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines.
d. C214, Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines.
2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
3. NACE International (NACE): RP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing
of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates.
4. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
6. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic
Gages.
b. PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications.
c. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning.
d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning.
f. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning.
g. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush-Off Blast
Cleaning.
i. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.
k. SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals Waterjetting
Prior to Recoating.
l. SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
m. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble
Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms used in this section:
1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per
gallon.
2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
3. HCl: Hydrochloric Acid.
4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils.
5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils.
6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch.
7. PPDS: Product Data Sheet.
8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet.
9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.
10. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon.
11. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat.
12. SP: Surface Preparation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Data Sheets:
1) For each product, furnish a Paint Product Data Sheet
(PPDS), the manufacturer’s technical data sheets, and paint
colors available (where applicable). The PPDS form is
appended to the end of this section.
2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet
(PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this
section.
3) Technical and performance information that demonstrates
compliance with Specification.
4) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating
applicator.
5) Indiscriminate submittal of only manufacturer’s literature is
not acceptable.
b. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed
abrasive material.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Samples:
a. Proposed Abrasive Materials: Minimum 5-pound sample for each
type.
b. Reference Panel:
1) Surface Preparation:
a) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4-inch
by 4-inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast
specified herein, prepared to specified requirements.
b) Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent
deterioration of surface quality.
c) Panel to be reference source for inspection upon
approval by Engineer.
2) Paint:
a) Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is
started, prepare minimum 8-inch by 10-inch sample
with type of paint and application specified on similar
substrate to which paint is to be applied.
b) Furnish additional samples as required until colors,
finishes, and textures are approved.
c) Approved samples to be the quality standard for final
finishes.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Applicator’s Qualification: List of references substantiating experience.
2. Coating manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer’s certification stating factory
applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified.
4. Manufacturer’s written verification that submitted material is suitable
for the intended use.
5. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer,
provide finish coating manufacturer’s written confirmation that
materials are compatible.
6. Manufacturer’s written instructions and special details for applying each
type of paint.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years’ experience in application of
specified products.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of
volatile organic compounds.
2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with
recommendations of the following:
a. Paint manufacturer’s instructions.
b. SSPC PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications.
c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Mockup:
1. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete
space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors,
finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details.
2. After Engineer approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a
standard for similar work throughout the Project.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping:
1. Where precoated items are to be shipped to the Site, protect coating
from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion.
2. Protect shop painted surfaces during shipment and handling by suitable
provisions including padding, blocking, and use of canvas or nylon
slings.
B. Storage:
1. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain
temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer.
2. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to weather for more than 2 months
before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by coating
manufacturer.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of
manufacturer’s recommended maximum or minimum allowable.
2. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than
5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are
regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical
service conditions.
B. Minimum of 5 years’ verifiable experience in manufacture of specified
product.
2.02 ABRASIVE MATERIALS
A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating
manufacturer’s recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be
applied.
2.03 PAINT MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Manufacturer’s highest quality products suitable for intended service.
2. Compatibility: Only compatible materials from a single manufacturer
shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to
compatibility of primers and finish coats.
3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by
coating manufacturer.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Products:
Product Definition
Acrylic Latex Single-component, finish as required
Acrylic Latex (Flat) Flat latex
Acrylic Sealer Clear acrylic
Alkyd (Semigloss) Semigloss alkyd
Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss or semigloss finish as
required, medium long oil
Alkyd Wood Flat alkyd
Primer
Aromatic Polyurea ARMA 901 Aromatic Polyurea Elastomer, Two-part
Elastomer chemical blended to a 1:1 ratio, applied at 2,500 psi
minimum, or ARMA Coatings.
Bituminous Paint Single-component, coal-tar pitch based
Block Filler Primer-sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces,
100% acrylic emulsion
Coal-Tar Epoxy Amine, polyamide, or phenolic epoxy type 70%
volume solids minimum, suitable for immersion
service
DTM Acrylic Surface tolerant, direct-to-metal water borne acrylic
Primer primer
DTM Acrylic Surface tolerant, direct-to-metal water borne acrylic
Finish finish coat
Elastomeric 100% solids, plural component, spray applied, high
Polyurethane build, elastomeric polyurethane coating, suitable for
the intended service
Epoxy 100% solids epoxy trowel grade filler and surfacer,
Filler/Surfacer nonshrinking, suitable for application to concrete and
masonry. Approved for potable water contact and
conforming to NSF 61, where required
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Product Definition
Epoxy Nonskid Polyamidoamine or amine converted epoxies
(Aggregated) aggregated; aggregate may be packaged separately
Epoxy Primer— Anticorrosive, converted epoxy primer containing
Ferrous Metal rust-inhibitive pigments
Epoxy Primer— Epoxy primer, high-build, as recommended by
Other coating manufacturer for specific galvanized metal,
copper, or nonferrous metal alloy to be coated
Fusion Bonded 100% solids, thermosetting, fusion bonded, dry
Coating powder epoxy, suitable for the intended service
Fusion Bonded, Tetrafluoroethylene, liquid coating, or open gear
TFE Lube or grease as supplied by McMaster-Carr Supply
Grease Lube Corporation., Elmhurst, IL; RL 736 manufactured by
Amrep, Inc., Marietta, GA
High Build Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, minimum 69% volume
solids, capability of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat
Inorganic Zinc Solvent or water based, having 85% metallic zinc
Primer content in the dry film; follow manufacturer’s
recommendation for topcoating
Latex Primer Sealer Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior
gypsum board and plaster. Capable of providing
uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish
coats
NSF Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, approved for potable water
contact and conforming to NSF 61
Epoxy, High Solids Polyamidoamine epoxy, 80% volume solids,
minimum, suitable for immersion service
Polyurethane Two-component, aliphatic or acrylic based
Enamel polyurethane; high gloss finish
Rust-Inhibitive Single-package steel primers with anticorrosive
Primer pigment loading
Sanding Sealer Co-polymer oil, clear, dull luster
Silicone/Silicone Elevated temperature silicone or silicone/acrylic
Acrylic based
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Product Definition
Stain, Concrete Acrylic, water repellant, penetrating stain
Stain, Wood Satin luster, linseed oil, solid or transparent as
required
Varnish Nonpigmented vehicle based on a variety of resins
(alkyd, phenolic, urethane) in gloss, semigloss, or flat
finishes, as required
Water Base Epoxy Two-component, polyamide epoxy emulsion, finish
as required
2.04 MIXING
A. Multiple-Component Coatings:
1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer.
2. No partial batches will be permitted.
3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond
their pot life.
4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other
small areas.
5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer.
6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or
otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating.
B. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other
materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas
likely to be present at Site.
2.05 SHOP FINISHES
A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph, Shop Coating Requirements.
B. Shop Coating Requirements:
1. When required by equipment Specifications, such equipment shall be
primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in
field with identical material after installation.
2. Where manufacturer’s standard coating is not suitable for intended
service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie-coat to be used
between manufacturer’s standard coating and specified field finish. In
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
such cases, tie-coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by
manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of
equipment manufacturer’s standard coating with field coating
manufacturer.
C. Pipe:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe:
a. Use SSPC standards as a guide for desired prepared surface.
Follow recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers for
means and methods to achieve SSPC-equivalent surface.
b. The surface preparation and application of the primer shall be
performed by pipe manufacturer.
c. For high performance (epoxy) coatings, follow additional
recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers.
d. Prior to blast cleaning, grind smooth surface imperfections,
including, but not limited to delaminating metal or oxide layers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide Engineer minimum 7 days’ advance notice to start of field surface
preparation work and coating application work.
B. Perform the Work only in presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior
approval to perform the Work in Engineer’s absence.
C. Schedule inspection of cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat
in advance with Engineer.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Factory Finished Items:
1. Schedule inspection with Engineer before repairing damaged factory-
finished items delivered to Site.
2. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas on factory-finished items as
recommended by coating manufacturer. Carefully blend repaired areas
into original finish. If required to match colors, provide full finish coat
in field.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces
prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and
recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The
more stringent requirements shall apply.
3.03 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates,
aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings,
nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be
painted.
B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring
adjacent surfaces.
C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage
during surface preparation and painting process.
D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering.
E. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Field Abrasive Blasting:
1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as
required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted
and primed or coated.
2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required.
3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from
manufacturer’s recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.
B. Metal Surface Preparation:
1. Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications
summarized below:
a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil,
drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants
by cleaning with solvent.
b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill
scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter,
using nonpower hand tools.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill
scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter,
using power-assisted hand tools.
d. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease,
dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products,
and other foreign matter by blast cleaning.
e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease,
dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products,
and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no
more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface which may
consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations
caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously
applied coatings.
f. SP 7, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible rust, oil,
grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings.
Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on
surface.
g. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease,
dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products,
and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no
more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist
of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by
stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied
coatings.
h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible
oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion
products, and other foreign matter using power-assisted hand tools
capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of
rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original
surface is pitted.
i. SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by
Waterjetting Prior to Recoating: Surface preparation using high-
pressure and ultrahigh-pressure water jetting to achieve specified
surface cleanliness condition. Surface cleanliness conditions are
defined in SSPC SP 12 and are designated WJ-1 through WJ-4 for
visual surface preparation definitions and SC-1 through SC-3 for
nonvisual surface preparation definitions.
2. The words “solvent cleaning”, “hand tool cleaning”, “wire brushing”,
and “blast cleaning”, or similar words of equal intent in these
Specifications or in paint manufacturer’s specification refer to the
applicable SSPC Specification.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast
cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating
manufacturers’ recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat
application shall apply.
4. Ductile Iron Pipe Supplied with Asphaltic Varnish Finish: Remove
asphaltic varnish finish prior to performing specified surface
preparation.
5. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning.
6. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges,
and surface defects.
7. Welds and Adjacent Areas:
a. Prepare such that there is:
1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead.
2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any area to be
painted.
3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead.
b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent
surface of weld bead.
8. Preblast Cleaning Requirements:
a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface
contaminants prior to blast cleaning.
b. Cleaning Methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water
with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water
rinsing.
c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable
solvent and clean cloth.
9. Blast Cleaning Requirements:
a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain
specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as
specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that
meets coating manufacturer’s recommendations for particular
primer to be used.
c. Use only dry blast cleaning methods.
d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems.
e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and
environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined
space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and
debris.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements:
a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning
operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other
method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other
areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth.
b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that
have started to rust before they are painted.
C. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation:
1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate
hand or power tools.
2. Remove oil and grease by wiping or scrubbing surface with suitable
solvent, rag, and brush. Use clean solvent and clean rag for final wiping
to avoid contaminating surface.
3. Obtain and follow coating manufacturer’s recommendations for
additional preparation that may be required.
D. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation:
1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with medium grit sandpaper to
provide tooth for coating system.
2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided
sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without
removing excess material.
3.05 SURFACE CLEANING
A. Brush-off Blast Cleaning:
1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements
of SSPC SP 7.
2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nutshell.
3. Select various surface preparation parameters, such as size and hardness
of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface
such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage.
4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be
exposed to view.
5. Engineer will review acceptable trial blast cleaned area and use area as a
representative sample of surface preparation.
6. Repair or replace surface damaged by blast cleaning.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Acid Etching:
1. After precleaning, spread the following solution by brush or plastic
sprinkling can: One part commercial muriatic acid reduced by two parts
water by volume. Adding acid to water in these proportions gives an
approximate 10 percent solution of HCl.
2. Application:
a. Rate: Approximately 2 gallons per 100 square feet.
b. Work acid solution into surface by hard-bristled brushes or
brooms until complete wetting and coverage is obtained.
c. Acid will react vigorously for a few minutes, during which time
brushing shall be continued.
d. After bubbling subsides (10 minutes), hose down remaining slurry
with high pressure clean water.
e. Rinse immediately to avoid formation on the surface of salts that
are difficult to remove.
f. Thoroughly rinse to remove any residual acid surface condition
that may impair adhesion.
3. Ensure surface is completely dry before application of coating.
4. Apply acid etching to obtain a “grit sandpaper” surface profile. If not,
repeat treatment.
C. Solvent Cleaning:
1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing
and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using
solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar
materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action.
2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 1.
3.06 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. The intention of these Specifications is for new, interior and exterior
concrete, metal, and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether
specifically mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise.
2. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal
vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces,
carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise
specified.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 14 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed
system. Consult coatings manufacturer’s written instructions for these
requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle.
4. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint
manufacturers’ printed recommendations and special details. The more
stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats
to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint.
5. Sand wood lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior
to applying next coat.
7. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized
bed, or flocking.
8. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to
structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation.
9. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: Use only solvent type paints and
coatings.
10. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe
penetrations.
11. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use.
12. Where more than one coat is applied within a given system, alternate
colors to provide a visual reference showing required number of coats
have been applied.
B. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloys:
1. Concealed galvanized, copper, and nonferrous metal alloy surfaces
(behind building panels or walls) do not require painting, unless
specifically indicated herein.
2. Prepare surface and apply primer in accordance with System No. 10
specification.
3. Apply intermediate and finish coats of the coating system appropriate
for the exposure.
C. Porous Surfaces, Such As Concrete and Masonry:
1. Filler/Surfacer: Use coating manufacturer’s recommended product to fill
air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects.
2. Prime Coat: May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and
adhesion.
a. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer
and dependent on surface density and type of coating.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 15
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Surface Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of
running water, just prior to application of coating.
D. Film Thickness and Coverage:
1. Number of Coats:
a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness.
b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required
paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences
in manufacturers’ products, and atmospheric conditions.
2. Application Thickness:
a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer’s recommendations.
b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper coating
thickness during application.
3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated
Surfaces:
a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments.
b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with Specification.
c. Coats are subject to inspection by Engineer and coating
manufacturer’s representative.
4. Visually inspect concrete, masonry, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood
surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained.
5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar
areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and
ensure proper millage in these areas.
6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of
underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats
would not increase the hiding.
3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the
following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in
the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in
question.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 16 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. System No. 2 Submerged Metal—Domestic Sewage:
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
SP 5, White Metal Prime in accordance
Blast Cleaning with manufacturer’s
recommendations
Coal-Tar Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT
-OR-
High Build Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT
1. Use on the following items or areas:
a. Metal surfaces new and existing below a plane 1 foot above
maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid
surface that are a part of immersed equipment, concrete embedded
surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves,
access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel,
and the following specific surfaces:
1) Discharge pipes from the influent pumps in the screen
distribution channel.
2) Scum piping in Secondary Clarifiers 1 through 4.
3) Water piping in Secondary Clarifiers 1 through 4.
C. System No. 4 Exposed Metal—Highly Corrosive:
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
SP 10, Near-White Epoxy Primer—Ferrous 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT
Blast Cleaning Metal
High Build Epoxy 1 coat, 4 MDFT
1. Use on the following items or areas:
a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and existing located inside or outside
of structures and exposed to weather, including the pumps, piping,
and valves.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 17
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. System No. 25 Exposed FRP, PVC:
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
In accordance with Acrylic Latex Flat 2 coats, 320 SFPGPC
Paragraph Plastic and
FRP Surface
Preparation
1. Use on the following items or areas:
a. All exposed-to-view PVC and CPVC surfaces, and FRP surfaces
without integral UV-resistant gel coat.
3.08 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. System: Special Concrete Coating:
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
In accordance with Aromatic Polyurea 125 MDFT
Paragraph Concrete Elastomer
Surface Preparation
3.09 COLORS
A. Provide as designated herein and shown in Piping Schedule selected by Owner
or Engineer.
B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected
manufacturer may supply matches.
C. Equipment Colors:
1. Equipment includes the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural
supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits.
2. Paint equipment and piping one color as selected.
3. Paint nonsubmerged portions of equipment the same color as the piping
it serves, except as itemized below:
a. Dangerous Parts of Equipment and Machinery: OSHA Orange.
b. Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red.
c. Radiation Hazards: OSHA Purple.
d. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout
devices, including, but not limited to, electrical disconnects for
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 18 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines
under pressure: OSHA Yellow.
D. Pipe Identification Painting:
1. Color code nonsubmerged metal piping, except electrical conduit. Paint
fittings and valves the same color as pipe, except equipment isolation
valves.
2. Pipe Color Coding: As shown in table below.
3. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along
pipe axis at connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall
boundaries, and at intervals along piping not greater than 9 feet on
center.
E. Pipe System Color Code:
Pipe System Color
Air, Process Federal Safety Green
Air, Instrument Federal Safety Purple
Ammonia, Liquid Federal Safety Orange
Ammonia, Solution Federal Safety Orange
Alum Dark Green
Chlorine, Gas Federal Safety Yellow
Chlorine, Liquid Federal Safety Yellow
Chlorine, Residual Sampling Silver/Gray
Chlorine Solution Federal Safety Yellow
Chlorine Ejector Water Silver/Gray
Chlorine Vent Federal Safety Yellow
Compressed Air Federal Safety Purple
Carbon Black
Drains and Sludge Light Brown
Decant Light Brown
Dewatering Black
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 19
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pipe System Color
Drains Black
Effluent, Final Silver/Gray
Effluent, Primary Silver/Gray
Effluent, Flushing Water, High Pressure Dark Green
Effluent, Flushing Dark Green
Fuel Oil Supply Federal Safety Orange
Fuel Oil Return Federal Safety Orange
Flocculation Basin Influent Buff
Filter Backwash Supply Medium Blue
Filter Surface Wash Supply Medium Blue
Hot Flushing Loop Federal Safety Blue
Headworks Buff
Lime White
Mixed Liquor Silver/Gray
Overflow Silver/Gray
Plant Service Water Medium Blue
Potable Water Light Blue
Polymer/Cationic Buff
Polymer Nonionic or Anionic Buff
Raw Sewage Dark Gray
Rapid Mix Influent Light Brown
Scum Light Brown
Sample Medium Green
Seal Water Federal Safety Blue
Sludge, Digested Dark Brown
Sludge, Primary Dark Brown
Sludge, Return Activated Light Brown
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 20 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pipe System Color
Sludge, Thickened Light Brown
Sludge, Waste Activated Dark Brown
Sludge, Stored Dark Brown
Sludge, Recirculated Dark Brown
Sludge, Mixed Light Brown
Thickener Dilution Water Dark Green
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Equipment:
1. Provide magnetic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness
specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Corp., Anaheim, CA,
Mikrotest.
2. Provide low-voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector to test
completed coating systems, 20 mils dry film thickness or less, except
zinc primer, high-build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for
pinholes, holidays, and discontinuities, as manufactured by Tinker and
Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1.
3. Provide high-voltage spark tester to test completed coating systems in
excess of 20 mils dry film thickness. Unit as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
B. Testing:
1. Thickness and Continuity Testing:
a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type,
dry film thickness gauge, in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Check
each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a
minimum of 8 hours after application of coating.
b. Holiday detect coatings 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer
and galvanizing, with low voltage wet sponge electrical holiday
detector in accordance with NACE RP0188.
c. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils dry with high voltage
spark tester as recommended by coating manufacturer and in
accordance with NACE RP0188.
d. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest
each repaired area. Final tests may also be conducted by Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 21
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Inspection: Leave staging and lighting in place until Engineer has inspected
surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer.
Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by Engineer.
D. Unsatisfactory Application:
1. If item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean
surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified
color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information
from coating manufacturer.
2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause
for rejection.
3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating
manufacturer.
E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays:
1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint
manufacturer.
2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint,
and feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on
extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be
required.
3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a
manner that will present a uniform texture and color-matched
appearance.
3.11 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, coating
manufacturer’s representative shall be present at Site as follows:
1. On first day of application of any coating system.
2. A minimum of two additional Site inspection visits, each for a minimum
of 4 hours, in order to provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper
Installation.
3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with
manufacturer’s product.
4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into
immersion service.
PAINTING AND COATING PW/WBG/426399
09 90 00 - 22 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.12 CLEANUP
A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal
containers or destroy at end of each day.
B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers
from Site or destroy in a legal manner.
C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave
entire job clean.
3.13 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this
Specification:
1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS)
2. Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS).
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 - 23
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET (PSDS)
Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface
preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given
coating system on a single PSDS.
Paint System Number (from Spec.):
Paint System Title (from Spec.):
Coating Supplier:
Representative:
Surface Preparation:
Paint Material Product Name/Number
(Generic) (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage
PW/WBG/398678 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET (PPDS)
Complete and attach manufacturer’s Technical Data Sheet to this PPDS for each product
submitted. Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for the following parameters at
temperature (F)/relative humidity:
Temperature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25
Induction Time
Pot Life
Shelf Life
Drying Time
Curing Time
Min. Recoat Time
Max. Recoat Time
Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for the following:
Mixing Ratio:
Maximum Permissible Thinning:
Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.: max.:
Surface Temperature Limitations: min.: max.:
Surface Profile Requirements: min.: max.:
Attach additional sheets detailing manufacturer’s recommended storage requirements and
holiday testing procedures.
PW/WBG/398678 PAINTING AND COATING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 09 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 02 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Requirements specified within this section apply to Division 26, Electrical.
Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual
sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National Electrical
Installation Standards.
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following:
a. Electrical service components.
b. Nameplates, signs, and labels.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 02 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and
Group of hazardous area indicated.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and
methods required for such areas.
1. Pump Room HD001.
2. Odor Control Room HD003.
3. Hopper Room HD103.
4. Motor Room HD104.
B. The following areas are classified as indoor and dry:
1. Electrical/HVAC Room HD205.
2. Electrical Room HD101.
C. The following areas are classified as outdoor and wet: Clarifiers 1, 2, 3, and 4.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. PVC-Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit Installer: Must be certified by conduit
manufacturer as having received minimum 2 hours of training on installation
procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are
required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of
materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.
B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be
capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient
temperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
C. Equipment and Devices Installed Outdoors or in Unheated Enclosures:
Capable of continuous operation within ambient temperature range of
minus 10 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 02 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.
If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with,
light gray color finish as approved by Owner.
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Material: Laminated plastic.
B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.
C. Color: Black, engraved to a white core.
D. Letter Height:
1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch.
2. Other electrical equipment: 3/8 inch.
2.04 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and
raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for
actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of
raceways, subject to approval of Engineer.
B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets,
equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for
conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems
and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify
Engineer in writing.
C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless
otherwise specified.
D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 02 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member
or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform
cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings,
paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of
conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such
work, restore surfaces to original condition.
3.02 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY
A. Drawings show each homerun circuit to be provided. Do not combine power
or control circuits into common raceways without authorization of Engineer.
3.03 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS
A. Equipment Nameplates:
1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including terminal
junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations.
2. Terminal junction box nameplates shall include equipment designation.
3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include
name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.
3.04 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and
equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.
B. Touchup Paint:
1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of
devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency
and type of surface of original finish.
2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire
equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than
factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is
acceptable to Engineer.
3.05 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION
A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects
of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 02 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor’s
convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other
adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate
protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 02 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 04
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy
and High-Strength Low Alloy Formability.
c. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
3. International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring
Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation–Part 1:
Intrinsic Safety.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.
b. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks.
c. 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Provide manufacturers’ data for the following:
a. Firestopping.
b. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having enclosures.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND METHODS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 04 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS
A. UL 486E and UL 1059.
B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.
C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment,
panels, or boxes.
D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing
direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.
E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity
metal.
F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.
G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.
H. Terminals:
1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than
stripping.
2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.
3. Individual, rail mounted.
I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.
J. Manufacturers:
1. Weidmuller, Inc.
2. Ideal.
3. Electrovert USA Corp.
4. Phoenix.
2.02 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS
A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel:
1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum,
ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/426399
AND METHODS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 04 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro-
deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint.
C. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless
steel, 12-gauge.
D. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.
2. Unistrut Corp.
3. Aickinstrut.
2.03 FIRESTOPS
A. General:
1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than,
the assembly penetrated.
2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and
after exposure to flame.
3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established
by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Firestop System:
1. Formulated for use in through-penetration firestopping around cables,
conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors.
2. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: 3M Brand Fire Barrier Caulk CP25,
Putty 303, Wrap/Strip FS195, Composite Sheet CS195 and Penetration
Sealing Systems 7902 and 7904 Series.
3. Two-Part, Foamed-In-Place, Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning Corp. Fire
Stop Foam, General Electric Co. Pensil 851.
4. Fire Stop Devices: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes, for
raceway and cable fittings.
2.04 ENCLOSURES
A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted
using an electrode position process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as
bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND METHODS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 04 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Color: Manufacturer’s standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless
otherwise shown.
C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of
different systems and voltage.
D. Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical
enclosures according to the following table:
Enclosures
Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type
Indoor Finished Dry 1
Indoor Unfinished Dry 1
Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet 4
2.05 WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896.
2. Industrial grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches
and screw terminals.
3. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent
lamp loads.
4. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
5. Color: Ivory.
6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting
strap.
7. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Leviton; 1221 Series.
b. Bryant; 4901 Series.
c. Hubbell; 1221 Series.
B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:
1. Duplex, listed Class A to UL Standard 943, tripping at 5 mA.
2. Color: Ivory.
3. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration D: 5-20R, 20 amps.
4. Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet boxes.
5. Standard Model: NEMA WD 1, with screw terminals and provisions for
testing.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/426399
AND METHODS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 04 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. Feed-Through Model: NEMA WD 1, with feed-through screw terminals
and provisions for testing.
7. Impact resistant nylon face.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Bryant.
b. Hubbell.
c. Leviton.
2.06 DEVICE PLATES
A. General: Sectional type plates not permitted.
B. Weatherproof:
1. For Receptacles, Wet Locations:
a. Impact-resistant, nonmetallic, single-gang, horizontal-mounting,
providing, while in-use, NEMA 3R rating.
b. Stainless steel mounting and hinge hardware.
c. Lockable, paintable.
d. Color: Gray.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Carlon.
2) Leviton.
2. For Switches:
a. Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external
operator for internal switch.
b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185.
2) Appleton; FSK-1VTS or FSK-1VS.
2.07 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
A. Enclosure:
1. NEMA 250, Type 4X, or as shown.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.
3. Doors: Rubber gasketed with continuous hinge.
4. Finish: Type 304 stainless steel.
5. Size panels to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment
mounted in or on panel.
6. Mount internal and door-mounted devices as shown.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND METHODS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 04 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7. Manufacturer:
a. Hoffman.
b. H. F. Cox.
B. Wiring:
1. Power and Control Wiring:
a. 600-volt class, insulated, stranded copper.
b. Size: Minimum 14 AWG enclosed in either sheet metal raceway
or plastic wiring duct.
2. Signal Circuit Wiring: Twisted shielded pairs minimum No. 16 AWG,
separated at least 6 inches from power wiring.
3. Device Identification: Provide engraved plastic nameplates, adhesive
attachment, white letters on black background.
2.08 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Specific requirements relating to fixture type, lamp type, and mounting
hardware are provided in the Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
B. Poles:
1. Rating (With Luminaire): 100 mph steady winds, without incurred
damage.
2. Material: Steel, or as specified on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.02 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL
A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment,
raceway, and cable tray systems.
B. Channel Type:
1. Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations:
a. Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel or
paint coated.
2. Outdoor Locations: Type 316 stainless steel.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/426399
AND METHODS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 04 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:
1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.
2. Painted Channel: Rust-inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint.
3.03 FIRESTOPS
A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer’s instructions. Comply with
installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.
B. Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory
materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and
walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or
wall assembly in which penetration occurs.
3.04 WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches:
1. Mounting Height: See Article Outlet and Device Boxes.
2. Install with switch operation in vertical position.
3. Install single-pole, two-way switches such that toggle is in up position
when switch is on.
B. Receptacles:
1. Install with grounding slot up, except where horizontal mounting is
shown, in which case install with neutral slot up.
2. Weatherproof Receptacles:
a. Install in cast metal box.
b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle
opening.
3.05 DEVICE PLATES
A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure a tight fit to box.
B. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plates
have no sharp corners or edges.
PW/WBG/426399 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND METHODS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 04 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.
D. Types (Unless Otherwise Shown):
1. Outdoor: Weatherproof.
END OF SECTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/426399
AND METHODS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 04 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 05
CONDUCTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-
Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors.
2. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association, Inc. (ICEA):
a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.
b. S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and
Instrumentation Cables.
c. T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with
Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA):
a. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
Instrumentation Cables.
b. WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for
the Distribution of Electrical Energy.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of
Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C,
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
c. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables.
d. 486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors.
e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors.
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and
Rubber Insulating Tape.
g. 1277, Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray
Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
h. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical
Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Wire and cable.
b. Wire and cable accessories.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the
AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Type:
1. All Circuits: Stranded copper.
C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with
XHHW-2 insulation.
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Flexible Cords and Cables:
1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in
accordance with UL 62.
2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of
NEMA WC 70.
2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE
A. General:
1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray
Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13
meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725.
2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer’s name, maximum
working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL
listing mark.
3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.
4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C
wet locations.
5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.
B. Type 1, Multiconductor Control Cable:
1. Conductors:
a. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper.
b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon.
c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1.
d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape.
e. Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1,
Table 2.
2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
3. Cable Sizes:
Max. Outside Diameter Jacket Thickness
No. of Conductors (Inches) (Mils)
3 0.41 45
5 0.48 45
7 0.52 45
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Max. Outside Diameter Jacket Thickness
No. of Conductors (Inches) (Mils)
12 0.72 60
19 0.83 60
25 1.00 60
37 1.15 80
4. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Southwire.
C. Type 2, Multiconductor Power Cable:
1. General:
a. Meet or exceed UL 1581 for cable tray use.
b. Meet or exceed UL 1277 for direct burial and sunlight-resistance.
c. Overall Jacket: PVC.
2. Conductors:
a. Class B stranded, coated copper.
b. Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene or cross-
linked polyethylene.
c. UL rated VW-1 or listed Type XHHW-2.
d. Color Code: Conductors, size 8 AWG and smaller, colored
conductors, ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1.
3. Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
4. Cable Sizes:
No. of Max. Nominal
Minimum Current Outside Jacket
Conductor Ground Carrying Diameter Thickness
Size Wire Size Conductors (Inches) (Mils)
12 12 2 0.42 45
3 0.45
4 0.49
10 10 2 0.54 60
3 0.58
4 0.63
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Southwire.
D. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair,
designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log
applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.
1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness.
2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic
polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.
4. Conductors:
a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,
meeting requirements of ASTM B8.
b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.
c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon.
e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Okonite Co.
b. Alpha Wire Corp.
c. Belden.
2.03 SPECIAL CABLES
A. Type 31, Data Highway Cable, Allen-Bradley “Blue Hose”:
1. Meet or exceed electrical characteristics of Allen-Bradley Catalog
No. 1770-CD.
2. Approved by Allen-Bradley for use with A-B programmable logic
controller systems.
3. Outer Jacket: Blue PVC.
4. Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped
to provide 100 percent coverage.
5. Drain: 55 percent tinned copper braid and drain wire.
6. Dimension: 0.243-inch nominal OD.
7. Conductors:
a. One pair 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper.
b. Insulation: Polyethylene.
c. Color Code: Blue and clear.
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8. Manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley.
b. Belden.
2.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or
THHN/THWN, insulation.
2.05 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Tape:
1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch
Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of
UL 510.
2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic,
Scotch Brand 88.
3. Arc and Fireproofing:
a. 30-mil, elastomer.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth
tapebinder.
2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder.
B. Identification Devices:
1. Sleeve:
a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed
black markings. Wrap around products are not acceptable. Hand-
printed identification is not acceptable.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE.
2) Brady, Type 3PS.
2. Heat Bond Marker:
a. Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure
sensitive adhesive.
b. Self-laminating protective shield over text.
c. Machine printed black text.
d. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS-HB.
3. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped
on plate.
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch
minimum.
C. Connectors and Terminations:
1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulug.
3) ILSCO.
2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
b. Seamless.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulink.
3) ILSCO; ILSCONS.
3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts):
a. UL 486C.
b. Plated steel, square wire springs.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts.
2) Ideal; Twister.
4. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector:
a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.
b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.
c. Manufacturers:
1) 3M Co.
2) Thomas & Betts.
3) Marrette.
D. Cable Lugs:
1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1.
2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.
3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed.
2) Burndy; Hydent.
3) ILSCO.
4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite.
2) Burndy; Quiklug.
3) ILSCO.
E. Cable Ties:
1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.
F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:
1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.
2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief.
3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.
b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.
2.06 PULLING COMPOUND
A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based
lubricant; UL listed.
B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-
covered wire and cable.
C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.
D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and
fiberglass raceways.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Ideal Co.
2. Polywater, Inc.
3. Cable Grip Co.
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless
noted otherwise.
C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling
tensions and minimum bending radii.
D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for
copper conductors.
F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-
center spacing as required by equipment terminals.
G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults,
cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some
other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed
length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.
H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling
wires or cables.
I. Cable Tray Installation:
1. Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray.
2. Bundle, in groups, wire and cable of same voltage having a common
routing and destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 8 feet.
3. Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections.
4. Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the
following maximum intervals:
a. Horizontal Runs: 20 feet.
b. Vertical Runs: 5 feet.
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below:
1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each
end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping
turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.
2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
3. Colors:
System Conductor Color
All Systems Equipment Green
Grounding
240/120 Volts, Single- Grounded Neutral White
Phase, Three-Wire One Hot Leg Black
Other Hot Leg Red
208Y/120 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White
Phase, Four-Wire Phase A Black
Phase B Red
Phase C Blue
480Y/277 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White
Phase, Four-Wire Phase A Brown
Phase B Orange
Phase C Yellow
Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.
4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other
than green, in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at each
termination, and in accessible locations such as panels, switchboards, pull
boxes, and terminal boxes.
B. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule
designations.
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:
1. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.
2. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one
circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to
make it unique.
D. Method:
1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond
markers.
2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger:
a. Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags.
b. Attach with nylon tie cord.
3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.
3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Do not splice branch power distribution conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless
specifically indicated or approved by Engineer.
B. Connections and Terminations:
1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on
stranded conductors.
2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for
instrumentation and control, circuit conductors.
3. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection
of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.
4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for
instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through
2/0 AWG.
5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for
power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.
6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit
conductors 10 AWG and larger.
7. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure
connection.
8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.
9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. Compression Lugs:
a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall
provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until
crimp is complete.
b. Do not use plier type crimpers.
C. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.
D. Splices and Terminations:
1. Insulate uninsulated connections.
2. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat shrink.
3. Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.
E. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.
F. Cabinets, Panels, and Switchgear:
1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.
2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,
remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips
of insulating material to protect the conductors.
G. Control and Instrumentation Wiring:
1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and
instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated,
locking-fork compression lugs.
2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in
accordance with terminal manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using
terminal strips.
4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made
under Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process
Systems, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections.
5. Cable Protection:
a. Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit or grouped
into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter.
b. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables.
c. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over
shield.
CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/426399
26 05 05 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
H. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install
minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet
in other assemblies.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CONDUCTORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 05 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National
Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code. (NEC).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings: Product data for the following:
a. Mechanical connectors.
b. Compression connectors.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.
PW/WBG/426399 GROUNDING AND BONDING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 26 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.02 CONNECTORS
A. Compression Type:
1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material.
2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and
larger.
4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and
sealed.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy Corp.
b. Thomas and Betts Co.
c. ILSCO.
B. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy Corp.
b. Thomas and Betts Co.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.
B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed
noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways,
ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and
metal piping systems.
C. Shielded Instrumentation Cables:
1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.
2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and
apply heat shrink tube.
3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.
3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and
control circuits above 50 volts.
GROUNDING AND BONDING PW/WBG/426399
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 26 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.
C. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment
containing a ground bus.
D. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.
E. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.
F. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to
intermediate metallic enclosures.
G. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding
system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch
machine screws.
3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING
A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor
feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.
B. Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish
compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch
brass threaded stud with bolt and washer.
C. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install
solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. General:
1. Abovegrade Connections: Install mechanical or compression-type
connectors; or brazing.
2. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to
allow good metal-to-metal contact.
B. Compression Type:
1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground
rods specified.
PW/WBG/426399 GROUNDING AND BONDING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 05 26 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Install using connector manufacturer’s compression tool having proper
sized dies.
C. Mechanical Type:
1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion
inhibitor before making connection.
2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Do not conceal mechanical connections.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING PW/WBG/426399
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 05 26 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
d. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at
Commercial Power Frequencies.
2. National Electrical Contractor’s Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation
standards.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).
c. C80.6, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial
Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. 5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
c. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel.
d. 360, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
e. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable
Fittings.
f. 1242, Standard for Safety for Electrical Intermediate Metal
Conduit – Steel.
g. 2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication
Cable Raceway.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Literature:
a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b. Intermediate metal conduit.
c. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
d. Conduit fittings.
e. Proposed raceway identification tag schedule.
f. Large junction and pull boxes.
g. Terminal junction boxes.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer.
B. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1. Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1.
2. Material:
a. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
b. Exterior Finish: PVC coating, 40 mils nominal thickness, bond to
metal shall have tensile strength greater than PVC.
c. Interior Finish: Urethane coating, 2 mils nominal thickness.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane.
4. Bendable without damage to either interior or exterior coating.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):
1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.6 and UL 1242.
2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective
layer.
D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.
2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit:
1. General:
a. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless
compression fittings not permitted.
2. Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees C.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Series BU-I.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.
3. Grounding Bushing:
a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for
150 degrees C, with solderless lugs.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Series GIB.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.
4. Conduit Hub:
a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw.
b. UL listed for use in wet locations.
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton, Series HUB-B.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Series CH.
3) Meyers; ST Series.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Conduit Bodies:
a. Sized as required by NFPA 70.
b. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):
1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets.
2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets.
3) Killark; Series O electrolets.
4) Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8.
6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
7. Unions:
a. Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC three-
piece union.
2) O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series,
three-piece coupling.
8. Conduit Sealing Fitting:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU.
2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS.
3) Killark; Type EY or Type EYS.
9. Drain Seal:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Type EYD.
2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or Type EZD.
10. Drain/Breather Fitting:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; Type ECDB.
2) Crouse-Hinds; ECD.
11. Expansion Fitting:
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Deflection/Expansion Movement:
a) Appleton; Type DF.
b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
2) Expansion Movement Only:
a) Appleton; Type XJ.
b) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
c) Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.
12. Cable Sealing Fitting:
a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
b. For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at
connector entry.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Appleton; CG-S.
2) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.
B. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
2. Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC-coated by conduit
manufacturer.
3. Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish.
Cover shall be of same material as conduit body. PVC-coated by
conduit manufacturer.
4. Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior.
5. Overlapping pressure sealing sleeves.
6. Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Ocal.
8. Expansion Fitting Manufacturer and Product: Ocal; Ocal-Blue XJG.
C. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing
rated for 105 degrees C.
2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.
2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. PVC-Coated Cast Metal:
1. Type: One-piece.
2. Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum.
3. Coating:
a. All Exterior Surfaces: 40 mils PVC.
b. All Interior Surfaces: 2 mils urethane.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Ocal.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.
B. Large Sheet Steel Box:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, for use in indoor and dry areas.
2. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel.
3. Cover: Full access, screw type.
4. Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant.
C. Cast Metal Box:
1. NEMA 250, Type 4, for use in non-corrosive and wet areas.
2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and
exterior mounting lugs.
3. Cover: Nonhinged with screws.
4. Gasket: Neoprene.
5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Nonhinged Type:
a. Crouse-Hinds; Series W.
b. O-Z/Gedney; Series Y.
D. Large Steel Box:
1. NEMA 250 Type 4, for use in non-corrosive and wet areas.
2. Box: 14-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed
exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish.
3. Cover: Hinged with clamps.
4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Robroy Industries.
c. Wiegman.
E. Large Stainless Steel Box:
1. NEMA 250, Type 4X.
2. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240, Type 304 stainless steel, with white
enamel painted interior mounting panel.
3. Cover: Hinged with clamps.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Robroy Industries.
2.05 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX
A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.
B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.
C. Terminal Blocks:
1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box.
Number all terminal points.
2. Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Identification Devices:
1. Raceway Tags:
a. Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal.
b. Shape: Round.
c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved.
d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors.
B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards.
C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.
D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and
dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.
F. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate
may collect above sealing fitting.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
G. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit
runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.
H. Group raceways installed in same area.
I. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from
parallel runs.
J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid
obstruction of passageways.
K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members,
or intersections of vertical planes.
L. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell
with reinforcing steel.
M. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.
N. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, or
IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid
galvanizing compound.
O. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation
of conductors, wires, or cables.
P. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams
without Engineer approval.
Q. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right
angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.
R. Install conduits for data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of
TIA 569B.
3.02 DEMOLITION
A. General Demolition:
1. Where shown, de-energize and disconnect nonelectrical equipment for
removal by others.
2. Where shown, de-energize, disconnect, and remove electrical
equipment.
3. Remove affected circuits and raceways back to serving panelboard or
control panel. Where affected circuits are consolidated with others,
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
remove raceways back to first shared condulet or box. Where
underground or embedded raceways are to be abandoned, remove
raceway to 1 inch below surface of structure or 12 inches belowgrade
and restore existing surface.
3.03 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS
A. Where Drawings indicate existing conduits may be reused, they may be
reused only where they meet the following criteria.
1. Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or
damage to exterior surface.
2. Conduit is sized per the NEC.
3. Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents.
4. Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents.
B. Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately
1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling
new conductors.
3.04 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or
raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
B. Size:
1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural
conditions. Box extensions not permitted.
2. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch PVC-coated cast
metal device box.
C. Locations:
1. Drawing locations are approximate.
2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,
relocate outlets as directed by Engineer.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Mounting Height:
1. General:
a. Dimensions given to centerline of box.
b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or
finish, mount as directed by Engineer.
2. Switches: 48 inches above grade.
E. Install plumb and level.
F. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or
structural member.
G. Box Type (Steel Raceway System):
1. Outdoor Locations: PVC-coated cast metal.
H. Box Type, Outdoor, Wet Locations (PVC-Coated rigid Galvanized Steel
Raceway System): PVC-coated cast metal with matching cover.
3.05 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.
B. Interior, Exposed:
1. Rigid galvanized steel.
2. Intermediate metal.
C. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):
1. Rigid galvanized steel.
2. Intermediate metal.
D. Outdoor: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.
3.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. For motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations
approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize
vibration:
1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, metallic, liquid-tight conduit.
2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Wet Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight conduit.
4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight conduit.
B. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient
to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.
3.07 PENETRATIONS
A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.
B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams,
not permitted.
C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations
to maintain fire-resistance rating as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods.
D. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout
dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.
3.08 SUPPORT
A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70
requirements. Do not exceed 8 feet in any application. Do not support from
piping, pipe supports, or other raceways.
B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze.
C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap:
1. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit: Zinc coated steel,
pregalvanized steel or malleable iron.
D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1. Wood: Wood screws.
2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by
powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.
4. Steelwork: Machine screws.
5. Location/Type of Hardware:
a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway
not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not
use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
3.09 BENDS
A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical
distance.
B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius.
C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with
acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to
facilitate bending.
E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with
same radius so that bends are parallel.
F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is
change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.
G. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor
bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit
flexibility.
3.10 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs.
B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature
variation.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.11 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturer’s premolded insulating sleeve
inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
1. General:
a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is
not required.
b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal
boxes having threaded hubs.
c. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 boxes
and enclosures.
2. Rigid Galvanized or Intermediate Conduit:
a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure.
c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment
ground bus or ground pad.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable
iron connectors.
C. Switchgear, and Free-Standing Enclosures: Terminate metal conduit entering
bottom with grounding bushing; provide grounding jumper extending to
equipment ground bus or grounding pad.
3.12 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. General:
1. Install plumb and level.
2. Installed boxes shall be accessible.
3. Do not install on finished surfaces.
4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and
allowed by applicable codes.
5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are
required and allowed by applicable codes.
6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate
conductor installation.
7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or
redirect multiple conduit runs.
8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of
three right-angle bends.
B. Mounting Hardware:
1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized.
2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel.
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Location/Type:
1. Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Nonhazardous: NEMA 250, Type 4X,
stainless steel.
3. Outdoor, Where Indicated Weatherproof (WP): NEMA 250, Type 3R.
4. Industrial Use in Areas Not Otherwise Classified: NEMA 250, Type 12,
unless otherwise shown.
D. Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250, Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.
E. Supports:
1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building
structure or structural member.
2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as
follows:
a. Wood: Wood screws.
b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.
c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
d. Steelwork: Machine screws.
3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
3.13 EMPTY RACEWAYS
A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
B. Provide nylon pull cord.
C. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags
attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.
3.14 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Raceway Tags:
1. Identify per Owner standard Raceway Schedule designation. Submit
proposed identification to Engineer for approval.
2. For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and
at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or
surface mounted.
3. Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways.
4. Provide noncorrosive wire for attachment.
RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/426399
26 05 33 - 14 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage
during construction.
B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over
conduit openings during construction.
C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 RACEWAY AND BOXES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 26 05 33 - 15
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 20 00
LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. This section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment
specification. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type,
synchronous speed, and deviations from this section will be listed in the
equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take
precedence over this section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
b. 620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for
Squirrel Cage Induction Machines.
c. 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry—Premium
Efficiency Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC)
Squirrel Cage Induction Motors—Up to and Including 370 kW
(500 hp).
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b. C50.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating
Stations.
c. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a. 83, Standard for Safety for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and
Cables.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 20 00 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. 674, Standard for Safety for Electric Motors and Generators for
Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
c. 2111, Standard for Safety for Overheating Protection for Motors.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of
NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31.
B. Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow
for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the
motor by its controller.
C. ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.
D. WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.
E. WPII: Open weather protected enclosure, Type II.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Descriptive information.
2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
3. Additional Rating Information:
a. Service factor.
b. Locked rotor current.
c. No load current.
d. Safe stall time for motors 250 hp and larger.
e. Multispeed load classification (for example, variable torque).
f. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example,
variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load
classification.
g. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor.
4. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).
5. Dimensions and total weight.
6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1
and NFPA 70.
7. Bearing type.
8. Bearing lubrication.
9. Bearing life.
10. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.
LOW-VOLTAGE PW/WBG/426399
AC INDUCTION MOTORS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 20 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
11. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
12. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the
motor.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Factory test reports.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be
products of:
1. U.S. Motors.
2. General Electric.
3. Baldor.
4. Reliance Electric.
5. Toshiba.
6. Siemens.
2.02 GENERAL
A. In order to obtain single source responsibility, utilize a single supplier to
provide drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.
B. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.
C. Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with
a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.
D. Lifting lugs on motors weighing 100 pounds or more.
E. Operating Conditions:
1. Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 40 degrees C.
2. Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without reduction
being required in nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding rated
temperature rise.
3. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 20 00 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 HORSEPOWER RATING
A. As designated in motor-driven equipment specification.
B. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty
Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any operating condition not to
exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.
2.04 SERVICE FACTOR
A. Inverter-duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.
2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING
A. System Frequency: 60 Hz.
B. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment
specification:
Voltage Rating
Size Voltage Phase
3/4 hp through 400 hp 460 3
C. Suitable for full voltage starting.
D. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor
starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.
2.06 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR
A. Efficiency:
1. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59.
2. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with NEMA MG 1
Table 12-12, Full-load Efficiencies for NEMA Premium Efficiency
Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less (Random Wound),or as
indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.
LOW-VOLTAGE PW/WBG/426399
AC INDUCTION MOTORS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 20 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer’s
standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.
2.07 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS
A. Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by
NEMA MG 1 tables.
B. Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater.
2.08 INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Three-phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in
motor-driven equipment specification, Class B or Class F at nameplate
horsepower and designated operating.
2.09 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.
2.10 TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES
A. Oversize main terminal boxes for all motors.
B. Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs
for conduit attachment.
C. Furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.
D. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1,
Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430:
Terminal Box Usable Values
Voltage Horsepower Percentage
Below 600 150 through 300 275
E. Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 20 00 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.11 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION
A. Vertical Motors:
1. Thrust Bearings:
a. Antifriction bearing.
b. Oil lubricated.
c. Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
2. Guide Bearings:
a. Manufacturer’s standard bearing type.
b. Oil lubricated.
c. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
B. Oil Lubrication Systems:
1. Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge.
2. Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs.
3. Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.
C. Inverter Duty Rated Motors, Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 50 hp shall
have electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.
2.12 NOISE
A. Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
B. Motors controlled by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed
sound levels of 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.
2.13 BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.
2.14 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturer’s standard. Finish color
manufacturer’s standard.
B. Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy
varnish.
LOW-VOLTAGE PW/WBG/426399
AC INDUCTION MOTORS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 20 00 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.15 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and
WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1,
and attached with stainless steel screws.
B. Winding Thermal Protection:
1. Thermistors:
a. Thermistor embedded in each stator phase winding before
winding dip and bake process.
b. In intimate contact with winding conductors.
c. Epoxy-potted, solid-state thermistor control module mounted in
NEMA 250 Type 4 box on motor, by motor manufacturer.
d. Individual thermistor circuits factory-wired to control module.
e. Control module rated for 120V ac power supply.
f. Control module automatically reset contact for external use rated
120 V ac, 5 amps minimum, opening on abnormally high winding
temperature. Provide manual reset at motor controller.
C. Nameplates:
1. Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum.
2. Display motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and
Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings.
3. Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal
efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and
maximum allowable kVAR.
D. Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer’s recommendations and of
sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition.
2.16 SPECIAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Inverter Duty Motor:
1. Motor supplied power by adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency
drives shall be inverter duty rated.
2. Suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 20 00 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.17 FACTORY TESTING
A. Tests:
1. In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors.
2. Routine (production) tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1. For energy
efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at 50 percent,
75 percent, and 100 percent of rated horsepower:
a. In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1,
Paragraph 12.59. and Paragraph 12.60.
3. Provide test reports.
B. Test Report Forms:
1. Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-1.
2. Efficiency and power factor by Test Method B, IEEE 112, Form A-2,
and NEMA MG 1, Table 12-12.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative at Site for installation assistance,
inspection, equipment testing, and startup assistance.
B. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
END OF SECTION
LOW-VOLTAGE PW/WBG/426399
AC INDUCTION MOTORS OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 20 00 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 29 23
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA): 359-A-1, Special Colors.
2. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS).
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems.
c. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-
Voltage AC Power Circuits.
4. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b. CP 1, Shunt Capacitors.
c. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
d. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extensions, and
Instrumentation Cables.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 79, Electrical Standard
for Industrial Machinery.
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms that may be used in this section:
1. AFD: Adjustable frequency drive.
2. CMOS: Complementary metal oxide semiconductor.
3. CSI: Current source inverter.
4. EMU: Energy monitoring unit.
5. GTO: Gate turn-off thyristor.
6. MPR: Motor protection relay.
7. MTBF: Mean time between failure.
8. PWM: Pulse width modulation.
9. ROM: Read only memory.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
11. RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit.
12. Rated Load: Load specified for equipment.
13. Rated Speed: Nominal rated (100 percent) speed specified for
equipment.
14. TDD: Total demand distortion.
15. THD: Total harmonic distortion.
16. TTL: Transistor transistor logic.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Composite drive/motor efficiency (CE) is defined as ratio of motor shaft
kW to drive input kW. AFD system minimum requirements:
a. At 60-Hz drive output and 100 percent load, CE equals
92 percent.
b. At 50-Hz drive output and 60 percent load CE equals 89 percent.
c. At 40-Hz drive output and 30 percent load CE equals 84 percent.
d. At 30-Hz drive output and 12.5 percent load CE equals
77 percent.
2. Rated Continuous Operation Capacity: Not less than 1.15 times full load
current rating of driven motor, as indicated on motor nameplate, and
suitable for continuous operation at continuous overload which may be
imposed on motor by driven pump operating over specified speed range.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Drive system consisting of adjustable frequency controller, drive motor,
auxiliary items, and components necessary for complete operating
system.
2. Other equipment is being powered from same bus as adjustable
frequency drives. Ensure proper operation of drives and other loads
under normal and emergency conditions.
3. Furnish AFDs rated on basis of actual motor full load nameplate current
rating times the service factor.
4. Drive System: Convert incoming three-phase, 60-Hz ac power to
variable voltage, adjustable frequency output for adjustable speed
operation of a standard ac induction squirrel-cage motor, using pulse-
width-modulation (PWM) technique to produce adjustable frequency
output.
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. System rated for continuous industrial duty and suitable for use with
NEMA MG 1, Design B motors.
6. Incoming Line Circuit Breaker: Provide positive means of disconnecting
incoming power, and overcurrent protection for drive system.
7. Incoming Line Reactor: Design to minimize harmonic distortion on
incoming power feeder.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Overall drive system operating data, including efficiencies, input
currents, and power factors, at driven equipment actual load and rated
system input voltage, at 0, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 110 percent of rated
speed.
2. AFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time, and pulse
rate of rise including justification for proposed deviation from specified
values. Include motor manufacturer’s certification motor insulation will
withstand long-term overvoltages caused at motor terminals due to
specified output pulse data or proposed deviation from this data.
3. Data on shelf life of “dc link” capacitor.
4. Complete system rating, including nameplate data, continuous operation
load capability throughout speed range of 0 percent to 120 percent of
rated speed.
5. Complete adjustable frequency controller rating coordinated with motor
full load nameplate current rating; list controller special features being
supplied.
6. Controller, reactor, harmonic filter, and isolating transformer (if
applicable) dimensional drawings; information on size and location of
space for incoming and outgoing conduit.
7. Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure.
8. Layout of controller face showing pushbuttons, switches, instruments,
and indicating lights.
9. Complete system operating description.
10. Complete system schematic (elementary) wiring diagrams.
11. Complete system interconnection diagrams between controller, drive
motor, and related components or controls external to system, including
wire numbers and terminal board point identification.
12. One-line diagram of system, including component ratings.
13. Description of diagnostic features being provided.
14. Descriptive literature for control devices such as relays and timers.
15. Itemized bill-of-materials listing system components.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Statement of Supplier qualifications.
2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
3. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
4. Factory functional test reports.
5. Field test reports.
6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of
1 year. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts
replacement, and maintenance with current price information.
7. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
8. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
9. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and
Group of hazardous area indicated.
D. Supplier: Minimum 5 years’ experience in furnishing similar size and type
adjustable frequency, controlled speed, drive systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. AFDs equipment shall be Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 700 or 755 Series, with
options and accessories to provide the specified features and to meet the
specified operating requirements.
B. In determining the most suitable AFD for this particular application, the
Owner conducted a formal Request for Qualifications (RFQ) selection
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
process. In that RFQ process, vendors were invited to submit information on
their AFD product, including cost information. The Owner evaluated the
products submitted and selected the product best suited to its needs. No other
products will be considered, unless the bidder can demonstrate that the
product is equal or superior to the specified AFD. All proposals for substitute
products shall demonstrate equipment compatibility with the software and
hardware systems, as shown, replacement parts availability, training
availability, etc.
C. The Bid price for any proposed substitute AFD products shall include the
following items, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere in this
section:
1. An 8-hour training course for Owner personnel, to be conducted by a
qualified person to familiarize the Owner with equipment features,
operation, and maintenance. This training will not be required of the
specified AFD manufacturer because Owner personnel have already
received the training.
2. Spare parts, in addition to those specified, including two of each
type/size: Operator interface units, communication interface modules,
input and output modules. Spare parts will not be required of the
specified AFD equipment manufacturer. The Owner already stocks
spare parts for the specified product.
3. The cost of any changes in the programming of the Process
Instrumentation and Control System (PICS) that are required due to the
proposed substitute product. This work will be executed by the Owner
or its representative and will be charged to the Contractor at a rate of
$100 per hour.
4. The cost of design and construction of any modifications to the Work
that are required to accommodate the proposed substitute product and/or
to provide the functions and features of the specified equipment.
2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
B. Storage Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to 158 degrees F.
C. Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent relative (noncondensing).
D. Altitude: 2,580 feet.
E. Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of maximum frequency.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Drive Units:
1. Incorporate switching power supply operating from dc bus, to produce
PWM output waveform simulating sine wave and providing power loss
ride through of 2 milliseconds at full load, full speed.
2. Current-limiting semiconductor fuses for protection of internal power
semiconductors.
3. Employ diode bridge rectifier providing constant displacement power
factor of 0.95 minimum at all operating speeds and loads.
4. Use transistors for output section, providing a minimum 97 percent
drive efficiency at full speed, full load.
5. Employ dc power discharge circuit so that after removal of input power
dc link capacitor voltage level will decay below 50 volts dc within
1 minute after de-energizing following NEMA CP 1 and NFPA 79.
Design dc link capacitor for a MTBF of 5 years.
6. Operate with open circuited output.
7. Input Voltage: 480V ac plus or minus 10 percent.
8. Output Voltage: 0 to 480 volts, three-phase, 0 to 66-Hz, minimum.
9. Maximum peak voltage of PWM AFD output pulse of 1,000 volts, with
pulse rise time of not less than 2 microseconds, and maximum rate of
rise of 500 volts per microsecond. User selectable PWM AFD output
pulse (carrier) frequency of 2,000 Hz to 6,000 Hz. AFD rating and
performance in the specified application shall be based upon a carrier
frequency of 4,000 Hz, minimum.
10. Motor Audible Noise Level: When operating throughout speed range of
PWM AFD, no more than 3 dBA above that designated in NEMA MG 1
for same motor operated at constant speed with a 60-Hz supply voltage.
11. Short-Time Overload Capacity: 125 percent of rated load in rms current
for 1 minute following full load, full speed operation.
12. Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: Suitable for connection to system with
maximum source three-phase, bolted fault, short-circuit available of
42,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts.
13. Conditioning:
a. Power Input: Provide series line reactors of 3 percent nominal
reactance.
b. Signal/Communication Inputs: Provide common mode toroidal
chokes on analog and remote I/O inputs.
c. Power Output: Provide series load reactors of 3 percent nominal
reactance
d. Install all devices within the drive panel or enclosure.
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
14. Diagnostics: Comprehensive for drive adjustment and troubleshooting:
a. Memory battery backup; 100-hour minimum during power loss.
b. Status messages will not stop drive from running but will prevent
it from starting.
c. Fault Condition Messages and History: First fault protection
function to be activated, ability to store six successive fault
occurrences in order. Minimum faults numerically:
1) Overcurrent (time and instantaneous).
2) Overvoltage.
3) Undervoltage (dc and ac).
4) Overtemperature (drive, motor windings, motor bearing,
pump bearing).
5) Serial communication fault.
6) Short-circuit/ground fault (motor and drive).
7) Motor stalled.
8) Semiconductor fault.
9) Microprocessor fault.
10) Single-phase voltage condition.
15. Drive Protection:
a. Fast-acting semiconductor fuses.
b. Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip.
c. Dc undervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout.
d. Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup.
e. Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link
components.
f. Overtemperature, motor, and pump.
g. Single-phase protection.
h. Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset).
i. Active current limit/torque limit protection.
j. Semiconductor fault protection.
k. Short-circuit/ground fault protection.
l. Serial communication fault protection.
m. Microprocessor fault.
n. Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule
surge, tested per IEEE C62.41).
o. Visual display of specific fault conditions.
16. Operational Features:
a. Use manufacturer’s standard unless otherwise indicated.
b. Programmable response to power loss.
c. Process proportional-integral controller.
d. Selectable volts/Hz control.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
e. Motor torque-current control for optimizing starting and
accelerating torque.
f. Power loss ride through (0.1 second).
g. Start on the fly.
h. Electronic motor overload protection.
i. Stall protection.
j. Slip compensation.
k. Automatic restart after power return (ability to enable/disable
function).
l. Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by
1.5-Hz steps in 10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system).
m. Drive maintenance system software for complete programming
and diagnostics.
n. Ground fault protection, drive, and motor.
o. Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.
B. Rectifier: Three-phase 6-pulse full wave diode bridge rectifier to provide
constant dc voltage to drive’s dc bus.
C. Furnish series choke and capacitors on dc bus to reduce ripple in rectifier
output and to reduce harmonic distortion reflected into incoming power
feeders.
D. Controller: Microprocessor-controller PWM inverter to convert to dc voltage
to variable voltage, adjustable frequency, three-phase ac output. Output
voltage shall vary proportionally with frequency to maintain constant ratio of
volts to hertz up to 60-Hz; above 60-Hz, voltage shall remain constant with
drive operating in constant horsepower output mode.
E. Enclosure:
1. NEMA 250, Type 12, gasketed, freestanding, or wall-mounted
enclosure, completely front accessible, and hinged doors. Properly sized
to dissipate heat generated by controller within limits of specified
operating conditions (including ambient temperature and ambient
airflow). Enclosure not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings.
2. Cable termination compartment door interlocked main circuit breaker,
defeatable (lockable in the open position), emergency stop pushbutton,
alphanumeric keypad and display, and operator’s controls.
3. Wire drive from above for power and control wiring.
4. Size forced-ventilation for periodic operation to cool each unit with
maximum room ambient temperature of 95 degrees F. Furnish
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
redundant fans such that if one fan fails remaining fans furnish adequate
ventilation for drive when operating at maximum capacity. Furnish
filters on ventilation intakes.
5. Wiring:
a. Bundle stranded copper wiring neatly with nylon tie wraps or with
continuous plastic spiral binding.
b. Label each terminal for permanent identification of leads.
c. Identify each wire at each end with imprinted mylar adhesive-back
wire markers.
d. Incorporate in as-installed wiring diagrams for wire and terminal
numbers shown.
e. Wiring across door hinge, use 19-strand, NEMA WC 57 Class C
stranding looped for proper twist rather than bending at hinge.
f. Wire connections internal to panels by crimp-on terminal types.
g. For multiple enclosure systems, complete interconnection wiring
with gasketed enclosure openings for wiring.
h. Multipoint plug receptacles for control wiring crossing equipment
shipping splits.
6. Selector switches, indicating lights, potentiometers, instruments,
protective devices, and major system components identified by means of
mechanically attached, engraved, laminated nameplates.
7. 120 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz circuits for control power and operator
controls from internal control power transformer.
F. Operator Interface:
1. Controls: Mount drive local control on front door of enclosure and
include control switch and membrane type keypad for the following
operator functions:
a. Start (when in local mode).
b. Stop (when in local mode).
c. Speed increase (when in local mode).
d. Speed decrease (when in local mode).
e. Parameter mode selection (recall programmed parameters).
f. LOCAL/REMOTE Control Selection: In REMOTE, furnish for
remote RUN command and speed increase/decrease via remote
Serial Communication Interface signal. In the LOCAL mode, the
remote run control and speed control via PLC shall be locked out.
g. Fault reset, manual for faults, except loss of ac voltage which is
automatic upon return.
h. RUN/preset speed.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 9
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
i. Parameter lock, password or key switch lockout of changes to
parameters.
j. Start disable, key switch or programmed code.
2. Control circuit disconnect shall de-energize circuits in units that are not
de-energized by main power disconnect device.
3. Arrange component and circuit such that failure of a single component
cannot cause cascading failure(s) of other component(s).
4. Alphanumeric Display: During normal operation and routine test, the
following parameters shall be available:
a. Motor current (percent of drive rated current).
b. Output frequency (Hertz).
c. Output voltage.
d. Running time.
e. Local/remote indicator.
f. Status of digital inputs and outputs.
g. Analog input and output values.
h. Output motor current per leg.
i. All test points.
5. Adjustable Parameters: Set drive operating parameters and indicate in
numeric form. Potentiometers may not be used for parameter
adjustment. Minimum setup parameters available:
a. Frequency range, minimum, maximum.
b. Adjustable acceleration/deceleration rate.
c. Volts per Hertz (field weakening point).
d. Active current limit/torque limit, 0 percent to 140 percent of drive
rating.
e. Adjustable voltage boost (IR compensation).
f. Preset speed (adjustable, preset operating point).
g. Provision for adjustment of minimum and maximum pump speed
to be furnished as function of remote speed signal.
G. Signal Interface:
1. Digital Input:
a. Accept a remote RUN command contact closure input.
b. High temperature contact closure input from field mounted motor
temperature monitoring relay.
2. Digital Output: Furnish three discrete output dry contact closures rated
5 amps at 120 volts ac.
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
a. DRIVE RUNNING.
b. DRIVE FAULT (with common contact closure for all fault
conditions).
c. DRIVE IN REMOTE MODE.
3. Analog Input: Not required.
4. Analog Output: Furnish two 4 mA to 20 mA dc signals for actual
frequency, actual load.
5. Serial Communication Interface: Compatible with Allen-Bradley PLC5
as remote I/O (RIO) drop as shown. Provide three-pin terminator for
RIO cable(s).
H. Accessories:
1. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch
die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible
location.
2. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.
3. Anchor Bolts: Galvanized, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2-inch
minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
4. Provide all cables and interface adapters for interconnection of operator
interface and serial communication interface with drive.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Enclosure:
1. Primer: One coat of rust-inhibiting coating.
2. Finish:
a. Interior: One coat white enamel.
b. Exterior: One coat manufacturer’s standard gray enamel or
EIA 359-A-1, No. 61.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical
connection, and intended function.
B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all control panels actually furnished.
C. Record test data for report.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 11
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer’s standard, confirming all functions
and performance, specified or shown.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Functional Test:
1. Conduct on each controller.
2. Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections,
interconnections, proper installation, and quiet operation.
3. Configure each drive in accordance with Owner requirements.
4. Record test data for report.
B. Performance Test:
1. Conduct on each controller.
2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
3. Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction.
4. Demonstrate performance by operating continuous period while varying
application load, as input conditions allow, to verify system
performance.
5. Record test data for report.
C. Test Equipment:
1. Provide diagnostic plug-in test card complete with instructions,
multiposition selector switch, and meters or built-in diagnostic control
panel or ROM-based processor for monitoring ac, dc, and digital signals
to assist in troubleshooting and startup of drive.
LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE PW/WBG/426399
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 29 23 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 MANUFACTURERS’ SERVICES
A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by
Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1. 2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.
2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. 1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
4. 1 person-day for facility startup.
5. 1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel.
B. See Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 29 23 - 13
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 26 43 00.02
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electric Power Systems.
b. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-
Voltage AC Power Circuits.
2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 508 Industrial Control Equipment.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section specifies the requirements necessary to provide:
1. Active Harmonic Correction (AHC) equipment.
2. Manufacturer’s services.
1.03 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA (FOR REFERENCE)
A. As shown on Drawings.
B. All harmonic-producing adjustable frequency drives are 6-pulse-type,
equipped with 3 percent line and load reactors.
1. Manufacturer and Model: Allen Bradley; PowerFlex 700 or 755 Series.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. AHC equipment shall include:
1. AHC unit.
2. Accessories, as specified.
3. Number Required (AHC plus accessories): One.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 43 00.02 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Harmonic correction equipment shall be suitable for installation as shown.
Installation of one AHC is planned. This AHC shall be suitable for operation
with utility and standby genset sources as shown. The installation of this AHC
is intended to provide sufficient cancellation of new load-produced harmonic
current such that the requirements of IEEE 519 are achieved at the Point of
Common Coupling (PCC) as defined on the Contract Drawings.
C. Minimum Rating, Total Harmonic Cancellation Current: 100 amperes. Each
AHC unit shall be rated on the basis of total harmonic cancellation current in
amperes.
D. AHC shall be connected in source-sensing configuration.
E. Modes of Operation:
1. AHC shall electronically inject harmonic current as required to cancel
load-produced harmonic current. Such current injection shall, within the
total cancellation current rating of the unit, maintain the PCC harmonic
current and voltage distortion at or below 5 percent TDD and 5 percent
THD(V), as defined by IEEE 519 for load demand and voltage
distortion limits. TDD is defined as the total RMS current distortion in
percent of the maximum demand load current of the circuit downstream
of the point of AHC application.
2. AHC shall also be capable of providing reactive current compensation
(displacement power factor correction). This function shall be manually
or automatically activated. When reactive current compensation is
activated, the AHC shall first perform harmonic current correction and
then, within its total injection current capacity, inject reactive
compensation current as required to maintain the PCC power factor at or
above 0.90 lagging.
F. Capacity Expansion: AHC shall be capable of parallel connection to increase
harmonic correction and reactive current compensation capacity. Up to
five units shall be capable of parallel connection. Sensing circuitry shall be
implemented by various inter-unit connections and may require addition of
auxiliary current transformers.
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC PW/WBG/426399
CORRECTION EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 43 00.02 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Manufacturer Descriptive Information (AHC and current transformers):
Summary of product ratings, features, and performance demonstrating
compliance with specification requirements.
2. Complete product specifications.
3. Drawings: Outline and arrangement drawing, schematic and connection
diagram.
4. Installation Information: Description of physical installation
requirements, mounting provisions, conduit entry, interconnection
wiring, power supply connection and requirements.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Factory Test Report: Provide on Seller’s standard forms.
2. Installation Instructions: Provide complete details for physical and
electrical installation and connection, including AHC, power supply
connection, and sensing current transformers.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Manual shall provide detailed
instructions for all programming, operation, and maintenance activities.
Provide replacement parts listing and instructions for obtaining. Provide
manufacturer’s pre-printed manual with copy of approved submittal
Drawings and tabulation of final settings.
4. Field Test and Commissioning Report: Provide summary of field
commissioning, including installation check, set-up and programming,
functional and performance testing, and approvals. Provide on Seller’s
standard forms.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
1. Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company providing harmonic correction equipment of the type
specified, with minimum 5 years’ documented experience.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 43 00.02 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Products shall comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA 70.
B. Equipment Finish:
1. Manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is
indicated.
2. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance
with light gray color finish as approved by Owner.
2.02 AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION APPROVAL
A. Material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ), in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
2.03 ACTIVE HARMONIC CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Input Power:
1. Voltage: 480V ac, three-phase, three-wire, plus ground.
2. Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent of nominal.
3. Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 5 percent.
4. Current Limit: 100 percent of rating, minimum.
5. Surge Withstand Capability: IEEE C62.41 without damage.
6. Input Fuses: Rated at 200,000 AIC (amperes interrupting capacity).
B. Output Performance:
1. Performance of the active harmonic correction equipment shall be
independent of the impedance of the power source.
2. Harmonic Correction:
a. Within the total cancellation current capacity of the AHC, limit
2nd- through 50th-order harmonic current to less than 5 percent
TDD as defined by IEEE 519 at the PCC at each installed
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC PW/WBG/426399
CORRECTION EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 43 00.02 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
location. Harmonic levels for individual harmonic orders shall
comply with respective levels established in IEEE 519.
b. Within the total cancellation current capacity of the AHC, limit
the load-produced THD(V) of the electrical system at the PCC of
AHC application to less than or equal to 5 percent, as defined by
IEEE 519.
3. Reactive Current Compensation: Within the total reactive compensation
capacity of the AHC, correct to 0.90 lagging displacement power factor,
minimum. Leading power factor is not permitted.
C. Environmental Conditions: The AHC shall be suitable for use under the
following environmental conditions:
1. Operating Ambient Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
2. Storage Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to 140 degrees F.
3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing.
4. Altitude: Operation up to 1,500 meters without derating.
5. Audible Noise: Shall not exceed 65 dbA measured 1 meter from surface
of unit.
6. Seismic Certification: UBC Zone 4.
D. Warranty: The AHC manufacturer shall warrant products against defects in
material and workmanship for a period of 2 years from final acceptance.
E. Enclosure:
1. Each AHC shall be provided in a NEMA 250, Type 1-rated enclosure.
Units shall not have any ventilation openings on the back. Provide
filtered ventilation as required.
2. Units with total cancellation current ratings of 100 amperes and less
may be designed for free-standing (conduit entry/exit through top and
bottom) or wall-mounting (conduit entry/exit through top or bottom)
installation. Units rated greater than 100 amperes shall be designed for
free-standing installation.
3. Freestanding units shall include a door-interlocked disconnect that
provides power interruption when the door is opened. Disconnect shall
be lockable in the power-off position. Door shall have continuous hinge
three-point locking mechanism.
4. Freestanding units shall include lifting lugs or other suitable lifting
provisions.
5. All units shall be provided with an identified grounding lug.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 43 00.02 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
6. The enclosure finishing shall be the manufacturer’s standard type and
color.
F. Operator Controls: Provide manufacturer’s standard controls interface.
Minimum requirements include ON/OFF-RESET control and indicators for
power on, unit operating, fault, warning, and unit at maximum capacity.
Provide a minimum of three Form-C dry contact relay outputs for remote
monitoring of status by others, including power on, unit operating, and fault.
G. AHC shall be designed and equipped to limit radiated and conducted EMI in
accordance with FCC and/or EU EMC directives.
H. Accessories: Sensing Current Transformers.
1. Source or load current sensing shall be provided by remotely-installed
current transformers. Two transformers shall be provided, installed on
two power circuit phases.
2. Current transformers shall be split-core type, suitable for operation at
400 Hz.
3. Transformer rating, ratio, and configuration shall be selected by Seller.
Circuit at sensing location has the following rating:
a. 400 amperes, three-phase, three-wire, 480V ac.
b. Circuit consists of two 500 kcmil insulated copper conductors per
phase.
c. Minimum CT inside diameter shall be 4 inches (or similar cross-
sectional area in rectangular style).
d. Installation location is shown on the Drawings.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform Seller’s standard factory inspection and tests to verify components
have been designed to specification, assembled in accordance with applicable
standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
B. Verify component devices operated correctly under conditions of actual operation.
C. Perform dielectric tests.
D. Verify equipment passed tests and inspection.
E. Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists and final certified and
signed test report.
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC PW/WBG/426399
CORRECTION EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 43 00.02 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.05 MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be
products of: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Model HCU100D5N1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY
A. AHC shall be factory assembled.
B. Factory test results shall be reviewed and accepted by Seller before AHC is
shipped.
C. Equipment shall be packaged or crated in a manner that will provide
protection from damage, deterioration, or contamination during shipping,
handling, and storage. Provisions for storage at the Job Site are as follows:
Secure, heated, indoor location.
D. Extra Materials:
1. Deliver at same time as AHC delivery.
2. Mark to identify associated products by name, equipment, and part
number. Provide detailed packing list.
3. Package parts for protection against damage from elements during
shipping, handling, and storage.
4. Ship in boxes or containers marked to indicate contents and as stated
above.
E. Accessories:
1. Deliver at same time as AHC delivery.
2. Furnish accessories required to place each item of equipment in full
operation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 43 00.02 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field quality control as part of manufacturer’s services.
B. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding.
C. General:
1. Perform inspection and testing of AHC in accordance with NETA ATS,
industry standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater
than, requirements established by NETA ATS.
3. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
4. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been
installed.
5. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
6. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:
a. Scheduled with Owner.
b. Conducted to avoid extended period of interruption to the
operating plant equipment.
D. Tests and inspection shall establish that:
1. Equipment and accessories are properly installed.
2. Equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances.
3. Installation operates properly.
4. Equipment is suitable for energization.
5. Installation conforms to requirements of NFPA 70.
E. Verify nameplate data.
F. Check accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.
H. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or
as recommended by manufacturer.
I. Test control and signal wiring for proper termination and function.
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC PW/WBG/426399
CORRECTION EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 7, 2011
26 43 00.02 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
J. Investigate and repair or replace:
1. Equipment items that fail tests.
2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
K. Provide and temporarily connect a three-phase harmonic analyzer upstream of
the point of AHC application to measure TDD and THD(V) levels to verify
performance of the AHC. Results shall demonstrate system operation in
accordance with these specifications. Conduct operating test and document
(current and voltage waveforms with harmonic spectra) with and without
AHC application.
L. Demonstrate control, monitoring, and indication functions in presence of
Owner.
M. Provide certified test report(s) documenting the successful completion of
testing. Include field test measurement data.
3.04 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at Job Site or
classroom as designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below (travel
time excluded):
1. 2 work days for inspection of installation, checkout and programming,
functional and performance testing, startup, and instruction of Owner
personnel.
B. Manufacturer’s Certification by a Factory Trained Manufacturer’s
Representative: Certify in writing equipment has been installed, adjusted, and
tested in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 26 43 00.02 - 9
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
a. M17, Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Paving Mixtures.
b. M81, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid Curing
Type).
c. M82, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium
Curing Type).
d. M140, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
e. M208, Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.
f. T166, Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of
Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry
Specimens.
g. T176 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded
Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.
h. T230, Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of
Pavement Compaction of Bituminous Aggregate Mixtures.
i. T245, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus.
j. T246, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Deformation and
Cohesion of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of Hveem Apparatus.
k. T247, Standard Method of Test for Preparation of Test Specimens
of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of California Kneading
Compactor.
l. T283, Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted
Bituminous Mixture to Moisture Induced Damage.
m. T304, Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of
Fine Aggregate (Method A).
2. Asphalt Institute (AI):
a. Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2), Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete.
b. Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2), Superpave Mix Design.
PW/WBG/426399 ASPHALT PAVING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 32 12 16 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D2041, Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
b. D4318, Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
c. D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
d. D5821, Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
e. E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Combined Aggregate: All mineral constituents of asphalt concrete mix,
including mineral filler and separately sized aggregates.
B. RAP: Reclaimed asphalt pavement.
C. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the
current edition of the Idaho Transportation Department Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction, including supplements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Samples:
a. Mix Constituents: Representative Samples of materials to be
incorporated into the Work.
2. Field density tests.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329.
2. Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be prepared by approved certified
independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt
technician.
ASPHALT PAVING PW/WBG/426399
32 12 16 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Compaction Control Strip:
1. General:
a. Construct to approximately 400 square meters in area and at
location that will become a portion of completed paved area.
b. Thickness: Typical of thickness to be paved on Project.
2. Rollers Used for Compaction:
a. Steel Wheel Rollers: Minimum static weight 9 Mg (10 tons).
b. Pneumatic Rollers: Capable of exerting pressure of 550 Kpa
(80 psi) on bituminous surface.
c. Vibratory Rollers: Static weight minimum 5.5 Mg (6 tons),
capable of applying a 9-Mg (10-ton) impact force equipped with
amplitude and frequency control specifically designed for
compaction of bituminous mixtures.
3. Compaction:
a. Compact bituminous mat, using a standard rolling pattern that
covers entire control strip. Request that Engineer performs final
density test.
b. Continue rolling until no further compaction can be obtained as
determined by field density testing.
c. Temperature and condition of bituminous mat shall be considered
workable when further compaction can no longer be obtained.
4. Target Density Determination:
a. Select test point near center of normal roller pass, but no closer
than 600 millimeters (2 feet) from edge of mat and 15 meters
(50 feet) from either end of control strip. Mat thickness at this
point shall be at least depth of finished pavement.
b. Point at which no further densification can be obtained.
5. Establish new target density if change is made in mix design, nominal
depth of mat being placed, aggregate source, or material properties.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when
ground temperature is lower than 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or air
temperature is lower than 4 degrees C (40 degrees F). Measure ground and air
temperature in shaded areas away from heat sources or wet surfaces.
B. Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when
application surface is wet.
PW/WBG/426399 ASPHALT PAVING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 32 12 16 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade SS-1, SS-1h, conforming to
Section 702 of the Standard Specifications.
2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX
A. General:
1. Mix formula shall not be modified except with written approval of
Engineer.
2. Source Changes:
a. Should material source(s) change, establish new asphalt concrete
mix formula before new material(s) is used.
b. Perform check tests of properties of plant-mix bituminous
materials on first day of production and as requested by Engineer
to confirm that properties are in compliance with design criteria.
c. Make adjustments in gradation or asphalt content as necessary to
meet design criteria.
B. Asphalt Concrete: Class II, as specified in Section 405 of the Standard
Specifications.
C. Composition: Hot-plant mix of aggregate, mineral filler if required, and
paving grade asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized,
uniformly graded, and combined in such proportions that resulting mixture
meets grading requirements of mix formula.
D. Aggregate:
1. General: 19 mm maximum size, as specified in Section 703.05 of the
Standard Specifications for hot plant bituminous pavement; however,
RAP material will not be acceptable.
E. Asphalt Cement: Paving Grade Type II-B as specified in Section 702.01 of the
Standard Specifications.
ASPHALT PAVING PW/WBG/426399
32 12 16 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Traffic Control:
1. In accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and
Controls.
2. Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated
or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt.
3.02 LINE AND GRADE
A. Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of
underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness.
3.03 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. In accordance with Section 405 of the Standard Specifications.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 301 of the Standard Specifications.
B. Existing Roadway:
1. Modify profile by grinding, milling, or overlay methods as approved, to
provide meet lines and surfaces and to produce smooth riding
connection to existing facility.
2. Remove existing material to a minimum depth of 25 millimeters
(1 inch).
3. Paint edges of meet line with tack coat prior to placing new pavement.
C. Thoroughly coat edges of contact surfaces (curbs, manhole frames) with
emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent
staining of adjacent surfaces.
3.05 PAVEMENT APPLICATION
A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in
conformance with Section 400 of the Standard Specifications.
PW/WBG/426399 ASPHALT PAVING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 32 12 16 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Tack Coat:
1. Prepare material, as specified in Section 401 of the Standard
Specifications, prior to application.
2. Apply uniformly to clean, dry surfaces avoiding overlapping of
applications.
3. Do not apply more tack coat than necessary for the day’s paving
operation.
4. Touch up missed or lightly coated surfaces and remove excess material.
5. Application Rate: Minimum 0.25 liter to maximum 0.70 liter of asphalt
(residual if diluted emulsified asphalt) per square meter (0.05 to
0.15 gallon per square yard) of surface area.
C. Pavement Mix:
1. Prior to Paving:
a. Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter.
b. Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement
mix.
c. Blot excess prime material with sand.
2. Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in one single lift.
3. Compacted Lift Thickness:
a. Minimum: Twice maximum aggregate size, but in no case less
than 25 millimeters (1 inch).
b. Maximum: 100 millimeters (4 inches).
4. Total Compacted Thickness: 3 inches.
5. Apply such that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical.
6. Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not
scatter material over finished surface.
7. Joints:
a. Offset edge of each layer a minimum of 150 millimeters
(6 inches) so joints are not directly over those in underlying layer.
b. Offset longitudinal joints in roadway pavements so longitudinal
joints in wearing layer coincide with pavement centerlines and
lane divider lines.
c. Form transverse joints by cutting back on previous day’s run to
expose full vertical depth of layer.
8. Succeeding Lifts: Apply tack coat to pavement surface between each
lift.
9. After placement of pavement, seal meet line by painting a minimum of
150 millimeters (6 inches) on each side of joint with cut-back or
emulsified asphalt. Cover immediately with sand.
ASPHALT PAVING PW/WBG/426399
32 12 16 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Compaction: Roll until roller marks are eliminated and minimum density of
95 percent of mix design unit weight at optimum asphalt content is obtained.
E. Tolerances:
1. General: Conduct measurements for conformity with crown and grade
immediately after initial compression. Correct variations immediately
by removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
2. Completed Surface or Wearing Layer Smoothness:
a. Uniform texture, smooth, and uniform to crown and grade.
b. Maximum Deviation: 3 millimeters (1/8 inch) from lower edge of
a 3.6-meter (12-foot) straightedge, measured continuously parallel
and at right angle to centerline.
c. If surface of completed pavement deviates by more than twice
specified tolerances, remove and replace wearing surface.
3. Transverse Slope Maximum Deviation: 6 millimeters (1/4 inch) in
3.6 meters (12 feet) from rate of slope shown.
4. Finished Grade:
a. Perform field differential level survey on maximum 15-meter
(50-foot) meter grid and along grade breaks.
b. Maximum Deviation: 6 millimeters (0.02 foot) from grade shown.
F. Seal Coat:
1. General: Apply seal coat of paving grade or emulsified asphalt to
finished surface at longitudinal and transverse joints, joints at abutting
pavements, areas where asphalt concrete was placed by hand, patched
surfaces, and other areas as directed by Engineer.
2. Preparation:
a. Surfaces that are to be sealed shall be maintained free of holes,
dry, and clean of dust and loose material.
b. Seal in dry weather and when temperature is above 2 degrees C
(35 degrees F).
3. Application:
a. Fill cracks over 1.5 millimeters (1/16 inch) in width with asphalt-
sand slurry or approved crack sealer prior to sealing.
b. When sealing patched surfaces and joints with existing
pavements, extend minimum 150 millimeters (6 inches) beyond
edges of patches.
PW/WBG/426399 ASPHALT PAVING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 32 12 16 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.06 PATCHING
A. Preparation:
1. Remove damaged, broken, or unsound asphalt concrete adjacent to
patches. Trim to straight lines exposing smooth, sound, vertical edges.
2. Prepare patch subgrade as specified in Section 301 of the Standard
Specifications.
B. Application:
1. Patch Thickness: 75 millimeters (3 inches) or thickness of adjacent
asphalt concrete, whichever is greater.
2. Place asphalt concrete mix across full width of patch in layers of equal
thickness.
3. Spread and grade asphalt concrete with hand tools or mechanical
spreader, depending on size of area to be patched.
C. Compaction:
1. Roll patches with power rollers capable of providing compression of
350 to 525 Newtons per linear centimeter (200 to 300 pounds per linear
inch). Use hand tampers where rolling is impractical.
2. Begin rolling top course at edges of patches, lapping adjacent asphalt
surface at least 1/2 the roller width. Progress toward center of patch
overlapping each preceding track by at least 1/2 width of roller.
3. Make sufficient passes over entire area to remove roller marks and to
produce desired finished surface.
D. Tolerances:
1. Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown
of adjacent surface.
2. Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus
6 millimeters (1/4 inch) or minus 0 millimeter when straightedge is laid
across patched area between edges of new pavement and surface of old
surfacing.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Provide services of approved certified independent testing laboratory
to conduct tests.
ASPHALT PAVING PW/WBG/426399
32 12 16 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Field Density Tests:
1. Perform tests from cores or sawed samples in accordance with
AASHTO T230 and AASHTO T166.
2. Measure with properly operating and calibrated nuclear density gauge in
accordance with ASTM D2950.
3. Maximum Density: In accordance with ASTM D2041, using sample of
mix taken prior to compaction from same location as density test
sample.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 ASPHALT PAVING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 32 12 16 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 05 15
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B31.1, Power
Piping.
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process.
c. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
4. International Building Code (IBC).
5. International Code Council (ICC):
6. International Mechanical Code (IMC).
7. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS):
a. SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design and
Manufacture.
b. SP 127, Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic
Design, Selection, and Application.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than 1 foot above liquid surface,
below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other
damp locations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Catalog information and drawings of piping support system, locating
each support, sway brace, seismic brace, hanger, guide, component, and
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
anchor for piping. Identify support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by
catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number.
2. Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor.
3. Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping
system layout or addition of flexible joints.
4. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
3. Maintenance information on piping support system.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Piping support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and
sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the state where the Work is to
be installed.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Design, size, and locate piping support systems throughout facility,
whether shown or not.
2. Piping Smaller than 12 Inches: Supports are shown only where specific
types and locations are required; additional pipe supports may be
required by Contractor.
3. Piping 12 Inches and Larger: Support systems have been designed for
piping shown.
4. Meet requirements of MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1 or as modified by
this section.
B. Pipe Support Systems:
1. Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by
weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of
fluid in pipes.
2. Seismic loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on
Structural General Drawings.
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/426399
40 05 15 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Wind loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on
Structural General Drawings.
4. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: In accordance
MSS SP 58 Table 3 and Table 4.
a. Ductile-iron Pipe 8 Inches and Under: Maximum span limited to
that for standard weight steel pipe for water service.
b. Ductile-iron Pipe 10 Inches and Larger: Maximum span limited to
20 feet.
5. Conduit Support: Include in design of framing support system.
C. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices,
including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to
withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each
particular support.
D. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum centers or as shown.
E. Existing Support Systems: Use existing supports systems to support new
piping only if Contractor can show they are adequate for additional load, or if
they are strengthened to support additional load.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct
material and to general configuration indicated.
B. Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard
catalog supports are not applicable.
C. Materials: In accordance with Table 1 and Table 2, attached as Supplements at
end of section.
2.02 WALL BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES
A. Welded Steel Wall Bracket: MSS SP 58, Type 33 (heavy-duty):
1. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000-pound rating.
2. B-Line; Figure B3067, 3,000-pound rating.
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 PIPE SUPPORT
A. Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with
baseplates drilled for anchors bolts.
1. In accordance with Detail 1 on Drawing Sheet ME-0005.
2. Sizes 20 inches though 60 inches, Piping Technology & Products, Inc.;
Fig. 2000.
2.04 PIPE CLAMPS
A. Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 8.
1. Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches.
2. B-Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
2.05 ELBOW AND FLANGE SUPPORTS
A. Elbow with Adjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2 inches through 18 inches, Anvil;
Figure 62C base.
B. Elbow with Nonadjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 42 inches,
Anvil; Figure 63A or Figure 63B base.
C. Flange Support with Adjustable Base: Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches,
Standon; Model S89.
2.06 INTERMEDIATE PIPE GUIDES
A. Type: Hold down pipe guide.
1. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3552, 1-1/2 inches through
30 inches.
B. Type: U-bolts with double nuts to provide nominal 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch
clearance around pipe; MSS SP 58, Type 24.
1. Anvil; Figure 137 and Figure 137S.
2. B-Line; Figure B3188 and Figure B3188NS.
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/426399
40 05 15 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.07 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Type: Spider.
B. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Anvil; Figure 255, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
2. B-Line; Figure B3281 through Figure B3287, sizes 1/2 inch through
24 inches.
2.08 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Type: Anchor chair with U-bolt strap.
B. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3147A or Figure B3147B.
2.09 PIPE HANGARS
A. Manufacturer: Grinnell, or approved equal.
B. See Detail 8 on Drawing Sheet ME-0005.
2.10 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Solid pipe bracing attachment to pipe clevis with clevis cross brace and angle
rod reinforcement.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Mason Industries.
2. B-Line.
3. Anvil.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchor Bolts:
1. Size and Material: Sized by Contractor for required loads, 1/2-inch
minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
2. Bolt Length (Extension Above Top of Nut):
a. Minimum Length: Flush with top of nut preferred. If not flush,
shall be no more than one thread recessed below top of nut.
b. Maximum Length: No more than a full nut depth above top of nut.
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Dielectric Barriers:
1. Plastic coated hangers, isolation cushion, or tape.
2. Manufacturer and Products:
a. B-Line; B1999 Vibra Cushion.
b. B-Line; Iso Pipe, Isolation Tape.
C. Insulation Shields:
1. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58, Type 40.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
b. B-Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
D. Welding Insulation Saddles:
1. Type: MSS SP 58, Type 39.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches.
b. B-Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
E. Plastic Pipe Support Channel:
1. Type: Continuous support for plastic pipe and to increase support
spacing.
2. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure Series B3106V, sizes
1/2 inch through 6 inches with Figure B3106 Vee bottom hanger.
F. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with
MSS SP 58.
G. Attachments:
1. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28,
Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange.
2. Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with
load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.
3. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.
a. Anvil; Figure 66.
b. B-Line; Figure B3083.
4. U-Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/426399
40 05 15 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Concrete Attachment Plates:
a. Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52.
b. B-Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless shown
otherwise.
2. Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut
down, start up or operations.
3. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by
equipment.
4. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently
of connected piping.
5. Support no pipe from pipe above it.
6. Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible
joints and couplings, and where shown.
7. Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or
walls.
8. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or
bridge crane runs.
9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal
and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup.
10. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction.
11. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads
and to direct and control thermal expansion.
12. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are
completed.
B. Standard Pipe Supports:
1. Horizontal Suspended Piping:
a. Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split-ring.
b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system.
2. Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls:
a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or to wall
mounted framing with anchors.
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and “J” hangers
acceptable for pipe smaller than 3-inch.
c. Pipe clamp that resists axial movement of pipe through support is
not acceptable. Use pipe rollers supported from wall bracket.
3. Horizontal Piping Supported from Floors:
a. Saddle Supports:
1) Pedestal Type, elbow and flange.
2) Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch grout beneath baseplate.
b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports:
1) Use for pipe smaller than 3-inch running along floors and in
trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated
using pedestal pipe supports.
2) Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on
minimum 1-1/2-inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts.
3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps.
c. Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor
and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be
accommodated using stanchion type.
4. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser
clamp on floor penetration.
C. Standard Attachments:
1. New Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or
concrete anchors as limited below:
a. Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4-inch rod
and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe).
b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect
a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete
anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.
2. Existing Concrete Ceilings: Channel type support with minimum of two
anchor points, concrete attachment plates or concrete anchors as limited
below:
a. Single point attachment to ceiling is allowed only for 3/4-inch rod
and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe).
b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations do not connect
a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete
anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.
3. Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments.
4. Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than
2-1/2 inches thick.
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/426399
40 05 15 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with concrete
anchors.
6. Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to
vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into beam bottom.
D. Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe
saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger when installed on top of steel or
concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated
point supports would be encountered.
E. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides:
1. Provide pipe alignment guides, or pipe supports that provide same
function, at expansion joints and loops.
2. Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 pipe and 14 pipe
diameters from each joint or loop.
3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not
carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide.
F. Accessories:
1. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated piping with oversize rollers and
supports.
2. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize
rollers and supports.
3. Dielectric Barrier:
a. Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and
copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports
and nonstainless steel ferrous metal piping.
b. Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized
clamps.
3.02 FIELD FINISHING
A. Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces hot-dip galvanized steel components as
specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.03 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this
specification:
1. Table 1: Nonchemical Areas.
END OF SECTION
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/426399
40 05 15 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Table 1
Nonchemical Areas
Exposure Conditions Support Material
Headworks Stainless steel or FRP
Notes:
1. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol).
2. Stainless steel to be Type 304.
3. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.
4. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these
surfaces.
PW/WBG/426399 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section
and any supplemental Data Sheets:
1. Air Force: A-A-58092, Tape Antiseize, Polytetrafluorethylene.
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
3. American Petroleum Institute (API): SPEC 5L, Specification for Line
Pipe.
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels.
b. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Qualification
Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers,
and Welding and Brazing Operators.
c. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
d. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
(Classes 25, 125, and 250).
e. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300.
f. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through
NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard.
g. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings.
h. B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
i. B16.15, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250.
j. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
k. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
l. B16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500.
m. B16.25, Butt Welding Ends.
n. B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes
150 and 300.
o. B31.1, Power Piping.
p. B31.3, Process Piping.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
q. B31.9, Building Services Piping.
r. B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
s. B36.19M, Stainless Steel Pipe.
5. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A,
Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
6. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C104/A21.4, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water.
b. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe
Systems.
c. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water.
d. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
e. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or
Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
f. C116/A21.16, Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron
Fittings for Water Supply Service.
g. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
h. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
i. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In.
Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm).
j. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
7. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. Brazing Handbook.
b. A5.8/A5.8M, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and
Braze Welding.
c. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.
8. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron
Castings.
b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
c. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
for Piping Applications.
d. A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
f. A135/A135M, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-
Welded Steel Pipe.
g. A139/A139M, Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-
Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over).
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
h. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.
i. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings,
for General-Purpose Piping.
j. A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy
and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and
Parts for High-Temperature Service.
k. A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and
Nuts.
l. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
m. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both.
n. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.
o. A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.
p. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.
q. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
r. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
s. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
t. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
u. A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
v. A320/A320M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service.
w. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts.
x. A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron
Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
y. A403/A403M, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings.
z. A409/A409M, Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter
Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service.
aa. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
bb. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
cc. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry.
dd. A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-
Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for
General Application.
ee. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-
Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service.
ff. A774/A774M, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought
Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service
at Low and Moderate Temperatures.
gg. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
hh. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
ii. B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,
Standard Sizes.
jj. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
kk. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
ll. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
mm. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
nn. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar and Shapes.
oo. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030,
UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS
N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS
N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS
N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS
R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts
for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.
pp. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020, N08024,
and N08026 Alloy Pipe.
qq. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Pipe.
rr. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced
Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment.
ss. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension.
tt. D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property Adhesion to
Flexible Substrate.
uu. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics
to Chemical Reagents.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
vv. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable.
ww. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
xx. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
yy. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
zz. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications.
aaa. D2310, Standard Classification for Machine-Made “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
bbb. D2464, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
ccc. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
ddd. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
eee. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
fff. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products.
ggg. D2996, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
hhh. D3222, Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene
Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials.
iii. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and
Fittings Materials.
jjj. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials.
kkk. D4894, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials.
lll. D4895, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Resin Produced from Dispersion.
mmm. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
nnn. F437, Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
ooo. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
ppp. F441/F441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
qqq. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
rrr. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs.
sss. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent
Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
9. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc. (MSS): SP-43, Wrought Stainless Steel Butt-Welding
Fittings.
10. NSF International (NSF): 61 Drinking Water System Components—
Health Effects.
11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LI 1, Industrial
Laminating Thermosetting Products.
12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Submerged or Wetted:
1. Zone below elevation of:
a. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs.
b. Liquid surface or within 1 foot above top of liquid surface.
c. Top face of clarifier walkways.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust
restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with
the following:
1. Process Piping: ASME B31.3, normal fluid service unless otherwise
specified.
2. Buried Piping: H20-S16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor,
AASHTO HB-17, as applicable.
3. Thrust Restraints:
a. Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule.
b. Allowable Soil Pressure: 2,000 pounds per square foot.
c. Low Pressure Pipelines:
1) When bearing surface of the fitting against soil provides an
area equal to or greater than area required for thrust
restraint, concrete thrust blocks will not be required.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2) Determine bearing area for fittings without thrust blocks by
projected area of 70 percent of internal diameter multiplied
by chord length for fitting centerline curve.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Fabricated Piping:
a. Detailed pipe fabrication or spool drawings showing special
fittings and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent
information.
b. Layout drawing showing location of each pipe section and each
special length; number or otherwise designate laying sequence on
each piece.
2. Pipe Wall Thickness: Identify wall thickness and rational method or
standard applied to determine wall thickness for each size of each
different service including exposed, submerged, buried, and concrete-
encased installations for Contractor-designed piping.
3. Hydraulic Thrust Restraint for Restrained Joints: Details including
materials, sizes, assembly ratings, and pipe attachment methods.
4. Dissimilar Buried Pipe Joints: Joint types and assembly drawings.
5. Pipe Corrosion Protection: Product data.
6. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance:
a. Pipe and fittings.
b. Welding electrodes and filler materials.
c. Factory applied resins and coatings.
2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
3. Qualifications:
a. Weld Inspection and Testing Agency: Certification and
qualifications.
b. Welding Inspector: Certification and qualifications.
c. Welders:
1) List of qualified welders and welding operators.
2) Current test records for qualified welder(s) and weld type(s)
for factory and field welding.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Weld Procedures: Records in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX for weld type(s) and base metal(s).
5. Nondestructive inspection and testing procedures.
6. Test logs.
7. Pipe coating applicator certification.
8. Laboratory Testing Equipment: Certified calibrations, manufacturer’s
product data, and test procedures.
9. Certified welding inspection and test results.
10. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Independent Inspection and Testing Agency:
a. Ten years’ experience in field of welding and welded pipe and
fittings’ testing required for this Project.
b. Calibrated instruments and equipment, and documented standard
procedures for performing specified testing.
c. Certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A for testing
procedures required for this Project.
d. Testing Personnel: Qualified for nondestructive test methods to be
performed.
e. Inspection Services: Qualified welding inspector.
2. Welding Inspector: AWS certified, AWS QC1 qualified, with prior
inspection experience of welds specified.
3. Welder and Welding Operator Qualifications:
a. Qualified by accepted inspection and testing agency before
starting Work in accordance with Section IX, Article III of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
b. Qualified to perform groove welds in Positions 2G and 5G for
each welding process and pipe material specified.
c. Qualification tests may be waived by Engineer based on evidence
of prior qualification.
B. Quality Control: Tests to be provided by Owner and performed by
independent inspection and testing agency for welding operations.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with and the following:
1. Flanges: Securely attach metal, hardboard, or wood protectors over
entire gasket surface.
2. Threaded or Socket Welding Ends: Fit with metal, wood, or plastic
plugs or caps.
3. Linings and Coatings: Prevent excessive drying.
4. Cold Weather Storage: Locate products to prevent coating from freezing
to ground.
5. Handling: Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s) and Piping Schedule located at the end
of this section as Supplement.
B. Diameters Shown:
1. Standardized Products: Nominal size.
2. Fabricated Steel Piping (Except Cement-Lined): Outside diameter,
ASME B36.10M.
3. Cement-Lined Steel Pipe: Lining inside diameter.
2.02 JOINTS
A. Flanged Joints:
1. Flat-faced, carbon steel, or alloy flanges when mating with flat-faced
cast or ductile iron flanges.
2. Higher pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when
equipment flange is of higher pressure rating than required for piping.
B. Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling
1. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 306 bands.
2. Manufacturer’s:
a. Pipeline Products Corp.
b. Fernco Joint Sealer Co.
3. Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with
ASME B1.20.1.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.
D. Grooved End System:
1. Rigid type.
2. Use of flexible grooved joints will only be allowed where shown on
Drawings or with prior approval by Engineer.
3. Flanges: When required, furnish with grooved type flange adapters of
same manufacturer as grooved end couplings.
E. Mechanical Joint Anchor Gland Follower:
1. Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with breakoff tightening bolts.
Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum. Rated operating deflection not less
than 2-1/2 degrees. UL and FMG approved.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. EBAA Iron Inc.; Megalug.
b. Romac Industries, Inc.; RomaGrip.
c. Ford Meter Box Co.; Series 1400.
F. Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling:
1. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 305 bands.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Pipeline Products Corp.
b. Fernco Joint Sealer Co.
2.03 GASKET LUBRICANT
A. Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or “or-
equal” will be allowed.
2.04 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Coatings: See Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for details of coating
requirements.
B. Polyethylene Encasement (Bagging):
1. Encasement Tube: Black polyethylene encasement tube, 8 mils
minimum thickness, conforming to AWWA C105/A21.5, Class C, free
of gels, streaks, pinholes, foreign matter, undispersed raw materials, and
visible defects such as tears, blisters, and thinning at folds.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Securing Tape: Thermoplastic tape, 8 mils minimum thickness, 1 inch
wide, pressure sensitive adhesive face capable of bonding to metal,
bituminous coating, and polyethylene encasement tube.
2.05 THRUST TIES
A. Steel Pipe: Joint harness as specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping
Specialties.
B. Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Unless restraint is otherwise specified
or shown, conform to NFPA 24. Tie-rod attachments relying on clamp friction
with pipe barrel to restrain thrust are unacceptable.
2.06 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Pipeline 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.
B. Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Pipe Data Sheet(s)
and Piping Schedule.
B. Galvanizing:
1. Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of ASTM A153/A153M.
2. Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe
service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new
equipment.
B. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall
pipes, sleeves, and other openings.
C. Welding Electrodes: Verify proper grade and type, free of moisture and
dampness, and coating is undamaged.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.02 PREPARATION
A. See Piping Schedule and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for
additional requirements.
B. Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings.
C. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and
remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.
D. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining
materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.03 WELDING
A. Perform in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code and ASME B31.3 for Pressure Piping, as may be specified on Piping
Data Sheets, and if recommended by piping or fitting manufacturer.
B. Weld Identification: Mark each weld with symbol identifying welder.
C. Pipe End Preparation:
1. Machine Shaping: Preferred.
2. Oxygen or Arc Cutting: Smooth to touch, true, and slag removal by
chipping or grinding.
3. Beveled Ends for Butt Welding: ASME B16.25.
D. Surfaces:
1. Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material
detrimental to welding.
2. Thoroughly clean each layer of deposited weld metal, including final
pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a
power-driven wire brush.
E. Alignment and Spacing:
1. Align ends to be joined within existing commercial tolerances on
diameters, wall thicknesses, and out-of-roundness.
2. Root Opening of Joint: As stated in qualified welding procedure.
3. Minimum Spacing of Circumferential Butt Welds: Minimum four times
pipe wall thickness or 1 inch, whichever is greater.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Climatic Conditions: Do not perform welding if there is impingement of any
rain, snow, sleet, or high wind on the weld area, or if the ambient temperature
is below 32 degrees F.
G. Tack Welds: Performed by qualified welder using same procedure as for
completed weld, made with electrode similar or equivalent to electrode to be
used for first weld pass, and not defective. Remove those not meeting
requirements prior to commencing welding procedures.
H. Surface Defects: Chip or grind out those affecting soundness of weld.
I. Weld Passes: As required in welding procedure.
J. Weld Quality: Free of cracks, incomplete penetration, weld undercutting,
excessive weld reinforcement, porosity slag inclusions, and other defects in
excess of limits shown in applicable piping code.
3.04 INSTALLATION—GENERAL
A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless
otherwise shown or specified.
B. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation.
C. Flanged Joints:
1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline.
2. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting
equipment flanges or as shown.
3. Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt
tightness.
4. Plastic Flanges: Install annular ring filler gasket at joints of raised-face
flange.
5. Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: Include stainless steel washer plates as
required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment.
6. Raised-Face Flanges: Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced
ductile or cast iron flange.
7. Verify compatibility of mating flange to adapter flange gasket prior to
selecting grooved adapter flanging.
8. Flange fillers are to be avoided, but if necessary, may be used to make
up for small angles up to 6 degrees and for filling gaps up to 2 inches
between flanges. Stacked flange fillers shall not be used.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 13
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9. Threaded flanged joints shall be shop fabricated and delivered to Site
with flanges in-place and properly faced.
10. Manufacturer: Same as pipe manufacturer.
D. Pipe Connections at Concrete Structures: As specified in Article Piping
Flexibility Provisions in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.
E. Ductile Iron Piping:
1. Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or
abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut.
2. Dressing Cut Ends:
a. General: As required for the type of joint to be made.
b. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections.
c. Push-On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
d. Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved
End Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter
manufacturer.
3.05 INSTALLATION—EXPOSED PIPING
A. Piping Runs:
1. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless
shown otherwise.
2. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall
provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.
B. Supports: As specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.
C. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve
building space and not interfere with use of space and other work.
D. Unions or Flanges: Provide at each piping connection to equipment or
instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation
and removal.
E. Threaded and Coupled Joints:
1. Conform to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when
screwed home in fittings.
3. Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading.
4. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 14 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on
Piping Data Sheets.
F. Grooved-End Joints:
1. Piping shall be grooved in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest
published instructions and shall be accurately cut with tools conforming
to coupling manufacturer’s standards and to AWWA C606.
2. Install grooved joint couplings and gaskets in accordance with
manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions.
G. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by
equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; install
to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
H. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:
1. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from
walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system
including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or
hanger/support systems.
2. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping:
Minimum 3 feet, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of
piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms,
insulation, or hanger/support systems.
3. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of
completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or
mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
4. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders,
stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.
5. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less
than the top of the opening.
6. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer
vaults or electrical equipment rooms.
7. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below
electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals,
boxes, or other similar electrical work.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 15
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.06 INSTALLATION—BURIED PIPE
A. Joints:
1. Dissimilar Buried Pipes: Provide concrete closure collar for gravity
piping or as shown.
2. Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete,
unless specifically shown.
B. Placement:
1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed.
2. Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition.
3. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or
damage to pipe.
4. Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe.
5. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual
inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection.
6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.
7. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement
operations are not in progress and at close of day’s work.
8. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying.
9. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical
closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will
not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide:
a. Shorter pipe lengths.
b. Special mitered joints.
c. Standard or special fabricated bends.
10. After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade.
11. Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before
next joint is installed.
12. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
C. Tolerances:
1. Deflection From Horizontal Line: Maximum 2 inches.
2. Deflection From Vertical Grade: Maximum 1/4 inch.
3. Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of manufacturer’s
recommendation.
4. Horizontal position of pipe centerline on alignment around curves
maximum variation of 1.75 feet from position shown.
5. Pipe Cover: Minimum 3 feet, unless otherwise shown.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 16 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.07 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as
shown in Piping Schedule.
2. Buried: Wrap with polyethylene bagging.
3. Submerged or Embedded: Coat with coal-tar epoxy as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use
NSF 61 approved epoxy.
B. Carbon Steel Pipe:
1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
2. Buried:
a. Pipe: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b. Joints: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or heat shrink wrap as
specified herein.
3. Submerged or Embedded: Shop coat with coal-tar epoxy as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use
NSF 61 approved epoxy.
C. PVC Pipe Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
D. Piping Accessories:
1. Exposed:
a. Field paint black and galvanized steel, brass, copper, and bronze
piping components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, as applicable to base metal material.
b. Accessories include, but are not limited to, pipe hangers, supports,
expansion joints, pipe guides, flexible couplings, vent and drain
valves, and fasteners.
2. Buried:
a. Bolts, Nuts, and Similar Items: Coat with bituminous paint.
E. Tape Coating System: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
F. Heat Shrink Wrap: Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to
surfaces that are cleaned, prepared, and primed.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 17
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
G. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:
1. Applications:
a. Dissimilar metal piping connections.
b. Submerged to unsubmerged metallic piping connections.
c. Connections to existing metallic pipe.
d. Where required for electrically insulated connection.
2. Pipe Installation:
a. Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to nonimmersed
piping shall be installed above maximum water surface elevation.
b. Submerged carbon steel, ductile iron, or galvanized piping in
reinforced concrete shall be isolated from the concrete
reinforcement steel.
c. Align and install insulating joints as shown on the Drawings and
according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Bolt lubricants
that contain graphite or other metallic or electrically conductive
components that can interfere with the insulating capabilities of
the completed flange shall not be used.
3.08 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Location:
1. Buried Piping: Where shown and where required to restrain force
developed at pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where
unbalanced forces exist because of hydrostatic testing and normal
operating pressure.
2. Exposed Piping: At all joints in piping.
B. Thrust Ties:
1. Steel Pipe: Attach with lugs fabricated in accordance with details shown
on Drawings.
2. Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against a
grooved joint coupling or flange.
3. Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install
manufacturer’s anchor studs through the coupling sleeve or use
dismantling joints.
C. Mechanical Joint Valve Restraint in Proprietary Restrained Joint Piping:
Install pipe joint manufacturer’s adapter gland follower and pipe end retainer,
or mechanical joint anchor gland follower.
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 18 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.09 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Application and Installation: As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping
Specialties.
3.10 FIELD FINISHING
A. Notify Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of any surface preparation or
coating application work.
B. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pressure Leakage Testing: As specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping
Leakage Testing.
B. Minimum Duties of Welding Inspector:
1. Job material verification and storage.
2. Qualification of welders.
3. Certify conformance with approved welding procedures.
4. Maintenance of records and preparation of reports in a timely manner.
5. Notification to Engineer of unsatisfactory weld performance within
24 hours of weld test failure.
C. Required Weld Examinations:
1. Perform examinations in accordance with Piping Code, ASME B31.3.
2. Perform examinations for every pipe thickness and for each welding
procedure, progressively, for all piping covered by this section.
3. Examine at least one of each type and position of weld made by each
welder or welding operator.
4. For each weld found to be defective under the acceptance standards or
limitations on imperfections contained in the applicable Piping Code,
examine two additional welds made by the same welder that produced
the defective weld. Such additional examinations are in addition to the
minimum required above. Examine, progressively, two additional welds
for each tracer examination found to be unsatisfactory.
3.12 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site to assist with unloading of the
double wall containment piping system, system tests, containment pipe joint
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 - 19
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
closure, installation and testing of leak detection system, and training of Owner’s
personnel in operation and maintenance of leak detection system. Manufacturer’s
representative shall complete a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
Inspection and examination practices shall be according to ASME B31.3 for
normal fluid service.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines
(except as stated below) with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until
foreign matter is removed.
B. Immediately after cleaning service piping, dry to minus 40 degrees F dew point
with dry compressed instrument air or compressed commercial grade nitrogen.
C. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, clean in-place from
inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or blow line at lower velocity.
D. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-
place until cleaning is complete.
E. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing
spools and valves from piping.
3.14 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this
Specification:
1. Piping Schedule.
2. Data Sheets.
Number Title
40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
40 27 00.04 Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings
40 27 00.07 Galvanized Steel Pipe and Malleable Iron Fittings
40 27 00.13 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe Tubing and Fittings
END OF SECTION
PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/426399
40 27 00 - 20 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND
SERVICE
AHP Air-High Pressure
RS Raw Sewage
SSM Scum Pipeline
SP Septage Pipeline
W3 Plant Water
EXPOSURE
ALL All
BUR Buried
EXP Exposed
MATERIAL
CLDI Cement-Lined Ductile Iron
COP Copper
GLDI Glass-Lined Ductile Iron
GSP Galvanized Steel Pipe
WS Welded Steel
JOINT TYPE
FL Flanged
S Screwed
W Welded (including solvent and fusion)
PRESSURE TEST
G Gravity Service: Test pressure is not shown on gravity
services. Test to highest liquid level that pipe can be
subject to.
H Hydrostatic
P Pneumatic
NA Not Applicable
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Piping Schedule
Test Pressure and Type
(psig-x),
Size(s) Piping Specification Joint Lining/ x = Type indicated in Pipe Color
Service (In.)1 Exposure Material Section Type Coating2 Legend and Label Remarks
AHP All All COP 40 27 00.13 FL 4 175, P OSHA
Yellow
RS 24, 30 EXP WS 40 27 00.04 W 2,4 50, H Buff
SP 18 EXP CLDI 40 27 00.01 FL 4 G Buff
SP 18 BUR CLDI 40 27 00.01 FL Polywrap G N/A
SSM All All GLDI 40 27 00.01 F 4 G Buff
W3 All EXP GS 40 27 00.07 S N/A 50, H N/A
1“>” Greater Than
“=” Greater Than or Equal To
“All” All Sizes
2Coating system number as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as specified in Article Pipe Corrosion Protection.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT 02 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item Description
General Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing
facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of the specified diameters,
dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years. Testing
of pipe required by AWWA A21.51 shall be conducted in testing and
laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under USA laws
and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture and shipped
without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside another).
Pipe Buried Liquid Service Using Mechanical and Proprietary Restrained
Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C151/A21.51, pressure class
conforming to Table 5 and Table 7 for Type 4 trench, 250 psi minimum
working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.
Exposed Pipe Using Grooved End and Flange Joints:
AWWA C115/A21.15, thickness Class 53 minimum, 250 psi minimum
working pressure.
Lining Cement-mortar: AWWA C104/A21.4.
Glass: Completely fused above 1,400 degrees F, 6 mils to 10 mils thick,
defects which expose base metal not greater than 0.01 percent of total
lined surface, hardness greater than 5 on the Mohs scale, lining bonded
sufficiently to withstand a metal strain of 0.001 inch/inch without
damage to the glass lining, finished lined pipe not to deviate more than
0.0125 inch per foot of length from a centerline perpendicular to the
flange face or square end of the pipe. Fast Fabricators, Inc., Ferrock
MEH 32; Ceramic Coating Co., SL 31; VITCO Corp., SG 14.
Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe.
Mechanical: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and
AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure.
Follower glands shall be ductile iron.
PW/WBG/426399 CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item Description
Proprietary Restrained: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11,
and AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working
pressure. Restraint shall be achieved with removable metal elements
fitted between a welded bar on the pipe barrel and the inside of the joint
bell. Assembled joints shall be rated for deflection in operation at rated
pressure. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1-1/2 degrees for 36-inch
and smaller pipe. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1/2 degree for
42-inch and larger pipe. Clow Corp., American Cast Iron Pipe Co., U.S.
Pipe. Restrained joints relying on metal teeth molded into the gasket to
prevent joint separation under pressure will not be accepted.
Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125
flat face or ASME B16.1, Class 250 raised face. Gray cast iron will not
be allowed.
Joints Mechanical: 250 psi minimum working pressure.
Flange: Class 125 flat face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to
AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Couplings Grooved End: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per
ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536; Victaulic.
Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 250 psi minimum working pressure,
malleable iron per ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536;
Victaulic.
Bolting Mechanical, Proprietary Restrained, and Grooved End Joints:
Manufacturer’s standard.
Class 125 Flat-Faced Flange: ASTM A307, Grade A carbon steel hex
head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel hex head nuts.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted
Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M
hex head bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Class 250 Raised-Face Flange: ASTM A307, Grade B carbon steel hex
head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel heavy hex head nuts.
CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED PW/WBG/426399
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item Description
Gaskets Mechanical and Proprietary Restrained Joints; Water and Sewage
Service: Rubber conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11.
Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8-inch thick, red rubber (SBR),
hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to 180 degrees F, conforming to
ASME B16.21, AWWA C207, and ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2.
Full face for Class 125 flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for Class 250
raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering entire inside
face with gasket cemented to blind flange.
Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test
pressure.
Joint Lubricant Manufacturer’s standard.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 CEMENT-MORTAR AND GLASS-LINED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 3
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.04
WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item Description
Pipe Carbon steel ASTM A283/A283M Rev A Grade C or
ASTM A285/A285M Grade C, sheet, fabricated in accordance with
AWWA C200, straight seam, thickness designed for 66 percent of
minimum yield stress at hydrostatic test pressure, minimum thickness
1/4-inch, sizes are to be nominal inside diameters conforming to
ASME B36.10M.
Joints Butt-welded or flanged, for pipe diameters greater than 24-inch.
But-welled, flanged, grooved, or shouldered end for piping 24 inches
and less diameter: AWWA C606, Type B, C or D. Victaulic coupling
for grooved end piping. Thicken pipe walls near joints to 3/8-inch
minimum.
Fittings Fabricated: Carbon steel fabricated from pipe in accordance with
AWWA C208; elbows to have a 22.5-degree maximum miter section
angle, minimum of three sections; wyes, tees, crosses, and outlets to
be reinforced in accordance with AWWA M-11.
Forged: Butt-welding fittings, ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB
meeting the requirements of ANSI B16.9. Fitting wall thickness to
match adjoining pipe. Elbows to be long radius unless shown
otherwise.
Flanges AWWA C207, Class D (150 psi), Class E (250 psi), Class F (275 psi)
hub or ring type.
Bolting Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade A hex head bolts and ASTM A563
Grade A hex head nuts.
Gaskets Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8 inch thick, red rubber (SBR),
hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to 200 degrees F, conforming to
ASME B16.21, AWWA C207, and ASTM D1330, Grade 1 and
Grade 2.
Gasket thickness for AWWA C207, Class E and Class F flanges shall
be 1/16 inch.
Lining Cement-Mortar per AWWA C205, where required in the Piping
Schedule.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 WELDED STEEL PIPE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.04 DATA SHEET - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item Size Description
Pipe Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A106, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53, Grade B seamless or
ERW.
2" & smaller Schedule 80.
2-1/2" thru 6" Schedule 40.
Joints 2" & smaller Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment, or
grooved end meeting requirements of
AWWA C606.
2-1/2" & larger Flanged at valves and equipment, or grooved end
meeting requirements of AWWA C606.
Fittings Threaded: 150- or 300-pound malleable iron,
ASTM A197 or ASTM A47, dimensions in
accordance with ASME B16.3.
Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47 or
ductile iron ASTM A536, 250 psi working
pressure, grooved ends to accept couplings
without field preparation. Victaulic; Anvil
International, Inc., Gruvlok.
Branch 2" & smaller Tee or reducing tee in conformance with Fittings
Connections above, galvanized 2,000-pound WOG threadolet
or welding boss; galvanize after welding.
2-1/2" & larger Branch Same Size as Run: Grooved end tee in
accordance with Fittings above. Branch One or
More Sizes Smaller Than Run: grooved end
reducing tee in accordance with Fittings above.
Flanges Galvanized forged carbon steel,
ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150
or Class 300, threaded, 1/16-inch raised face.
Grooved end adapter flange, malleable iron
ASTM A47 or ductile iron ASTM A536.
Victaulic; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok.
PW/WBG/426399 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.07 DATA SHEET - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item Size Description
Unions Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197 or
ASTM A47, 300-pound WOG, brass to iron seat,
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.3.
Couplings Grooved End: Rigid joint malleable iron,
ASTM A47 or ductile iron, ASTM A536,
250 psi working pressure. Victaulic; Anvil
International, Inc., Gruvlok.
Plugs Forged carbon steel, ASTM A181/A181M,
Grade II, round head, threaded, galvanized.
Bolting Grooved End Couplings: Carbon steel,
ASTM A183 bolts and nuts, 110,000 psi
minimum tensile strength.
Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex
head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head
nuts.
Gaskets All flanges Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8 inch
thick, red rubber (SBR), hardness 80 (Shore A),
rated to 200 degrees F, conforming to
ASME B16.21, AWWA C207, and
ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering entire
inside face with gasket cemented to blind flange.
Grooved end EPDM or chlorinated butyl per ASTM D2000
couplings for water, and air to 230 degrees F, dimensions
conforming to AWWA C606.
Thread 2" & smaller Teflon tape or joint compound that is insoluble
Lubricant in water.
Coating All Exposed: Coating system No. 4 as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as
specified in Article Pipe Corrosion Protection.
Pipe Color All Exposed: Medium Blue.
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE PW/WBG/426399
AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 27 00.07 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item Size Description
Pressure Test All Gravity Service: Test pressure is not shown on
gravity services. Test to highest liquid level that
pipe can be subject to.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.07 DATA SHEET - 3
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 00.13
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Item Description
Seamless, conforming to ASTM B88 as follows:
Tubing
Compressed air service ............. Type L, hard drawn
Fittings ASTM B75 commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint,
dimensions conforming to ASME B16.22.
Flanges Class 150, ASTM B75 commercially pure wrought copper, socket
joint, ASME B16.24 standard.
Bolting ASTM A307, carbon steel, Grade A hex head bolts, ASTM A563
Grade A hex head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel
washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of
bolt minimum yield stress.
Gaskets 1/16-inch-thick nonasbestos compression type, full face, Cranite,
John Manville.
Solder
Wire solder (95 percent tin), conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy
Grade Sn95. Do not use cored solder.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY
OCTOBER 7, 2011 PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 27 00.13 DATA SHEET - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 01
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,
125, and 250).
b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through
NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
b. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
c. C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines.
d. C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines.
e. C219, Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe.
f. Manual M11, Steel Pipe—A Guide for Design and Installation.
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.
b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
5. NSF International (NSF): NSF 61, Drinking Water System
Components—Health Effects.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer’s data on materials, construction, end
connections, ratings, overall lengths, and live lengths (as applicable).
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 01 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide required piping specialty items, whether shown or not shown on
Drawings, as required by applicable codes and standard industry practice.
B. Rubber ring joints, mechanical joints, flexible couplings, and proprietary
restrained ductile iron pipe joints are considered flexible joints; welded,
screwed, and flanged pipe joints are not considered flexible.
2.02 CONNECTORS
A. Teflon Bellows Connector:
1. Type: Two convolutions, unless otherwise shown, with metal
reinforcing bands.
2. Flanges: Ductile iron, drilled 150 psi ASME B16.5 standard.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 140 psi, minimum, at 120 degrees F.
4. Thrust Restraint: Limit bolts to restrain force developed by specified
test pressure.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Garlock; Style 214.
b. Resistoflex; No. R6904.
c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 112.
d. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 442.
B. Elastomer Bellows Connector:
1. Type: Fabricated spool, with single filled arch.
2. Materials: Nitrile tube and wrap-applied neoprene cover.
3. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,
with full elastomer face and steel retaining rings.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 140 psig, minimum, at 180 degrees F for
sizes 12 inches and smaller.
5. Thrust Restraint: Control rods to limit travel of elongation and
compression.
6. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-1462.
b. Garlock; Style 204.
c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 1501.
d. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 220.
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/426399
40 27 01 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Closure Collar Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
2.03 COUPLINGS
A. General:
1. Couplings shall be rated for working pressure not less than indicated in
Piping Schedule for the service and not less than 150 psi.
2. Couplings shall be lined and coated with fusion-bonded epoxy in
accordance with AWWA C213.
3. Unless thrust restraint is provided by other means, couplings shall be
harnessed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M11,
and restrained with retainer bar or ring welded to pipe end, or as shown
on Drawings.
4. Sleeve type couplings shall conform to AWWA C219 and shall be
hydraulically expanded beyond minimum yield for accurate sizing and
proofing of tensile strength.
B. Flexible Sleeve Type Coupling:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Steel Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 38.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 411.
b. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 253.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 411.
C. Bolted Split Sleeve Type Coupling: Victaulic Co., Depend-O-Lok couplings.
D. Transition Coupling for Steel Pipe:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 162.
b. Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 413.
E. Flanged Coupling Adapter:
1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Steel Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 913.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 01 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 912.
2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Elastomer Bellows:
1. Type: Reinforced molded wide arch.
2. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,
with split galvanized steel retaining rings.
3. Washers: Over retaining rings to help provide leak-proof joint under test
pressure.
4. Thrust Protection: Control rods to protect the bellows from
overextension.
5. Bellows Arch Lining: Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl.
6. Rated Temperature: 250 degrees F.
7. Rated Deflection and Pressure:
a. Lateral Deflection: 3/4 inch, minimum.
b. Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure.
c. Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as
follows:
Size Deflection Pressure
(inch) (inch) (psig)
2-1/2 to 12 1.06 150
14 1.65 130
16 to 30 1.65 90
8. Manufacturers and Products:
a. General Rubber Corp.; Style 1015 Maxijoint.
b. Mercer; Flexmore Style 450.
c. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711.
d. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Series 1500.
e. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 251.
2.05 SERVICE SADDLES
A. Double-Strap Iron:
1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure
without leakage or over stressing.
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/426399
40 27 01 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which
saddle is installed.
3. Taps: Iron pipe threads.
4. Materials:
a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Straps: Galvanized steel.
c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel.
d. Seal: Rubber.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Smith-Blair; Series 313 or 366.
b. Dresser; Style 91.
2.06 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeve:
1. Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch.
2. Seep Ring:
a. Center steel flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or
water-bearing walls, 3/16-inch minimum thickness.
b. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than
pipe sleeve outside diameter.
c. Continuously fillet weld on each side all around.
3. Factory Finish:
a. Galvanizing:
1) Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of
ASTM A153/A153M.
2) Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable.
b. Shop Lining and Coating: Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat
in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
B. Insulated and Encased Pipe Sleeve:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Pipe Shields, Inc.; Models WFB, WFB-CS
and -CW Series, as applicable.
C. Modular Mechanical Seal:
1. Type: Interconnected synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to
continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall sleeve opening.
2. Fabrication:
a. Assemble interconnected rubber links with ASTM A276,
Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts.
b. Pressure plates shall be reinforced nylon polymer.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 01 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Size: According to manufacturer’s instructions for size of pipes shown
to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening.
4. Manufacturer: Thunderline Corp., Link-Seal Division.
2.07 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Ductile Iron Wall Pipe:
1. Diameter and Ends: Same as connecting ductile iron pipe.
2. Thickness: Equal to or greater than remainder of pipe in line.
3. Fittings: In accordance with applicable Pipe Data Sheet.
4. Thrust Collars:
a. Rated for thrust load developed at 250 psi.
b. Safety Factor: 2, minimum.
c. Material and Construction: Ductile iron or cast iron, cast integral
with wall pipe wherever possible, or thrust rated, welded
attachment to wall pipe.
5. Manufacturers:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co.
B. Steel or Stainless Steel Wall Pipe:
1. Same material and thickness as connecting pipe, except 1/4-inch
minimum thickness.
2. Lining: Same as connecting pipe.
3. Thrust Collar:
a. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than
outside diameter of wall pipe.
b. Continuously fillet welded on each side all around.
C. Pipe Penetration Seals
1. Link Seal Modular Seal.
2. Or approved equal.
2.08 SPRAY NOZZLES
A. Type 8:
1. Spray Pattern: Narrow Angle, high impact.
2. Spray Angle: 35 degrees at 40 psi.
3. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Orifice Diameter: 11/64 inch.
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/426399
40 27 01 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Capacity: 9.5 gpm at 100 psi.
6. Size: 1/2-inch NPT.
7. Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co., Model Series FlatJet or equal.
8. Split Eyelet Connector:
a. Clamp sized appropriately to connect to carrier pipe.
b. Material shall be stainless steel.
c. Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co. or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide accessibility to piping specialties for control and maintenance.
3.02 PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVISIONS
A. General:
1. Thrust restraint shall be provided as specified in Section 40 27 00,
Process Piping—General.
2. Install flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, in accordance
with approved shop drawings.
B. Flexible Joints at Concrete Backfill or Encasement: Install within 18 inches or
one-half pipe diameter, whichever is less, from the termination of any
concrete backfill or concrete encasement.
C. Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures: Install 18 inches or less from face of
structures; joint may be flush with face.
3.03 PIPING TRANSITION
A. Applications:
1. Provide complete closure assembly where pipes meet other pipes or
structures.
2. Pressure Pipeline Closures: Plain end pieces with double flexible
couplings, unless otherwise shown.
3. Restrained Joint Pipe Closures: Install with thrust tie-rod assemblies as
shown.
4. Gravity Pipe Closures: As specified for pressure pipelines, or concrete
closures.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 01 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
5. Concrete Closures: Use to make connections between dissimilar pipe
where standard rubber gasketed joints or flexible couplings are
impractical, as approved.
6. Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable.
B. Installation:
1. Flexible Transition Couplings: Install in accordance with coupling
manufacturer’s instructions to connect dissimilar pipe and pipes with a
small difference in outside diameter.
2. Concrete Closures:
a. Locate away from structures so there are at least two flexible
joints between closure and pipe entering structure.
b. Clean pipe surface before placing closure collars.
c. Wet nonmetallic pipe thoroughly prior to pouring collars.
d. Prevent concrete from entering pipe.
e. Extend collar a minimum of 12 inches on each side of joint with
minimum thickness of 6 inches around outside diameter of pipe.
f. Make entire collar in one placement.
g. After concrete has reached initial set, cure by covering with well-
moistened earth.
3.04 PIPING EXPANSION
A. Piping Installation: Allow for thermal expansion due to differences between
installation and operating temperatures.
B. Expansion Joints:
1. Grooved Joint and Flanged Piping Systems: Elastomer bellows
expansion joint.
2. Nonmetallic Pipe: Teflon bellows expansion joint.
3. Screwed and Soldered Piping Systems: Copper or galvanized and black
steel pipe expansion compensator, as applicable.
4. Air and Water Service above 120 Degrees F: Metal bellows expansion
joint.
5. Pipe Run Offset: Flexible metal hose.
C. Anchors: Install as specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems, to
withstand expansion joint thrust loads and to direct and control thermal
expansion.
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/426399
40 27 01 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 SERVICE SADDLES
A. Ferrous Metal Piping (except stainless steel): Double-strap iron.
B. Plastic Piping: Nylon-coated iron.
3.06 COUPLINGS
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Before coupling, clean pipe holdback area of oil, scale, rust, and dirt.
3. Do not remove pipe coating. If damaged, repair before joint is made.
4. Application:
a. Metallic Piping Systems: Flexible couplings, transition couplings,
and flanged coupling adapters.
b. Concrete Encased Couplings: Flexible coupling.
3.07 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. Install to prevent piping from being supported by equipment, for vibration
isolation, and where shown.
B. Product Applications Unless Shown Otherwise:
1. Nonmetallic Piping: Teflon bellows connector.
2. Copper Piping: Flexible metal hose connector.
3. Compressor and Blower Discharge: Metal bellows connector.
4. All Other Piping: Elastomer bellows connector.
C. Limit Bolts and Control Rods: Tighten snug prior to applying pressure to
system.
3.08 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Application:
1. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.
2. Above Grade in Nonsubmerged Areas: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
3. Below Grade or in Submerged or Damp Environments: Shop-lined and
coated.
4. Alternatively, Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve as specified may be
applied.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 01 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Installation:
1. Support noninsulating type securely in formwork to prevent contact
with reinforcing steel and tie-wires.
2. Caulk joint with specified sealant in non-submerged applications and
seal below grade and submerged applications with wall penetration seal.
3.09 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Applications:
1. Watertight and Below Ground Penetrations:
a. Wall pipes with thrust collars.
b. Provide taps for stud bolts in flanges to be set flush with wall face.
2. Nonwatertight Penetrations: Pipe sleeves with seep ring.
3. Existing Walls: Rotary drilled holes.
4. Fire-Rated or Smoke-Rated Walls, Floors or Ceilings: Insulated and
encased pipe sleeves.
B. Wall Pipe Installation:
1. Isolate embedded metallic piping from concrete reinforcement using
coated pipe penetrations as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating.
2. Support wall pipes securely by formwork to prevent contact with
reinforcing steel and tie-wires.
3.10 SPRAY NOZZLES
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW/WBG/426399
40 27 01 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 27 02
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Gas Association (AGA): 3-88, Orifice Metering of Natural
Gas.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z21.15, Manually
Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and
Hose End Valves.
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,
125, and 250).
b. B16.44, Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in
Aboveground Piping Systems up to 5 PSI.
4. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE): 1011, Performance
Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
b. C500, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
c. C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
d. C507, Ball Valves, 6 in. Through 48 in. (150 mm Through
1200 mm).
e. C508, Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in. through
24-in. (50 mm Through 600 mm) NPS.
f. C509, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
g. C510, Double Check Valve, Backflow Prevention Assembly.
h. C511, Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention
Assembly.
i. C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates.
j. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
k. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
l. C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
6. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
b. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. A564/A564M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
d. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
e. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
f. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar, and Shapes.
g. B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy
(UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
h. B139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar and
Shapes.
i. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar,
and Wire.
j. B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar.
k. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications.
l. D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to
Rigid Substrates.
m. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
7. Canadian Gas Association, Inc. (CGA): 9.1, Manually Operated Gas
Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End
Valves.
8. FM Global (FM).
9. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
10. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
(IAPMO).
11. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):
a. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
b. SP-81, Stainless Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves.
c. SP-85, Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends.
d. SP-88, Diaphragm Valves.
e. SP-110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
12. NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components—
Health Effects.
13. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
14. USC Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 2 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type
Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or
service where used.
b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
d. For each power actuator provided, Manufacturer’s standard data
sheet, with application specific features and options clearly
identified.
e. Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valves.
f. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services for:
3. Tests and inspection data.
4. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Valves to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,
floor stand, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories to allow a complete
operation from the intended operating level.
B. Valve to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower
quality than specified.
C. Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or
in Supplements.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 3
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Valve ends to suit adjacent piping.
E. Resilient seated valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at
valve rated design pressure. All other valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight)
in either direction at valve rated design pressure, unless otherwise allowed for
in this section or in stated valve standard.
F. Size operators and actuators to operate valve for the full range of pressures
and velocities.
G. Valve to open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified.
H. Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories.
2.02 SCHEDULE
A. Additional requirements relative to this section are shown on Pneumatic
Actuator Schedule located at the end of this section.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in
contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and
2 percent aluminum.
1. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: B61, B62,
B98/B98M (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139 (Alloy
UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164,
B194, and B127.
2. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze.
B. Valve materials in contact with or intended for drinking water service to meet
the following requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other
applicable federal, state, and local requirements.
2. Coatings materials to be formulated from materials deemed acceptable
to NSF61.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Epoxy Lining and Coating:
1. Use where specified for individual valves described herein.
2. In accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise specified.
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 4 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except
only heat-activated material if specified as “fusion” or “fusion bonded”
epoxy.
4. Minimum 7-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve
operating tolerances.
B. Exposed Valves:
1. In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
2. Safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles, handwheels, or
chain wheels “safety yellow.”
2.05 VALVES
A. Plug Valves:
1. Type V407 Eccentric Plug Valve 24 Inches to 48 Inches:
a. Nonlubricated type rated 150 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with
pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service
flanged ends per ASME B16.1, buried service mechanical joints
ends unless otherwise shown, plug cast iron port opening of no
less than 70 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with
Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless
steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings or U-cups with O-rings
of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings.
b. Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2-inch
nut, or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times the maximum
operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse
pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide
completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant.
c. For buried service, provide external epoxy coating.
d. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Pratt; Ballcentric.
2) DeZurik; Style PEC.
3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.
B. Type V320 Vee-Ball Valve 1 Inch to 16 Inches:
1. ANSI Class 150-pound flanged ends, Type 317 stainless steel body,
heat treated nickel- or hard chromium-plated Type 317 stainless steel
ball, splined-type 17-4 PH stainless steel shafts, reinforced PTFE flow-
ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless steel or Hastalloy sleeve
bearings, and PTFE V-ring packing. Valve to have 300:1 rangeability
and equal percentage characteristic.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 5
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Fisher Controls; Design V150.
b. DeZurik; VPB V-Port Ball Valve.
2.06 OPERATORS AND ACTUATORS
A. Manual Operators:
1. General:
a. For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of
the applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator
when force exceeds requirements.
b. For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable
industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under any
operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear
reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.
c. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device.
d. Position indicator on quarter-turn valves.
e. Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm-gears of gear
bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground
and polished. Traveling nut type operator’s threaded steel reach
rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
2. Exposed Operator:
a. Galvanized and painted handwheel.
b. Cranks on gear type operator.
c. Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand,
and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation
level.
d. Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock.
B. Pneumatic Actuators:
1. General:
a. Actuator complete with air sets, exhaust mufflers, speed controls,
pilot solenoids, safety vented isolation valves, and accessories.
b. Suitable for full operation range of valve at air supply pressure
indicated.
c. Position indicated and stop limiting devices on all actuators.
2. Cylinder Actuator:
a. In compliance with AWWA C541.
b. Air supply pressure of 100 psig.
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 6 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. Nonswivel type totally enclosed:
1) Travel stops and position indicator.
2) Factory lubricated and sealed requiring no additional
lubrication.
d. Double Acting:
1) Nonmetallic for operation on nonlubricated air.
2) Handwheel override independent of cylinder.
e. Actuators used on quarter-turn valves to include a totally enclosed
valve actuating mechanism. Actuating mechanism to be factory
lubricated and sealed.
f. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Rotork.
2) DeZurik.
3. Accessories:
a. Air Set: Pressure regulator with internal relief, filter, outlet
pressure gauge, and adjustable reduced pressure range as required
by the valve actuator.
1) Aluminum body and handwheel.
2) Safety vented lockout isolation valve.
3) Gauge range 1-1/3 to 2 times maximum operating pressure.
4) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Fisher Controls; Type 67 AFR.
b) Masoneilan; No. 77-4.
b. Air Exhaust Muffler:
1) In the exhaust port of actuator pilot solenoid valves.
2) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Barry Wright Corp.
b) Allied Witan Co.
c. Limit Switch:
1) Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, rated 10 amps at
120V ac.
2) Housed in NEMA 4X enclosure.
3) Adjustable for OPEN and CLOSED valve positions.
d. Pilot Solenoid Valve:
1) Solenoid valve shall pilot control actuator in the appropriate
configuration for type of open-close actuator being
controlled. Double acting actuator shall have four-way
solenoid valve, and spring return actuator shall have three-
way solenoid valve. Dual coil valve shall not change
position unless one coil is energized while the other is de-
energized.
2) Pilot operated diaphragm type solenoid valve with brass
body and resilient seat. Valve with minimum operating
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 7
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
pressure differential no greater than 10 psig and maximum
operating pressure differential no less than 150 psig. Internal
parts corrosion-resistant. Solenoid valve to have Class F
molded coils for operation on 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless
otherwise indicated. Solenoid enclosure as defined in
NEMA 250, Type 4X.
3) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Asco Red Hat.
b) C.A. Norgren Co.
4. Open-Close and Throttling Valve:
a. Double Acting Cylinders: Four-way solenoid with dual coils.
b. Spring Return Cylinders: Three-way solenoids, spring return.
5. Control Features: Pneumatic actuators with features noted in the
Pneumatic Actuator Schedule.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Tagging: 1-1/2-inch diameter heavy brass or stainless steel tag attached with
No. 16 solid brass or stainless steel jack chain for each valve, bearing valve
tag number shown on Pneumatic Actuator Schedule and on Drawings.
B. Limit Switch:
1. Factory installed NEMA 4X limit switch by actuator manufacturer.
2. SPST, rated at 5 amps, 120V ac.
C. T-Handled Operating Wrench:
1. Eight each galvanized operating wrenches, 4 feet long.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Mueller; No. A-24610.
b. Clow No.; F-2520.
3. Four each galvanized operating keys for cross handled valves.
D. Extension Bonnet for Valve Operator: Complete with enclosed stem,
extension, support brackets, and accessories for valve and operator.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Pratt.
b. DeZurik.
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 8 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. Floor Stand:
1. Nonrising, heavy pattern, indicating type.
2. Complete with solid extension stem, coupling, handwheel, stem guide
brackets, and yoke attachment. Stem length as required to connect valve
operating nut and floor stand.
3. Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200.
4. Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Clow; Figure F-5515.
b. Mueller, Figure A-26426.
F. Floor Box:
1. Plain type, for support of nonrising type stem.
2. Complete with solid extension stem, operating nut, and stem guide
brackets. Stem length as required to extend valve operating nut to within
3 inches of finish floor.
3. Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200.
4. Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Neenah Foundry; R 7506.
b. Clow; No. F5690.
G. Chain Wheel and Guide:
1. Handwheel direct-mount type.
2. Complete with chain.
3. Galvanized or cadmium-plated.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Clow Corp.; Figure F-5680.
b. Walworth Co.; Figure 804.
c. DeZurik Corp.; Series W or LWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Flange Ends:
1. Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe.
2. Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts
progressively and uniformly.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 9
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Screwed Ends:
1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing.
2. Apply joint compound.
C. PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service
conditions.
D. Valve Installation and Orientation:
1. General:
a. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed
without encountering obstructions.
b. Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and
maintenance.
c. Install valves per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Eccentric Plug Valves:
a. Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as
follows:
1) Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow:
Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up
when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream
(flow to produce unseating pressure).
2) Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow:
Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up).
3) Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end
downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher
pressure forces plug into seat).
E. Install a line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line
flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters,
for isolation during maintenance.
F. Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. Install
access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access.
G. Extension Stem for Operator: Where the depth of the valve operating nut is
3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish an operating extension stem with
2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish
grade.
H. Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand,
furnish extension stem torque tube of a type properly sized for maximum
torque capacity of valve.
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 10 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
I. Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in
floor box.
J. Chain Wheel and Guide: Install chain wheel and guide assemblies or chain
lever assemblies on manually operated valves over 6 feet 9 inches above
finish floor. Install chain to within 3 feet 0 inch of finish floor. Where chains
hang in normally traveled areas, use appropriate “L” type tie-back anchors.
Install chains to within operator horizontal reach of 2 feet 6 inches maximum,
measured from normal operator standing location or station.
3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.
B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions.
Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure
conditions from both directions.
C. Inspect air and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and
seating is fully functional.
D. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any
discrepancies with manufacturer’s data.
E. Set, verify, and record set pressures for relief and regulating valves.
F. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set
opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by
Engineer.
G. Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to
maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery.
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s field services and Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Proper Installation for pneumatic actuated valves, 24 inches and larger.
B. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site for minimum person-days
listed below, travel time excluded:
1. Two person-days for installation assistance and inspection for the valve
and the pneumatic actuator; 1 day each.
C. See Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 - 11
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.04 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this
Specification.
1. Pneumatic Actuator Schedule.
END OF SECTION
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/426399
40 27 02 - 12 OCTOBER 7, 2011
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Pneumatic Actuator Schedule
Actuator
Maximum Maximum Travel Type and
Valve Size Operating ∆P Time Control
Tag Number Type (inches) Fluid Flow (psi) Service (Seconds) Features
HDW-FV 10054 V407 24 Raw Sewage 15,000 gpm 36.8 O/C 30 B (FC, J)
Service: O/C = Open-Close, T = Throttling, M = Modulating
Actuator Type and Control Features:
A = Vane Type Actuator
B = Cylinder Type Actuator
C = Diaphragm Type Actuator
D = Valve shall open upon loss of signal.
E = Valve shall remain in last position upon loss of signal.
FC = Fail Close on loss of air supply (Air to open, spring to close).
FO = Fail Open on loss of air supply (Air to close, spring to open).
G = Positioner with 3 to 15 psig pneumatic input signal.
H = Valve position output converter that generates an isolated 4 to 20 mA dc signal in proportion to valve position, and is capable of
driving into loads of up to 500 ohms at 24V dc.
I = Visual indicator
J = Manual handwheel override
L = Limit Switch
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
OCTOBER 7, 2011 40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 1
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 80 01
PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information
that follows.
a. Testing dates.
b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.
c. Test type.
d. Method of isolation.
e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s)
to be tested.
2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment.
3. Certified Test Report.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify Engineer in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in
presence of Engineer.
B. Pressure Piping:
1. Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to
protect adjacent piping or equipment and make taps in piping prior to
testing.
2. Wait 5 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking is installed to
perform pressure tests. If high-early strength cement is used for thrust
blocking, wait may be reduced to 2 days.
3. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or
devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.
4. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping:
a. Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds,
blind flanges, or as acceptable to Engineer.
5. Test Pressure: As indicated on Piping Schedule.
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 LEAKAGE TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 80 01 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure
prior to testing.
3.02 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Fluid: Clean water of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping
system.
B. Exposed Piping:
1. Perform testing on installed piping prior to application of insulation.
2. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area
of pipe.
3. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or
loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge
air pockets.
4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 60 minutes,
minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct
examinations for leakage.
5. Examine joints and connections for leakage.
6. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.
3.03 PNEUMATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Do not perform on:
1. PVC or CPVC pipe.
2. Piping larger than 18 inches.
3. Buried and other non-exposed piping.
B. Fluid: Oil-free, dry air.
C. Procedure:
1. Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to
piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply
soap bubble mixture to joints and connections; examine for leakage.
2. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are
corrected.
3. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure.
Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of
specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.
PROCESS PIPING PW/WBG/426399
LEAKAGE TESTING OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 80 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of
10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap
bubble examination for leakage.
5. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.
D. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances
at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage.
E. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry
flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system
during filling process.
3.04 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING
A. Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2-gallon water leakage under
specified conditions.
B. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallons per hour per inch diameter per
100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to
minimum head specified.
C. Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest
as specified.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Report Documentation:
1. Test date.
2. Description and identification of piping tested.
3. Test fluid.
4. Test pressure.
5. Remarks, including:
a. Leaks (type, location).
b. Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.
6. Signed by Contractor and Engineer or Owner to represent that test has
been satisfactorily completed.
END OF SECTION
PW/WBG/426399 PROCESS PIPING
OCTOBER 7, 2011 LEAKAGE TESTING
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 80 01 - 3
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 40 90 01
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel
Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-
Temperature Service.
b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Steel Bars and Shapes.
c. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes.
d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
e. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
2. International Society of Automation (ISA):
a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
(NRC ADOPTED).
b. PR12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
c. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams.
d. S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves.
e. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial
Process Instruments.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
4. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 508A, Standard for Safety,
Industrial Control Panels.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work Includes:
1. Engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing,
documenting, and starting up for complete Process Instrumentation and
Control (PIC) for this project.
2. Major parts are: Primary elements and transmitters.
B. Detailed Design: PIC as shown and specified includes functional and
performance requirements and component specifications. Complete detailed
PIC design.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations:
1. LCP: Local Control Panel.
2. MCC: Motor Control Center.
3. PAT: Performance Acceptance Test.
4. PIC: Process Instrumentation and Control.
5. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
B. Signal Types:
1. Analog Signals, Current Type:
a. 4 mA to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1.
b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PIC Subsystem
components, use the following ISA 50.1 options:
1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two-wire.
2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L.
3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers.
2. Discrete signals, two-state logic signals using dc or 120V ac sources as
indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. General:
a. Wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature.
b. Identify proposed items and options. Identify installed spares and
other provisions for future work (for example, reserved panel
space; unused components, wiring, and terminals).
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Catalog Cuts: I&C Components, Electrical Devices, and Mechanical
Devices:
a. Catalog information, mark to identify proposed items and options.
b. Descriptive literature.
c. External power and signal connections.
d. Scaled drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations of
electrical and mechanical interfaces.
3. Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components.
a. Format and Level of Detail: In accordance with ISA-S20.
b. Include component type identification code and tag number on
data sheet.
c. Specific features and configuration data for each component:
1) Location or service.
2) Manufacturer and complete model number.
3) Size and scale range.
4) Setpoints.
5) Materials of construction.
6) Options included.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer’s local
office, representative, distributor, or service facility.
4. Loop Diagrams: Individual wiring diagram for each analog loop.
a. Complete loop drawing in Contract Documents showing wires
and terminations. Include Drawing in As-Builts and Operation
and Maintenance Manuals.
5. Wiring Diagrams:
a. Complete contract wiring diagrams.
b. Diagrams shall bear electrical Subcontractor’s signature attesting
diagrams have been coordinated with Division 26, Electrical.
c. Show:
1) Electrical connections between equipment, consoles, panels,
terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components.
2) Component and panel terminal board identification
numbers, and external wire and cable numbers.
3) Circuit names matching Circuit and Raceway Schedule.
4) Intermediate terminations between field elements and panels
(for example, to terminal junction boxes and pull boxes).
5) Pull boxes.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Informational Submittals: For PIC equipment, provide Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Proper Installation and readiness for operation.
1. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: In accordance with
Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data, unless otherwise
specified in this section.
a. Content and Format:
1) Complete sets O&M manuals.
2) Sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation,
adjustment, calibration, maintenance and purchasing
replacements for each PIC component.
3) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists.
4) Manual format in accordance with Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Include:
1) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: One reproducible
copy of revised P&ID to reflect as-built PIC design.
2) Refer to paragraph Shop Drawings for the following items:
a) Catalog Cuts.
b) Component Data Sheets.
c) Loop Diagrams, one reproducible copy.
d) Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy.
3) Device O&M manuals for components, electrical devices,
and mechanical devices include:
a) Operations procedures.
b) Installation requirements and procedures.
c) Maintenance requirements and procedures.
d) Troubleshooting procedures.
e) Calibration procedures.
f) Internal schematic and wiring diagrams.
g) Component Calibration Sheets from field quality
control calibrations.
4) List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools
provided.
5) List of additional spares, expendables, test equipment and
tools recommended.
2. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT) Submittals:
a. Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed tests, forms,
and checklists.
b. Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and
checklists.
c. Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when
tests are completed.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Calibration Instruments: Each instrument used for calibrating PIC equipment
shall bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying that instrument has been
calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the NIST.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide Site and warehouse storage facilities for PIC equipment.
B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive-inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping
containers, and related equipment as recommended by the capsule
manufacturer.
C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in
storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions.
D. Cover elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Environmental Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, design
equipment for continuous operation in a wet non-corrosive environment, with
TE:
1. Field Elements: Inside.
B. Environmental Design Requirements: Following defines the types of
environments referred to in the above.
1. Inside:
a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F.
b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent non-condensing.
c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Activity Completion: The following is a list of key activities and their
completion criteria:
1. Quality Control Submittals: Reviewed and accepted.
2. Hardware Delivery: Hardware delivered to Site and inventoried by
Owner.
3. PAT: Completed and required test documentation accepted.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. PIC Substantial Completion: When Engineer issues Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
1. Prerequisites:
a. All PIC Submittals have been completed.
b. PIC has successfully completed PAT.
c. Owner training plan is on schedule.
d. All spares, expendables, and test equipment have been delivered
to Owner.
C. PIC Acceptance: When Engineer issues a written notice of Final Payment and
Acceptance.
1. Prerequisites:
a. Certificate of Substantial Completion issued for PIC.
b. Punch-list items completed.
c. Final revisions to O&M manuals accepted.
d. Maintenance service agreements for PIC accepted by Owner.
D. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start the following key Project
activities until the prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been
completed and satisfied:
Activity Prerequisites and Lead Times
Submittal reviews by Engineer acceptance of Submittal
Engineer breakdown and schedule.
Hardware purchasing, Associated Submittals completed.
fabrication, and assembly
Shipment Completion of PIC Shop Drawing
Submittals and preliminary O&M
manuals.
PAT Startup, Owner training, and PAT
procedures completed; notice 2 weeks
prior to start.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. PIC functions as shown on Drawings and as required for each loop. Furnish
equipment items as required. Furnish all materials, equipment, and software,
necessary to effect required system and loop performance.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. First Named Manufacturer: PIC design is based on first named manufacturers
of equipment and materials.
1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain
approval from Engineer for such changes in accordance with Article
Submittals.
2. If using proposed item requires other changes, provide work and
equipment to implement these changes. Changes that may be required
include, but are not limited to: different installation, wiring, raceway,
enclosures, connections, isolators, intrinsically safe barriers, software,
and accessories.
C. Like Equipment Items: Use products of one manufacturer and of the same
series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance,
operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s services.
2.02 I&C COMPONENTS
A. Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in the
Component Specifications. Furnish all equipment that is necessary to achieve
required loop performance.
B. Component Specifications: Generalized specifications for each type of
component are located in Article Supplements.
2.03 NAMETAGS
A. Nametags: Component identification for field devices.
1. Inscription: Component tag number.
2. Materials: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
3. Letters: 3/16-inch imposed.
4. Mounting: Affix to component with 16- or 18-gauge stainless steel wire
or stainless steel screws.
2.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with Division 26, Electrical.
B. Wires entering or leaving enclosures, terminate and identify as follows:
1. Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks.
2. Special signals, terminated using manufacturer’s standard connectors.
3. Identify wiring in accordance with Contract Drawings.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Analog Signal Isolators: Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are
sent from one enclosure to another. Do not wire in series instruments on
different panels, cabinets, or enclosures.
2.05 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. ON/OFF Valves:
1. Type: Ball valve.
2. Materials: Stainless steel.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Whitey; Series 41 through Series 43.
b. Hoke; Flomite 7100 Series.
B. Solenoid Valve, Three-Way:
1. Type: Globe valve directly actuated by solenoid and not requiring
minimum pressure differential for operation.
2. Materials:
a. Body: Brassed globe valves.
b. Valve Seat: Buna-N.
3. Size: 1/4-inch and normally closed or opened, as noted.
4. Coil: 115V ac, unless noted otherwise.
5. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 4.
6. Manufacturer and Product: ASCO; Red Hat Series 8320.
C. Pressure Regulator, Air:
1. Provide air at reduced pressures, as shown, constant to within plus or
minus 10 percent for flows from 0 to 300 scfh with 100 psi supply
pressure.
2. Setscrew for outlet pressure adjustment.
3. Integral filter and relief valve.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Masoneilan; Series 77-4.
b. Fisher; Series 67FR.
D. Plastic Tubing and Fittings:
1. Tubing: Polyethylene capable of withstanding 190 psig at
175 degrees F.
a. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Dekoron; Type P.
2) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo black instrument tubing.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Fittings:
a. Type: Brass compression.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo tube fittings.
2) Dekoron; E-Z fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. For equipment not provided by PIC, but that directly interfaces with the PIC,
verify the following conditions:
1. Proper installation.
2. Calibration and adjustment of positioners and I/P transducers.
3. Correct control action.
4. Switch settings and dead bands.
5. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops.
6. Input and output signals.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Material and Equipment Installation: Retain a copy of manufacturers’
instructions at Site, available for review at all times.
B. Electrical Wiring: As specified in Division 26, Electrical.
C. Mechanical Systems:
1. Drawings for PIC Mechanical Systems are diagrammatic and not
intended to specifically define element locations or piping and tubing
run lengths. Base materials and installations on field measurements.
2. Plastic Tubing Supports: Except as shown on Drawings, provide
continuous support in conduits or by aluminum tubing raceway system.
3. Install tubing conduit for plastic tubing and tubing raceways parallel
with, or at right angles to, structural members of buildings. Make
vertical runs straight and plumb.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Startup and Testing Team:
1. Thoroughly inspect installation, termination, and adjustment for
components and systems.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 9
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Complete onsite tests.
3. Provide startup assistance.
B. Operational Readiness Inspections and Calibrations: Prior to startup, inspect
and test to ensure that entire PIC is ready for operation.
1. Loop/Component Inspections and Calibrations:
a. Check PIC for proper installation, calibration, and adjustment on a
loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis.
b. Prepare component calibration sheet for each active component
(except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items).
1) Project name.
2) Loop number.
3) Component tag number.
4) Component code number.
5) Manufacturer for elements.
6) Model number/serial number.
7) Summary of functional requirements, for example:
a) Transmitters/converters, input and output ranges.
8) Calibrations, for example:
a) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10,
50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling.
b) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points.
9) Space for comments.
c. These inspections and calibrations do not require witnessing.
C. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT): These are the activities that
Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, refers to as
Performance Testing.
1. General:
a. Test all PIC elements to demonstrate that PIC satisfies all
requirements.
b. Test Format: Cause and effect.
1) Person conducting test initiates an input (cause).
2) Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect)
occurs.
c. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists:
1) Conduct tests in accordance with, and documented on,
Engineer accepted procedures, forms, and checklists.
2) Describe each test item to be performed.
3) Have space after each test item description for sign off by
appropriate party after satisfactory completion.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
d. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and
checklists. All signed by Engineer and Contractor.
e. Conducting Tests:
1) Provide special testing materials, equipment, and software.
2) Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process
variables, equipment, and data.
3) If it is not practical to test with real process variables,
equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation.
4) Define simulation techniques in test procedures.
f. Coordinate PIC testing with Owner and affected Subcontractors.
2. Test Requirements:
a. Once facility has been started up and is operating, perform a
witnessed PAT on complete PIC to demonstrate that it is
operating as required. Demonstrate each required function on a
paragraph-by-paragraph and loop-by-loop basis.
b. Perform local and manual tests for each loop before proceeding to
remote and automatic modes.
c. Where possible, verify test results using visual confirmation of
process equipment and actual process variable. Unless otherwise
directed, exercise and observe devices supplied by others, as
needed to verify correct signals to and from such devices and to
confirm overall system functionality. Test verification by means
of disconnecting wires or measuring signal levels is acceptable
only where direct operation of plant equipment is not possible.
d. Make updated versions of documentation required for PAT
available to Engineer at Site, both before and during tests.
e. Make one copy of O&M manuals available to Engineer at the Site
both before and during testing.
f. Refer to referenced examples of PAT procedures and forms in
Article Supplements.
3.04 CLEANING/ADJUSTING
A. Repair affected surfaces to conform to type, quality, and finish of surrounding
surface.
B. Cleaning:
1. Prior to closing system using tubing, clear tubing of interior moisture
and debris.
2. Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from
interior and exterior of equipment.
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 - 11
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. Supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this
Specification.
1. Component Specifications.
2. PLC Input and Output List.
3. Instrument Calibration Sheet: Provides detailed information on each
instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items).
4. I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet: Each sheet shows detailed information
for installation, adjustment, and calibration of a given valve.
5. Performance Acceptance Test Sheet: Describes the PAT for a given
loop. The format is mostly free form.
a. Lists the requirements of the loop.
b. Briefly describes the test.
c. Cites expected results.
d. Provides space for check off by witness.
END OF SECTION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 - 12 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
A. F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic:
1. General:
a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive
process liquid in a full pipe.
b. Type:
1) Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on
Faraday’s Law, utilizing the pulsed dc type coil excitation
principle with high impedance electrodes.
2) Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flow-
tube cross section.
3) Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point
probes inserted into a spool piece.
c. Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, and
mounting hardware. Other parts as noted.
2. Service:
a. Stream Fluid:
1) Raw sewage.
2) Suitable for liquids with a minimum conductivity of
5 microS/cm and for demineralized water with a minimum
conductivity of 20 microS/cm.
3. Operating Temperature:
a. Element:
1) Ambient: Minus 5 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2) Process: Minus 5 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.
b. Transmitter:
1) Ambient: Minus 5 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2) Storage: 15 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.
4. Performance:
a. Flow Range: 0 to 20,000 gpm.
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting
from pipe velocities of 2 to 30 feet per second.
c. Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at
minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second.
5. Features:
a. Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check
zero alignment.
PW/WBG/398678 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. No obstructions to flow.
c. Very low pressure loss.
d. Measures bi-directional flow.
6. Process Connection:
a. Meter Size (diameter inches): 24 inches.
b. Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised-face flanges;
AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on
meter size, unless otherwise noted.
c. Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.
7. Power (Transmitter): 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise noted.
8. Element:
a. Meter Tube Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
b. Liner Material: Polyurethane.
c. Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to
protect liner during shipment.
d. Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the
manufacturer for the noted stream fluid.
e. Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless
otherwise noted.
f. Grounding Ring:
1) Required.
2) Quantity: Two.
3) Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
g. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted.
9. Transmitter:
a. Mounting: Surface (wall).
b. Display: Required.
1) Digital LCD display, indicating flow rate and total.
2) Bi-directional Flow Display: Required.
a) Forward and reverse flow rate.
b) Forward, reverse and net totalization.
c. Parameter Adjustments: By keypad or non-intrusive means.
d. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted.
e. Empty Pipe Detection: Drives display and outputs to zero when
empty pipe detected.
10. Signal Interface (at Transmitter):
a. Analog Output:
1) Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance from 0 ohm
to at least 500 ohms minimum for 24V dc supply.
2) Supports Superimposed Digital HART protocol: If noted.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
11. Cables:
a. Types: As recommended by manufacturer.
b. Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations.
12. Built-in Diagnostic System:
a. Features:
1) Field programmable electronics.
2) Self-diagnostics with troubleshooting codes.
3) Ability to program electronics with full scale flow,
engineering units, meter size, zero flow cutoff, desired
signal damping, totalizer unit digit value, etc.
4) Initial flow tube calibration and subsequent calibration
checks.
13. Factory Calibration:
a. Calibrated in an ISO 9001 and NIST certified factory.
b. Factory flow calibration system must be certified by volume or
weight certified calibration devices.
c. Factory flow calibration system shall be able to maintain
calibration flow rate for at least 5 minutes for repeatability point
checks.
14. Factory Ready for Future In situ Verifications: Original meter parameter
values available from vendor by request.
15. Manufacturers:
a. Krohne includes IFC 300 (remote) signal converter.
1) OPTIFlux 4000.
b. ABB Automation MagMaster (includes Transmitter):
1) 10D1475 Mini-Mag (size: 1/10 to 4 inches).
2) MFE (size: 1/2 to 24 inches).
3) Plus MFF (size: 8 to 84 inches).
c. Emerson Process Management, Rosemount Division:
1) Model 8705 (flanged) and Model 8711(wafer) flow tubes.
2) Model 8712 (surface) and Model 8732 (integral)
transmitters.
d. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Flow Measuring System:
1) Promag 50/53H (size: 1/12 o 4 inches).
2) Promag 50/53P (size: 1/2 to 24 inches).
3) Promag 50/53W (size: 1 to 78 inches).
e. Invensys Foxboro (includes IMT 25 Series Intelligent Magnetic
Flow Transmitter):
1) 8000A Series Wafer Body (size: 1/16 to 16 inches).
2) 9100A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 1 to
78 inches).
PW/WBG/398678 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3) 9200A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 8 to
48 inches).
4) 9300A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 8 to
16 inches).
B. P4 Pressure Gauge:
1. General:
a. Function: Local pressure indication.
b. Type: Bourdon tube element.
2. Performance:
a. Scale Range: 0 to 30 psig.
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.50 percent of full scale.
3. Features:
a. Dial: 4-1/2-inch diameter.
b. Pointer Vibration Reduction: Required, unless otherwise noted.
Use the following method.
1) Liquid filled gauge front, unless otherwise noted.
a) Glycerine fill, unless otherwise noted.
c. Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted.
d. Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process
connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary
components):
1) Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.
e. Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window.
f. Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted.
g. Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring.
h. Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back.
4. Process Connection:
a. Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted.
b. Size: 1/2-inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted.
5. Accessories:
a. Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted.
1) Type suitable for the intended service.
2) Install in gauge socket bore.
b. Rubber hose for remote mounting.
1) Diameter: 1/4-inch.
2) Length: As required.
6. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1259/Model, 1279/Model,
1279 PLUS!
b. Ametek U.S. Gauge; Solfrunt Model 19XX/1981Advantatge.
c. WIKA, Type 2XX.34.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. P15 Pressure Seal, Annular:
1. General:
a. Function:
1) Sense pressure in a process line and transfer to pressure
monitoring device.
2) Protect attached pressure monitoring device from sludge or
slurry.
b. Type: Annular fluid-filled device that senses pressure through
flexible sleeve around full pipe circumference.
2. Performance:
a. Operating Conditions: Suitable for line pressures up to pipe flange
rating.
3. Features:
a. Construction:
1) In-line, 10 Inches and Larger: Wafer style.
2) Offline: Threaded, unless otherwise noted.
b. Materials:
1) Body: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.
2) Flanges (where applicable): Carbon steel, unless otherwise
noted.
3) Flexible Sleeve: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted.
4) Fill Fluid: Ethylene glycol/water or propylene glycol, unless
otherwise noted.
c. Factory Filled System:
1) Filled and assembled with pressure monitoring device(s).
2) Coordinate attached pressure monitoring device(s) with
system integrator. Seal vendor’s standard pressure
monitoring device(s) only acceptable if it meets
specification of the related pressure monitoring device.
4. Process Connections:
a. Mounting: In-line or offline, as noted or shown.
b. Pipe Size:
1) In-line: 24 inch diameter.
c. Connections:
1) In-line, Wafer style: Compatible with Classes 150/
300 flange drilling.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Red Valve Company; Series 40, Series 42/742, Series 48.
b. Dover/OPW Engineered Systems; Iso-Ring.
PW/WBG/398678 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 01 - 5
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
WEST BOISE WWTF
HEADWORKS MODIFICATIONS I/O LIST
INST/EQUIP TAG DESCRIPTION PANEL PID ADDRESS PLC I/O TYPE
HDW-CS-10034 INFLUENT PUMP 4 SEAL LEAK HDW-LCP-001 PI-0001 TBD PLC-01 DI
INFLUENT PUMP 4 FV OPEN
HDW-FV-10054 STATUS HDW-LCP-001 PI-0001 TBD PLC-01 DI
INFLUENT PUMP 4 FV CLOSED
HDW-FV-10054 STATUS HDW-LCP-001 PI-0001 TBD PLC-01 DI
INFLUENT PUMP 4 CLOSE
HDW-FV-10054 COMMAND HDW-LCP-001 PI-0001 TBD PLC-01 DO
HDW-FIT-10064 INFLUENT PUMP 4 FLOW HDW-LCP-001 PI-0001 TBD PLC-01 AI
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 02 - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET Rev.06.05.92
COMPONENT MANUFACTURER PROJECT
Code: Name: Number:
Name: Model: Name:
Serial #:
FUNCTIONS
RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? Y / N CONTROL? Y / N
Indicate? Y / N Chart: Describe: Action? direct / reverse
Modes? P / I / D
Record? Y / N Scale: SWITCH? Y / N
Unit Range:
Transmit/ Input: Differential: fixed/adjustable
Convert? Y / N Output: Reset? automatic / manual
ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS Note
REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED No.
Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreasing Input Number Trip Point Reset Pt. Trip Point Reset Pt.
Indicated Output Indicated Output (note rising or falling) (note rising or falling)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: I: D: 7.
# NOTES: Component Calibrated and Ready
for Startup
By:
Date:
Tag No.:
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 03 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET Rev.06.05.92
EXAMPLE - ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER
COMPONENT MANUFACTURER PROJECT
Code: A7 Name: Leeds & Northrup Number: WDC30715.B2
Name: pH Element & Analyzer/Transmitter Model: 12429-3-2-1-7 Name: UOSA AWT PHASE 3
Serial #: 11553322
FUNCTIONS
RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? N CONTROL? N
Indicate? Y Chart: Describe: Action? direct / reverse
Record? N Modes? P / I / D
Scale: 1-14 pH units SWITCH? N
Unit Range:
Transmit/ Input: 1-14 pH units Differential: fixed/adjustable
Convert? Y Output: 4-20 mA dc Reset? automatic / manual
ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS Note
REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED No
Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreasing Input Number Trip Point Reset Pt. Trip Point Reset Pt.
Indicated Output Indicated Output (note rising or falling) (note rising or falling)
1.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 3.9 1. N.A. N.A.
2.3 2.3 5.6 2.2 5.5 2.3 5.6 2. 1.
7.5 7.5 12.0 7.5 11.9 7.5 12.0 3.
12.7 12.7 18.4 12.7 18.3 12.6 18.3 4.
14.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 5.
6.
CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: N.A. I: D: 7.
# NOTES: Component Calibrated and Ready for
1. Need to recheck low pH calibration solutions. Startup
By: J.D. Sewell
Date: Jun-6-92
Tag No.: AIT-12-6[pH]
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 03 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92
PARTS Project Name: Project Number:
Body Type: Mfr:
Size: Model:
Line Connection: Serial #:
Operator Type: Mfr:
Action: Model:
Travel: Serial #:
Positioner Input Signal: Mfr:
Action: Model:
Cam: Serial #:
Pilot Action: Mfr:
Solenoid Rating: Model:
Serial #:
I/P Input: Mfr:
Converter Output: Model:
Action: Serial #:
Position Settings: Mfr:
Switch Contacts: Model:
Serial #:
Power Type: Air Set Mfr:
Supply Potential: Model:
Serial #:
ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date
Air Set Valve Action
Positioner Installation
Position Switches Wire Connection
I/P Converter Tube Connection
Actual Speed
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 04 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
REMARKS: Valve Ready for Startup
By:
Date:
Tag No.:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 04 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92
EXAMPLE
PARTS Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Project Number: SFO10145.G2
Body Type: Vee-Ball Mfr: Fisher Controls
Size: 4-inch Model: 1049763-2
Line Connection: 159 # ANSI Flanges Serial #: 1003220
Operator Type: Pneumatic Diaphragm Mfr: Fisher Controls
Action: Linear - Modulated Model: 4060D
Travel: 3-inch Serial #: 2007330
Positioner Input Signal: 3-15 psi Mfr: Fisher Controls
Action: Direct - air to open Model: 20472T
Cam: Equal percentage Serial #: 102010
Pilot Action: Mfr:
Solenoid Rating: None Model:
Serial #:
I/P Input: 4-20 mA dc Mfr: Taylor
Converter Output: 3-15 psi Model: 10-T-576-3
Action: Direct Serial #: 1057-330
Position Settings: Closed / Open 5 deg, rising Mfr: National Switch
Switch Contacts: Close / Close Model: 1049-67-3
Serial #: 156 &157
Power Type: Pneumatic Air Set Mfr: Air Products
Supply Potential: 40 psi Model: 3210D
Serial #: 1107063
ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date
Air Set JDS Jun-06-92 Valve Action JDS Jun-03-92
Positioner JDS Jun-06-92 Installation JDS Jun-03-92
Position Switches JDS Jun-06-92 Wire Connection JDS Jun-04-92
I/P Converter JDS Jun-07-92 Tube Connection JDS Jun-04-92
Actual Speed JDS Jun-07-92
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 04 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
REMARKS: Valve was initially installed backwards. Valve Ready for Startup
Observed to be correctly installed May-25-92 By: J.D. Sewell
Date: Jun-07-92
Tag No.: FCV-10-2-1
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 04 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92
Project Name: Project No.:
Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop:
(a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test.
(c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.
Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner
Loop Status Report By:
Instrument Calibration Sheet Date:
I&C Valve Calibration Sheet
Performance Acceptance Test By Date
Performed
Witnessed Loop No.:
PW/WBG/426399 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
OCTOBER 7, 2011 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 05 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92
EXAMPLE
Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Plant Expansion Project No.: SFO12345.C1
Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop:
(a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test.
(c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.
1. MEASURE EFFLUENT FLOW
1.a With no flow, water level over weir should be zero and
FIT indicator should read zero. Jun-20-92 BDG
2. FLOW INDICATION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS
With flow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression
Q(MGD) = 429*H**(2/3) (H = height in inches of water over weir).
Vary H and observe that following.
2.a Reading of FIT indicator. Jun-6-92 BDG
2.b Reading is transmitted to FI on LP-521-1. Jun-6-92 BDG
2.c Reading is transmitted and displayed to CCS. Jun-6-92 BDG
H(measured) 0 5 10 15
Q(computed) 0 47.96 135.7 251.7
Q(FIT indicator) 0 48.1 137 253
Q(LI on LP-521-1) 0 48.2 138 254
Q(display by CCS) 0 48.1 136.2 252.4
Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner
Loop Status Report J.D. Sewell May-18-92 By: J.D. Smith
Instrument Calibration Sheet J.D. Sewell May-18-92 Date: Jun-6-92
I&C Valve Calibration Sheet N.A.
Performance Acceptance Test By Date
Performed J. Blow MPSDC Co. Jun-6-92
Witnessed B.deGlanville Jun-6-92 Loop No.: 30-12
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/426399
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS OCTOBER 7, 2011
40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT 05 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 44 42 24.03
OWNER-FURNISHED SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This specification was used by Owner to prepurchase equipment which will
be installed by Contractor. It is included here for reference.
B. The Work of this section includes installation of Owner-furnished suction
header/manifold type secondary clarifier mechanisms, motors, and all
appurtenant for Secondary Clarifiers 1-4.
C. General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which
contains information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA):
a. 2001, Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for
Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
b. 2004, Gear Materials and Heat Treatment Manual.
c. 6022, Design Manual for Cylindrical Wormgearing.
d. 6034, Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Wormgear Speed
Reducers and Gearmotors.
e. 9005, Industrial Gear Lubrication.
3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B29.100,
Precision Power Transmission Double-Pitch Power Transmission, and
Double-Pitch Conveyor Roller Chains, Attachments, and Sprockets.
6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): C200, Steel Water
Pipe—6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
7. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code – Steel.
b. QC 01, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.
8. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
c. A148/A148M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High
Strength, for Structural Purposes.
d. A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate
Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
e. A285/A285M, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength.
f. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
10. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SP 7, Brush-off Blast
Cleaning.
11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 674, Standard for Safety Electric
Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alarm Torque: 120 percent of Design Running Torque.
B. Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): As defined in AWS QC 01.
C. Cutout Torque: 140 percent of Design Running Torque.
D. Design Running Torque: Torque used to select size, strength, and type of
materials and components for mechanism and drive system and at which or
below will provide continuous 24 hour per day clarifier operation for period of
not less than 20 years at design torque condition and rotational speed specified
herein, without damage, permanent deformation or overload, and equal to
50 percent on overload device scale.
E. Slenderness Ratio: Ratio of unbraced length to least radius of gyration.
F. Submerged Metal: Metal below gear head drive and a plane 18 inches above
weir elevation indicated.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 2
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
G. Ultimate Torque: 200 percent of Design Running Torque and below which no
portion of mechanism will be damaged if operated for only short period of
time (a few seconds) and equal to 100 percent on overload device scale.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Product Data:
1) Make, model, weight, and horsepower.
2) Descriptive literature, specifications, dimensional layout,
and identification of materials of construction.
3) Painting/Coating System(s): Manufacturer’s descriptive
technical catalog literature and specifications.
4) Seismic anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and
Bracing.
b. Detailed Drawings:
1) Structural, mechanical, and electrical showing equipment
fabrications and interface with other items including
dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other
work, and weights of associated equipment.
2) Structural and Mechanical: Details of influent column,
center torque cage, center pier, flocculation well, walkway
bridge, influent well, sludge suction header and manifold,
rotating rake arm trusswork, scum skimmer, scum trough,
and scum pipe.
c. Design Details:
1) Running, Alarm, and Cutout torque ratings of drive unit
assembly.
2) Ultimate Torque Load capabilities of drive unit assembly,
torque cage, and rotating rake arm trusswork.
d. Hydraulic Calculations: Minimum average, normal maximum,
and instantaneous flows and data.
e. Sludge Withdrawal System: Indicate head loss in sludge suction
header and manifold at design flow rate.
f. Certification of Structural Calculations: Letter of certification for
structural design of mechanism, shall be signed and sealed by
Registered Professional Engineer. Copies of detailed structural
design calculations shall not be submitted for review. If submitted,
calculations will be returned without review.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
g. Structural Loads: Static, dynamic, and torque reaction loads to be
transferred into structure at center column and access bridge
support locations.
h. Details of torque sensing and load indication device.
i. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, drain, etc.,
for each component.
j. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation
and controls to be supplied, including list of parameters
monitored, controlled, or alarmed.
k. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
l. Diameter of ball race.
m. Motor Data:
1) Horsepower.
2) Voltage.
3) Enclosure.
4) Terminal Connections.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Designer’s qualifications.
2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: Commercial products and
factory-applied coating system(s).
4. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
5. Welder/welding operator qualifications.
6. Welding inspector credentials.
7. Welding Inspector’s Report.
8. Test procedures.
9. Test results, reports, and certifications.
10. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 30 00,
Administrative Requirements.
11. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 34, Special Services.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Designer: Registered Professional Engineer.
B. Welder/Welding Operator: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 4
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Welding Inspector: Certified in accordance with AWS QC 01, and having
prior experience with welding codes specified.
1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer’s extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named
as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall
provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement
of Goods specified in this specification section found non-conforming during
a period of 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and
obligations for correction or removal and replacement of non-conforming
Goods as specified in paragraph 8.02 of the General Conditions.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Item Quantity
Gaskets, O-rings, keys, dowels, and One complete set per unit
pins
Shear pins of each different size Six per unit
Scum skimming arm blade pivot Two each type and size per unit
bearing
Drive chain and/or belts (if used) One set each type and size per unit
Springs used in scum collection Two each type and size per unit
assemblies
Special tools required to maintain One complete set
or dismantle scum collection
assemblies, drive unit except for
low speed main bearing, but
including that required for removal/
insertion of main bearing race balls
Lubricants As required for 1 year of continuous
operation per unit; locally obtained
per manufacturer’s listing of
approved lubricants
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product
Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be
products of:
1. Envirex Products/Siemens Water Technologies.
2. OVIVO/EIMCO Water Technologies.
3. WesTech Inc.
4. Or approved equal.
2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Material Handled: Mixed liquor, settled return sludge, and clarified effluent
produced by air activated sludge process and resulting from degritted, primary
clarification, municipal wastewater.
B. Influent Liquid Temperature Range: 50 degrees F, minimum to 75 degrees F,
maximum.
C. Influent Mixed Liquor Solids Concentration: 5,000 mg/L, maximum, dry
weight basis.
D. Influent pH Range: 6.3, minimum to 8.0, maximum.
E. Return Sludge Solids Concentration Range, Dry Weight Basis: 8,000 mg/L,
minimum, 10,000 mg/L, average, 15,000 mg/L, maximum.
F. Site Conditions:
1. Design shall accommodate the following Site conditions:
a. Exposure: Ultraviolet radiation of sun, outside.
b. Ambient Temperature Range: Minimum minus 20 degrees F to
110 degrees F, maximum.
c. Ambient Humidity Range: Minimum 20 percent to 98 percent
relative humidity, including rain and ice.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 6
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Provide units meeting performance and design requirements as specified below.
B. General:
1. Suitable for installation in 100-foot diameter by 12-foot sidewall water
depth (SWD) clarifier having floor slope of 1:12 as shown on Drawings.
2. Center pier supported, center drive type.
3. Furnished complete, including drive motor, gearing, center influent
well, flocculation well, bridge, walkway, platforms, handrail, skimmer
mechanism and scum trough , and other necessary parts, including
anchor bolts.
4. Direction of mechanism rotation shall be clockwise.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Remove balanced proportional volume of settled sludge uniformly from
and across entire tank bottom.
2. Collect and convey settled sludge to center-located rotating manifold
and discharge into and through sludge return pipe.
3. Settled Heavy Solids: Collect and convey to center heavy solids/drain
hopper.
4. Floating Scum: Collect, convey, and discharge from surface of clarifier
and from inside influent well, to a central point at outside perimeter of
unit.
5. Return Sludge: Remove through suction manifold header.
a. Maximum Removal Rate: 5.4 mgd per clarifier.
b. Maximum Head Loss: 12-inch water column maximum headloss
in sludge withdrawal header, as measured from tank water surface
to hydraulic gradient at discharge point into sludge manifold.
6. Sludge Suction Header Velocity: Minimum 0.5 fps at any point in
header at minimum RAS flow of 1.4 mgd.
7. Operate satisfactorily under the following conditions:
Design Flow Rates
Minimum Average Maximum
Return Sludge Flow Rate 1.4 4.7 5.4
(mgd)
Clarified Effluent Rate 2.9 4.7 7.1
(mgd)
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Design Flow Rates
Minimum Average Maximum
Influent Mixed Liquor Flow 4.3 9.5 12.3
Rate (mgd)
D. Design Requirements:
1. Gears, Bearings, Chains and Sprockets: Above clarifier water surface.
2. Drive Mechanism: Easy removal of internal gears, balls, and strip liners
without walkway bridge removal.
3. Mechanism Construction: Welded, except at locations requiring
periodic field adjustment and as approved.
4. Stresses: Maximum 90 percent of material yield strength at Ultimate
Torque load in members.
5. Maximum Slenderness Ratio: 200 for compression member and 240 for
tension member.
6. Design Running Torque: 25,000 foot-pounds minimum. Drive unit shall
be sized such that worm gear, spur gear, and pinion meet Design
Running Torque in accordance with AGMA 2001 and AGMA 6034.
7. Rotational Speed: Between 0.019 and 0.025 rpm.
8. Capable of withstanding, without failure or permanent deformation of
any part, torque load of minimum twice Design Running Torque.
2.04 CENTER PIER AND INFLUENT COLUMN
A. Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, 42-inch minimum inside diameter, wall thickness
not less than 1/4 inch, extending continuously from clarifier base slab.
B. Ports:
1. Minimum four in top of column to release liquid flow and entrapped
scum. Size and location determined by manufacturer.
2. Sized to limit velocity to 1.5 feet per second at peak flow.
C. Minimum 3/4-inch-thick flange at base of pier for anchoring to clarifier
foundation by not less than six anchor bolts, size as determined by
manufacturer. Repair or replace anchor bolts at existing clarifiers, as required
by Engineer. Field verify existing bolt pattern at influent columns.
D. Designs loading anchor bolts as compressive columns (leveling nuts in place)
are not acceptable.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 8
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.05 ENERGY DISSIPATING INLET
A. Steel plate, ASTM A36/A36M, minimum 3/16-inch-thick plates and
minimum 1/4-inch-thick shapes.
B. Energy dissipation baffles or equivalent to ensure uniform flow distribution
into flocculation well. Simple discharge ports in center pier or influent column
will not be considered adequate.
C. Configuration:
1. Inlet shall be designed with a full bottom extending to within 1 inch of
the influent column.
2. Minimum diameter of 10 feet.
3. Extend minimum 6 inches above and 3 feet below clarifier static liquid
level.
4. Scum Release Ports: Minimum four.
2.06 FLOCCULATION WELL
A. Configuration:
1. Center of basin shall be separated from settling zone by 25-foot
minimum to 30-foot maximum diameter cylindrical baffle wall.
a. Constructed of reinforced steel plate, ASTM A36/A36M.
b. Plates minimum 3/16 inch thick and shapes minimum 1/4 inch
thick.
2. Extend from 6 inches above to 8 feet below designed clarifier water
surface.
B. Baffle Wall:
1. Rigidly supported from walkway bridge or drive cage.
2. Designed to withstand wind load of 20 pounds per square foot on
projected area when well is not full of water.
3. Baffle Plate: Along bottom periphery of baffle wall to direct flow
currents down inside face of baffle wall toward center of basin and to
prevent short-circuiting.
4. Ports:
a. Eight, minimum.
b. At 45-degree points around circumference to allow scum to pass
into skimming area of clarifier.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 9
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
c. Approximately 12 inches square.
d. Extend 3 inches to 4 inches above designed water surface.
2.07 CENTER DRIVE UNIT ASSEMBLY
A. Ultimate Torque Rating: Not less than 2.0 times Design Running Torque.
B. Motor, Primary and Secondary Speed Reducers: Mount separately and
independently at center gear head drive platform. Directly coupled vertically
stacked cycloidal reducers are also acceptable.
C. Electric Drive Motor: For motor requirements see Induction Motor Data
Sheet.
D. Primary Speed Reducer:
1. Horizontally mounted cylindrical-worm or helical-worm gear motor
type with gears supported by antifriction bearings. Connected to
secondary speed reducer via chain or belt or direct coupled drive system
with drive sprocket or pulley directly mounted on its output shaft.
Cycloidal reducer directly coupled to motor without use of chains and
sprockets and keyed to pinion shaft is also acceptable.
2. AGMA 6034 and AGMA Service Classification II.
3. Overhung Load Rating: Exceed chain pull by minimum 1.75 based on
Ultimate Torque.
4. Oil Fill, Drain and Level Indicator Devices, and Lubricant:
AGMA 9005.
E. Chain Belt Drive (If Used):
1. Roller Chain: Standard, ASME B29.100.
2. Standard single V-belt.
3. Connect drive sprocket on primary speed reducer to driven sprocket on
secondary speed reducer input shaft.
4. Steel Sprockets: Minimum of 12 teeth.
5. Chain: Belts:
a. Service Factor: Minimum 4.0.
b. Power Transmission Rating: 1.75 based on pull and power
required respectively at Design Torque rating.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 10
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Secondary Speed Reducer (If Used):
1. Cylindrical-Worm and Worm-Gear Type: Shafts supported by
antifriction bearings and output shaft directly driving pinion gear of low
speed main bearing assembly.
2. Load Capacity and Torque Rating: AGMA 6034.
3. Design: AGMA 6022.
4. Service Factor: Minimum 1.25 based upon Design Running Torque.
5. Output Shaft: One-piece output extending through worm-gear and low
speed main gear drive pinion without intermediate couplings.
6. Worm: Steel, heat treated, AGMA 2004, ground and polished.
7. Worm-Gear: Centrifugally cast, high silicon bronze copper alloy, or
ductile iron.
8. Bearings: ABMA L-10, life of 180,000 hours minimum.
9. Oil fill, drain and level indicator devices, and lubricant conforming to
AGMA 9005.
10. Enclosure: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 40 minimum housing, and
registered fit mounted to gear head drive platform.
G. Cycloidal Speed Reducer (If Used):
1. Cycloidal or helical speed reducers: Directly connected to motor.
2. Main ring gear:
a. High carbon chromium bearing steel.
b. Fixed to drive casing.
3. Eccentric Bearing: Mounted to high speed shaft, roll cycloidal discs
around internal circumference of main ring gear.
4. Cycloidal Disc Lobes: Engage successively with pins in fixed ring gear.
5. Helical Gearing:
a. Manufactured to AGMA standards.
b. Service Factor: 1.25, based on drive output torque rating.
6. Grease Lubricated Radial and Thrust Bearings: Sized for mechanism
loads specified herein.
H. Low Speed Final Reduction Unit:
1. Enclosed turntable, balls in main bearing annular radial thrust raceway
type, balls in compression and renewable strip liners or continuous
multipoint contact contoured raceway type with hardened surfaces and
balls in shear (precision bearing).
a. Ring Gear: Internal or External toothed, spur pinion gear driven,
attached to secondary speed reducer output shaft.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 11
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Low Speed Gearset:
a. Design and Rated: AGMA 2001.
b. Power Rating:
1) Lower of pitting resistance and bending strength ratings for
pinion and gears.
2) Based upon continuous 24 hours per day service at Design
Running Torque for 180,000 hours minimum.
c. Spur Pinion Gear:
1) Steel: Heat treated; integral with or keyed to its shaft.
2) Wall Thickness (Above Keyway): Minimum depth of one
tooth.
d. Ring Gear:
1) Solid one-piece or split construction of ductile (nodular)
iron (ASTM A536), cast steel (ASTM A148/A148M), or
heat treated alloy steel.
2) Split Gear Construction: Machined, minimum two
alignment dowels, joined with high strength galvanized steel
bolts.
3) Bolt to center torque cage that supports and rotates
collection mechanism.
e. Teeth: Full depth, AGMA 2001; stub-pitch and undercut gear
teeth not acceptable.
3. Main Bearing:
a. Ball Raceway Diameter: Minimum 47 inches, low unit ball load
and stability without guide shoes or steady bearings.
b. Raceways and Balls: ABMA L-10 life of minimum 180,000 hours
when operating continuously at Design Running Torque.
c. Load Carrying Balls:
1) Steel: Chrome alloy, hardened to 60-65 Rockwell C.
2) Diameter: Minimum 1-1/2 inches. If all balls are load-
carrying, 1-inch diameter balls are acceptable.
3) Crushing Strength: Minimum 120,000 pounds.
d. Spacer Balls (if required): 1/16-inch lesser diameter than, and of
same material as, load carrying balls.
e. Balls: Field replaceable without access walkway removal.
f. Raceways:
1) Four vacuum degassed high carbon steel renewable liner
strips force fit (pin or capscrew attachments not acceptable)
into base and ring gear, and specially hardened to 38-46
Rockwell C. Strips shall have minimum dimensions of
1/4 inch by 1/2 inch.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 12
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2) Deep grooved, fully contoured design, match bearing balls.
Heat treated steel, minimum tensile strength of 120,000 psi,
hardness of 250-300 Brinell, and surfaces heat treated to
55-60 Rockwell C.
4. Ring Gear, Pinion Gear, and Main Bearing Ball Races:
a. Oil bathed and steel dust shield and felt seal protected.
b. Oil Fill, Drain and Level Indicator Devices, and Lubricant:
AGMA 9005.
c. Casing with manual condensate drain.
5. Oil filling and level pipe, drain plug, and sight gauge. Attach pipe to
turntable bottom within base center for easy access.
I. Turntable Base and Housing:
1. Bolt to center column, support entire rotating collector mechanism,
transmit mechanical design strengths, support main bearing assembly,
and one end of the access walkway, and form center platform for
convenient access to drive unit components.
2. Platform: 32-inch minimum clear walking and working surface outside
drive unit components mounted at platform.
3. Cast Iron: Grey, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 40 minimum or Steel:
ASTM A36/A36M, 3/8 inch thick.
J. Mechanism Overload Device:
1. Mechanical or Hydraulic: Actuate integral contacts to indicate
impending overload and shutoff drive motor at predetermined load.
2. Impending Overload Contact (Alarm Torque): Actuate at 120 percent of
Design Running Torque.
3. Motor Shutdown Contact (Cutout Torque): Actuate at 140 percent of
Design Running Torque.
4. Contacts: Single-pole, double-throw rated 5 amps, 120V ac.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Type 316 stainless steel.
6. Indicating Pointer: Indicate relative load on graduated scale up to
Ultimate Torque.
7. Provide shear pin device or backup motor cutout switch to protect drive
unit in case of control system failure.
2.08 ACCESS WALKWAY
A. General: Provide access walkway from side of clarifier to center drive unit
and access platform around center drive unit.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 13
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Support System:
1. All aluminum rolled channel sections or truss beam type bridge
construction supported rigidly on center pier and at access end on the
clarifier wall with a thermal expansion compensating anchorage.
2. Diagonally cross brace and space beams as necessary to carry loads and
produce required clear walkway width. Extend full radius.
C. Bridge Design:
1. Maximum Vertical Deflection: 1/360 of span under uniform 50 pound
per square foot of walkway surface live load, plus dead load. Camber
for 1/3 live load plus dead load.
2. Limit Horizontal Deflection: 1/360 of span under uniform horizontal
loading of 50 pounds per linear foot.
3. Horizontal and vertical design live loads need not be applied
simultaneously.
4. Walkway Surface Elements: Do not utilize to reduce calculated bridge
deflections.
D. Surface:
1. Aluminum Checkered Plate:
a. Material:
1) Aluminum: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
b. Minimum Thickness:
1) Aluminum: 3/8 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
c. Surface shall be raised-lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown
otherwise on Drawings.
d. Slip-Resistant Surface:
1) Provide for all plates.
2) Manufacturers and Products:
a) IKG/Borden, Clark, NJ; MEBAC 2.
b) W.S. Molnar Co., Detroit, MI; SLIPNOT Grade 2–
Medium.
2. Width: Extend minimum to guardrail/handrail supports.
E. Width:
1. 36 inches minimum clear between guardrails/handrails.
2. 32 inches minimum clear working space all around center drive unit.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 14
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
F. Guardrails/Handrails:
1. General:
a. Furnish pre-engineered and prefabricated aluminum picket
handrails.
b. Pop rivets and glued railing construction not permitted.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL.
b. Moultrie Manufacturing, Moultrie, GA; Wesrail II.
3. Rails, Posts, and Formed Elbows: Extruded Alloy 6105-T5 or 6061-T6,
minimum tensile strength of 38,000 psi and minimum yield strength of
35,000 psi.
a. Miscellaneous Aluminum Parts: 6063-T6 or 6061-T6 extruded
aluminum of adequate strength for all loads.
b. Post and Railing: Nominal 1-1/2-inch diameter.
1) Rails: 1.900-inch outside diameter by 0.145-inch wall
thickness, Schedule 40.
2) Posts: 1.900-inch outside diameter by 0.200-inch wall
thickness, Schedule 80.
3) Solid dowel interconnectors of 6105-T5 or 6061-T6
aluminum.
4. Fittings:
a. Handrail and Post Fittings: Extruded, machined bar stock,
permanent mold castings, or die castings of sufficient strength to
meet load requirements. Fittings shall match color of pipe in
handrails. Sand cast parts not permitted.
b. Handrail Connections for Metal Beams:
1) Extruded aluminum bracket, Alloy 6063-T6.
2) Bracket bolts 1/2-inch diameter Type 304 stainless steel
bolts.
3) Manufacturers and Products:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. SMB-2 or
SMB-3. Use Part No. TSM-1.5 if bracket is attached
to flat side of channel.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMBEXT.
Use Part No. WIISMB if bracket is attached to flat
side of channel.
c. Miscellaneous Rail to Post Fittings:
1) Aluminum Tee Fittings:
a) Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TF-1 and
TX-1.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 15
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
(2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part Nos. WIIT40,
WIIT40/05, WIIT80, and WIIT80/05.
2) Aluminum Ell Fittings:
a) Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TE-1,
TE-2, and TE-3.
(2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 51900.
3) Aluminum Splice Lock:
a) Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. SL-1.
(2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIS40.
4) Aluminum Expansion Joint Splice:
a) Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. ES-1.
(2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WII40,
omit set screws on one side.
5) Formed Aluminum Wall Flange:
a) Manufacturers and Products:
(1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. CF-2.
(2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 41250.
d. In-Fill Area Picket and Attachments:
1) 1/2-inch Schedule 40 aluminum pipe (picket); alloy 6105,
6063, or 6061.
2) Extruded aluminum 1-1/2-inch by 7/8-inch by 1/8-inch
channel; alloy 6105, 6063, or 6061.
3) Fittings for Offset Stair Railings:
a) Cast Al-mag Adjustable Picket Fitting Manufacturer
and Product: Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part
No. APF.
b) Cast Al-mag Adjustable Stair Fitting Manufacturer
and Product: Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part
No. ASF.
4) Furnish neoprene plug for each end of the picket.
5) Pickets at 4 inches on center.
e. Toeboards and Accessories:
1) Material: Molded or extruded 6063 or 6061 aluminum.
2) Manufacturers:
a) Thompson Fabricating Co.
b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIKP20.
f. Castings for Handrails:
1) Cast Al-mag with sufficient strength to meet load and test
requirements.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 16
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2) Anodizable grade finish with excellent resistance to
corrosion when subject to exposure of sodium chloride
solution intermittent spray and immersion.
5. Finishes:
a. Handrail Pipe and Post: In accordance with AA DAF45,
designation AA-M32-C22-A41.
b. Cast Fittings and Toeboards: In accordance with AA DAF45,
designation AA-M10-C22-A41.
6. Locknuts, Washers, and Screws:
a. Elastic Locknuts, Steel Flat Washers, RHMS Round Head
Machine Screws: Type A 304 or Type A 316 stainless steel.
b. Flat Washers: Molded nylon.
c. Manufacturer: McMaster-Carr Supply Co., Los Angeles, CA.
7. Bolts and Nuts for Bolting Handrail to Metal Beams:
ASTM A193/A193M and ASTM A194/A194M, Type A 316 stainless
steel with minimum yield strength for bolts of 95,000 psi, unless
otherwise shown.
8. Extend all along both sides of bridge and around center platform.
9. Truss type bridge members shall not be used as guardrail/handrail. Use
Attach standard premanufactured wall bracket units to attach top and
intermediate rails to bridge elements.
2.09 CENTER TORQUE CAGE
A. All-welded steel, ASTM A36/A36M, box truss design, minimum 4 feet square
and components minimum 1/4 inch thick.
B. Supports and rotates rake arms, sludge withdrawal manifold, and skimming
devices, and fastens to main ring gear with machine screws or bolted
connections.
C. Designed with sufficient strength and rigidity such that with 60/40 percent
load imbalance at Ultimate Torque Load; no member will be stressed to level
beyond maximums allowed by current AISC Specifications.
D. Connections to Sludge Suction Header and Manifold: Adjustable, bolted, and
seal welded after alignment.
2.10 SLUDGE SUCTION HEADER AND MANIFOLD
A. Full radius sludge suction header(s) to collect from clarifier bottom and carry
through header into sludge manifold and discharge sludge into return sludge
outlet port and pipe at clarifier bottom.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 17
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Quantity: Two per clarifier.
C. Header:
1. Material: 3/16-inch Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Rectangular-shaped, tapered cross-sectional area, uniformly varying
from maximum near clarifier center to minimum at outer basin
perimeter end.
3. Capable of sweeping entire clarifier bottom once per mechanism
revolution.
4. Mounts parallel to clarifier bottom and with longitudinal cross-sectional
axis at an angle of 45 degrees with bottom to produce peaked top edge.
5. Leading edge extends downward 2 inches to form integral fluidizing
vane and direct sludge into sludge inlet orifices’ area of influence.
6. Orifices and Header: Designed to ensure hydraulic balance in clarifier
and to produce uniform sludge draw-off velocities throughout header
and not less than the minimum velocity stated under Paragraph Design
Requirements.
7. Sludge Inlet Orifices:
a. Accurately size and space at regular intervals to produce
proportionate sludge withdrawal volumes uniformly from clarifier
bottom.
b. Vary size from a minimum near clarifier center to a maximum at
basin perimeter.
c. Minimum Size: 2-inch diameter.
d. Maximum Spacing: 2-1/2 feet on center.
8. Fabricated Section(s):
a. Minimum 15 feet long.
b. Flanged and secured together with 300 Series stainless steel bolts,
nuts and washers.
9. Silicone base caulk flange interfaces and bolt holes to seal.
10. Inner End of Header: Flanged for field bolting to manifold with stainless
steel bolts and silicone caulk.
11. Plow: Steel hot-dip galvanized with neoprene squeegee to clean basin
bottom and direct material to heavy solids hopper and first inlet orifice
around manifold.
12. Provide dissimilar metals insulation.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 18
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Squeegees: Mount Under Header
1. Materials: 20-gauge Type 304 stainless steel.
2. Attach to steel sludge scraper blades on rake arm opposite sludge
withdrawal header.
3. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Vertical Adjustment: Between 1/2-inch minimum and 1-1/2-inch
maximum clearance above grouted clarifier bottom.
5. Sludge Suction Header Connections: Adjustable and bolted with two
Type 316 stainless steel bolts at each location. Do not seal weld these
connections.
E. Manifold:
1. Minimum 1/4-inch-thick steel plate, ASTM A36/A36M.
2. Bottom closure and outlet plate, and as necessary for anchorage.
3. Sealing Rings: Two, for watertight connection between basin floor and
manifold and center influent column.
F. Sludge Withdrawal: Accomplished and controlled by hydrostatic pressure
differential.
2.11 SCUM SKIMMING SYSTEM
A. Mechanically collect and discharge surface scum from annular space between
center flocculation well and outer perimeter scum baffle, with positive means
for moving scum from flocculation well to outer clarifier surface.
B. Skimming Arm(s) and Skimmer Blade Assemblies: Support from rake arms.
1. Quantity: Two.
2. Supports: Maximum 10-foot centers.
3. Bolted Connections: Permit plate removal during icing conditions.
C. Flocculation Well Scum Arms: One.
D. Skimming Arm:
1. Extend tangentially from, but not necessarily attached to, center
flocculation well continuously outward to skimmer blade assembly at
perimeter of clarifier.
2. Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, plate and shapes, minimum thickness
1/4 inch.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 19
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. Extend plate from 3 inches above to 3 inches below static liquid level
(weir invert elevation) in clarifier.
E. Skimmer Blade Assembly:
1. Traps scum at perimeter scum baffle and discharge it into scum trough.
2. Hinged, adjustable unit designed such that when passing over scum
trough bottom, blade edge is always in contact with trough even if
trough is not horizontal or plumb.
3. Lockout Device: Permits unit to be raised and maintained out of liquid.
4. Blade:
a. Extend full width of scum trough.
b. Bottom and Edges: Replaceable neoprene seal strips to ensure
continued entrapment and discharge of scum into scum trough.
c. Inner and Outer Edges: Suitable, separate wearing surfaces.
5. Adjustable, spring-loaded device, minimum applied force of 5 pounds,
or flexible neoprene wiper to constantly force seal with perimeter scum
baffle.
F. Scum Trough Assembly:
1. One per clarifier, including horizontal submerged shelf and inclined
beach.
2. Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, plate and shapes, minimum thickness
1/4 inch.
3. Radial Width: Minimum 6 feet.
4. Circumferential Length (Including Inlet and Outlet Beaches): Minimum
6 feet.
5. Inlet Inclined Beach Length: Minimum 65 percent of total
circumferential length of trough.
6. Trough Opening: Minimum 12 inches wide, sloped bottom with 6-inch
outlet.
7. Support from basin weir wall and connect to scum baffle with adequate
supports.
8. Support of skimming blade as it passes over scum trough opening shall
be provided by support bars over opening or roller and track assembly.
9. Track: Vertically and horizontally adjustable, arranged to properly
engage roller assembly on skimmer blade assembly at outside perimeter
edge.
10. Support Bars: Maximum of three per scum trough, sized to provide
adequate support for skimmer blade.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 20
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
11. Containment/Training Baffle Assembly:
a. At inside perimeter edge.
b. Extend minimum 6 feet in front of shelf/beach leading edge.
c. Extend 1 foot below and 8 inches above static liquid level (weir
invert elevation) in clarifier.
d. Support from basin wall.
G. Counterweight Assembly: Designed by mechanism manufacturer to balance
weight of scum skimmer components or other appurtenances as necessary of
one of following designs:
1. Welded steel box filled with proper quantity of steel punchings and
topped with 2 inches minimum of grout.
2. Multiple steel plates of various thicknesses and quantities supported by
baseplate and forming a stack bolted together by at least two Type 304
stainless steel bolts.
2.12 V-NOTCH WEIR PLATES AND SCUM BAFFLES
A. See Section 44 42 28, Weirs, Baffle Plates, and Launder Cover.
2.13 DENSITY CURRENT BAFFLES
A. See Section 44 42 28, Weirs, Baffle Plates, and Launder Cover.
2.14 LAUNDER COVER SYSTEM
A. See Section 44 42 28, Weirs, Baffle Plates, and Launder Cover.
2.15 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
A. Mechanism Control Interfaces:
1. A control station with ON/OFF/RESET push buttons located by the
drive unit shall be provided.
2. The mechanism overload device as described under Mechanism
Overload Device shall interface from the NEMA 4X enclosure mounted
by the drive unit to the MCC.
B. Other Instrumentation and Controls: Provide all items not specifically called
out which are required to implement the functions described herein.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 21
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.16 DISSIMILAR METALS
A. Isolate dissimilar metals or connectors to prevent direct contact and electrical
conductivity.
1. Use 1/8-inch-thick continuous neoprene gasket to insulate aluminum
grating, checker plate, and handrail post bases from access walkway
support bridge and other components.
2. Use insulating washer and Teflon sleeves at bolted connections.
2.17 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Threaded Rod:
a. ASTM F593 stainless steel threaded rod, diameter as shown on
Drawings.
b. Length as required, to provide minimum depth of embedment.
c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material.
d. For hollow-unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless steel
wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod.
2. Adhesive:
a. Two-component, designed to be used in adverse freeze/thaw
environments, with gray color after mixing.
b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for
intended use and environmental conditions.
c. Nonsag, with selected viscosity base on installation temperature
and overhead application where applicable.
3. Packaging and Storage:
a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing
both components in the proper mixing ratio and fitting into a
manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.
b. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in covered storage
area, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name,
material type, batch or serial number, and adhesive expiration
date.
d. Dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Ultrabond 1 Epoxy
Anchor System.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 22
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT HY 150 Adhesive Anchor System,
(use HIT HY 20 for hollow masonry).
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; C6 Adhesive Anchor
System or A7 Adhesive Anchor System. (Use A7 Adhesive
Anchor System for hollow masonry.)
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; ET Epoxy-Tie
Adhesive or Acrylic-Tie Adhesive. (Use Acrylic-Tie Adhesive for
temperatures below 40 degrees F.)
e. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro-Poxy 300 Adhesive Anchors or
Pro-Poxy 300 Fast Epoxy Adhesive Anchors.
f. USP Structural Connectors CIA-Gel 7000 Epoxy Anchoring
System.
B. Equipment Identification Plates: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, securely
mounted on drive unit in readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8-inch
high engraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification number
and letters.
2.18 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble mechanism components in largest sections
practicable and permitted by transportation carrier regulations.
B. Divide large assemblies such as center torque cage, rake arms, flocculation
well, access walkway bridge, into flanged sections. Bolt together with
Type 316 stainless steel fasteners.
C. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for procedures,
appearance, and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding.
D. Shop/Factory Finishing (Seller):
1. All ferrous metal submerged or nonsubmerged, nongalvanized surfaces
will be shop primed with an epoxy primer. Exposed metal surfaces of
motors and gear reducers shall be factory prepared and primed.
2. Epoxy Primer: Anticorrosive, converted epoxy primer containing rust-
inhibitive pigments.
3. Shop blast equipment and steel prior to application of primer.
4. Seal welding is required for all submerged welded joints. Skip welds are
not acceptable.
E. Field finishing of all components, except for the drive unit, shall be performed
by installation contractor.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 23
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Inspections: Inspect for required construction, electrical connection,
and intended function.
B. Factory Adjustments: Calibrate torque controls.
C. CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed and shall:
1. Monitor conformance with approved welding procedure specifications.
2. Monitor conformance of welder/welding operator qualifications.
3. Inspect weld joint fit-up and provide in-process inspection.
4. Provide 100 percent visual inspection of welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9.
5. Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of inspection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION (BY OTHERS)
A. In accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. No field welding, except seal welding, will be allowed. Seal weld
continuously at connections for tightness against leaks. Seal welding shall
comply with applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Anchor Bolts: Place using steel templates furnished by manufacturer.
3.02 FIELD FINISHING (BY OTHERS)
A. Paint ferrous metal for submerged surfaces and for nonsubmerged,
nongalvanized surfaces. Shop primed mechanism shall be prepared for field
priming and finish coating by brush-off blasting in accordance with
SSPC SP 7.
B. Paint exposed metal surfaces of motors, gear reducers assemblies.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (BY OTHERS)
A. Before placing clarifiers into service, check weir plate settings by filling
clarifiers with water to design elevation EL 2580.09. Readjust as required by
Engineer.
B. Weirs: Level to within plus or minus 1/16 inch of design elevation.
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 24
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Functional Tests:
1. Conduct on each mechanism.
2. Test for continuous 3-hourperiod without malfunction.
D. Performance Test:
1. Conduct on each completed assembly in accordance with accepted test
procedures.
2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
3. Perform to confirm mechanical and structural compliance with specified
torque requirements.
a. Load each mechanism to 120 percent of Design Running Torque
to demonstrate mechanism’s structural capability to withstand
resulting loads.
1) Apply loads to mechanism’s rake arms through cables or
other means anchored to basin floor or wall. Utilize a
hydraulic cylinder, springs, or other means that allows
machine to rotate for a peripheral distance of at least 3 feet
under load.
2) Accomplish testing with machine in operation.
b. Demonstrate mechanism overload devices; verify actual torques at
which Alarm and Cutout (shutdown) contacts and load limiting
device are actuated.
c. Correlate with scale indications.
4. Replace shear pins after torque testing is completed.
3.04 SELLER’S SERVICES
A. Seller’s Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for
minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1. Buyer will take only two clarifiers out of service at a time. Two separate
trips will be required for installation assistance, inspection, functional
and performance testing.
2. 4 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.
3. 4 person-days for functional and performance testing and completion of
Seller’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
4. 1 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
5. 2 person-days for facility startup.
B. See Section 01 43 34, Special Services.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 - 25
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this
Specification:
1. Data Sheet: Induction Motor Data Sheet.
END OF SECTION
OWNER-FURNISHED PW/WBG/426399
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM OCTOBER 7, 2011
(SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
44 42 24.03 - 26
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET
Project: West Boise WWTF South Plant Secondary Clarifier Mechanism Replacement
Owner: City of Boise
Equipment Name: South Plant Clarifier Mechanisms No. 1 through No. 4
Equipment Tag Number(s): SCL-MTR-P-35031, SCL-MTR-P-35032, SCL-MTR-P-35033,
SCL-MTR-P-35034
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single
manufacturer.
Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and
have an applied UL listing mark.
Motor Horsepower: 0.5, minimum Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 82.5 percent
Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load:
Phase: Three Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): 1.0 1.15
Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: TEFC
Synchronous Speed: 1800 rpm Multispeed, Two-Speed: ____ / ____ rpm
Thermal Protection: Winding: One Two
Space Heater: volts, Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical
single-phase
Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow
Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up ____ Down ____
Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage
Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems.
Operating Speed Range: ____ to ____% of Rated Speed
Variable Torque
Constant Torque
Special Features:
Provide breathers and drains for moisture removal. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.
Motor finish shall be suitable for outdoor industrial atmospheres including moisture and direct sunlight.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED
OCTOBER 7, 2011 SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL (SUCTION HEADER/MANIFOLD TYPE)
44 42 24.03 SUPPLEMENT - 1
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 44 42 28
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, AND LAUNDER COVER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This specification was used by Owner to prepurchase equipment which will be
installed by Contractor. It is included here for reference.
B. The Work of this section includes installation of Owner-furnished weirs,
baffle plates, and launder covers.
C. General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which
contains information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): F102, Matched-Die-
Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates, Scum Baffles, and
Mounting Brackets.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C581, Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures
Intended for Liquid Service.
b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
c. D256, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics.
d. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
e. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
f. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
g. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid
Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND LAUNDER COVER
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 28 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Detailed description of laminate and type of reinforcing to be
used.
b. Manufacturer’s drawings showing dimensions of the weir and
baffle items and accessories being provided.
c. Complete information regarding the specific resin to be used.
d. Manufacturer’s recommended launder cover dimensions,
mounting configuration and location of each application
e. Manufacturer’s recommended density current baffle dimensions,
deflection angle and location of each application
2. Sample: Manufacturer’s 6-inch-square sample of fiberglass reinforced
plastic laminate of same construction, nominal thickness, and color as
materials specified.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and stating the following:
a. Reinforcing material used will provide suitable chemical
resistance.
b. Resin is suitable for the environmental conditions intended and
the fabrication technique proposed.
2. Special shipping, storage and protection and handling instructions.
3. Manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Site properly packaged for ease of handling and to
minimize damage during shipping.
B. Handling and storage of the items provided hereunder shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Care shall be taken
not to damage the components and accessories.
1.05 WARRANTS
A. Weirs and Scum Baffles: Manufacturer shall warrant the weirs and scum
baffles to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
1 year after the date of Substantial Completion.
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, PW/WBG/426399
AND LAUNDER COVER OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 28 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
B. Density Current Baffle: Manufacturer shall warrant the density current baffle
to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years after
the date of Substantial Completion.
C. Launder Cover System: Manufacturer shall warrant the launder cover system
to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year after
the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one
manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation,
maintenance, and manufacturers’ services.
B. V-notch weir, scum baffle, density current baffle and launder cover
manufacturer shall coordinate the design and installation requirements with
the clarifier mechanism as specified in Section 44 42 24.03, Secondary
Clarifier Mechanism (Suction Header/Manifold Type).
C. Manufacturers:
1. NEFCO, Inc., Palm Beach Gardens, FL.
2. MFG Water Treatment Products Company, Union City, PA.
3. Or approved equal.
2.02 V-NOTCH WEIRS AND SCUM BAFFLES
A. Furnish V-notch weirs and scum baffles for the existing South Plant
Secondary Clarifiers No. 1 through No. 4. Weirs and baffles shall be
isophthalic polyester plastic resin with UV inhibitors, reinforced with glass
fiber.
1. V-Notch Angle: 90 degrees.
2. V-Notch Depth: 3 inches.
3. V-Notch to V-Notch Distance: 7 inches.
4. Weir Plate Thickness: 1/4 inch.
5. Scum Baffle Depth: 3 feet 6 inches for 40 feet distance ahead of scum
trough and 10 feet behind scum trough; otherwise, 2 feet 0 inch.
6. Distance Between Anchors to Launder (Scum Baffle): 4 feet 0 inch.
7. Scum Baffle Thickness: 1/4 inch.
8. Height of Scum Baffle Over Weir Plate: 3 inches.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND LAUNDER COVER
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 28 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
9. Distance Between Anchors to Launder (Weir Plate): 1 foot 9 inches
max.
2.03 DENSITY CURRENT BAFFLES
A. Furnish density current baffle systems for the existing South Plant Secondary
Clarifiers No. 1 through No. 4.
B. The Density Current Baffle System shall consist of a series of baffle panels
that are attached to the wall of the clarifier to form an inclined, shelf-like
surface around the entire inner periphery of the tank. Each panel shall be
molded of corrosion-resistant, UV-treated fiberglass. The panel shall be a
maximum of 8 feet in length and shall be curved to follow the curvature of the
clarifier tank. The width, inclination angle and mounting location of the baffle
shall be determined based upon the clarifier configuration in order to provide
optimum baffle performance. The panels shall be designed such that adjacent
panels fit together without overlapping or cutting, and the completed baffle
when installed, has a well-engineered and professional appearance.
C. Provision shall be made to attach the panels to the clarifier wall and support
them at the proper angle using a triangular panel bracket. The panel and
bracket shall be molded as an integral part of each panel, forming a baffle
module, or separate panels and brackets may be supplied. If the panel and
bracket are molded as an integral unit with adequate stiffeners, only one
bracket is required per panel. A specially formed “free-end” bracket shall be
provided to support the free end of the last panel where the run of panels is
interrupted by an obstruction. Panels may be cut as required to fit around
obstructions.
D. If separate panels and brackets are supplied, the panels shall be molded of
fiberglass and shall meet the specifications of this section. The brackets shall
be fabricated of 3-inch by 3-inch by 1/4-inch Type 304 stainless steel angle
and shall be triangular in shape, with the corners welded. Brackets shall be
installed at a maximum spacing of 4 feet. The panels shall be fastened to the
brackets with stainless steel nuts, bolts and lock washers every 8 inches.
E. A method of interconnecting adjacent panels shall be provided such that the
entire assembly forms a rigid structure capable of supporting its own weight
plus snow and wind loads in the event the tank is out of service. The baffle
shall also be designed to withstand a buoyant force load equal to the weight of
the water displace from the volume beneath the baffle. The angled working
surface of each baffle shall be sufficient in pitch and width to divert the flow
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, PW/WBG/426399
AND LAUNDER COVER OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 28 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
and to create a self-cleaning action of the baffle itself. Provision shall also be
made to vent gases which may form beneath the baffle through 2-inch radius
half round openings molded into the panel at its highest point.
2.04 EFFLUENT LAUNDER COVER
A. Furnish the effluent launder cover systems for the existing South Plant
Secondary Clarifiers No. 1 through No. 4 and the existing North Plant
Secondary Clarifiers No. 5 and No. 6.
B. The Launder Cover shall consist of a system of molded fiberglass panels that
are attached together to form a continuous cover over the launder trough, weir
and scum baffle within the secondary clarifiers. The cover shall be designed
and manufactured to inhibit incident sunlight from striking the surfaces of the
launder and weir. Each cover section shall be molded of UV-protected
fiberglass and shall be opaque to sunlight. Individual sections shall be a
minimum of 4 feet in length and curved to follow the curvature of the
secondary clarifiers. The cover shall extend over the effluent launder and weir
as far as possible and may extend to a point immediately inside the scum
baffle so long as the cover does not interfere with the sweep arm. The cover
shall be designed such that adjacent panels fit together properly and the
completed cover, when installed, forms a rigid structure and has a well-
engineered and professional appearance.
C. The cover shall be designed to open away from the operator and toward the
center of the clarifiers. Each cover segment shall consist of two sections, a
fixed mounting section and a hinged cover section connected by a continuous
stainless steel hinge. The mounting section shall provide a rigid mount for the
cover and is fastened to the weir wall with stainless steel brackets as shown in
the contract drawings. The mounting section extends inward to a point just
inboard the scum baffle. The hinged cover section extends outward toward the
tank wall and swings open to allow inspection and maintenance of the launder
and weir. In the closed position, the cover section rests on an FRP support
flange attached to the inner wall of the clarifier.
D. Provision shall be made to lock the cover in the closed position for safety and
security. This shall be accomplished by means of an easily operated latch
mechanism that secures the hinged cover section to the support flange.
Handles or lift rings may also be required for some panels. A means of
limiting the travel of the hinged cover section, in the form of a restraint cable
or tether, may also be provided to protect against damage. Covers with
inspection hatches or cleanout doors are unacceptable.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND LAUNDER COVER
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 28 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
E. The hinged cover sections shall also be designed such that alternating sections
have integral tabs at each side which rest on the adjacent section, insuring that
the seams between panels are covered and enabling the alternate panels to
open independent of every other panel.
F. Provision shall be made to support the cover in such a manner that the panels
are held securely in place, with the panels hinged to provide access to the
launder and weir for inspection and maintenance. Cover supports that
cantilever from the outer effluent launder wall without support at the weir wall
are unacceptable. Neither the cover nor the means used to support it shall
interfere with effluent flow over the weir or within the trough. Cover supports
shall not impede personnel from entering and traversing the launder.
G. Where the circumference of the trough is interrupted by a bridge-support or
another obstacle, a fixed panel(s) shall be installed over the trough beneath the
support such that the surface of the cover is continuous around the entire tank.
Alternatively, vertical panels may be installed on both sides of the bridge
supports to block out sunlight.
H. The cover system shall be designed to withstand common wind and snow
loads but shall not be intended as a “walk-on” cover designed to support the
weight of plant personnel. Adequate stiffeners shall be integral to each panel,
but panels reinforced with balsa or foam cores are not acceptable.
I. The latch/handle shall be a spring-loaded mechanism with a positive detent
positioned to indicate the closed/locked position of the handle. The latch is
activated by pressing down on the spring-loaded handle and turning it.
J. The restraint cable shall consist of a length of stainless steel cable secured to
the tank wall and the hinged cover section by means of stainless steel eyebolts.
The length of the cable is selected to limit the travel of the cover.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Match-die molded fiberglass, 1/4-inch minimum thickness, in accordance with
AWWA F102.
B. Resin: Except as modified by this Specification, conform to ASTM C581:
1. Type I: Isophthalic polyester with corrosion-resistant properties,
Corezyn COR75-AQ-010 or equivalent.
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, PW/WBG/426399
AND LAUNDER COVER OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 28 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
2. Shall not contain fillers or thixotropic agents, except as may be required,
and shall conform to resin manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Glass Content: 20 percent to 30 percent.
b. Inorganic Fillers: No less than 40 percent of resin mixture.
3. Coloring: Pigmented gel-coat containing ultra-violet blocking agent;
manufacturer’s standard color. The launder cover panels shall be
pigmented to opaque.
4. Reinforcement:
a. Commercial grade glass, made specifically for use in fiberglass
reinforced plastic, and having a coupling agent providing a
compatible bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
b. Weight and density may be varied to obtain necessary resin-glass
ratio and structural strength for the specified service.
5. Mold Surfaces: Reinforced with surfacing mat, followed by minimum of
3 ounces of chopped strand mat, in a minimum of two layers, with no
other product introduced between layers.
6. Exposed Surfaces:
a. Resin-rich, 10 mils to 20-mils thick with Type C surfacing mat,
silane finish, and styrene-soluble binder.
b. Glass fibers shall not be exposed.
c. Chopped strand and chopped strand mat shall be Type E glass
with silane finish and styrene-soluble binder.
d. Minimum Glass Content: 30 percent by weight.
7. Laminates:
Property ASTM
(70 Degrees F) Standard Value
Ultimate Tensile Strength, psi D638 7,500 minimum
Flexural Strength, psi D790 16,000 minimum
Flexural Modulus, psi D790 800,000 minimum
Water Absorption D570 0.2% in 24 hours
Impact, foot-pounds D256 10
8. Barcoal Hardness: ASTM D2538; minimum 90 percent of resin
manufacturer’s minimum specified hardness for cured, nonreinforced
resin.
9. Allowable cosmetic defects: As defined in AWWA F102.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND LAUNDER COVER
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 28 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
10. Final Laminate:
a. Thickness: Within plus or minus 10 percent of nominal laminate
thickness.
b. Tolerance: Plus 1/16 inch; minus 0 inch of minimum specified
thickness.
c. Void Content (Completed Laminate): Maximum 2-1/2 percent of
laminate by volume.
2.06 APPURTENANCES
A. Sealant:
1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing, ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25.
2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex-1a.
b. Mameco International; Vulkem 45.
B. Anchoring: Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors as specified in
Section 44 42 24.03, Secondary Clarifier Mechanism (Suction
Header/Manifold Type).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION (BY OTHERS)
A. The installation contractor shall install in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. FRP Plates: Sand all cut edges or drilled holes greater than 3/8 inch in
diameter, and seal with a nonair-inhibited resin solution, as recommended by
resin manufacturer.
C. V-Notch Weirs:
1. The installation contractor shall install weir plates such that weir crest is
level with a maximum variation of 1/16 inch throughout its entire
length.
2. Sealant:
a. Clean and prepare concrete and weir plate surfaces in accordance
with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, PW/WBG/426399
AND LAUNDER COVER OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 28 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
b. Application:
1) In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2) Completely cover the interface between the weir plate and
mounting surface over the full height of the weir plate.
3) Apply sufficiently to completely fill any gaps between the
weir plate and the supporting wall surface.
4) Clean excess sealant that is forced from between the weir
plate and supporting wall as the plate is tightened against the
wall surface to provide a neat installation.
5) Clean all adjacent surfaces of smears or soiling.
D. Density Current Baffles:
1. The installation contractor shall field verify existing dimensions and
install the baffle in accordance with the contract drawings, approved
shop drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations. Mounting holes
shall be factory drilled. Field cutting of baffle panels will be only
allowed to complete the structure and accommodate in-tank
obstructions. All field cut or drilled edges shall be coated per the
manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent fiber blooming or fraying.
All of the fasteners required for installation shall be supplied by the
baffle manufacturer. The baffle panels shall be attached to the wall using
3/8-inch by 3-3/4-inch concrete expansion anchors with oversized
1/8-inch by 2-1/4-inch stainless steel washers, and hex nuts, Adjacent
baffle panels are fastened together using 1/4-inch bolts, two flat
washers, lock washer, and hex nut. All of the installation fasteners shall
be Type 316 stainless steel.
2. The density current baffle shall extend completely around the secondary
clarifiers and shall be level, rigid and free of sway that could work
anchors loose or cause undue wear.
E. Effluent Launder Covers:
1. The cover sections shall be mounted to the weir wall on stainless steel or
FRP brackets. The free end of each cover panel shall be supported at the
outer clarifier wall by an FRP support flange that attaches to the entire
periphery of the clarifier.
2. The installation contractor shall install the cover in accordance with the
contract drawings, manufacturing drawings and manufacturer’s
recommendations. Field cutting of panels shall be allowed to complete
the structure and accommodate in-tank obstructions. All cut ends shall
be prepared as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES,
OCTOBER 7, 2011 AND LAUNDER COVER
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 28 - 9
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
3. All of the fasteners and brackets required for the installation shall be
Stainless Steel and shall be supplied by the cover manufacturer. The
support flange and weir wall brackets are installed using 3/8-inch by
3-3/4-inch expansion anchors with flat washers, lock washers and hex
nuts.
3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION (BY OTHERS)
A. Effluent Weir Adjustment Level:
1. Demonstrate proper installation of weir plate for both water tightness
and level, prior to placing unit into service, by filling unit with water to
the weir crest elevation. Provide uniform flow rate at all points.
2. Use water level in full clarifier to level notches.
END OF SECTION
OWNER-FURNISHED WEIR, BAFFLE PLATES, PW/WBG/426399
AND LAUNDER COVER OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 28 - 10 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SECTION 44 42 56.01
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This specification was used by Owner to prepurchase equipment which will
be installed by Contractor. It is included here for reference.
B. The Work of this section includes installation of Owner-furnished screw-
induced flow centrifugal pumps, motors and all appurtenant work for the new
raw wastewater influent pump.
C. General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which
contains information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250).
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b. A532/A532M, Standard Specification for Abrasion-Resistant Cast
Irons.
c. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
4. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
a. Standard 1.6, Centrifugal Pump Tests.
b. Standard 9.6.4, Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for Vibration
Measurements and Allowable Values.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 National Electric Code, Article 500, Hazardous (Classified)
Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2.
b. 497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable
Liquids, Gases or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations
for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall
conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.
2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identification of materials of construction.
3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand,
and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from
shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the head, capacity,
horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence
required at the guarantee point.
4. For variable speed motors provide variable speed curves for every
50 rpm over the operational range.
5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
6. Motor data in accordance with requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low-
Voltage AC Induction Motors.
7. L-10 bearing life calculations.
8. Factory finish system.
9. Seismic anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
10. Shop vibrational tests as specified in Paragraph 2.04.G.5 of this section.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
3. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
4. Factory Functional Test Reports and Log
5. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance that factory finish system is
identical to requirements specified herein.
6. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
7. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW PW/WBG/426399
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 56.01 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
8. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 34, Special Services.
1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish for each pump:
1. Complete set bearings.
2. Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals.
3. Complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Characteristics:
1. Screw induced pump for pumping wastewater; incorporating an
impeller that combines action of a positive displacement screw and a
single vane centrifugal impeller.
2. Design shall permit low liquid velocities and gradual acceleration and
change of flow direction of the pumped media.
3. Impeller/casing design shall result in a single helical passage free of
surfaces to which solid or fibrous material can adhere.
B. Suction Liners: Replaceable and field adjustable.
C. Coordinate pump requirements with motor and be responsible for pump and
drive.
D. Flanges to be to ASME B16.1.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Weir Specialty Pump; Wemco-Hidrostal. No approved equal.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Casing and Frame: ASTM A48 Class 30 cast iron.
B. Replaceable Casing Suction Piece or Suction Liner: High Chrome Cast Iron
ASTM A532, 450 Brinell Hardness.
C. Impeller: DIN 1.4122 Stainless Steel, 280 Brinell Hardness.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 - 3
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
D. Intermediate Shafting: 4140 carbon fiberglass composite.
E. Pump Shaft: 1045 steel.
F. Seal Housing: ASTM A48 Class 30 Cast Iron.
G. Mechanical Seals: 2-Hidrostal Type:
1. Outboard: Tungsten-Carbide/Silicon-Carbide
2. Pumpside: Tungsten-Carbide/Silicon-Carbide.
3. Moisture Sensor: Monitor moisture content of oil in chamber between
outer and inner seals. Provide panel mounted relay with NEMA 4
enclosure.
H. Bearing Housing: ASTM A48, Class 30 Cast Iron.
I. Bearings: Anti-friction, commercial steel.
J. Base: Fabricated steel.
K. Assembly and Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: A325 steel.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Casing:
1. Permits removal of the rotating element without disconnecting the piping.
2. Parts to have registered fit for alignment.
3. Flanges: ANSI 125.
4. Internal spiral groove in suction piece or liner to provided cutting action
against impeller vane.
5. Pipe tapped openings with gage cocks for draining, priming, and
venting the casing.
B. Impeller:
1. One-piece casting completely machined on all exterior surfaces.
2. Statically and dynamically balanced per Hydraulic Institute Standards.
3. Spiral groove or pump out vanes to effect material from between the
impeller and backplate on impeller flange.
4. Uniform sections and smooth surfaces free from cracks and porosity on
interior water passages.
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW PW/WBG/426399
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 56.01 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
C. Shaft:
1. Shaft completely machined.
2. Shaft deflection at mechanical seal not more than 0.002 inch at any
operating head.
3. Total shaft runout less than 0.002 inch.
D. Bearings:
1. Anti-friction type.
2. Grease lubricated.
3. Minimum Life (ABMA L10) Rating: 100,000 hours.
4. Rated for max shaft speed.
E. Extended Shaft:
1. Minimum life rating at continuous full level max rpm.
2. Flexible disc pack between pump/motor shafts and extended shaft.
3. ADDAX composite fiberglass design.
F. Frame Assembly:
1. Rigidly support the rotating element with two bearings.
2. Outboard bearing to carry both radial and axial loads.
3. To permit axial adjustment of rotor without dismantling.
4. Bearing enclosures to keep out contaminants and retain lubricant and
with adequate provisions for adding and flushing lubricant.
G. Balance:
1. Accurately machine all rotating parts.
2. Place pump in as near perfect rotational balance as practicable.
3. Equipment which vibrates excessively will be rejected.
4. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall preclude resonance at any
operating speed.
5. Limits:
a. Max peak-to-peak vibration displacement at any point on the
machine, horizontal axial: 0.28 in/s rms, unfiltered.
b. Max peak-to-peak vibration displacement at any point on the
machine, vertical: 0.32 in/s rms, unfiltered.
c. Ratio of rotative speed to critical speed of unit or components:
Less than 0.8 or more than 1.3.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 - 5
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
H. Motor:
1. Inverter duty.
2. WP-1.
3. 480 V, three-phase, 60 Hz.
4. Premium efficiency.
5. See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
I. Accessories:
1. Lifting eye bolts or lugs.
2. Plugged gage cock connections at discharge nozzles.
3. Tapped and plugged openings for casing and bearing housing vents and
drains.
4. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch
die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted.
5. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.
J. Shop/Factory Finishing (Seller):
1. All ferrous metal surfaces will be shop primed with an epoxy primer.
Drive unit, including motors, reducers, and base shall be factory finish
coated per manufacturer’s standard coating system.
2. Epoxy Primer: Anti-corrosive, converted epoxy primer containing rust-
inhibitive pigments.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test each pump for capacity, power requirements, efficiency at
specified rated head, shutoff head, operating extremes, and as many other
points as necessary for accurate performance curve plotting.
B. Perform tests and prepare test reports in accordance with Hydraulic Institute
Standards.
C. Refer to submittal requirements for test reports.
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW PW/WBG/426399
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 56.01 - 6 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B. Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with the driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do
not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.
D. After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with poured, nonshrinking grout of proper category. Remove
wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout.
E. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump
flanges.
F. Pipe pump drain to hub drain.
3.02 FIELD FINISHING
A. Equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump.
1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper
alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
2. Vibration Test:
a. Test with unit installed and in normal operation, and discharging
to the connected piping systems across the range of the pump, and
with actual building structures and foundations provided shall not
develop vibration exceeding the limits specified.
b. If unit exhibits vibration in excess of limits, specified adjust or
modify as necessary. Unit that cannot be adjusted or modified to
conform as specified shall be replaced.
3. Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes.
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 - 7
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
4. Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for
abnormally high temperatures.
5. Test for continuous 3-hour period.
6. Test Report Requirements: In accordance with HI Standard 1.6 for
centrifugal pump tests.
7. Natural Frequencies: Determine the natural frequency of pump across
the entire range of the pump.
3.04 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by
Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1. 2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.
2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
3. 1 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
4. Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for
each training activity has been reviewed by Buyer and Engineer.
B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.
3.05 SUPPLEMENTS
A. Supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this
Specification.
1. Screw-Induced Flow Centrifugal Pump Data Sheet.
END OF SECTION
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW PW/WBG/426399
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 56.01 - 8 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SCREW-INDUCED FLOW CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATA SHEET
Tag Numbers: HDW-PMP10034
Pump Name: Influent Pump 4
Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) WEMCO Hidrostal
L20K-SD Vertical
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Raw Sewage
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal Max 68 degrees F Min
Specific Gravity at 60°F: 1 Viscosity Range: 1.00 cP
pH: 6-9
Abrasive (Y/N) Yes Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N)
Largest Diameter Solid Pump Can Pass: 9 inches.
Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 31 feet absolute
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Design Point Lower Design Point
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 15,000 gpm 5,000 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 40 feet 34 feet
Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 80
Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 825
Constant (Y/N) N Adjustable (Y/N) Y
DESIGN AND MATERIALS
Pump Type: Heavy Duty (Y/N) Y Horizontal (Y/N) N Frame-mounted (Y/N)
Close-Coupled (Y/N) N Belt-Driven (Y/N) N Vertical (Y/N) Y
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 SUPPLEMENT - 1
HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND WEST BOISE WWTF
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
Materials: Abrasion Resistance:
Pump Casing: Cast iron ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30.
Suction Liner: High chrome cast iron ASTM A532/A532M, 450 Brinell
hardness.
Impeller: DIN 1.4122 stainless steel, 280 Brinell hardness.
Shaft: Type 316 stainless steel.
Bearing Housing: Cast iron ASTM A48/A48M.
Long Radius Suction Elbow (Y/N): Y
(By Others)
OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW PW/WBG/426399
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS OCTOBER 7, 2011
44 42 56.01 SUPPLEMENT - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL
WEST BOISE WWTF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENT AND
SECONDARY CLARIFIER MECHANISM
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
SCREW-INDUCED FLOW CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATA SHEET
Tag Number: HDW-PMP-10034
Shaft Seal: Packing (Y/N) N Material: Outside—Tungsten-Carbide/Silicone-
Carbide. Inside—Tungsten-Carbide/Silicone-Carbide
Mechanical (Y/N) Y Type: 2-Hidrostal Type
ABMA L-10 Bearing Life (Hrs): 100,000 Lubrication: Grease
Coupling: Falk (Y/N) Fast (Y/N) Spring-Grid (Y/N)
Gear Type (Y/N) Spacer (Y/N) Manufacturer Standard (Y/N) Y
Pedestal Base Material (Vertical mounted): Carbon Steel.
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 250 Voltage: 460 Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 900
Service Factor: 1.0
Adjustable Speed: Yes
Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on
pump curve.
Enclosure: DIP _____ EXP _____ ODP _____ TEFC ______ CISD-TEFC _____
TENV _____ WPI _X___ WPII _____ SUBM _____
REMARKS:
PW/WBG/426399 OWNER-FURNISHED SCREW-INDUCED FLOW
OCTOBER 7, 2011 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
©COPYRIGHT 2011 CH2M HILL 44 42 56.01 SUPPLEMENT - 3
PART 4
DRAWINGS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)